10867658-Sharp Mx-2600n 3100n Mx-2600g 3100g Service Manual PDF

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX3100/S1E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MODEL
MX-2600N/3100N
MX-2600G/3100G
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
[1]
PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
[3]
CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[C] RSPF SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
[4]
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
[D] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
For unpacking and installation,

refer to the installation manual
(00ZMX3100/I1E)
[E] PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . .E-1

[F]
PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . .F-1
[G] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
[5]
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL

STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6]
ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[ i ] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . i -1
[7]
SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[J]
[8]
SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . 8-1
[K] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . .K-1
[9]
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[L]
[H] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION. . H-1

DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . . J-1
FUSER SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
[10] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION. . M-1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 11-1
[N] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[12] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[O] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1

[P] FAN SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION . . . . Q-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATION
This document has been published to be used

for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
3. Note for installing site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
[1]
PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Article constitution (Main unit and option) . . . . . . . . .1 - 1
2. Main function of the main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2
3. Combination of options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1
[3]
CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
3. Definition the developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . .3
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
1
3
6
6
[4]
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

* For unpacking and installation, refer to the installation manual (00ZMX3100/I1E).
[5]
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE

1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . .5 - 1
[6] ADJUSTMENTS
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1
2. Adjustment item list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 3
[7] SIMULATION
1. General (Including basic operations) . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 1
2. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 3
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 8
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 1
2. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 4
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 7
[9] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 1
2. Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 4
3. Maintenance and disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 -36
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT

1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1
[B] OPERATION PANEL
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . B - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B - 4
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B - 4
[C] RSPF SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . C - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 8
[D] SCANNER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . D - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 3
[E] PAPER FEED SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . E - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 4
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 5
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . F - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 2
[G] LSU SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . G - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G - 3
[H] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . H - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 3
[i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . .i - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i - 2
[10] FIRMWARE UPDATE

1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
[J] DEVELOPING SECTION

1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . J - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 2
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION

1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -10
3. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -32
[K] TRANSFER SECTION

1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . K - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K - 3
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K - 4
[12] OTHERS
1. System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
2. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 5
3. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work .flow)
. . . . 12 - 7
[L] FUSER SECTION

1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . L - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L - 3
[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . M - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M - 3
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M - 3
[N] DRIVE SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N - 1
[O] PWB SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O - 1
[P] FAN SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P - 1
[Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q - 1
MX-3100N
NOTE
FOR SERVICING
5)
Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it

forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation.

Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.
1. Precautions for servicing

1)
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.

6)
Keep the power cable away from a heat source.

Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable,

the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
except when performing the communication test, etc.

7)
Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which

may drop inside the machine.
8)
With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
do not perform servicing.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
2)
There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use

extreme care when servicing.
3)
There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may

cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
It may cause an electric shock.
4)
Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective

material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
3. Note for installing site
It may cause a burn.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.

5)
When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to

pinch your hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
driving sections.
6)
Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.
Do not install the machine at the following sites.

1)
Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, causing paper jam or copy dirt.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch

inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or
an injury.
7)
Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature, low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature and humidity.
For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications

described later.
When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink

excessively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
Alternatively, follow the instruction of the MSDS
8)
The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to

damage fingers when servicing.
9)
Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise,

toner may pop and burn you.
2)
Place of much vibrations

It may cause a breakdown.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified
one only.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
2. Warning for servicing

1)
Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that

meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
2)
If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal

smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
3)
Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage

occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
result.
3)
Poorly ventilated place

An electro-static type copier will produce ozone inside it.
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
such a machine may produce an odor of ozone. Install the
machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,

grounding must be made.
4)
When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the

following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
Gas tube
Lightning conductor
A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
Grounding wire for telephone line
MX-2600/3100 N/G NOTE FOR SERVICING - i
4)
Place of direct sunlight.

Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may
undergo qualitative change.
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
5)
Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.
6)
Place of much dust

When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.
7)
Place near a wall

Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be resulted.
30cm
30cm
8)
45cm
Unstable or slant surface

If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified,
it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
MX-2600/3100 N/G NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii
MX-3100N
[1]
PRODUCT OUTLINE
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
Article constitution (Main unit and option)
Paper exit system
Document feeder system
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
12 MX-SCX1
REVERSING
SINGLE PASS FEEDER
EXIT TRAY UNIT
DOCUMENT COVER
2 MX-VRX1
1 MX-RPX2
6 MX-TRX1
DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
FINISHER
7 MX-FNX9
PUNCH MODULE
10 MX-PNX1
Paper feed system
MX-2600N/3100N
MX-2600G/3100G
A/B/C/D
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
12 MX-SCX1
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
5 MX-LCX1
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
13 AR-SC3 (For saddle)
PAPER PASS UNIT
8 MX-RBX3
SADDLE STITCH
FINISHER
9 MX-FN10
PUNCH MODULE
11 MX-PNX5
STAND/1 x 500 SHEET

PAPER DRAWER
A/B/C/D
Printer expansion
PRINTER
EXPANSION KIT
14 MX-PBX3
Image send expansion
BARCODE FONT KIT
17 AR-PF1
FACSIMILE
EXPANSION KIT
18 MX-FXX2
PS3 EXPANSION KIT
15 MX-PKX1
XPS EXPANSION KIT
Authentication/Security
DATA SECURITY KIT
DATA SECURITY KIT
25 MX-FR10
21 MX-FWX1
STAMP CARTRIDGE
22 MX-NSX1
19 AR-SU1
SHARPDESK
1 LICENSE KIT
26 MX-USX1
27 MX-USX5
EXPANSION
MEMORY BOARD
34 MX-SMX3
APPLICATION
INTEGRATION MODULE
23 MX-AMX1
NETWORK SCANNER
EXPANSION KIT
Application/Solution
SHARPDESK
5 LICENSE KIT
Memory
INTERNET FAX
EXPANSION KIT
STAMP UNIT
20 AR-SV1
16 MX-PUX1
24 MX-FR10U
STAND/2 x 500 SHEET

PAPER DRAWER
4 MX-DEX7
3 MX-DEX6
SHARPDESK
50 LICENSE KIT
29 MX-US50
SHARPDESK
100 LICENSE KIT
30 MX-USA0
SHARPDESK
10 LICENSE KIT
28 MX-US10
MX-3100N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1
APPLICATION
COMMUNICATION MODULE
31 MX-AMX2
EXTERNAL
ACCOUNT MODULE
32 MX-AMX3
KEYBOARD
33 MX-KBX1
2.
Main function of the main unit

MX-2600N/3100N
Copier
GDI printer
PCL printer
PS printer
Main body LCD
FAX
Scanner
Filing
HDD
RSPF
Automatic duplex
Security
Internet Fax
MX-2600G/3100G
STD
--STD
STD
OPT*3
OPT*1
COLOR WVGA 8.5"
MONOCHROME HVGA 8.1"

OPT
STD
OPT
STD
STD
STD
OPT
STD
OPT*2
OPT
STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option

OPT*1: Product key target. When PS is used, PCL function must be available.
OPT*2: Product key target.
OPT*3: When expansion for PCL printer, GDI printer is not available.
3.
Combination of options
Section
Document feeder
system
Paper feed
system
Paper exit system
Printer expansion
Image send
expansion
Authentication/
Security
Application/
Solution
Memory
Name
Model name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER

DOCUMENT COVER
STAND/1 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER
STAND/2 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
EXIT TRAY UNIT
FINISHER
PAPER PASS UNIT
SADDLE STITCH FINISHER
PUNCH MODULE
11
PUNCH MODULE
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
PRINTER EXPANSION KIT
PS3 EXPANSION KIT
XPS EXPANSION KIT
BARCODE FONT KIT
FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT
STAMP UNIT
STAMP CARTRIDGE
INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT
NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT
APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE
DATA SECURITY KIT
DATA SECURITY KIT
SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT
APPLICATION COMMUNICATION
MODULE
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE
KEYBOARD
EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD
32
33
34
MX-RPX2
MX-VRX1
MX-DEX6
MX-DEX7
MX-LCX1
MX-TRX1
MX-FNX9
MX-RBX3
MX-FN10
MX-PNX1
A/B/C/D
MX-PNX5
A/B/C/D
MX-SCX1
AR-SC3
MX-PBX3
MX-PKX1
MX-PUX1
AR-PF1
MX-FXX2
AR-SU1
AR-SV1
MX-FWX1
MX-NSX1
MX-AMX1
MX-FR10U
MX-FR10
MX-USX1
MX-USX5
MX-US10
MX-US50
MX-USA0
MX-AMX2
MX-AMX3
MX-KBX1
MX-SMX3
MX-2600N/
3100N
STD
--{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
MX-2600G/
3100G
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
STD
{
{*4
{
{*2
{
{
{
STD
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{*1
{*1, *4
{
{*2
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
STD/{*3
{
{
--{
STD: Standard provision. {: Installable. ---: Cannot be connected.

* 1: Printer expansion (PCL) is required.
* 2: No support for some destinations.
* 3: Standard for North America and some destinations, option for the other destinations.
* 4: Memory expansion are required.
MX-3100N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 2
Product
key target
Remarks
A4
Inner finisher
For inner finisher

For saddle stitch finisher
For finisher
For saddle
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Includes the Sharpdesk.

Commercial version
Authentication version
{
{
1GB
MX-3100N
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS
(6)
Engine resolution
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
Writing resolution
Basic specifications
Smoothing
Gradation
(Monochrome/Color)
A. Base engine
(1)
Type
Type
Desktop
(7)
(2)
Engine composition
Photoconductor kind
Copying method
Developing system
Charging system
Transfer system
Cleaning system
Fusing system
Waste toner disposal
Printable area
Max. print size

Void area Image loss
OPC (Drum diameter:I30mm)

Black x1, Color x 3
Electronic photo (Laser)
Dry, 2-component magnetic brush
development
Charged saw-tooth method
Intermediate transfer belt
Counter blade
Heat roller
No toner recycling system / Waste toner
bottle system
Dimensions / Weight
Outer dimensions
(W x D x H)
Dimensions occupied by
Machine (W x D)
(State of the manual paper
feed tray is expansion.)
Weight
(Including OPC drum/
excluding consumble parts)
(4)
MX-2600G/3100G: 620 x 670 x 795 mm

MX-2600N/3100N: 620 x 695 x 950 mm
MX-2600G/3100G: 970 x 670 mm
MX-2600N/3100N: 970 x 695 mm
(8)
Engine speed (ppm)
a. In case of tray (1-4, LCC) paper feeding
Pre-heat
recovery time from jam *
MX-2600G/3100G: Approx. 102 kg

MX-2600N/3100N: Approx. 112 kg
60 seconds or less (The value may be

increased by operating condition)
Yes
30 sec. or less
* Condition: After the door is kept open for 60 seconds, the polygon motor halt.
(5)
Standard
paper
Warmup
Warm-up time
First copy time

Platen/RSPF
Platen
RSPF
Monochrome
6.0 sec. or less
10.7 sec. or less
Color
8.9 sec. or less
13.5 sec. or less
* Measurement conditions: When paper of A4/8.5 x 11 is fed to

narrow side direction from the main unit tray 1, and the polygon
motor is rotating.
299 x 450 mm
Lead edge: 4mm or less
Rear edge: 2 mm or more, and 5 mm or less
Total of the lead edge and the rear edge:
8mm or less
Full A3 / 11 X 17 dimension (299 x 450 mm) can be printed with

PCL / PS driver.
Paper
type
(3)
Copy: 600 x 600dpi

Print: 1200 x 1200dpi
No
Copy: 600 x 600dpi
Print : 600 x 600 (1bit)
/ 600 x 600 (4bit)
/ 1200 x 1200 (1bit)
Heavy
paper
Paper size
A3
B4
A4
B5
A4R
B5R
A5R
Extra
11 x 17
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 13
8.5 x 13.4
8.5 x 13.5
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11R
7.25 x 10.5R
5.5 x 8.5R
A4
B5
A5R
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 5.5R
A4R
B5R
8.5 x 11R
7.25 x 10.5R
In the other
sizes
26-sheets model
MonoColor
chrome
13
13
15
15
26
26
31
31
18
18
20
20
12
13
12
13
13
14
13
14
15
15
17
17
26
26
31
31
18
18
20
20
12
12
12
12
* LCC is not allowed the heavy paper passing.
MX-3100N SPECIFICATIONS 2 1
31-sheets model
MonoColor
chrome
14
14
17
17
B. Controller board
b. In case of manual paper feed tray paper feeding

Paper
type
Standard
paper
OHP
Envelope
Heavy
paper
Paper size
A3W *1
A3
B4
A4
B5
A4R
B5R
A5R
Extra
12 x 18 *1
11 x 17
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 13
8.5 x 13.4
8.5 x 13.5
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 11R
7.25 x 10.5R
5.5 x 8.5R
A4, 8.5 x 11
A4R, 8.5 x 11R
Monarch,
Com-10, DL, C5
A4
B5
A5R
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 5.5R
A4R
B5R
8.5 x 11R
7.25 x 10.5R
In the other
sizes
26-sheets model
MonoColor
chrome
12
11
13
12
15
14
22
23
23
16
18
17
18
31-sheets model
MonoColor
chrome
13
11
14
12
16
14
22
23
23
16
19
17
20
20
12
11
13
11
13
12
14
12
15
14
16
14
23
23
12
9
22
16
17
18
10
7
20
12
9
22
16
17
20
10
7
18
12
10
19
12
10
Power source
Voltage / Current
Frequency
Power source code
Power switch
100V series
200V series
100 - 127V 12A
220 - 240V 8A
50/60Hz
Fixed type
Inlet
(Direct connection)
2 switches
(Primary switch: in the front cover;
Secondary switch: the operation panel)
(10) Power consumption

Max. Rated Power
Consumption *1
Controller board
CPU
Interface
IEEE 1284 Parallel
Ethernet
USB 2.0
USB authentication
acquisition
Serial I/F
Memory expansion slot
(2)
Power QUICCIII-MPC8533E (800MHz)

No
1 port
Interface
10Base-T , 100Base-TX,
1000Base-T
TCP/IP (IPv4 IPv6), IPX/
SPX , NetBEUI , EtherTalk
Support
Protocol
1 port
(Either on the front section or rear section)
For connection of USB memory, USB
keyboard, IC card reader, IC reader writer
or USB hab
No
1 port
1 slot
Memory, hard disk
Memory capacity, HDD capacity

Local Memory (Copy)
System Memory (Print)
HDD
Standard
Memory
Standard
Memory
Expansion
Memory
Max.
80GB *
1GB
512MB
1GB
1.5GB
* Capacity depends on procurement and sourcing status.
*1: Engine speed in finisher output
(9)
(1)
100V series
1.44Kw
C. Operation panel
(1)
Display device
a. Monochrome LCD (MX-2600G/3100G)

Type
Size
Display dot number
LCD drive display area
LCD backlight
LCD contrast adjustment
Dot matrix STN LCD, touch panel

8.1 inch
640 x 240 dots (H-VGA)
192 x 72 mm
Fluorescent lamp backlight system
Yes
b. Color LCD (MX-2600N/3100N)

Type
Size
Display dot number
LCD drive display area
LCD backlight
LCD contrast adjustment
200V series
1.84Kw
*1: When the power supply is turned on, when the dehumidification
heater is OFF.
Dot matrix TFT LCD, touch panel

8.5 inch
800 x 480 (W-VGA)
184.8 x 110.88mm
Fluorescent lamp backlight system
Yes
D. Scanner section
(1)
Resolution/Gradation
Scanning
Resolution
(dpi)
In sending
Resolution
(dpi)
Exposure lamp
Reading
gradation
Output
gradation
(2)
copy mode
Platen
Monochrome
600 x 300 dpi (Default)

600 x 400 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
Color
600 x 600dpi
RSPF
Mono600 x 400 dpi (Default)
chrome 600 x 600 dpi
Color
600 x 600dpi
Internet Fax /
Scanner
Fax
Direct SMTP
200dpi x 100dpi
Standard
(middle tone not
(203.2 x 97.8 dpi)
100dpi x 100dpi
allowed)
(middle tone not
allowed)
Fine
200dpi x 200dpi 200dpi x 200dpi
(203.2 x 195.6 dpi)
Super Fine
(203.2 x 391 dpi)
Ultra Fine
(406.4 x 391 dpi)
--Xenon
10bits
B/W: 1bit
Gray scale: 8bit
Full color: RGB colors are 8bit each
Document table
Type
Scanning area
Original standard position
Detection
detection size
Dehumidifying heater
(Scanner section)
Document table fixed system (Flat bed)

297 x 432mm
Left bottom reference
Yes
Automatic detection
Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
Inch-3 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
AB-1
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Platen
AB-2
A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13
AB-3
8K, 16K, 16KR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5
AB-4
A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13.4
AB-5
A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13.5
Supplied as a service part
DKIT-0373FCZZ
(3)
Automatic document feeder
Type
Scan speed
Copy
FAX / Internet FAX

Scanner
Detection
Paper detection size
(Platen/RSPF)
Original standard
position
Document size
Original copy weight

Max. loading capacity of
documents
Transport disable
document
Finish stamp
RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)

Monochrome (A4 / 8.5 x 11)
Color (A4 / 8.5 x 11)
Single: 50-sheet/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1bit)
Single: 36-sheet/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 4 bit)
36-sheet/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 1 bit)
Duplex: 14-page/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 4 bit)
Duplex: 16-page/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1bit)
14-page/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 1bit)
N/A
Yes
Auto detection (Switching one type of detection unit)
Inch-1
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Inch-2
11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Inch-3
11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
AB-1
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11
RSPF
AB-2
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11
AB-3
8K, 16K, 16KR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11
AB-4
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11
AB-5
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 11
Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random feeding)
Standard size (Refer to the "paper detection size")
Long paper: 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Internet FAX 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm. When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper is not available.
Mix paper feed (Same series, same width paper) enabled
Random paper feed
(The following two kinds of sizes can be combined; A3 and B4, B4 and A4R, B5 and A5, 11" and 8.5". AMS is available.)
* In random paper feeding, scanning with duplex is not available.
Single: (Thin paper) 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2), (plain paper) 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)
Max. 100 sheet (21 lbs Bond, 80g/m2) or 13 mm (height limitation)
OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakage, pasted paper, cutout
document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch unit
is allowed.)
Option
E. Paper feed section

(1)
Type
Type
Paper type setting

Dehumidifying heater
(2)
(3)
Standard:
2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper
feed tray
Full option:
4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper
feed + LCC
Yes
Service parts (Supported by kit)
Tray 1, 2 (Main unit)
Paper capacity
Paper size
Paper type
Feedable Paper Weight

Paper size setting when
shipping
Paper remaining
detection
Manual paper feed tray (main unit)
Paper capacity
Paper size
Paper type
Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2)

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17,
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
Plain paper, re-printed paper, recycled paper,
letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper,
heavy paper
Plain paper: 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Heavy paper: 28 - 110 lb bond (106 - 209g/m2)
AB series; Tray 1: A4, Tray 2: A3
Inch series; Tray 1: 8.5 x 11, Tray 2: 11 x 17
Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels)
Plain paper: 100 sheets (80 g/m2)

envelope/OHP: 20 sheets
A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 , 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4,
8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
5.5 x 8.5R, envelope
heavy paper
Thin paper:
13 lb bond - 16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2)
Plain paper:
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Heavy paper:
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2),
110 lb index - 140 lb index (210 - 256g/m2)
(4)
Tray 3, 4 (2-stage paper feed tray)
Paper capacity
Paper size
Paper type

shipping
Paper remaining
detection
Power consumption
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
(5)
F. Paper exit section
Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) x 2

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14,
8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11 R, 7.25 x 10.5R
heavy paper
Plain paper:
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Heavy paper:
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2)
Maximum position of paper guide width
Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels)
20W (Power is supplied from main unit)
with adjuster
720 x 670 x 303 mm
without adjuster 590 x 670 x 303 mm
Paper remaining
detection
Driving form
Off-center adjustment
Power consumption
(without heater)
Power source
External dimensions
(W x D x H)
Dimensions occupied by
Machine
(W x D)
Weight
Thermal heater
Optional detection
Center tray of main unit
Paper exit section

Paper exit system
Paper exit capacity
Paper exit paper size/
weight
Shifter function
Paper exit full detection
(2)
3,500-Sheet Large Capacity Tray

124 mm/s - 360 mm/s
A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
Simulation setup
A4
Yes
letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper:
16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
3,500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Effective height: 385 mm
Yes (5 levels: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, none)
The transport motor (DC brush-less motor)
and control PWB are built-in to LCC.
r 3mm
(Move the regulation plate F/R to adjustment)
Normal operation : 26.4W
During lift-up
: 40.8W
5Vr5% and 24Vr5% are supplied from main
unit
370 x 550 x 520 mm
370 x 550 (mm) * Clearance with main unit:
235 mm
Approx. 30 kg
Standard equipment: AC power is supplied
from main unit. And main unit can control ON/
OFF operation.
Auto detection system
Offset width
Integrity
(3)
Center section of the main unit

Face-down paper exit system
500 sheets (When A4, 8.5 x 11)
(recommended paper for color)
Thin paper:
13 lb bond - 16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2)
Plain paper:
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Heavy paper:
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2),
110 lb index -140 lb index (210 - 256g/m2)
* A3W/12x8 paper exiting is not allowed.
Yes
Yes
Shifter
Paper weight
Paper size/type
Tray 5 (LCC)
Type
Transport speed
Paper size
Paper size setting
shipping
Paper type setting
Allowable paper type
and weight for paper
feed
Paper capacity
(1)
55 - 256g/m2
Offset mode Size:
Envelope and custom size are
not acceptable
Type:
Envelope, OHP, label paper and
tab paper are not acceptable
30 mm
Non-offset
Getting out:
It doesn't fall down from tray
Offset mode Getting out: within 50 mm
FR shift: within r10 mm
JOB distance: 10 mm or more
Paper exit tray
Type
Paper exit position/
system
Paper exit capacity
Paper exit paper size/
type
Paper exit paper full
detection
Shifter function
Exit tray unit

Paper exit to external in the right side of the
main unit/Paper exits in face-down
100 sheets (When A4/8.5 x 11)
(recommended paer for color)
All of allowable paper for paper feed except
envelope, tab paper and gloss paper.
Yes
No
G. Copy functions
(1)
Copy magnification ratio
Copy magnification ratio
Zoom
Preset magnification
ratio
(2)
1 :1 r0.8%
25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%,
100%, 115%, 122%, 141%,
200%, 400%
Inch series
25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%,
121%, 129%, 200%, 400%
25-400% (RSPF: 25-200%)
4
Normal ratio
AB series
Density/copy image quality process
Exposure mode
Number of manual steps

Toner save mode
Automatic, Text, Text/Printed Photo,

Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph,
Map, light document
9 steps
Yes
* Off on printed photo, photograph or light
document
(3)
Auto color selection

Full color
Two color
Single color
(4)
Copy mode automatically discerning color/

monochrome.
Full color copy
(Red/Black mode)
Copies with one color (R/G/B/C/M/Y) that is
replaced from red color area in document, and
black color.
Mode to select one color from R/G/B/C/M/Y
Type and weight of

paper which can be
passed
Paper type
(1)
Platform
IBM PC/AT
Macintosh
(2)
Support OS
Non stack system

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17,
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 5.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
Plain paper:
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Heavy paper:
28 - 110 lb bond (106 - 209 g/m2)
Plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper,
letter head, re-printed paper, pre-punched
paper, heavy paper
Mac
Copy functions
Function
Automatic paper selection
Automatic magnification ratio
selection
Paper type selection
Auto tray switching
Rotation copy
Electronic sort
Special functions
Binding margin (Left and Right/Top)
Erase (Edge/Center/center + edge/
side erase)
2 in 1
Center binding (Centering provided)
Large volume document mode
Tandem copy
Cover paper insertion
Only insertion of tab paper.
Combination with tab copy is not
allowed.
Job reservation (99 items)

Tray installation priority
Program call/register (48 items)
Document paper size input
Indefinite paper size input
Duplex copy direction switching
(Multi shot) (Centering provided,
page printing based on number
of original pages is provided)
Book copy
Tab copy
Card shot
Automatic temporary save
Filing
Trial copy
Document count
Mixed document feeder
OHP insert paper
Thin paper scanning
Document control (When the data security kit is installed)
Print menu
Color adjustment
Date print
Stamp
RGB
Color balance
Character print
Page print
Sharpness
Brightness
adjustment
Modifying image
Background
Vividness
removal
adjustment
Photo repeat
A3 wide copy
Auto color calibration
(Setting with system)
Enlargement
Centering
Registration
continuous copy
(Setting with system)
Mirror image
Black-white
reversion
Custom
PCL6
OS
Windows
Duplex
System
Paper size
(5)
H. Printer function
Color copy mode
(3)
98 / Me
NT 4.0 SP5 or
later
2000
XP
XP x 64
Server 2003
Server 2003
x 64
Vista
Vista x 64
9.2.2
X 10.2.8
X 10.3.9
10.4.11
X 10.5-10.5.1
Custom
PCL5c
Custom
PS
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
PDL emulation
MX-2600G/
MX3100G
Option
PostScript 3 compatibility
MX-2600N/
MX3100N
Standard
Option
Font
Emulation
PCL5c
copatibility,
PCL6
compatibility
PostScript 3
compatibility
Built-in fonts
Roman outline fonts = 80 fonts
Line printer font (BMP) = 1 font
Option font
Font for bar code
= 28 fonts
Roman outline fonts

= 136 fonts
Print channel
Support print
channel
(6)
Yes
No
PCL5c compatibility, PCL6 compatibility
(5)
SPLC
-c
Yes
Yes
Enulation
(4)
PPD
PSERVER/RPRINT for netware environment

LPR
IPP
PAP:EtherTalk
FTP
NetBEUI
Raw Port (Port 9100)
USB 1.1 (Windows98/Me/2000/Server2003/XP/Vista)
USB 2.0 (For Windows2000/XP/Vista only)
HTTP (Web Submit Print)
POP3 (E-Mail To Print)
Environment setting
Setting item
Default setting
PCL
PS
General
Basic settings for using the printer such as the number
of copies and the print direction
Setting of the PCL symbol and fonts
Setting of enabling/disabling of print in case of a PS
error, setting of binary data outputting
I. Image send function

(1)
Mode
Scanner
Fax
Internet Fax
(2)
Scan to e-mail
Scan to Desktop
Scan to FTP
Scan to Folder (SMB)
Scan to USB memory
Scan to e-mail with Meta
Scan to Desktop with Meta
Scan to FTP with Meta
Scan to SMB with Meta
Scan to Scan to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
(Document Admin)
Fax to Fax (Manual)
Fax to e-mail/Internet Fax/Fax (Relay transfer)
Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Inbound routing)
Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Document Admin)
Internet Fax to Internet FAX (Manual)
Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
(Inbound routing)
Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
(Document Admin)
Scanner
SMTP
FTP (TCP / IP)
SMB
Item Number of registration items
Item
One-touch/ Group
Program
Memory box
Sender registration
User list (Return address list)
Transfer table list
Sender number
Item name
File name
Fixed phrase
Meta data set list
Receive rejection address
Polling allow number
Working environment
OS
Internet Fax
POP server
SMTP server
ESMTP server
Fax
Internet Fax
TIFF-FX
(TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
Fax
PC
CPU
Monitor
---
Memory
HDD
Interface
---
Support image
Mode
File format
Compression
system
Conversion for
each page to a
file (Available
to quantity
specification)
Scanner
Monochrome:
TIFF, PDF, Encrypted
PDF, XPS
Color/
Gray scale:
Color TIFF, JPEG,
PDF, Encrypted PDF,
XPS
Monochrome:
Non-compression
G3 = MH
G4 = MMR
Color / Gray scale:
JPEG
(High compression/
Middle
compression/
Low compression)
Yes
Non-compression,
MH, MMR
No. of registration items

999 items
Max. number of registration items for one
group (500 items)
48 items
Total of bulletin board / confidential letter /
relay and broadcast: 100 items
FAX, Internet FAX: 1 item
Scanner: 1,000 items
50 items
18 items
30 items
30 items
30 items
10 items
Internet FAX: 50 items, Fax: 50 items
(In total 50 items)
FAX: 10 items
J. PC-Fax, PC internet Fax functions

(1)
Support system
Mode
Corresponding
server/protocol
(3)
(4)
Communication protocol
---
---
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT4.0 Workstation
(Service Pack5, IE4.0 or more)
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows server 2003
Windows Vista
IBM PC/AT compatible machine
Pentium II 300MHz or more
Screen resolution: 640 X 480 pixel or above
Number of colors: 256 colors or above
64 MB or more
Empty capacity of 50MB or above
USB 2.0
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
LPR / lp
Port9100 (RAW)
IPP
USB2.0
(2)
K. Document filing function
Functions
PC-FAX send
PC-Internet FAX send

Resolution
Send document size
Compression system
Broadcast send
F-code send
Telephone book
registration, Send function
Covering letter
attachment function
Covering letter making
function
Sender print
Preview
Delivery confirmation
(Notification to PC by
NJR)
Document filing function
PC- FAX send log
User authentication
Yes
(When FAX is installed)
FAX number max. 64 digits
Yes (Internet FAX expansion kit is required)
Internet FAX address: max. 64 digits
200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi /
400 x 400dpi /600 x 600dpi
A3 / B4 / A4 / A5 / B5 / 11 x 17 / 8.5 x 14 /
8.5 x 11 / 5.5 x 8.5 / 8.5 x 13
MH / MMR / JBIG
Yes (Max. 500 items)
Yes
Sub address Yes
(Max. 20 digits)
Pass code
Yes
(Max. 20 digits)
Yes
Yes
(1)
Basic function
Number of files
that can be saved
in the standard
folder/user folder
Number of files
that can be saved
in temporary file
folders.
Number of folders
that can be made
as user folders.
Number of users
which can be
registered
38GB
Monochrome (Text): 5,500 pages or 3,000 files (*1)
Full color data (Text and Photo): 2,500 pages (*2)
12GB
Monochrome (Text): 1,700 pages or 1,000 files (*1)
Full color data (Text and Photo): 800 pages (*2)
Max. 1,000 folder
Same as that of account users of the main unit
(*1): When the standard document (A4 monochrome: test sheet C)

is used.
(*2): When the color document (A4, greg fruit) is used.
Yes
Original (Text, A4): Test Sheet C
Original (Color, A4): Greg fruit
Prints always
Yes
Yes
Filing
Automatic temporary save
Yes
Yes
(2)
Data operation by each function
Job
Copy
Printer
Direct print (FTP pull)
Direct print (FTP push)
Direct print (USB pull)
Direct print (e-mail push)
Direct print (Web push)
Direct print (SMB pull)
Scan to e-mail/FTP
Scan to SMB
FAX send
Internet FAX send
PC FAX / PC Internet
FAX send
Scan to HDD
Each folder in the

standard folder
/user folder
ConfiSharing
dential
storage
storage
Yes
Temporary folder
Sharing
storage
Confidential
storage
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
(3)
L. Ambient conditions
Data operation contents
Operation content
Reprint
Resend
Delete
Shift
Attribute change (Common/
Confidential/Protection)
Confidential file setting
Confidental folder setting
File name change
Creation of a folder
File transfer to Local PC
Machine HDD occupying rate
display
Confirmation of save data
image (Preview)
Operation panel
WEB
(1)
Working environment
(Humidity)
85%
60%
Yes
20%
No
Yes
Yes
10
Retrieval
Collective print
(When the user name and the
password of target files in the
folder are the same)
Delete with the time specified
Multi file selection (print only)
Standard environmental
conditions
Usage environmental
conditions
Yes
Quality Guarantee Period
* During the above setting on the operation panel, web access is

disabled.
(4)
Reprint / resend limitation items for each job

Mode
Job
kind
Copy
Copy
Printer
Printer
Image
send
Scan
send
Document
filing
FAX
send
Internet
FAX
send
Scan
save
Data
save
Color
Monochrome
Color
Monochrome
Color
Monochrome
Monochrome
Monochrome
Color
Monochrome
Reprint
MonoColor
chrome
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Resend
MonoColor
chrome
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
30
35
(Temperature)
Yes
(The print data displays only
the first page.)
Yes
* "Color" includes "Color/BW Mixing."
Temperature 20 25 C
Humidity
65 r 5 %RH
Temperature 10 35 C
Humidity
20 85 %RH
Atmospheric 590 1013 hPa
pressure
(height: 0 2000m)
Toner and Developer: 24 months from the
production month (unopened)
Drum: 36 months from the production month
MX-3100N
[3]
CONSUMABLE PARTS
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. Supply system table

A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
No.
1
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-31NTBA
Toner Cartridge (Cyan)
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip
x1
15K *1
MX-31NTCA
Toner Cartridge (Magenta)
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip
x1
15K *1
MX-31NTMA
Toner Cartridge (Yellow)
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip
x1
15K *1
MX-31NTYA
5
6
Developer (Black)
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (3 colors / set))
x1
x1
100K
60K
MX-31NVBA
MX-31NVSA
Developer (Black)
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(3 colors/set))
Drum
OPC Drum
x1
MX-31NRSA
Drum Unit
Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum)

Color identification seal (B/C/M/Y) x 1 each
Charger cleaner
x1
x1
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
MX-31NUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
B. Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand

No.
1
Item
Content
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-31GTBA
x1
15K *1
MX-31GTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-31GTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-31GTYA
5
6
Developer (Black)
Developer
x1
x1
100K
60K
MX-31GVBA
MX-31GVSA
Developer (Black)
Developer
(3 colors/set))
Drum
OPC Drum
x1
MX-31GRSA
Drum Unit
Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum

Charger cleaner
x1
x1
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
Remarks
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
MX-31GUSA
C. Asia/Hong Kong
No.
1
Item
Content
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-31ATBA
x1
15K *1
MX-31ATCA
x1
15K *1
MX-31ATMA
x1
15K *1
MX-31ATYA
5
6
Developer (Black)
Developer
x1
x1
100K
60K
MX-31AVBA
MX-31AVSA
Developer (Black)
Developer
(3 colors/set))
Drum
OPC Drum
x1
MX-31ARSA
Drum Unit
Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included)

Charger cleaner
x1
x1
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
MX-31AUSA
MX-2300/2700 N/G CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 1
Remarks
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
D. Middle East/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines
No.
1
Item
Content
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-31FTBA
x1
15K *1
MX-31FTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-31FTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-31FTYA
5
6
Developer (Black)
Developer
x1
x1
100K
60K
MX-31FVBA
MX-31FVSA
Developer (Black)
Developer
(3 colors/set))
Drum
OPC Drum
x1
MX-31FRSA
Drum Unit

Charger cleaner
x1
x1
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
Remarks
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
MX-31FUSA
E. Brazil
No.
1
Item
Content
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-31BTBA
x1
15K *1
MX-31BTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-31BTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-31BTYA
5
6
Developer (Black)
Developer
x1
x1
100K
60K
MX-31NVBA
MX-31NVSA
Developer (Black)
Developer
(3 colors/set))
Drum
OPC Drum
x1
MX31NRSA
Drum Unit

Charger cleaner
x1
x1
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
MX-31NUSA
Remarks
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
at Area Coverage 5%
2. Maintenance parts list

A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America
No.
1
Item
Heat roller kit
Content
Upper heat roller unit
Upper separation pawl
Upper separation pawl spring
Lower separation pawl
Lower separation pawl spring
Upper thermistor
Lower heat roller unit
Lower thermistor
Primary transfer belt
Transfer cleaning blade
PTC unit
Primary transfer roller
Belt drive gear
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary transfer idle gear
Upper thermistor PA
Ozone filter CJ
Paper ejection filter
PS paper dust removing unit
Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3)
x1
x4
x4
x4
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x2
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x3
x1
x1
x1
x3
Life
200K
Model name
MX-310HK
200K
MX-310Y1
300K
MX-310Y2
100K
MX-310FL
100K
50K
MX-310PD
MX-310HB
Black: 100K,
Color: 60K
MX-310DS
Black: 100K,
Color: 60K
MX-310MK
2000 times x 3
AR-SC3
Primary transfer kit
Secondary transfer kit
Filter kit
5
6

Waste toner box kit
DV blade kit
Main charger kit
Staple cartridge
DV blade N kit
DV side seal F (three in one)
DV side seal R (three in one)
Toner filter unit
Main charger unit
Drum cleaning blade
Cleaning Gum P2
Staple cartridge
10
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
x3
5000 times x 3
MX-SCX1
11
12
13
14
Stamp cartridge
Primary transfer belt unit
Secondary transfer belt unit
Fusing unit
15
Fuser cleaning roller kit
Stamp cartridge
Primary transfer belt unit (For service purpose)
Secondary transfer belt unit (For service purpose)
Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 120V)
Fuser cleaning roller
Bearing
x2
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x2
100K
AR-SV1
MX-310U1
MX-310U2
MX-310FU1
MX-310FU
MX-310CR
Life
200K
Model name
MX-310UH
200K
MX-310LH
200K
MX-310B1
200K
MX-310X1
300K
300K
MX-310B2
MX-310X2
100K
100K
MX-310PD
MX-310FL
50K
MX-310HB
Remarks
5% coverage for each

color; 25% color ratio

(MX-FN10)
For finisher (MX-FNX9/
MX-FN10)
B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand
No.
1
Item
Upper heat roller kit
Lower heat roller kit
Primary transfer belt kit
Primary transfer roller kit
5
6
Secondary transfer belt kit

Secondary transfer roller kit
7
8

Filter kit
Waste toner box kit
Content
Upper thermistor
Lower thermistor
PTC unit
Belt drive gear
Upper thermistor PA
Ozone filter CJ
Paper ejection filter
x1
x4
x4
x1
x1
x4
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x2
x1
Remarks

No.
10
DV blade kit
Item
Staple cartridge
Content
DV blade N kit
Toner filter unit
Main charger unit
Drum cleaning blade
Cleaning Gum P2
Staple cartridge
x1
x1
x1
x3
x1
x1
x1
x3
11
Main charger kit
12
Life
Black: 100K,
Color: 60K
Model name
MX-310DS
Black: 100K,
Color: 60K
MX-310MK
2000 times x 3
AR-SC3
13
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
x3
5000 times x 3
MX-SCX1
14
15
16
17
18
Stamp cartridge
Fusing unit
Stamp cartridge
Bearing
x2
x1
x1
x1
x1
x2
100K
AR-SV1
MX-310U1
MX-310U2
MX-310FU
MX-310CR
Content
Upper thermistor
Lower thermistor
PTC unit
Belt drive gear
Upper thermistor PA
Ozone filter CJ
x1
x4
x4
x4
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
Life
200K
Model name
MX-310HK
200K
MX-310Y1
300K
MX-310Y2
100K
100K
50K
MX-310FLN
MX-310PD
MX-310HB
x1
x1
x1
x3
x1
x1
x1
x3
Black: 100K,
Color: 60K
MX-310DS
Black: 100K,
Color: 60K
MX-310MK
2000 times x 3
AR-SC3
Remarks

(MX-FN10)
For finisher
(MX-FNX9/MX-FN10)
C. Hong Kong
No.
1
Item
Heat roller kit
4
5
6
Filter kit
Waste toner box kit
DV blade kit
Main charger kit
Staple cartridge
DV blade N kit
Toner filter unit
Main charger unit
Drum cleaning blade
Cleaning Gum P2
Staple cartridge
10
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
x3
5000 times x 3
MX-SCX1
11
12
13
14
15
Stamp cartridge
Fusing unit
Stamp cartridge
Bearing
x2
x1
x1
x1
x1
x2
100K
AR-SV1
MX-310U1
MX-310U2
MX-310FU
MX-310CR
Remarks


(MX-FN10)
For finisher
(MX-FNX9/MX-FN10)
D. Asia/Middle East/Agency
No.
1
Item
Heat roller kit
Content
Upper thermistor
Lower thermistor
PTC unit
Belt drive gear
Upper thermistor PA
Ozone filter CJ
x1
x4
x4
x4
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x3
x1
x1
x1
x3
Life
200K
Model name
MX-310HK
200K
MX-310Y1
300K
MX-310Y2
100K
100K
50K
MX-310FLN
MX-310PD
MX-310HB
Black: 100K,
Color: 60K
MX-310DS
Black: 100K,
Color: 60K
MX-310MK
2000 times x 3
AR-SC3
4
5
6
Filter kit
Waste toner box kit
DV blade kit
Main charger kit
Staple cartridge
DV blade N kit
Toner filter unit
Main charger unit
Drum cleaning blade
Cleaning Gum P2
Staple cartridge
10
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
x3
5000 times x 3
MX-SCX1
11
12
13
14
Stamp cartridge
Fusing unit
15
Stamp cartridge
Bearing
x2
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x2
100K
AR-SV1
MX-310U1
MX-310U2
MX-310FU1
MX-310FU
MX-310CR
Remarks


(MX-FN10)
For finisher (MX-FNX9/
MX-FN10)
3. Definition of developer/drum life end
4. Production number identification
When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level.
A. Drum cartridge
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level.

When either of the above reached the specified level, it is judged
as life end.
In an actual case, the ratio of monochrome output and color output
may differ greatly.
When data of mixed documents (monochrome and color) are output, monochrome document data may be output in the color mode
in order to prevent against fall in the job efficiency. (ACS auto color
selection).
In addition, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as
well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm
reaches the specified level, it is judged as life end.
To check the drum life, use SIM22-1/22-13.
Developer/
drum
Single multi
2 sheets multi
3 sheets multi
4 sheets multi
Developer/drum rpm
B/W
Full color
840K
840K
rotations
rotations
Black developer/drum
56,000
85,000
100,000
107,000
Color developer/drum
44,000
56,000
60,000
64,000
2:
3:
4:
5/6:
7:
10:
Black drum
Color drum
10
The number is printed on the flange on the front side.
8/9:
120,000
The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as

follows.
1:
(840K rotations = 7,916,813cm)

Developer/drum counter
B/W
Full color
100K
60K
Number
For this model, this digit is 2.
Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code.
Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Number
Indicates the day of the production date.
Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
Number
Indicates the day of the packing date.
Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
100,000
Printable counter
B. Developer
80,000
BK
60,000
C. M .Y
40,000
20,000
Single multi
2 sheets multi 3 sheets multi 4 sheets multi

The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as follows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.
1:
2:
3/4:
5/6:
7:
8:
Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
Number
Indicates the production year.
Number
Indicates the production month.
Number
Indicates the production day.
Hyphen
Number
Indicates the production lot.
C. Toner cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the
side of the toner cartridge.
Part name
Destination
Toner color
Production
place
Incompatibility
Production
year/month/day
Version
Serial No. in production day
Example: 1st of production onJune 1, 2008
MX-3100N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
[5]
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1.
Identification of each section and functions
A. External view
(1)
(2) (3)
(7)
(4) (5) (6)
When a finisher / saddle

stitch finisher is not installed
When a keyboard
is installed
(15)
When a finisher is installed
(8)
No.
1
(9)
Name
Automatic document feeder
Front cover
3
4
5
Paper pass unit*

Operation panel
USB connector (A type)
6
7
8
Exit tray unit (right tray)*

Output tray (center tray)
Keyboard*
Saddle stitch finisher*
10
11
12
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (when a stand/1 x 500 sheet
paper drawer or a stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed)*
Tray 4 (when a stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed)*
Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is
installed)*
Finisher*
13
14
15
(10) (11) (12)
(13)
(14)
function/Operation
This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided
originals can be automatically scanned.
Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a
toner cartridge.
This transfers output to the saddle stitch finisher.
This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as
USB memory to the machine. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
Output is delivered to this tray.
This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine. When not used, it can
be stored under the operation panel.
This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding and
stapling output and the fold function for folding output in half are also available. A
punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
Up to 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)) can be loaded in each tray.
NOTE
This holds paper. Up to 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)) can be loaded.
This holds paper. Up to 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)) can be loaded.
Up to 3500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)) can be loaded.
When a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed, this is tray 4.
This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed to
punch holes in output.
* Peripheral device.
The peripheral devices are basically options. There are some destinations that peripheral device is provided as a standard unit.
MX-3100N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 1
B. Internal operation parts

(1)
(7)
No.
1
(8)
Name
(9)
(3)
(4)
Fusing unit
Transfer belt
4
5
Right side cover

Paper reversing section cover
Bypass tray
Main power switch
8
9
Waste toner box

Waste toner box release button
10
11
Handle
Right cover of stand/1 x 500 sheet
paper drawer Right cover of stand/2 x
500 sheet paper drawer (when a
stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer or a
stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is
installed)
Paper tray right side cover
Right side cover release lever
(5) (6)
(10) (11) (12) (13)
Function/Operation
These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out in a cartridge, the
cartridge of the color that ran out must be replaced.
Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
Toner cartridges
12
13
(2)
During full color printing, the toner images of each of the four colors on each of
the photoconductive drums are combined together on the transfer belt. During
black and white printing, only the black toner image is transferred onto the
transfer belt.
Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a
paper misfeed.
Use this tray to feed paper manually. When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x
11"R or A4R, be sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.
This is used to power on the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax
functions, keep this switch in the "on" position.
This collects excess toner that remains after printing.
Press this button when you need to release the waste toner box lock to replace
the waste toner box or clean the laser unit.
Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine.
Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 3 or tray 4.
Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 1 or tray 2.

To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side
cover.
NOTE
Caution:
The fusing unit is hot. Take
care not to burn yourself
when removing a paper
misfeed.
Do not touch or damage the
transfer belt. This may cause
a defective image.
C. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT GLASS

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(9)
(8)
No.
1
2
3
Name
Paper feed roller
Document feeding area cover
Original guides
4
5
6
7
8
Document feeder tray

Original exit tray
Scanning area
Original size detector
Reversing tray
Document glass
function/Operation
This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.
These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the
width of the original.
Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
During scanning of a 2-sided original, the original is temporarily output to this
tray in order to be turned over for scanning of the reverse side.
Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the
automatic document feeder.
NOTE
D. Connector
When the fax expansion kit is installed
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No.
1
Name
USB connector (A type)
LAN connector
USB connector (B type)
Service-only connector
5
6
Power plug
Extension phone socket
Telephone line socket
function/Operation
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as
USB memory to the machine. This connector is not initially available for use. If
you wish to use the connector, contact your service technician.
Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a
network. For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). A computer can be connected to this connector to
use the machine as a printer. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
CAUTION: This connector is for use only by service technicians. Connecting a
cable to this connector may cause the machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service
connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be
connected to this socket.
When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to
this socket.
NOTE
E. Operation panel
(1)
MX-2600N/3100N
(1)
(2) (3)
(4)
JOB STATUS
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
(5)
(6) (9)
(10)
(17)
PRINT
READY
DATA
IMAGE SEND
LINE
DATA
HOME
LOGOUT
(7)
No.
1
Name
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
[JOB STATUS] key
PRINT mode indicators
(11)
(12)
(13) (14)
function/Operation
Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys
to perform a variety of operations. When a key is touched, a beep sounds and
the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you perform an
operation.
Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings
are used to configure paper tray settings, store addresses for transmission
operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to
check information on jobs and to cancel jobs.
Touch panel
(8)
x READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
x DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is
taking place.
These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical
values. These keys are also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the
system settings).
Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be
registered in the home screen to enable quick and easy operation of the
machine.
Numeric keys
6
7
[CLEAR] key (
[HOME] key
IMAGE SEND mode indicators
x LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also
lights during transmission of an image in scan mode.
x DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a
problem such as out of paper. This lights up when there is a transmission job
that has not been sent.
Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and white. This key is also
used to send a fax in fax mode.
Press this key to copy or scan an original in color. This key cannot be used for
fax or Internet fax.
Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When
using the fax function, this key can also be pressed to send tone signals on a
pulse dial line.
When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using
the fax function, this key can be used when dialing.
Press this key to return to the initial operation state. Use this key when you wish
to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial
state.
Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key (
) blinks when the machine is in auto power shutoff mode.
Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
[BLACK & WHITE START] key
10
[COLOR START] key
11
[LOGOUT] key (
12
[#/P] key (
13
[CLEAR ALL] key (
14
16
[STOP] key (
)
[POWER SAVE] key (
17
18
[POWER] key (
)
Main power indicator
)
)
) / indicator
(15) (16)
NOTE
(2)
MX-2600G/3100G
(1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(5)
(6) (10)
(11)
PRINT
READY
DATA
DOCUMENT
FILING
LINE
DATA
IMAGE SEND
COPY
JOB STATUS
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
LOGOUT
(7)
No.
1
Name
Mode select keys and indicators
(14) (15)
Press this key to switch to document filing mode when you wish to store a
document as an image file on the hard drive or print or transmit an image stored
on the hard drive.
Press this key to select network scanner / fax mode to use the scanner function
or fax function.
Press this key to select copy mode. Hold the [COPY] key down to view the
machine's total page use count and amount of toner remaining.
x [IMAGE SEND] key

x [COPY] key
PRINT mode indicators
x READY indicator
x DATA indicator
4
(13)
function/Operation
Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This
provides confirmation as you perform an operation.
Use these keys to change the mode displayed in the touch panel.
The indicator of a key lights when the key is selected.
Touch panel
x [DOCUMENT FILING] key
(8) (9)(12)
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.

This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is
taking place.
IMAGE SEND mode indicators

x LINE indicator
x DATA indicator
Numeric keys
6
7
[CLEAR] key (
)
[JOB STATUS] key
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key
9
10
Function key
[BLACK & WHITE START] key
11
[COLOUR START] key
12
[LOGOUT] key (
13
[#/P] key (
14
[CLEAR ALL] key (
15
16
[STOP] key (
)
[POWER SAVE] key (
17
18
[POWER] key (
)
Main power indicator
)
)
) / indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also
lights during transmission of an image in scan mode.
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a
problem such as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical
values. These keys are also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the
system settings).
Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to
check information on jobs and to cancel jobs.
Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings
are used to configure paper tray settings, store addresses for transmission
operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
To use the SharpOSA function, press this key to switch to SharpOSA mode.
Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and white. This key is also
used to send a fax in fax mode.
Press this key to copy or scan an original in colour.
This key cannot be used for fax or Internet fax.
Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When
using the fax function, this key can also be pressed to send tone signals on a
pulse dial line.
When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using
the fax function, this key can be used when dialling.
Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and
start operation from the initial state.
Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key (
) blinks when the machine is in auto power shutoff mode.
Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
(16) (17) (18)

NOTE
F. Status display
Copies in progress from tray 1.
Ready to scan for next copy job.
Job Status
Interrupt
(1)
MFP Status
Color Mode
Job Status
MFP Status
Special Modes
Full Color
020/015
Plain
8 x11
1. 1/2
2. 1/2
3. 1/2
8 x11
8 x11R
8 x14
4. 11x17
Exposure
Auto
Maintenance
Information
DC DC DC
2-Sided Copy
Copying
Output
020/015
DC
DC
DC
Waiting
DC
DC
DC
File
020/015
Quick File
Waiting
Copy Ratio
Original
Paper Select
100%
Auto
Auto
8x11
Plain
8x11
Example: Basic of copy mode

No.
1
Name
Display selection key
Job Status display
MFP Status display
020/015
Waiting
(2)
(3)
function/Operation
The status display can be switched between Job Status and MFP Status.
If the job status screen is displayed, the status display automatically changes to
"MFP Status".
This shows the first 4 print jobs in the print queue (the job in progress and jobs
waiting to be printed). The type of job, the set number of copies, the number of
copies completed, and the job status appear.
Jobs cannot be manipulated in this screen. Jobs can only be manipulated in the
job status screen.
This shows machine system information.
Maintenance Information:
This shows machine maintenance information by means of codes.
NOTE
G. Sensor
SPLS2
SPLS1
SPPD1
SPED
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPWS
SPPD5
SOCD
SPPD4
MHPS
OCSW
TFD3
TFD2
HPOS
POD2
POD3
APPD1
POD1
HLPCD
DSW_ADU
TH_UM_IN
TH_US_IN
TH_LM_IN
1TUD_CL
1TUD_BK
DHPD_CL
TCS_Y
TCS_M
TCS_C
REGS_F
REGS_R
DHPD_K
TCS_K
APPD2
MPED
PPD2
MTOP1
MPWD
MPFD
MPLD
MTOP2
TH_M/HUD_M
PPD1
CLUD1
CPFD1
CPED1
CSS1
DSW_C
CSPD1
CLUD2
CPFD2
CPED2
CSS2
CSPD2
Signal
name
1TUD_BK
1TUD_CL
APPD1
APPD2
CLUD1
CLUD2
CPED1
CPED2
CPFD1
CPFD2
CSPD1
CSPD2
CSS1
CSS2
DHPD_CL
DHPD_K
DSW_ADU
Name
Transfer belt separation BK detection
Transfer belt separation CL detection
ADU transport path detection 1
Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection)
Tray 1 paper empty detection
Tray 1 transport detection
(Paper entry detection)
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 1 installation detection
CL phase detection
BK phase detection
ADU transport open/close detection
Function/Operation
Type
Detects the transfer belt separation BK.

Detects the transfer belt separation CL.
Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass.
Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass.
Detects the tray 1 upper limit.
Detects the tray 1 paper empty.
Detects the tray 2 paper empty.
Detects tray 1 paper pass.
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Detects the tray 1 paper remaining quantity.

Detects the tray 2 paper remaining quantity.
Detects the tray 1.
Detects the tray 2.
Detects the CL phase.
Detects the BK phase.
Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close.
Transmission type
NOTE
Signal
name
DSW_C
HLPCD
HPOS
MHPS
MPED
MPFD
MPLD
MPWD
MTOP1
Name
Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close
detection
Fusing pressure release sensor
Shifter home position detection
Scanner home position sensor
Manual feed paper empty detection
Manual feed paper entry detection
Manual feed paper length detector
Function/Operation
Detects pressure release of the fusing roller.

Detects the shifter home position.
Detects the scanner home position.
Detects the manual feed paper empty.
Detects the manual feed paper entry.
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
Transmission type
Volume resistor
Transmission type
OCSW
POD1
POD2
POD3
PPD1
PPD2
REGS_F
Manual paper feed tray paper width detector

Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector
1
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector
2
Original cover SW
Fusing rear detection
Paper exit detection
Right tray paper exit detection
Resist pre-detection
Resist detection
Pro-reg sensor F
REGS_R
Pro-reg sensor R
SOCD
SPED
SPLS1
SPF open/close sensor

SPF document empty sensor
SPF document length detection short sensor
SPLS2
SPF document length detection long sensor
SPPD1
SPF paper entry detection 1 sensor

(Also used for random detection)
SPF paper entry detection 2 sensor (PS front)
SPF scan front sensor
SPF reverse gate front sensor
SPF reverse rear sensor
SPF document width sensor
SPF stamp unit installation detection
Toner density sensor
Right tray paper exit full detection
Lower main thermister
Temperature/humidity detection
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.

Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out
position (storing position).
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out
position (pull-out position).
Detects the trigger for document size.
Detects the paper exit from fusing.
Detects the paper from paper exit.
Detects the paper exit to right tray.
Detects the paper in front of resist roller.
Detects the paper in rear of resist roller.
Detects the registration shift of the machine front (F)
side and detects color toner patch.
Detects the registration shift of the machine rear (R)
side and detects black toner patch.
Detects open/close of the RSPF.
Detects document empty in the RSPF tray.
Detects the document length of the paper feed tray
upper.
Detects the document length of the paper feed tray
upper.
Detects paper entry and detects paper size in random
paper feeding.
Detects the paper in front of the PS roller.
Detects the paper in front of scan point.
Detects the paper in front of reverse gate.
Detects reversed paper.
Detects width of document on the tray.
Detects the finish stamp unit.
Detects the toner density (C).
Detects the toner density (K).
Detects the toner density (M).
Detects the toner density (Y).
Detects the face down paper exit tray full.
Detects the right tray paper exit full.
Detects the temperature.
Detects temperature and humidity.
Upper main thermister

Upper sub thermister

MTOP2
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPWS
STMPU
TCS_C
TCS_K
TCS_M
TCS_Y
TFD2
TFD3
TH_LM_IN
TH_M/
HUD_M
TH_UM_IN
TH_US_IN
Type
NOTE
Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close.
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Manual paper
feed unit
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Reflection type
Reflection type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Volume resistor
Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor
Transmission type
Manual paper
feed unit
Manual paper
feed unit
H. Switch
SCOV
PWRSW
DSW-R
MSW
DSW-F
1TNFD
Signal
name
1TNFD
DSW-F
Name
Type
Function/Operation
Waste toner full detection switch

Front door open/close switch
Mechanical switch
Micro switch
DSW-R
Right door open/close switch
Micro switch
MSW
PWRSW
Main switch
Operaton panel power supply switch
Seesaw switch
Push switch
SCOV
SPF cover switch
Micro switch
Detects the waste toner full.

Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/
OFF the power line of the fusing, motor and the LSU
laser.
Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/
OFF the power line of the fusing, motor and the LSU
laser.
Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power
source.
Detects the paper feed cover open/close.
NOTE
I. Clutches and solenoids
MPUC
PCSS
MPFS
MPGS
STMPS
SPFC
SRRC
SPFC
SGS
LSUSS_B
LSUSS1
1TURC
CPUC1
CPLC1
CPFC
CPUC2
CPLC2
Signal
name
1TURC
Primary transfer separation clutch
CPFC
Tray vertical transport clutch
Name
CPUC1
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
CPUC2
LSUSS_B
LSU shutter solenoid 1
MPFS
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
MPGS
Manual paper feed gate solenoid
MPUC
Manual paper feed clutch
PCSS
Process control shutter solenoid
SGS
SPF document exit gate solenoid
SPFC
SPF paper feed clutch
SRRC
SPF resist roller clutch
STMPS
Stamp solenoid
Type
Electromagnetic
clutch
Electromagnetic
clutch
Electromagnetic
clutch
Electromagnetic
clutch
Electromagnetic
solenoid
Electromagnetic
solenoid
Electromagnetic
solenoid
Electromagnetic
clutch
Electromagnetic
solenoid
Electromagnetic
solenoid
Electromagnetic
clutch
Electromagnetic
clutch
-
Function/Operation
Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the
paper feed tray section.
Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 1
section.
Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 2
section.
Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
Controls the manual paper feed gate Open/Close.
Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed
roller ON/OFF.
Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and
the registration sensor.
Reverses the paper exit guard by ON operation.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller.
Controls ON/OFF of the PS roller.
Drives the finish stamp.
NOTE
J. Drive motor
PRM
OSM
POM
FUM
PGM
WTNM
SPFM
MIM
SPRM
TNM_Y
TNM_M
PFM
TNM_C
ADUML
ADULM
TNM_K
CLUM1
CPFM
DVM_CL
DVM_K
CLUM2
RRM
Signal
name
ADUML
CLUM1
CLUM2
CPFM
DVM_CL
DVM_K
Name
Type
ADU motor lower

Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2)
Paper feed motor
Developing drive motor (CL)
Developing drive motor (K)
Stepping motor
DC brush motor
DC brush motor
Brush-less motor
Brush-less motor
Brush-less motor
Fusing drive motor

Scanner motor
Shifter motor
Transport motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
PGM
POM
PRM
RRM
SPFM
SPRM
Polygon motor
Paper exit drive motor
Fusing pressure release motor
Resist motor
SPF transport motor
SPF paper feed reverse motor
DC brush-less motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
TNM_C
Toner motor C
Stepping motor
TNM_K
Toner motor K
Stepping motor
TNM_M
Toner motor M
Stepping motor
TNM_Y
Toner motor Y
Stepping motor
WTNM
Waste toner drive motor
Synchronous motor
FUM
MIM
OSM
PFM
Function/Operation
Drives the right door section.
Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
Drives the paper feed section.
Drives the OPC drum/developing section (CL).
Drives the OPC drum/developing section/transfer
section (K).
Drives the fusing unit.
Scanner (reading) section
Performs offset of paper.
Drives transport between the resist roller and the
paper feed section, transport between the resist roller
and the right door section.
Scans the laser beam.
Drives the paper exit roller.
Adjusts the fusing roller pressure.
Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.
Drives the transport roller and the PS roller.
Drives the roller for paper feeding and drives the
SWB transport roller.
Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the
developement unit.
developement unit.
developement unit.
developement unit.
Stirs waste toner.
NOTE
K. Lamps/Gates
1
CLI
CCFT
HL_U
HL_LM
DL_Y
Signal
name
CCFT
LCD backlight
CLI
Scanner lamp
DL_C
DL_K
DL_M
DL_Y
HL_LM
HL_U
Signal
name
1
2
DL_M
DL_C
DL_K
Name
Discharge lamp C
Discharge lamp K
Discharge lamp M
Discharge lamp Y
Heater lamp lower main
Heater lamp upper
LED
LED
LED
LED
Name
ADU reverse gate
ADU gate lower
Type
Cold Cathode
Fluorescent Tube
Xenon lamp
Type
Function/Operation
NOTE
Backlight for LCD

Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan
the document image.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)
Heats the upper heat roller.
Function/Operation
Switches the paper route which is discharged to the
inner tray or the right tray.
Switches the transport route by switchback when
paper is transported to the duplex (ADU) section.
NOTE
L. Fans and filters
POFM_R
POFM_F
RCFM
FUFM
CCFM
MFPFM
PSFM2
PSFM
OZFM
Signal
name
CCFM
FUFM
MFPFM
OZFM
POFM_F
POFM_R
PSFM
PSFM2
RCFM
NO
1
2
3
Name
Function/Operation
Process air inlet fan motor

Fusing fan motor
Controller cooling fan motor
Ozone fan motor
Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side)
Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side)
Power cooling fan motor
Power cooling fan motor2
Rear cooling fan motor
Name
Ozone filter
Toner filter
Paper exit filter
NOTE
Cools charger section of the process.

Cools the fusing unit and peripheral area.
Cools the controller PWB.
Exhausts ozone.
Cools the fusing unit.
Cools the power unit.
Cools rear (R) part of the machine.
Function/Operation
Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
Prevents dispersing of toner.
Deodorizes smell generated by the fusing unit.
NOTE
M. PWB
8.5 inch
8.1 inch
13
14
15
15
16
16
14
33
10
13
31
32
12
9
11
26
2
25
24
23
27
30
34
8
17
35
21
18
6
22
33
5
7
19
28
29
20
3
4
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Name
RD I/F PWB
Tray installation detection PWB
DC power PWB
Driver main PWB
MC PWB
Primary transfer PWB
AC power PWB
Scanner control PWB
Function/Operation
Detects each sensor in the right door unit.
Detects the tray.
Outputs the secondary side voltage.
Drives the transport motor and related sections.
Generates the high voltage for the main charger and the
developing bias voltage.
Generates the primary transfer voltage.
Controls the primary side power source.
Controls the scanner section.
NOTE
NO
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Name
CCD PWB
CL inverter PWB
Document detection light collector PWB
Document detection light emitting PWB
LCD INV PWB
LVDS PWB
MFP OPE-P PWB
Power SW PWB
17
18
HL PWB
Secondary transfer PWB
19
MFP cnt PWB
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Mother PWB
PCU PWB
PCU Flash ROM PWB
BD PWB
LSU PWB
LSU thermistor
DL PWB
LD PWB
PROG1 ROM PWB
PROG2 ROM PWB
SCN Flash ROM PWB
USB connector PWB
USB converter PWB
Function/Operation
Scans document images.
Drives the xenon lamp.
Outputs the document size detection signal.
Emits light for document size detection.
Generates the high voltage for the LCD backlight.
Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD.
Outputs the key operation signal.
Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power
source.
Controls the heater lamp.
Generates the secondary transfer voltage, the transfer
belt cleaning voltage and the pre-transfer voltage.
Controls the image-related items and controls all over the
machine.
Interfaces the MFP cnt PWB and other PWB.
Controls the engine section.
The ROM PWB that control the PCU PWB.
Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
Controls the LSU.
Measures the temperature in LSU.
Controls laser lighting.
Stores the program to boot the printer controller.
Stores the program.
Stores the scanner control program.
For connecting the USB
Controls the USB keyboard.
33
34
35
USB-HUB PWB
RSPF drive PWB
TM drive PWB
Branches off the USB line.

Drives the RSPF.
Control the toner motor.
NOTE
Only for the keyboard standard

equipment model
N. Fuses/Thermostats
15
8.1 inch
10
HLTS2
HLTS1
HLTS3
11
14
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
Signal name
HLTS1
HLTS2
HLTS3
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Name
Thermostat
Thermostat
Thermostat
Signal name
F201
F202
F203
F204
F205
F1
F2
F3
F4
F1
F101
F102
F103
F301
F1
Name
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
6
7
8
9
Specifications
Fusing roller overheat protection
Fusing unit
Fusing unit
Fusing unit
Section
Specifications
T6.3AH 250V
T6.3AH 250V
T6.3AH 250V
T6.3AH 250V
T6.3AH 250V
15A 250V (100V) / T10AH 250V(200V)
T10AH250V (200V only)
T2AH 250V
T2AH 250V (200V only)
200mA 250V
12A 125V (100V) / T6.3AH 250V (200V)
T1AH 250V (100V) / T3.15AH 250V (200V)
T8AH 250V (100V) / T5AH 250V (200V)
T5AH 250V (100V) / T3.15AH 250V (200V)
1.25A 250V
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
AC power PWB
AC power PWB
AC power PWB
AC power PWB
LCD INV PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
CL inverter PWB
Section
O. Roller
1
2
4
3
5
6
8
12
11
14
16
15
13
7
9
10
48
49
52
53
50
51
41
43
42
40
55
54
44
45
26
27
46
47
36
17
19
39
38
18
37
35
33
20
21
22
34
32
31
30
56
57
23
24
25
29
28
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
Name
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
U-turn roller
PS follower roller
PS roller
Transport follower roller
8
9
Scan front roller

Scan rear roller
10
11
Transport roller in SWB pass section
Function/Operation
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
Guide roller to transport paper.
Applies a pressure to paper and the PS roller to give the
transport power of the PS roller to the paper.
Synchronizes the document lead edge and the scan start
position.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to
give the transport power of the transport roller to the
paper.
Transports paper from the PS roller to the scan rear roller.
Transports paper from the scan front roller to the SWB
roller or paper exit roller.
paper.
Transports paper from the SWB roller to the PS rear
roller.
NOTE
NO.
12
Name
13
14
Paper exit roller

Paper exit follower roller
15
16
SWB roller
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)

Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller
(Manual paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Resist roller (Drive)
27
Resist roller (Idle)
28
Transport roller 1 (Idle)
29
Transport roller 1 (Drive)
30
31

32
33
34
35
36

37
38
39
40

41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Function/Operation
paper.
Discharges paper.
Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to
give the transport power of the paper exit roller to the
paper.
The transport direction is switched back to reverse paper.
paper.
Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the
paper transport timing to adjust relative relations between
images and paper.
Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give
the transport power of the transport roller to the paper.
paper.
Transports paper from No. 3 and No. 4 paper feed tray to
the transport roller 4.
Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
paper.
Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper
feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the
transport roller 7.
paper.
Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
paper.
Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to
the transport roller 8.
paper.
Transports the paper to resist roller.
paper.
Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport
roller 13.
paper.
Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the
transport roller 11.
paper.
transport roller 12.
paper.
transport roller 8. / Transports the paper from the manual
paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.
NOTE
NO.
48
Name
49
50
Paper exit roller 1 (Idle)
51
Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
52
Paper exit roller 2 (Idle)
53
54
55
56

Fusing roller (Heating)
Fusing roller (Pressing)
57
Function/Operation
transport roller 1. / Transport paper to the duplex (ADU)
section.
paper.
paper.
Discharges paper. Transports paper to the right paper exit
tray. Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
paper.
Discharges paper.
Heat and press toner onto paper to fuse images.
Applies a pressure to the fusing roller (heating).
Transports paper from the paper feed tray 2 to the
transport roller 4.
paper.
NOTE
MX-3100N
[6]
ADJUSTMENTS
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with

a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest.
Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, however, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Perform only the necessary adjustments according to the need.
If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would

not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2.
Adjustment item list
Job No
ADJ 1
ADJ 2
ADJ 3
ADJ 4
ADJ 5

Adjust the developing doctor gap
Adjust the developing roller main pole
Toner density control reference value setting
Adjusting high voltage values
Image density sensor (image registration sensor)

adjustment
4A
4B
4C
5A
5B
ADJ 6
ADJ 7
ADJ 8
ADJ 9
ADJ 10
ADJ 11
ADJ 12
ADJ 13
ADJ 14
ADJ 15
ADJ 16
ADJ 17
ADJ 18
ADJ 19
Adjust the main charger grid voltage

Adjust the developing bias voltage
Transfer voltage adjustment
Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F)
calibration
Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F), black
image density sensor (image registration sensor R) adjustment
Image skew adjustment (LSU unit)

OPC drum phase adjustment
7A
OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
7B
OPC drum phase adjustment (Manual adjustment)
Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment)
Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
Image registration adjustment (Print engine section)
10A
Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub
scanning direction) (Auto adjustment)
10B
Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment)
10C
Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment)
Scan image distortion adjustment
11A
Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
11B
Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
11C
Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
11D
Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit)
Scan image focus adjustment (CCD unit position adjustment)
RSPF parallelism adjustment (RSPF mode)
13A
RSPF height adjustment (RSPF mode)
13B
RSPF diagonal adjustment (RSPF mode)
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
14A
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning
(Document table mode)
direction) (Document table mode)
14B
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning
direction) (Document table mode)
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main/sub scanning direction) (RSPF mode)
Scan image off-center adjustment
16A
Scan image off-center (Document table mode)
16B
Scan image off-center (RSPF mode)
Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
Copy image position, image loss adjustment
18A
Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Document table
mode)
18B
Adjust the original scan start position (Adjust the scanner read
position in SPF-mode front face scan) (RSPF mode)
18C
Copy image position, image loss adjustment (RSPF mode)
Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) (Print engine section)
MX-3100N ADJUSTMENTS 6 1
Simulation
8-2
8-1
8-6
44-13
44-2
61-4
50-22
44-31
50-10
50-10
50-22
50-20
50-21
48-1
48-1
48-1
50-12
50-12
50-10/50-1
50-1 (50-2)
50-6 (50-7)
50-5
Job No
ADJ 20
ADJ 21
ADJ 22
ADJ 23
ADJ 24
ADJ 25
ADJ 26
ADJ 27
Copy color balance/density adjustment
Printer color balance/density adjustment

20A
CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Normal document
copy mode)
20B
Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
20C
Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
20D
Copy density adjustment (Each color copy mode) (Whole
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20E
Copy density adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode) (Whole
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20F
Copy color balance/gamma adjustment (Each color copy mode)
(Normally not required)
20G Monochrome copy density/gamma adjustment (Each
monochrome copy mode) (Normally not required)
20H
Condition setting of document density reading operation
(exposure) in the monochrome auto copy mode
20I
Document background density reproducibility adjustment in the
monochrome auto copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20J
Copy density adjustment for low density section (Each copy
mode) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20K
Color copy text, line image edge gamma, density adjustment/
TextMap mode gamma, density adjustment
20L
Color document reproducibility adjustment in the monochrome
copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20M Black ingredient amount adjustment in color copy mode (Normally
unnecessary to adjust)
20N
Sharpness adjustment in the monochrome auto copy mode
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20O Copy high density part density correction setting (Prevents
against tone gap) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20P
Copy color balance adjustment (single color copy mode)
20Q Copy density adjustment in the RSPF mode (Normally
20R
Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance
auto adjustment ENABLE setting and adjustment)
21A
Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
21B
Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
21C
Printer density adjustment (low density part density adjustment)
21D
Printer high density part desnsity correction setting (high density
part tone gap countermeasure) (Normally unnecessary to the
setting change)
21E
Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Printer color balance
auto adjustment ENABLE setting and adjustment)
21F
Automatic copy/printer color balance and density adjustment
Adjusting the fusing paper guide position

Document size sensor adjustment
23A
23B
Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment
RSPF tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment (RSPF mode)
Touch panel coordinate setting
Image loss, void area, image off-center, image
27A
magnification ratio auto adjustment with SIM50-28
27B
27C
27D
Document size sensor detection point adjustment

Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor
Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio

automatic adjustment
Image off-center automatic adjustment
Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image offcenter, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
SPF mode image off-center, image lead edge position, sub
scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic
adjustment (RSPF mode)
Simulation
63-3 (63-5)
46-24
46-21
46-1
46-2
46-10
46-16
46-19
46-32
46-63
46-27
46-37
46-38
46-60
46-23
46-25
46-9
26-53
67-24
67-25
67-36
67-34
26-54
46-74
41-2
41-2
40-2
53-7
65-1
50-28
50-28
50-28
3.
Details of adjustment
4)
Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten

the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
5)
Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm - 70mm

from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.60 r 0.05mm.
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing doctor

gap
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
1)
Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the

developing doctor and the developing roller.
70mm
70mm
40mm
40mm
2)
Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
Note for use of a thickness gauge

Do not insert the gauge diagonally.
The gauge must pass freely.
The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG
roller oscillation.
* Marked point (A) on the follower side (right side) of the MG roller.
A
3)
Insert a thickness gauge of 0.60mm in between 40mm - 70mm

from the edge of the developing doctor.
70mm
70mm
40mm
40mm
7)
ADJ 2 Adjust the developing roller

main pole
After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller

main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjustment plate with the fixing screw.
ADJ 3 Toner density control reference
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
value setting
* When the print image density is low.

* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* When developer is replaced.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is

replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
1)
Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the developing unit on a flat surface.
2)
Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin.
3)
Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because too heavy. It will not
provide a correct position.)
4)
1)
With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the

needle with the needle at 2 - 3mm from the developing roller
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.)
$7'(9($'-B/B.
$7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B&
$7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0
$7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9($'-B/B<
$7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
23mm
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
.
&
<
(;(&87(

M
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
5)
Measure the distance between the marking position and position A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8 r
0.5mm.
$7'(9($'-B/B.
$7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B&
$7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0
$7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9($'-B/B<
$7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the developing roller main pole position in the following procedures.
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
.
&
<
(;(&87(

Adjustment completed
Abnormal end

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
A
37.8 + 0.5mm
37.8 + 0.5mm
$7'(9($'-B/B.
$7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B&
$7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0
$7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9($'-B/B<
$7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
6)
Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing

screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
&
<
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&'B.(((/
7&'B&
7&'B0(((/
7&'B<
7&9B.(((/
7&9B&(((/
7&9B0(((/
7&9B<(((/
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the developing roller main pole

position comes to the specified range.
&
<
2)
Close the front cabinet.
3)
Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
(;(&87(

4)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The developing roller rotates, and the toner density sensor detects toner
density, and the output value is displayed.
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the average value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saved) as the reference toner density control value.
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation
is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight.
This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is
completed or not.
The above operation is executed each of the lower speed
mode and the middle speed mode, and the reference toner
density control value is set for each of them.
ADJ 4 Adjusting high voltage values

4-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1)
Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.

NOTE:
If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the adjustment
result is not reflected.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$ 0,''/(63(('*%B.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.

% 0,''/(63(('*%B&
& 0,''/(63(('*%B0

' 0,''/(63(('*%B<
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the reference toner density control value is not completed normally.
Error
display
EE-EL
Error name
Detail of error
EL abnormality
EE-EU
EU abnormality
EE-EC
EC abnormality
Sensor output level: 1.5V or below. If not,

Control voltage: 8.0V or above.
Sensor output level: 3.45V or above. If not,
Control voltage: 2.0V or below.
Sensor output level: other than 2.5V r 0.2V
5)
Use SIM24-5 to clear the developer counter.
6)
Use SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
0,''/(
2)
(;(&87(
2.
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.

NOTE:
1)
/2:
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
When replacing developer, always replace all the three colors

of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan.
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$ 0,''/(63(('*%B.
If only one color is replaced, color balance may be adversely

affected. Black developer can be replaced individually.
& 0,''/(63(('*%B0

% 0,''/(63(('*%B&
' 0,''/(63(('*%B<
After replacement of developer or the photoconductor, be sure

to execute SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
If the above procedure is neglected, the half-tone correction
may not be performed correctly.
3)
When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25-2.

0,''/(
Item
MIDDLE
LOW
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
MIDDLE SPEED GB_K

MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
MIDDLE SPEED GB_M
MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
LOW SPEED GB_K
LOW SPEED GB_C
LOW SPEED GB_M
LOW SPEED GB_Y
(;(&87(
2.
2)
Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and

the scroll key.
3)
Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle

speed mode and press [OK] key.
Mode
K
C
M
Y
K
C
M
Y
/2:
Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode)

Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode)
Main charger grid voltage(Low speed mode)
Adjustment
range
150 - 850
150 - 850
150 - 850
150 - 850
150 - 850
150 - 850
150 - 850
150 - 850
Monitor (MC/DV high

voltage PWB)
Monitor voltage
Check
(Specified value)
pin
17.8 r 1.1V
GB-K
17.8 r 1.1V
GB-C
17.8 r 1.1V
GB-M
17.8 r 1.1V
GB-Y
17.7 r 1.1V
GB-K
17.7 r 1.1V
GB-C
17.7 r 1.1V
GB-M
17.7 r 1.1V
GB-Y
Actual
voltage
-630V
-630V
-630V
-630V
-620V
-620V
-620V
-620V
Remark:
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is outputted.
6)
Apply a digital multi-meter to between the check pin and GND

on the MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the
adjusted mode.
7)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label

attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX

When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are automatically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.
The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec.
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed
mode, and then adjust the other mode.
If possible, it is recommendable to use an unnecessary developing unit and an unnecessary OPC drum for this adjustment.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the

modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
automatically changed. Use care for that.
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output voltage, there is no need to check the output value.
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
procedures below.
1)
Remove the rear cover of the machine.
If this procedure is executed for a long time, the OPC drum

and the developing roller may be adversely affected. Use this
procedure as short as possible.
8)
Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.

If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
adjust. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
may be defective.
MC/DV high voltage PWB
PCU PWB
Development unit
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode
2
1
2)
Open the PWB holder.
3)
4)

the scroll key.
5)
Check the relationship between the check pin on the MC/DV

high voltage PWB and each adjustment mode.
1)
4-B Adjust the developing bias voltage
Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-1.

* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 0,''/(63((''9%B.

% 0,''/(63((''9%B&

& 0,''/(63((''9%B0
' 0,''/(63((''9%B<
0,''/(
/2:
(;(&87(
2.
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
after 30 sec.
or

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 0,''/(63((''9%B.

% 0,''/(63((''9%B&

& 0,''/(63((''9%B0
' 0,''/(63((''9%B<
0,''/(
Item
MIDDLE
LOW
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K

MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
MIDDLE SPEED
DVB_M
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
LOW SPEED DVB_K
LOW SPEED DVB_C
LOW SPEED DVB_M
LOW SPEED DVB_Y
/2:
(;(&87(
2.
2)

the scroll key.
3)
Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle

speed mode and press [OK] key.
Mode
Adjustment
range
K
C
M
Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode)

0-600
0-600
0-600
Y
K
C
M
Y
Developing bias voltage

0-600
0-600
0-600
0-600
0-600
(Middle speed mode)

(Low speed mode)
(Low speed mode)
(Low speed mode)
(Low speed mode)
Monitor (MC/DV high

voltage PWB)
Monitor voltage
Check
(Specified value)
pin
19.2 r 1.2V
BS-K
19.2 r 1.2V
BS-C
19.2 r 1.2V
BS-M
19.2 r 1.2V
19.2 r 1.2V
19.2 r 1.2V
19.2 r 1.2V
19.2 r 1.2V
BS-Y
BS-K
BS-C
BS-M
BS-Y
Actual
voltage
-450V
-450V
-450V
-450V
-450V
-450V
-450V
-450V
Remark:
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is outputted.
5)
Check the relationship between the check pin on the MC/DV

high voltage PWB and each adjustment mode.
6)
Apply a digital multi-meter to between the check pin and GND

on the MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the
adjusted mode.
7)
8)
Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label

attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
DVK:XXX DVC:XXX DVM:XXX DVY:XXX

When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are automatically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed
mode, and then adjust the other mode.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
automatically changed. Use care for that.
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output voltage, there is no need to check the output value.
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
procedures below.
1)
Remove the rear cover of the machine.
The main charger voltage is outputted for 30sec.

If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
adjust. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
may be defective.
MC/DV high voltage PWB
PCU PWB
Development unit
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode
2
1
2)
Open the PWB frame.
3)
4)

the scroll key.
1)
4-C Transfer voltage adjustment

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
* When the primary transfer high voltage power PWB or Secondary transfer high voltage power PWB is replaced.
&/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 7&/2:63(('&/.

% 7&0,''/(63(('&/.
& 7&/2:63(('&/&
' 7&0,''/(63(('&/&
( 7&/2:63(('&/0
) 7&0,''/(63(('&/0
* 7&/2:63(('&/<
+ 7&0,''/(63(('&/<
, 7&/2:63(('%:.
- 7&0,''/(63(('%:.
. 7&3/$,1&/63;
/ 7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87(
2.
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 7&/2:63(('&/.

% 7&0,''/(63(('&/.
& 7&/2:63(('&/&
' 7&0,''/(63(('&/&
( 7&/2:63(('&/0
) 7&0,''/(63(('&/0
* 7&/2:63(('&/<
+ 7&0,''/(63(('&/<
, 7&/2:63(('%:.
- 7&0,''/(63(('%:.
. 7&3/$,1&/63;
/ 7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87(
2.
2)
Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3)
Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK]

key.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified
voltage is outputted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is outputted.
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
TC1 LOW SPEED CL K

TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K
TC1 LOW SPEED CL C
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C
TC1 LOW SPEED CL M
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M
TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y
TC1 LOW SPEED BW K
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K
TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
TC2 PLAIN CL DPX
TC2 PLAIN BW SPX
TC2 PLAIN BW DPX
TC2 HEAVY CL SPX
TC2 HEAVY CL DPX
TC2 HEAVY BW SPX
TC2 HEAVY BW DPX
TC2 OHP CL
TC2 OHP BW
TC2 ENVELOPE CL
TC2 ENVELOPE BW
TC2 CLEANING
TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD
TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD
TC2 CLEAN CLEANING
Content
Primary transport
bias reference
value
Color
K
C
M
Y
Black/White
Secondary
transport bias
reference value
Color
K
Standard
paper
Black/White
Color
Heavy
paper
Black/White
Secondary
transport bias
reference value
Secondary
transport cleaning
bias reference
value
Color
Black/White
Color
Black/White
Cleaning process
In low speed print
In middle speed print
Cleaning
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
OHP
Envelope
Setting
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
80
109
80
109
80
109
80
109
80
109
130
120
99
99
78
78
78
68
78
68
78
78
63
0
0
85
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
0V -1500V
0V -1500V
0V -1500V
Default value
of actual
output value
6PA
10PA
6PA
10PA
6PA
10PA
6PA
10PA
6PA
10PA
40PA
35PA
25PA
25PA
15PA
15PA
15PA
10PA
15PA
10PA
15PA
15PA
8PA
0V
0V
-500V
Setting
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
1 - 255
1 - 255
1 - 255
1 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
100
100
100
100
184
184
184
131
93
149
149
149
0V 4KV
0V 4KV
0V 4KV
0V 4KV
0.5KHz 2KHz
0.5KHz 2KHz
0.5KHz 2KHz
0.5KHz 2KHz
0V 2KV
0V 2KV
0V 2KV
0V 2KV
0: OFF
1-6: Environment conditions
0-6
0: OFF
10: Lighting-up fully
0 - 10
Item/Display
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
AM
VPTC LOW SPEED CL

VPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL
VPTC LOW SPEED BK
VPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK
FPTC LOW SPEED CL
FPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL
FPTC LOW SPEED BK
FPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK
DCPTC LOW SPEED CL
DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL
DCPTC LOW SPEED BK
DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED
BK
PTC_HT
AN
HT_DUTY
Content
PTC applied
voltage control
(AC constant
voltage setting)
PTC applied
voltage control
(frequency setting
value)
PTC applied
voltage control
(DC constant
voltage setting
value)
PTC heater
operating
environment
setting
Setting of the
supply power in
PTC heater
constant operation
(Duty ratio setting)
Color
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
Black/White
Color
Black/White
Color
Black/White
ADJ 5 Image density sensor (image

registration sensor) adjustment
There are some parts variations in the image density sensor section. Therefore, the absolute detection level differs in each
machine. To correct this, calibration is executed.
Default value
of actual
output value
2.5KV
2.5KV
2.5KV
2.5KV
0.5KHz
0.5KHz
0.5KHz
0.5KHz
-1.0KV
-1.4KV
-1.4KV
-1.4KV
Always ON
0% 100%
50%
5-A Color image density sensor (image

registration sensor F) calibration
1)
Open the front cabinet of the main unit, and remove the waste
toner box.
2)
Remove the primary transfer unit fixing screw.
3)
Turn to the transfer belt tension release cam and release the
primary transfer belt tension.

* When the image density sensor (image registration sensor) is
replaced.
The targets of the adjustment are the color image density sensor
(image registration sensor F) and the black image density sensor
(image registration sensor R). There are following adjustment
methods.
* Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration SIM44-13
* Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) calibration SIM44-2
NOTE: The color image density sensor detects color image density
and image registration on front frame side, the black image
density sensor detects black image density and image registration on rear frame side. That is, two functions is
assigned to each one sensor.
Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the following items.
UNLOCK
* Check to confirm that the color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) and the black image density sensor (image
registration sensor R) are clean.
* Check to confirm that the image density sensor calibration plate
is clean.
* Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from
scratches.
CAUTION: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer

unit is released manually, turn on the power again after
completion of the work. This procedure initializes the
transfer roller to return it to the home position.
4)
Open the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
5)
Open the process front cover, and pull out the primary transfer
belt unit.
8)
Close the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
9)
Install the waste toner bottle to the main unit.
10) Close the front cabinet.

11) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Color image sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration is
automatically executed. When the operation is completed, the
adjustment result is displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display.
Display/Item
6)
PCS_CL
CARB OUT
PCS_CL
LED ADJ
Install the color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration jig (UKOG-0318FCZZ) to the sensor housing
section.
Engage the pawls (A) in the sensor housing groove, and slide
it to the rear frame side.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the PTC terminal.
Content
Color image density sensor
LED current adjustment
target value
LED current adjustment
target value (PCS CL CARB
OUT) registered LED current
level
Adjustment
value range
1 - 255
1 - 255
Default
108
21
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.

In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. If any
abnormality is found, repair and execute calibration again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
PCU PWB
Image sensor calibration jig (standard reflection sheet dirt,
scratch, discoloration)
Image density sensor calibration plate
NOTE: Store the image sensor calibration jig under low temperature, low humidity and dark place.
5-B Color image density sensor (image

registration sensor F), black image density
sensor (image registration sensor R)
adjustment
7)
Turn on the power and enter SIM44-13 mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17
NOTE: This adjustment executes automatically at the outset of

registration adjustment operation and process control operation as well as SIM44-2.
1)
Enter SIM44-2 mode.
3&6B&/&$5%287
3&6B&//('$'-

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
352&21*$,1$'-8670(17
(;(&87(

EXECUTE
3&6B&//('$'-
5(*B)*51'
3&6B./('$'-
5(*B5*51'
3&6B&/'$5.
5(*B)%(/70$;
3&6B.'$5.
5(*B)%(/70,1
3&6B.*51'
5(*B)%(/7',)
3&6B.%(/70$;
5(*B5%(/70$;
3&6B.%(/70,1
5(*B5%(/70,1
3&6B.%(/7',)
5(*B5%(/7',)
5(*B)/('$'-
5(*B)3$7&+.
5(*B5/('$'-
5(*B)3$7&+&
5(*B)'$5.
5(*B)3$7&+0
5(*B5'$5.
5(*B)3$7&+<

(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17
3&6B&/&$5%287
3&6B&//('$'-
2)


The color image density sensor (image registration sensor F),
the black image density sensor (image registration sensor R)
are automatically adjusted.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is
displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
(;(&87(

Mode
Adjustment
value for
process
control
operation
mode
Display/Item
A
PCS_CL
LED ADJ
PCS_K
LED ADJ
PCS_CL
DARK
PCS_K
DARK
PCS_K
GRND
D
E
Adjustment
value for
image
registration
operation
mode
PCS_K
BELT
MAX
PCS_K
BELT MIN
PCS_K
BELT DIF
REG_F
LED ADJ
REG_R
LED ADJ
REG_F
DARK
REG_R
DARK
REG_F
GRND
REG_R
GRND
REG_F
BELT
MAX
REG_F
BELT
MIN
REG_F
BELT
DIF
REG_R
BELT
MAX
REG_R
BELT
MIN
REG_R
BELT
DIF
REG_F
PATCH
(K)
REG_F
PATCH
(C)
REG_F
PATCH
(M)
REG_F
PATCH
(Y)
Content
Range
Color image sensor

light emitting quantity
adjustment value
Black image sensor
light emitting quantity
adjustment value
Dark voltage of color
1 - 255
Default
21
1 - 255
21
0 - 255
Dark voltage of black
0 - 255
Belt base detection

level when
completion of Item B
adjustment
Maximum value of
belt base detection
level
Minimum value of
belt base detection
level
Belt base detection
level difference
(Item E - Item F)
Image registration
sensor light emitting
quantity adjustment
value F
Image registration
sensor light emitting
quantity adjustment
value R
Image registration
sensor dark voltage
F
Image registration
sensor dark voltage
R
Belt base detection
level when
completion of Item I
adjustment
Belt base detection
level when
completion of Item J
adjustment
Maximum value of
belt base detection
level (F side)
Minimum value of
belt base detection
level (F side)
Belt base detection
level difference
(Item O - Item P)
Maximum value of
belt base detection
level (R side)
Minimum value of
belt base detection
level (R side)
Belt base detection
level difference
(Item R - Item S)
Patch detection level
F for check (K)
0 - 255
0 - 255

F for check (C)
0 - 255

F for check (M)
0 - 255

F for check (Y)
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
1 - 255
Mode
Adjustment
value for
image
registration
operation
mode
AA
AB
REG_R
PATCH
(K)
REG_R
PATCH
(C)
REG_R
PATCH
(M)
REG_R
PATCH
(Y)
Mode
Adjustment
value for
process
control
operation
mode
Error display
BK_SEN_ADJ
_ERR
CL_SEN_ADJ
_ERR
BELT_READ
_ERR
56
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
Adjustment
value for
image
registration
operation
mode
REG_SEN_F
_ADJ_ERR
REG_SEN_R
_ADJ_ERR
0
REG_BELT_F
_READ_ERR
0 - 256
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
Range

R for check (K)
0 - 55
Default
0

R for check (C)
0 - 255

R for check (M)
0 - 255

R for check (Y)
0 - 255
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
56
1 - 255
Content
Display/Item
REG_BELT_R
_READ_ERR
Black image
density
sensor
adjustment
abnormality
Color image
sensor
adjustment
abnormality
Transfer belt
surface
reading
abnormality
Error content
PCS_K LED ADJ error
(The target value is not
obtained after retried
three times.)
Registration
sensor F
adjustment
abnormality
Registration
sensor R
adjustment
abnormality
F side
transfer belt
surface
reading
abnormality
R side
transfer belt
surface
reading
abnormality
PCS_CL LED ADJ

error (The target value
is not obtained after
retried three times.)
PCS_K GRND error
(The surface detection
level is maximum or
the minimum value
difference is outside a
reference range. )
REG_F LED ADJ error
three times.)
REG_R LED ADJ error
three times.)
REG_F GRND error
level is maximum or
the minimum value
reference range. )
REG_R GRND error
level is maximum or
the minimum value
reference range. )
When an error occurs, check the following sections for any

abnormality.
Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F)
Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R)
0 - 255
0 - 255
PCU PWB
Transfer belt (dirt, scratch)
Transfer belt cleaner
Color image sensor calibration plate
If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
ADJ 6 Image skew adjustment (LSU

unit)
2)
Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by

changing the value of set item B.
3)
4)
Check the printed black image for any skew.
The check pattern is printed out.

* When the color shift occurs.
Measure the right angle level by using the six cross patterns
printed in black.
* When the LSU unit is replaced.
There are following two methods of checking the black image

for any skew (right angle).
* When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit.

* When a color image registration mistake occurs.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing site is changed.
(Required depending on the cases.)
* When there is an uneven density area or a difference in color
balance in the main scanning direction (back and forth).
* When the color phase is not matched by the color balance
adjustment.
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced.
NOTE: This adjustment can be executed efficiently by executing
the following procedures in advance.
The black (K) image skew, however, must be properly
adjusted for that.
1)
Press [REGIST] button in SIM50-22 mode to execute the automatic image registration adjustment.
2)
The current skew level is displayed on the SKEW display

menu.
3)
Put down the displayed skew level value.
Method 1:
Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print
pattern. Check the difference in the length of the diagonal lines
for judgment of good or no good
Method 2:
Compare the right angle of vertical side/horizontal side of the
rectangle print pattern and the right angle sides of A3 or 11 x
8.5 paper for judgment of good or no good.
(NOTE) In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be
used may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of
paper to be used in advance.
(Method 1)
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle
print pattern.
4
(Meaning of the skew level value)

* When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the
skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the number of the
value.
* When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the
skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the number
of the value.
Diagonal line D
Diagonal line C
At that time, the fractional part after the decimal point is rounded.
NOTE: The K (black) image skew level cannot be checked with
this adjustment.
To check and adjust the K (black) image skew, follow the
procedures below and execute the adjustment.
1)
Enter SIM61-4 mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17
$ 08/7,&2817
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C

and D of the diagonal lines.
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in
the following range. C D = r0.8mm
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
is no need to adjust.
% 3$3(5&6

(;(&87(
key
EXECUTE
2.
EXECUTE
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17
$ 08/7,&2817
% 3$3(5&6

(;(&87(
2.
(Method 2)
a) Fit the side of A3 or 11x17 paper to the long side of the rectangle print pattern.
Comparison line
10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color
image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjustment.
4
A3 or 11 x 17 paper
0.5mm or less
Direction B
Direction A
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Direction A
*B
*A
Direction B
*B
*A: Rough adjustment print pattern

*B: Fine adjustment print pattern
(
b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper

and side of the rectangle print pattern.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
adjust.
If not, execute the following procedures.
5)
Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box.
6)
Loosen the LSU unit fixing screws (2 pcs.) and shift the skew
adjustment screw in the arrow direction to adjust the LSU (writing) unit skew.
(When Method 1 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance)
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the front

frame direction and in the rear frame direction, note the same
print color pattern and check to confirm that the difference in
the highest density sections is within r1 step.
(Compare the front and the rear frame positions of the samecolor print color patterns. All the highest density sections of all
the print color patterns may not be aligned on a line. Compare
only the same-color patterns.)
If the above condition is not met, do the following:
11) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to
adjust.
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C > D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of Y.
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C < D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of X.
(When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any

skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance)
If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, shift the
adjustment screw to X direction. If the image is skewed in the
arrow direction of B, shift the adjustment screw to Y direction.
When each adjustment screw is turned, it clicks. Turn it by

5 - 6 clicks and the check pattern is changed by 1 step (1
dot size).
Y
When the image skew pattern on the front frame side is

skewed in the arrow direction of A (to the smaller number) from
the rear frame side, turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise. When the image is skewed in the arrow direction of B (to
the larger number), turn the adjustment screw clockwise.
12) Print the check pattern.
13) Check the color image skew pattern.
7)
Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet.
8)
Execute procedures 3) - 4).
Repeat procedures 11) - 13) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
(Repeat procedures 5) - 8) until a satisfactory result is

obtained.)
The image skew adjustment (LSU unit) is executed by changing

the parallelism of the LSU unit scan laser beam for the OPC drum.
9)
If the adjustment result reaches the satisfactory level, tighten

the adjustment screw.
(The black image skew adjustment is completed with the
above.)
2)
ADJ 7 OPC drum phase adjustment
(The machine enters the OPC drum phase adjustment mode/

image registration adjustment (auto adjustment) mode, and
both adjustments are executed simultaneously in this mode.)

The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration

adjustment can be individually executed by [REGIST] button
and [DRUM POS] button. Since, however, the image registration adjustment must be executed when the OPC drum phase
adjustment is completed, both adjustment are executed in this
adjustment simultaneously.
* When the photoconductor drum is replaced.

* When the OPC drum is removed from the main unit.
* When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
3)
* When the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.

The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration
adjustment are executed automatically.
* When EEPROM on the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.

* When the color image sensor (image registration sensor F) is
replaced.
* When the color image sensor (image registration sensor R) is
replaced.
7-A OPC drum phase adjustment

(Auto adjustment)
1)
Press [ALL] key.
* After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor stops and

[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and the adjustment result is displayed.
MAIN, SUB
Example
PHASE
Enter SIM50-22 mode.

Example

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:
&/1*
0/1*
</1*
5(*,67
'580326
$//
EXECUTE
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
12:(;(&87,1*
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Image regist adjustment value is displayed.

( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value.
This time 105.0, previous time 103.0 : 105.0 (+2)
OPC drum phase adjustment value is displayed.
( ) is the previous adjustment value.
This time 90q, previous time 45q : 3 (2)
&/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
(55257211(5(037<
(;(&87(
4)
7-B OPC drum phase adjustment

(Manual adjustment)
The adjustment patterns (8 pages) are printed.

NOTE: The OPC drum phase adjustment by manual is not recommended. Cause judgement of adjustment pattern differ in
individuals. Auto adjustment mode with SIM50-22 is recommended.
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'580326,7,216(77,1*
$ 35,1702'(6(79$/8(

% &2/25
& 3$3(5&6
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
Each identification number ("1" - "8") is printed on each printed

page of 8 adjustment patterns.
2.
5)
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'580326,7,216(77,1*
Check the deflection in 94mm pitch cycle of each C/M/Y print

pattern. Select a print pattern of the smallest deflection for
each color of C/M/Y, and use the pattern identification number
as the adjustment value, and enter it to set item B. Press [OK]
key.
$ 35,1702'(6(79$/8(

% &2/25
& 3$3(5&6
(;(&87(
2.
When the deflection exceeds the range

between 2 lines in the printed result.
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
94mm

&/26(
'580326,7,216(77,1*
$ 35,1702'(GHJ

94mm
94mm
or end of print
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
94mm
NOTE: If there is a peculiar deflection other than the drum cycle

(94mm pitch), check the following conditions.
OPC drum drive section
% &2/25
Transfer belt drive section
& 3$3(5&6
Paper feed drive section

Each motor speed set value (Set value of SIM48-6)
(;(&87(
2.
2)
Enter "1" with 10-key in the PRINT MODE of set item A, and
press [OK] key.
3)
Select the paper feed stage with A3 (or 11 x 17) in it with

PAPER SELECT of set item C, and press [OK] key.
6)
ADJ 8 Print engine image

magnification ratio adjustment
(BK) (Main scanning direction)
(Print engine section) (Manual
adjustment)
Change the set value of set item A.

When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
by 0.1mm.
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
main scanning direction is decreased.

* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment
(Print engine section)


1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*

% 0$,10)7
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.

* When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main
scanning direction) is performed.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
& 0$,1&6
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
- 68%&6
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
(;(&87(
2.
* When the regist roller section is disassembled.

EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print

(Note)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
* Check that the print engine image magnification ratio adjustment

(BK) (main scanning direction) has been properly adjusted.
$ %.0$*

Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the following

item.
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6
1)
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&

+ 0$,1$'8
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
, 68%0)7
- 68%&6
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
(;(&87(
2.
$ %.0$*

% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6
' 0$,1&6
2)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray.
( 0$,1&6
3)
Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
key.
* 0$,1/&&
4)
- 68%&6
) 0$,1&6
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7
. 68%&6
The check pattern is printed out.

5)
&/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
/ 68%/&&
(;(&87(
Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 210
r0.5mm.
2.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*

% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
210 0.5mm
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7
- 68%&6
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
(;(&87(
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

2.
2)
Select set item J with the scroll key and enter the value corresponding to the paper feed tray to be adjusted.
Display/Item
BK-MAG
MAIN-MFT
MAIN-CS1
MAIN-CS2
MAIN-CS3
MAIN-CS4
MAIN-LCC
MAIN-ADU
Content
Main scan print
magnification ratio BK
Print off center adjustment
value (Manual paper feed)
value
(Tray 1)
value
(Tray 2)
value
(Tray 3)
value
(Tray 4)
value
(LCC)
value (ADU)
Setting
range
60 - 140
Default
100
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
5)
Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the correct position.
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied.
RV
2.0mm 2.0mm
FV
2.0mm
NOTE: Before execution of
SUB-MFT
SUB-CS12
K
L
M
N
O
SUB-CS34
SUB-LCC
SUB-ADU
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
DUPLEX
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
this adjustment,
check to insure that
the adjustment
items A - G have
been properly
adjusted. If not, this
adjustment cannot
be made properly.
Registration
Manual
paper feed
motor ON
Timing
Standard
adjustment
tray
DESK
LCC
ADU
Number of print
Tray
Manual paper
selection feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
Duplex
Yes
print
No
selection
2.0mm
RV: REAR VOID AREA

FV: FRONT VOID AREA
RV + FV d 4.0mm
RV = 2.0 r 2.0mm
FV = 2.0 r 2.0mm
1 - 99
50
6)
1 - 99
50
7)
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 999
1-6 1
50
50
50
1
2
(CS1)
0-1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
Select the paper feed mode adjustment item (B - H) to be

adjusted with the scroll key.
Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
[EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pattern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
changed by about 0.1mm.
Repeat procedures 3) - 7) until the conditions of procedure 5)
are satisfied.
1
(NO)
3)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray selected in procedure 2).
4)
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating

the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
8)
Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2

pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direction. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
10-A Image registration adjustment (Main

scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
(Auto adjustment)
In this adjustment, the image registration adjustment in the main
scanning direction and that in the sub scanning direction are executed simultaneously and automatically.
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:
&/1*
0/1*
</1*
5(*,67
'580326
$//
E X ECUTE
(;(&87(


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
12:(;(&87,1*
ADJ 10 Image registration adjustment

(;(&87(
Abnormal end
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.

* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.

* When the color image registration mistake in the main scanning

direction occurs.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
* When the color image registration mistake in the sub scanning

direction occurs
(55257211(5(037<
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed.

* When maintenance work is performed. (Replacement of the
OPC drum, the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt,
etc.)
* When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main
scanning direction) is performed.
(;(&87(

Note before adjustment
(Before execution of this adjustment, all the following adjustments
must have been completed.)
* Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit)
* [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main scanning direction) (print engine section)
2)
Press [REGIST] key to select the image registration adjustment auto adjustment mode.
3)

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto
adjustment is started. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the adjustment result is displayed.
It takes about 40 sec to complete the adjustment.
Display/
Item
MAIN C
F
MAIN
R
SUB
SKEW
Content
Registration
adjustment value
(Main scanning
direction) (Position
of writing by cyan
laser is F side)
Registration
adjustment value
(Main scanning
of writing by
magenta laser is F
side)
Registration
adjustment value
(Main scanning
of writing by yellow
laser is F side)
Registration
adjustment value
(Main scanning
of writing by cyan
laser is R side)
Registration
adjustment value
(Main scanning
of writing by
magenta laser is R
side)
Registration
adjustment value
(Main scanning
of writing by yellow
laser is R side)
Registration
adjustment value
(Sub scanning
direction) (Cyan
drum to black drum)
Registration
adjustment value
(Sub scanning
direction) (Magenta
drum to cyan drum)
Registration
adjustment value
(Sub scanning
direction) (Yellow
drum to magenta
drum)
Calculated result of
print skew amount
(Cyan)
print skew amount
(magenta)
print skew amount
(yellow)
Display
1.0 199.0
Default
100
NOTE
To check the auto adjustment result, use the manual image

registration adjustment mode below.
* Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (SIM50-20)
* Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (SIM50-21)
1.0 199.0
10-B Image registration adjustment (Main

scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
100
NOTE: If item "AR_AUTO" in SIM44-1 is 0 (Allows) and process

control is executed, the image registration adjustment is
executed automatically and updates the result in each
case.
1.0 199.0
In case of retaining the manual adjustment result, 1 must be set to

item "AR_AUTO" of SIM44-1 (inhibits).
100
1)
1.0 199.0

100
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21
$ &<$1)5217

% &<$15($5

& 0$*(17$)5217

' 0$*(17$5($5

( <(//2:)5217
1.0 199.0
) <(//2:5($5
100
* 08/7,&2817
+ 3$3(5&6
, '83/(;12
(;(&87(
1.0 199.0
10-key
EXECUTE
1.0 199.0
2.
100
EXECUTE
End of print
100

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21
$ &<$1)5217
1.0 199.0

100
% &<$15($5

& 0$*(17$)5217
' 0$*(17$5($5
( <(//2:)5217
) <(//2:5($5
* 08/7,&2817
+ 3$3(5&6
1.0 199.0
, '83/(;12
100
(;(&87(
-99.9 99.9
-99.9 99.9
-99.9 99.9
If the value is plus,

R is displayed to
left side of
numerical value. If
the value is minus,
L is displayed to left
side of numerical
value. When the
value is in the -4 to
+4 range, "OK" is
displayed to right
side of numerical
value. If not, "NG"
is displayed to right
side of numerical
value.
2.
2)
Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by

changing the value of set item H.
3)

The image registration adjustment pattern in the main scanning direction is printed.
MAIN, SUB: The entered value after adjustment is displayed.

( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value.
Example: This time 105, previous time 103: 105 (+2)
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
A: Rough adjustment pattern

B: Fine adjustment pattern
C: Adjustment range (0 r1)
4)
Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pattern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear
frame sides.
Display/Item
C
MAGENTA
(FRONT)
MAGENTA
(REAR)
YELLOW
(FRONT)
YELLOW
(REAR)
Use the visually highest color density section as the center,

and measure the shift amount.
The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are
adjusted independently.
To check the image registration, therefore, check the front
frame side and the rear frame side individually.
Rough adjustment print
pattern check
Fine adjustment print
pattern check
Check that the rough adjustment print pattern

is at the center for the rough adjustment
reference pattern.
Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is
at the center for the fine adjustment reference
pattern.
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0

r1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the adjustment is not required.)
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode
adjustment item A - F to be adjusted with the scroll key and
change the adjustment value to adjust.
Display/Item
A
CYAN
(FRONT)
CYAN
(REAR)
Content
Image registration
adjustment value
(Main scanning direction)
(Cyan) (F side)
Image registration
adjustment value
(Cyan) (R side)
Adjustment
value range
1 - 199
Default
100
Content
Image registration
adjustment value
(Magenta) (F side)
Image registration
adjustment value
(Magenta) (R side)
Image registration
adjustment value
(Yellow) (F side)
Image registration
adjustment value
(Yellow) (R side)
Adjustment
value range
1 - 199
Default
100
1 - 199
100
1 - 199
100
1 - 199
100

For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the
adjustment value, refer to the following.
(Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of
the adjustment value)
a)
Measurement of the shift amount

* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
Use the visually highest color density section as the
center, and measure the shift amount.
1 - 199
100
(Example)
The measurement value of the figure is "14.
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern
Measurement value: -54 (= -40 - 14)
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direction or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark
as 40, the second line mark as 80, the third line mark as
120. The interval between the rough adjustment marks
corresponds to 40.
-40
(Example)
In the case of the figure, it is between 40 - 80 of the plus
polarity, and the measurement is "40.
-18
22
-16
24
-14
26
-12
28
-10
30
-8
32
* The actual shift amount is the sum of the rough adjustment reference shift amount and the fine adjustment
shift amount.
-6
34
-4
36
-2
Shift amount (correction value) = Rough adjustment

shift amount + Fine adjustment shift amount.
38
-38
-36
(Example)
In the case of the figure, the total shift amount is 54.
-34
Measurement value: 54 (= 40 + 14)
-32
-30
10
-28
12
-26
14
-24
16
-22
18
When calculating, be careful of the plus polarity and the

minus polarity.
-18
-16
40
120 -120
120 -120
22
24
-14
26
-12
28
-10
30
-8
32
-6
34
-4
36
-2
38
-38
-36
-34
-32
-30
10
-28
12
-26
14
-24
16
-22
18
The shift amount from the adjustment reference position

is calculated for each of six kinds of adjustment items A
- F.
b)
Adjustment value calculation

Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or
from the current adjustment value, and the result value is
used as the new adjustment value.
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift
amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value - Shift
Yellow
E
120 -120
Magenta
C
120 -120
Cyan
A
120 -120
-18
22
-16
24
-18
22
-16
-14
24
26
-14
26
-12
28
-12
28
-10
30
-10
30
-8
32
-8
32
-6
34
-6
34
-4
36
-4
36
-2
38
-2
38
-38
-38
-36
-36
-34
-34
-32
-32
-30
10
-30
10
-28
12
-28
12
-26
14
-26
14
-24
16
-24
16
-22
18
-22
18
-18
22
-18
22
-16
24
-16
24
-14
26
-14
26
-12
28
-12
28
-10
30
-10
30
-8
32
-8
32
-6
34
-6
34
-4
36
-4
36
-2
38
-2
38
-38
-38
-36
-36
-34
-34
-32
-32
-30
10
-30
10
-28
12
-28
12
-26
14
-26
14
-24
16
-24
16
-22
18
-22
18
-18
22
-18
22
-16
24
-14
120 -120
120 -120
-16
24
26
-14
26
-12
28
-12
28
-10
30
-10
30
-8
32
-8
32
-6
34
-6
34
-4
36
-4
36
-2
38
-2
38
-38
-38
-36
-36
-34
-34
-32
-32
-30
10
-30
10
-28
12
-28
12
-26
14
-26
14
-24
16
-24
16
-22
18
-22
18
120 -120
(Example)
Previous value before
adjustment
A: 100
B: 112
C: 95
D: 98
E: 102
F: 96
1)

New adjustment value
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(176&$11,1*',5(&7,21
A: 86 (=100-14)
B: 88 (=112-24)
C: 97 (=95+2)
D: 120 (=98+22)
E: 116 (=102+14)
F: 140 (=96+44)
$ &<$1

% 0$*(17$
& <(//2:

' 08/7,&2817
( 3$3(5&6
) '83/(;12
NOTE: If either of front or rear adjustment value is changed, the

other adjustment print pattern position may be varied. Be
careful of that.
(;(&87(
10-C Image registration adjustment (Sub

scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
10-key
NOTE: If item "AR_AUTO" in SIM44-1 is 0 (Allows) and process

control is executed, the image registration adjustment is
executed automatically and updates the result in each
case.
EXECUTE
2.
EXECUTE
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
In case of retaining the manual adjustment result, 1 (inhibits) must be set to item "AR_AUTO" of SIM44-1.
&/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(176&$11,1*',5(&7,21
$ &<$1

% 0$*(17$
& <(//2:
' 08/7,&2817
( 3$3(5&6
) '83/(;12
(;(&87(
2.
2)
Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) or A3 (11 x 17)
paper in it by changing the value of set item H.
3)

The sub scanning direction image registration adjustment pattern is printed.
A: Rough adjustment pattern B: Fine adjustment pattern C: Adjustment range

4)
Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pattern positions of each color.
Use the visually highest color density section as the center,
and measure the shift amount.
Rough adjustment print pattern

check
Fine adjustment print pattern check
Measurement value: -54 (= -40 - 14)

A
Check that the rough adjustment

print pattern is at the center for the
rough adjustment reference
pattern.
Check that the fine adjustment
print pattern is at the center for the
fine adjustment reference pattern.
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode

adjustment item A - C to be adjusted with the scroll key, and
change the adjustment value to adjust.
CYAN
MAGENTA
Content
Image registration
adjustment value
(Sub scanning direction)
(Cyan)
Image registration
adjustment value
(Magenta)
Image registration
adjustment value
(Yellow)
Adjustment
value range
1 - 199
1 - 199
Default
100
120
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0

r1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the adjustment is not required.)
Display/Item
-120
-40
100
-18
22
-16
24
-14
26
-12
28
-10
30
-8
32
-6
34
-4
36
-2
38
-38
-36
-34
-32
-30
10
-28
12
-26
14
-24
16
For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the

adjustment value, refer to the following.
-22
18
YELLOW
1 - 199
100
Measurement value: 54 (= 40 + 14)
(Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of

the adjustment value)
a)
Measurement of the shift amount

* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
-120
40
Use the visually highest color density section as the

center, and measure the shift amount.
(Example)
The measurement value of the figure is "14.
120
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern
-18
22
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direction or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.
-16
24
-14
26
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark

as 40, the second line mark as 80, the third line mark as
120. The interval between the rough adjustment marks
corresponds to 40.
-12
28
-10
30
-8
32
(Example)
In the case of the figure, it is between 40 - 80 of the plus
polarity, and the measurement is "40.
-6
34
-4
36
-2
38
-38
-36
-34
A: Rough adjustment pattern

C
B: Fine adjustment pattern

C: Adjustment range
The shift amount is calculated from the adjustment reference position for each of the three adjustment items A
- C.
-32
-30
10
-28
12
-26
14
-24
16
-22
18
b)
Adjustment value calculation

Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or
from the current adjustment value, and the result value is
used as the new adjustment value.
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value - Shift
-120
-120
-120
120
120
120
-18
22
-18
22
-18
22
-16
24
-16
24
-16
24
-14
26
-14
26
-14
26
-12
28
-12
28
-12
28
-10
30
-10
30
-10
30
-8
32
-8
32
-8
32
-6
34
-6
34
-6
34
-4
36
-4
36
-4
36
-2
38
-2
38
-2
38
-38
-38
-38
-36
-36
-36
-34
-34
-34
-32
-32
-32
-30
10
-30
10
-30
10
-28
12
-28
12
-28
12
-26
14
-26
14
-26
14
-24
16
-24
16
-24
16
-22
18
-22
18
-22
18
Previous value before

adjustment
A: 100
B: 112
C: 95
New adjustment value

A: 46 (=100-54)
B: 126 (=112+14)
C: 125 (=95+30)
4)
Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
5)
Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
ADJ 11 Scan image distortion

adjustment
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above procedures, perform the following procedures.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.

* When the copy image is distorted.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact.
11-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table

glass. (For details, refer to [C]-3.)
1)
Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive
wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire.
2)
Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
6)
With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on

the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

3)
Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit B.
11-B Scan image (sub scanning direction)

distortion adjustment
1)
4)
Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.)
5)
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scanner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6)
Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.

(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L = 10mm
L
2)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)

is satisfied.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform "ADJ 11D Scan image distortion
adjustment (whole scanner unit).
11-C Scan image (main scanning direction)

distortion adjustment
1)
3)
Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.

(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.

If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
La
Lb
L
L = 10mm
L
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform
the following procedures.
2)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table, and make a copy on A3 (11"x 17") paper.
3)
Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
7)
If the four angles of the rectangle on the copy are right angles,
there is no distortion and therefore no further steps are
needed.
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted
with the above procedures, perform ADJ 11D Scan image distortion adjustment (whole scanner unit).
11-D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole

scanner unit)
This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
adjusted with ADJ 11A, ADJ 11B, and ADJ 11C related to the scan
image distortion adjustment.
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform
the following procedure.
4)
Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand

and right-hand side images distortions.
Lc
Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of
the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted.
1)
Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2)
Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
Lc
Copy A
Copy B
Ld
There is no difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld
Ld
There is some difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left
Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.

(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.

5)
Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front

frame side.
ADJ 12 Scan image focus adjustment

(CCD unit position adjustment)
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the
scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the
image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
6)
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.

* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scanning direction is not properly adjusted.
Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front

frame side, change the overall height.
1)
Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.
9)
To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1

% &&'68%

& 63)0$,1
' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%
2.
2)
Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).

Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
4)
Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
3)
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is

replaced.
* Never loosen the screws marked with X.

Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
5)
Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.
6)
Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main

scanning direction from the following formula.
If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the

angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction

ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
(Example)
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the
copy image.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.

At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction

ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).
B
100mm scale
(Orignal)
10
20
90
100
110
1.0mm
Copy image
(1mm (1%)
shorter than
the original)
10
20
90
100
110
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 r 1%,

repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the

following procedures.
7)
Remove the document table glass.
8)
Remove the dark box cover.
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simulation 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 r 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the optical system structure.
ADJ 13 RSPF parallelism adjustment

(RSPF mode)
13-A RSPF height adjustment (RSPF mode)

1)
Make an RSPF height adjustment sheet

Cut copy paper in the longitudinal direction.
20mm
A4/Letter size
2)
<Flow chart>
Perform the adjustment according to the flowchart below.
<Work procedure>
a) Check section A.
Start of the
adjustment
Place the RSPF height adjustment sheet between section A

and the SPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a), and
close the RSPF unit.
Slowly pull out the RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out
the RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check section A.
* Be careful not to cover the convex section of the glass

holding resin surface with the height adjustment sheet.
A
Is
No
there a resistance?
The section
A is lowered
too much.
Yes
Adjust hinge D
until there is a
resistance in
section A.
(Counterclockwise)
b) If it cannot be pulled out, turn the section D clockwise and

adjust in order to lift the RSPF unit.
If it can be pulled out without resistance, turn the section D
counterclockwise and adjust in order to move down the RSPF
unit.
Turn the hinge

D to lift the
RSPF so that
there is a
resistance in
the section A.
(Clockwise)
c) Adjust the section F.

Use a clearance gauge to check to confirm that the clearance
in the section F is 4.9mm - 5.5mm.
If not, turn the section E to adjust.
Adjust the
section F so that
the clearance is
4.9mm - 5.5mm.
* Insert a clearance gauge in the range of 20mm from the

edge (a) of the right lower cover of the base.
4.9 - 5.5mm
No
Is there a
resistance in the
section B?
Yes
F
a
Increase the
clearance in
the section F
until there is a
resistance in
the section B.
However, the
max. is 5.5mm.
20mm
* Turn section E clockwise to lift the RSPF unit. Turn it

counterclockwise to move down the RSPF unit.
d) Check section B.
Place the RSPF height adjustment sheet between section B
and the SPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a), and
close the RSPF unit.
Slowly pull out the RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out
the RSPF height adjustment sheet. (If the boss in section B is
in contact, it is O.K.)
Check section B.
* Be careful not to put the book sensor (b) on the height

adjustment sheet.
B
Is
there a resistance?
No
Yes
e) If it can be pulled out without resistance, turn the hinge in

section E clockwise to adjust.
Adjust hinge
E until the
separation in
section C is
deleted.
(Counterclockwise)
Check section C.
Is there
a separating
section.
No
f) Check section C.
* The bosses in section A

and B are excessively
pressed. (The right
side is separating.)
b
C
Yes
End of the
adjustment
C
b
13-B RSPF diagonal adjustment (RSPF mode)

1)
Set a test chart (A3) on the RSPF document tray, and make a
copy.
2)
Measure (a) and (b) on the copied test chart. If (a) - (b) =
r1mm or more, perform the diagonal adjustment.
5)
Close the RSPF unit, and loosen the hex nut of the RSPF
diagonal adjustment screw section.
Turn the hex wrench of the RSPF skew adjustment screw to
adjust the skew.
a
2
TEST CHART
A3 size
* In the case of (A), turn the RSPF diagonal adjustment screw
counterclockwise.
b
3)
In the case of (B), turn the RSPF diagonal adjustment screw

clockwise.
Remove the hex nut cover in the RSPF diagonal adjustment

screw section.
4)
Raise the RSPF unit upright, and loosen the fixing screw of the
hinge.
2
2
6)
Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test
chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a)(b)=r1mm or less) is satisfied.
7)
Tighten the hinge section fixing screw which was loosened in

the procedure 4) to tighten the hinge section.
ADJ 14 Scan image magnification ratio

adjustment (Document table
mode)
14-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(Sub scanning direction) (Document table
mode)
1)
Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure

below.
* When the copy image magnification ratio in the sub scanning

direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
* When a U2 trouble occurs.

* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
14-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(Main scanning direction) (Document table
mode)
1)

below.
2)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1

% &&'68%

& 63)0$,1
' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%
2.
2)
3)
Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
py magnifition ratio
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1

% &&'68%
(Original dimension - Copy dimension)

Original dimension
100%
& 63)0$,1

' 63)68%
(Example 1)
Copy A
(Shorter than
the original)
( 63)%0$,1

) 63)%68%
10
20
90
100
110
2.
3)
Scale
(Original)
Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

4)
20
90
100
110
Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified

range (100 r 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
r 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5)
10
(Example 2)
Copy B
(Longer than
the original)
10
20
90
100
110
Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.

When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
is within the specified range (100 r1.0%).
4)
Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified

range (100 r 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
r 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5)
Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.

When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
11) Change the mode to "F: SPFB (SUB)." The current magnification ratio correction value in the back surface sub scanning
direction is displayed in 2 digits on the display section.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
12) Enter a set value and press [OK] key. The correction value is
saved and a copy is made.
<Adjustment specifications>
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is

within the specified range (100 r1.0%).
ADJ 15 Scan image magnification ratio

adjustment (Main/sub scanning
direction) (RSPF mode)
Mode
Magnification ratio
correction
adjustment
Specifi
cations
Normal
r1.0%
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, the CCD unit must have been
properly installed. To execute this adjustment, the OC
mode adjustment when copying must have been completed.
1)

below, and make a normal copy to make a test chart.
SIM
Set value
SIM.48-1
<Main scanning
direction>
C: Front surface
E: Back surface
<Sub scanning
direction>
D: Front surface
F: Back surface
Add 1:
0.1% enlarged.
Subtract 1:
0.1% reduced.
Default: 50
Setting
range
1 - 99
ADJ 16 Scan image off-center

adjustment
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the RSPF section is disassembled.
* When the RSPF unit is installed.
* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
NOTE: Since the copied scale is used as a test chart,

place the scale in parallel to the sides.
2)
Set the test chart on the RSPF, and make a normal copy.
3)
Compare the outputted copy with the test chart. If it is judged

from comparison that an adjustment is required, perform the
following procedures.
4)
Execute SIM48-1.
16-A Scan image off-center (Document table

mode)
1)
Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by your self) in the

adjustment mode (document table or RSPF).

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1

% &&'68%

& 63)0$,1
' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%
A=B
2.
5)
Change the mode to "C: SPF (MAIN)." The current magnification ratio correction value is displayed in 2 digits on the display
section.
6)
Enter a set value and press [OK] key. The correction value is
7)
Change the mode to "E: SPFB (MAIN)." The current magnification ratio correction value is displayed in 2 digits on the display section.
8)
9)
Change the mode to "D: SPF (SUB)." The current magnification ratio correction value is displayed in 2 digits on the display
section.
10) Enter a set value and press [OK] key. The correction value is
2)
Check the copy image center position.
16-B Scan image off-center (RSPF mode)
If A - B = r1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, the paper off-center must have

been adjusted properly.
1)
Set the test chart for center position adjustment (which is

made by yourself) on the RSPF.
A'
Draw a straight line on paper in the scanning direction.

2)
Make a normal copy from the manual paper feed tray. Compare the printed copy and the test chart. If an adjustment is
required, perform the following procedures.
3)
Execute SIM50-12.
A' - B' = 1.0mm

(100%)
B'

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$ 2&

% 63)6,'(

& 63)6,'(

If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures.
3)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$ 2&

2.
% 63)6,'(

& 63)6,'(
2.
4)
Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
The entered value is set.
Change the mode to "B: SPF (SIDE1)." The current off-center

adjustment value is displayed in 2 digits on the display section.
5)
Enter a set value and press [START] key. The correction value
is saved and a copy is made.
6)
Change the mode to "C: SPF (SIDE2)." The current back surface off-center adjustment value is displayed in 2 digits on the
display section.
7)
Mode
When the set value is increased, the main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
6)
4)
Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy.
Document
off-center
adjustment
Specifications
Center
position
(Default):
3750 pixel
Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until the above condition is

satisfied.
SIM
Set value
SIM50-12
B: Front surface
C: Back surface
Add 1:
Shift to R side
by 0.1mm.
Subtract 1:
Shift to F side by
0.1mm.
Setting
range
1 - 99
4)
ADJ 17 Print area (Void area)

adjustment (Print engine
section)
Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below

are in the range of the standard values.
Content
X
Y
Z1/Z2

Lead edge void area

Rear edge void area
FRONT/REAR void area
Standard adjustment
value
3.0 r 1.0mm
2.0 - 5.0mm
2.0 r 2.0mm
* When a paper tray is replaced.
Z1
2.0
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.

* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
2.0mm
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.

* When the duplex section is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
X
3.0 1.0mm
Y
2.0 - 5.0mm

NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 8
Print image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main
scanning direction) (Print engine section) in advance.
1)
Z2
2.0

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired

condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
$ %.0$*

2.0mm
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
' 0$,1&6
5)
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8

, 68%0)7
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
- 68%&6
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
. 68%&6
$ 55&$
/ 68%/&&
$
(;(&87(
2.

% 55&%&6
& 55&%&6
' 55&%/&&
( 55&%0)7
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
) 55&%$'8
* /($'
+ 6,'(
End of print
, '(1$
- '(1%
. )52175($5

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
2.
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*

% 0$,10)7
10-key
& 0$,1&6
' 0$,1&6
OK
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&

+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
- 68%&6
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
&/26(
$ 55&$
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
(;(&87(
2.

% 55&%&6
& 55&%&6
' 55&%/&&
2)
3)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper to all the trays, and select the set item
J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the
adjustment target paper feed tray.
( 55&%0)7
) 55&%$'8
* /($'
+ 6,'(
, '(1$
- '(1%
. )52175($5
2.
6)
Select the adjustment item I, J, K with the scroll key, and enter
the adjustment value and press [OK] key.
Display/Item
Lead
edge
adjustment
value
RRCA
RRCB-CS12
C
D
E
RRCB-CS34
RRCB-LCC
RRCB-MFT
F
G
RRCB-ADU
LEAD
H
I
J
Image
loss area
setting
value
Void area
adjustment
K
L
N
O
P
Off-center
adjustment
Magnification
ratio
correction
Sub
scanning
direction
print area
correction
value
SIDE
DENA
DENB
FRONT/
REAR
OFSET_OC
Content
Document lead edge
reference position
(OC)
Resist
Standard
motor ON Tray
timing
Desk
adjustLCC
ment
Manual
paper
feed
ADU
Lead edge image
loss area setting
Side image loss area
adjustment
Lead edge void area
adjustment
Rear edge void area
adjustment
FRONT/REAR void
area adjustment
OC document offcenter adjustment
Default
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
1 - 99
0 - 99
50
30
0 - 99
20
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
1 - 99
30
1 - 99
20
1 - 99
20
1 - 99
50
DENB-MFT
Manual feed
correction value
Tray 1 correction
value
Tray 2 correction
value
Tray 3 correction
value
Tray 4 correction
value
LCC correction value
ADU correction value
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
DENB-CS4
S
T
DENB-LCC
DENB-ADU


* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
50
DENB-CS3
1 - 99
18-A Copy image position, image loss

adjustment (Document table mode)
SCAN sub scanning

magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
DENB-CS2
loss adjustment
Setting
range
0 - 99
SCAN_
SPEED_OC
DENB-CS1
ADJ 18 Copy image position, image
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that

the ADJ 17 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine
section) has been completed normally.
1)

below.
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
plate.
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
edge can be seen.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.
NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related
as follows:
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item
N, O, P, Q, R, S, T (DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
The adjustment item J (DENB) have a effect on the paper
of all paper feed tray.
That is, adjustment value of item N, O, P, Q, R, S, T
(DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to adjustment item J (DENB) for
each paper tray.
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to check
that the void area is within the specified range.
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if the
lead edge void area is not within the specified range, change the
adjustment value of RRCB-XXX (item B, C, D, E, F) of SIM 50-1.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
2)
Display/Item

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$ 55&$

% 55&%&6
& 55&%&6
' 55&%/&&
( 55&%0)7
4)
) 55&%$'8
Sub
scanning
direction
print area
correction
value
DENB-CS4
DENB-LCC
DENB-ADU
+ 6,'(
, '(1$
- '(1%
2.
50
50
Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
OK
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is

obtained.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
Scale image 3.0mm position
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$ 55&$

1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge

image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
copy scale.
. )52175($5

Tray 4 correction
value
LCC correction value
ADU correction value
Default
50
Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200%
mode.
* /($'
Setting
range
Content
Paper lead
edge
% 55&%&6
& 55&%&6
' 55&%/&&
( 55&%0)7
) 55&%$'8
* /($'
100%
+ 6,'(
5mm 10mm
, '(1$
- '(1%
. )52175($5
2.
3)
200%
Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.

Display/Item
Lead
edge
adjustment
value
C
D
RRCA
RRCB-CS12
RRCB-CS34
RRCB-LCC
RRCB-MFT
E
F
G
H
I
J
Image
loss area
setting
value
Void area
adjustment
K
L
N
O
P
Q
Off-center
adjustment
Magnifica
tion ratio
correction
Sub
scanning
direction
print area
correction
value
RRCB-ADU
LEAD
SIDE
DENA
DENB
FRONT/
REAR
OFSET_OC
Content
Document lead edge
reference position
(OC)
Standard
Tray
Resist
Desk
motor ON
LCC
timing
Manual
adjustpaper
ment
feed
ADU
Lead edge image
loss area setting
Side image loss area
adjustment
Lead edge void area
adjustment
Rear edge void area
adjustment
FRONT/REAR void
area adjustment
Setting
range
0 - 99
5mm
Default
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
1 - 99
0 - 99
50
30
0 - 99
20
1 - 99
30
1 - 99
20
1 - 99
20
5)
Image loss adjustment

When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in
the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value,
change these adjustment items.
Paper lead edge
Copy area
Maginification ratio : 400%
DENB-MFT
DENB-CS1
DENB-CS2
DENB-CS3
SCAN sub scanning

magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
Manual feed
correction value
Tray 1 correction
value
Tray 2 correction
value
Tray 3 correction
value
10mm
5mm
Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm

1 - 99
50
Display
/Item
LEAD
SCAN_
SPEED_OC
10mm
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Content
Image loss
adjustment
SIDE
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Lead edge
image loss
adjustment
Side image
loss adjustment
Adjust
ment
range
0 - 99
Default
0 - 99
20
30
Standard
adjustment
value
3.0
r 1.0mm
2.0
r 1.0mm
50
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
50
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is

changed by 0.1mm.
50
18-B Adjust the original scan start position

(Adjust the scanner read position in RSPFmode front face scan) (RSPF mode)
[Note]
After completion of the RSPF scan position adjustment, execute the RSPF lead edge adjustment (for both sides).
Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is
obtained.
* The scan control PWB has been replaced.

* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
18-C Copy image position, image loss

* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced.
1)
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced.
Place a scale on the OC table as shown in the figure below.

* The RSPF section has been disassembled.
* The RSPF unit has been replaced.
This adjustment is intended to adjust the scanner read position in
RSPF-mode front face scan.
An incorrect adjustment would deviate the scanner stop position
from the required position, thus possibly causing a shadow of the
original table to appear at the leading edge of an image generated
by RSPF (front-face) mode scan.
1)
Make a copy in RSPF (front-face) mode, and make sure that

the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image is
free from shadows.
NOTE: Since the copied scale is used as a test chart,

place the scale in parallel to the sides.
2)
Make a copy. Use the output copy as the original document,

and make a copy of it from the RSPF.
3)
Check the output result. If an adjustment is required, perform

the following procedures.
4)
Execute SIM50-6.
Papar lead edge

Image area

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
Shadow image of RSPF
$ 6,'(

% 6,'(
& /($'B('*(6,'(
' )5217B5($56,'(
( 75$,/B('*(6,'(
) /($'B('*(6,'(
* )5217B5($56,'(
If the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image

contains a shadow of the original table, then do the following
steps.
2)
+ 75$,/B('*(6,'(

, 2)6(7B63)
- 2)6(7B63)
. 6&$1B63(('B63)
Go through the modes specified in Simulation 53-8. Press the

[MANUAL] key.
/ 6&$1B63(('B63)
2.
5)
Set the RSPF lead edge position set value so that an image
similar to the image adjusted in the previous OC image lead
edge position is outputted.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
$872
<Set range and default value of each set value>
0$18$/
Item
Display Item
SIDE1
SIDE2
Image
loss
quantity
setting
SIDE1

3)
Enter the adjustment value and press the Start key.

<<Description of adjustment display>>
Item
Display item
ADJUST VALUE
Description
RSPF scan position
adjustment
Set
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
When the set value is increased by 1, the distance from the

home position to the RSPF scan position is increased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the position is shifted
by 0.1mm.
* Since the RSPF scan position distance are changed, RRCA
is not changed by the adjustment value.
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
Descriptions
Front surface
document scan
start position
adjustment (CCD)
Back surface
document scan
start position
adjustment (CCD)
Front surface lead
edge image loss
quantity setting
Front surface side
image loss
quantity setting
Front surface rear
edge image loss
quantity setting
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
20
0 - 20
30
Setting
range
Item
F
Display Item
Image
loss
quantity
setting
SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
Descriptions
Back surface lead
edge image loss
quantity setting
Back surface side
image loss
quantity setting
Back surface rear
edge image loss
quantity setting
Default
value
20
Setting
range
0 - 99
2)
Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) paper
in it.
Display/Item
0 - 99
20
0 - 20
30
DEN-B
FRONT/REAR
DENB-MFT
DENB-CS1
DENB-CS2
DENB-CS3
DENB-CS4
DENB-LCC
DENB-ADU
K
L
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
A, B:
The greater the value is, the slower the scanning timing is.
C - H:
The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the image loss is.
A - H:
1STEP=0.1mm
The SPF rear edge image loss is provided against the shade.
The default value is 0.
ADJ 19 Print lead edge image position

adjustment (Printer mode)
DEN-C
Content

NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the
lead edge void area to greater than the standard value
(3mm) in the printer mode.
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
DUPLEX
&/26(
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
Printer lead edge

image position
adjustment
Rear edge void area
adjustment
FRONT/REAR void
area adjustment
Manual feed rear edge
void area adjustment
correction value
Tray 1 rear edge void
area adjustment
correction value
area adjustment
correction value
area adjustment
correction value
area adjustment
correction value
LCC rear edge void
area adjustment
correction value
ADU rear edge void
area adjustment
correction value
Number of print
Tray
Manual
selection
paper feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
Duplex
Yes
print
No
selection
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
30
1 - 99
30
1 - 99
20
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
57
1 - 999
1-6
1
1
2 (CS1)
0-1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
1 (NO)
$ '(1&

% '(1%
3)
4)
Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
& )52175($5
' '(1%0)7
( '(1%&6
) '(1%&6
* '(1%&6
+ '(1%&6
Standard adjustment value: 3.0 r2.0mm
, '(1%/&&
- '(1%$'8
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5&6
(;(&87(
10-key
EXECUTE
2.
EXECUTE
End of print
3.0
2.0mm

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$ '(1&

% '(1%
& )52175($5
' '(1%0)7
( '(1%&6
) '(1%&6
* '(1%&6
+ '(1%&6
, '(1%/&&
- '(1%$'8
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5&6
(;(&87(
2.
5)
Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjustment item DENC with the scroll key.
6)
Change the adjustment value.

Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
[EXECUTE] key.
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
by about 0.1mm.
(The following items affect the copy color balance/density

adjustment, but it is not required to adjust them frequently.
When, however, a trouble occurs, check and adjust them.)
1)
The following items must be adjusted properly.
Job
No
ADJ
1
ADJ
2
ADJ
4
Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
ADJ 20 Copy color balance/density

adjustment
ADJ
12
ADJ
20A
Simulation
Adjust the developing doctor gap

Adjust the developing roller main pole position
Adjusting high
voltage values
ADJ Adjust the main charger

4A
grid voltage
ADJ Adjust the developing
4B
bias voltage
ADJ Transfer voltage
4C
adjustment
Scan image focus adjustment
(CCD unit position adjustment)
CCD gamma adjustment
(CCD calibration)
8-2
8-1
8-6
63-3
(1) Note before execution of the copy color balance/density

adjustment
(Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy

color balance/density adjustment)
* After completion of this adjustment, the printer color balance/

density adjustment must be executed.
Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy color
balance/density adjustment depend on the machine status and the
servicing conditions.
* Requisite conditions before execution of the copy color balance/

density adjustment
Before execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment,
check to insure that the adjustments which affect the copy color
balance/density adjustment have been completed.
The importance levels of them are shown below.
(The following items affect the copy color balance/density
adjustment, and must be checked and adjusted before execution of the image quality adjustments.)
1)
The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly.
Job
No
ADJ
5
ADJ
6
ADJ
7
Image density
sensor, image
registration sensor
adjustment
ADJ
7A
Image registration
adjustment (Print
engine section)
ADJ
10A
ADJ
10B
ADJ
10C
OPC drum phase

adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
OPC drum phase
adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
Image registration
adjustment
(Main scanning
direction, sub
scanning direction)
(Auto adjustment)
Image registration
adjustment
(Main scanning
direction)
(Manual adjustment)
Image registration
adjustment
(Sub scanning
direction)
(Manual adjustment)
There are following four, major cases.

1)
When installing
2)
When a periodic maintenance is performed.
3)
When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.

(When a consumable part is replaced.)
4)
When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.

(Without replacement of a consumable part)
(2) Copy color balance and density check

(Note)
Color image sensor

calibration
Color image density
sensor, black image
density sensor, image
registration sensor
adjustment
Image skew adjustment (LSU unit)
OPC drum phase

adjustment
ADJ
5A
ADJ
5B
ADJ
7B
ADJ
10
Simulation
Adjustment Item List
Follow the flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment

procedures depending on the actual conditions.
44-13
44-2
Before checking the copy color balance and density, be sure to

execute the following jobs.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
64-1/61-4
50-22
44-31
50-22
(Method)
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy
of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG0317FC11), and check that they are proper.
a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in the
color copy mode
To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test
chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart
(UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11). Set the copy density
level to "3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make a
copy.
At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
50-20
In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color.

b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density
50-21
To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ).

Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo
mode (Manual).
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
[Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)]

In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
the following conditions.
NOTE: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) to check.
20-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)

(Normal document copy mode)
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble is occurred.
(Color copy)
Patch 1 is
slightly copied.
SHARP gray chart
SHARP GRAY CHART

1
10
(1) Note before adjustment

1)
Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens
surface are free from dirt and dust.
2)
Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of

the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
free from dirt and scratches.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
Patch 2 is copied.
If they are dirty, clean them.
(Black-and-white copy)
Patch 2 is
slightly copied.
1
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
SHARP gray chart
SHARP GRAY CHART

3
10
(2) Adjustment procedures

1)
Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to

the reference position on the left rear frame side of the document table.
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
the left side.
Patch 3 is copied.
Patch 1 is not copied.
[Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/

UKOG-0317FC11)]
In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
check to insure the following conditions.
(Color copy)
Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
The densities of patches 1 - 6 of

each color are properly balanced.
Patch 7 is slightly
copied or not copied.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
NOTE: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
table.
UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
2)
Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.

The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&8$872$'-8670(17
20-B Copy color balance adjustment

(Auto adjustment)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
2&



* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
&&&555
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
000***
<<<%%%

a. General
(;(&87(
2&

NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC

Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet
rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such
as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature
and low humidity.
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust

the copy density of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black with SIM 4624 or the user program automatically.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the copy modes are revised.)
There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjustment.
1)
Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24

is used.)
2)
Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program

mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the copy color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto

adjustment)
1)
The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
2)
The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted properly.
3)
Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
c. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-24) procedure flowchart
Start
Execute ADJ20B Copy color balance and density adjustment

(automatic density).
Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A4 (11 x 17) paper.
(Automatic selection)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory
target or the service target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the half tone image correction
is automatically performed.
Automatic color balance target change

Change the factory color balance and
density target which is available in 3
kinds. (SIM63-11)
Cancel SIM46-24
NO
Check the color balance and density adjustment result.

Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) to make a
copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color balance and density.
Though the factory

color balance and
density target (available
in 3 kinds) is changed,
satisfactory color balance
and density are not obtained (SIM63-11), or the
service target is
selected.
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the
patch color balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)
Are the color balance and density at the satisfactory level?
Execute ADJ20C (Manual copy color balance

and density adjustment). (SIM46-21/44-21).
(*2)
YES
Check that the initial setting of the half tone image correction was properly
performed. (*3)
Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
(SIM44-21)
Execute the half tone image correction. (SIM44-26)

Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11)
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check
the color balance and density.
NO
Are the color balance and density at the satisfactory level?

YES
YES
NO
*1:
When the copy color balance and density are
customized and registered as the service
target, select the service target.
*2:
If satisfactory color balance and density are
not obtained with ADJ20C (Manual copy
color balance and density adjustment)
(SIM46-21/44-21), check the print engine for
any problems.
*3:
If the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is not properly made, satisfactory
color balance and density cannot be
obtained. In this case, check the print engine
for any problems.
*4:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the
printed check pattern, check the print engine
for any problems.
End
1)
Remark:
(Descriptions on [FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key in the
color balance auto adjustment menu.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
&/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
[FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key are used to select one of

the above two.
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be

selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
63-11.)
Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable)
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
target gamma data are the same.
(;(&87(
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping.

2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically

selected.)
3)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in

procedure 2) on the document table.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper

on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
For the service target, the customized color balance gamma

can be registered with SIM 63-7.
5)
Press [OK] key on the operation panel.

According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the
half tone image correction is performed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
2.
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is displayed. This operation takes several minutes.
4)
Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press

[EXECUTE] key.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service target with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS

MODE" is displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
)$&725<
6(59,&(
(;(&87(
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed

to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
&/26(
6)
Check the color balance and density.

There are following three methods in the color balance and
density check.
(Method 1)
Low density
High density
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch

image is within the following specifications.
Y
M
Low density
High density
Y
Bk
CMY
blend
M
Q
(Max)
Bk
Q
(Max)
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C,
and BK is very slightly copied.
A
Patch A of each of Y, M, C,
and BK are not copied.
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C,
Patch A of each of Y, M, C,
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY

mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
converted into the natural gray color balance by the color correction table in an actual copy mode.
(When the color balance target is DEF 1.)

3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter

level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
(Method 3)
The density level of each color must be almost at the same

level.
Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG0317FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy
color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color
balance and density check.)
x Patch B may not be copied.

x Patch A must not be copied.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained

from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
(Method 2)
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above procedure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to execute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
7)
Use SIM44-26 to execute the half tone image correction.

(Forcible execution)
Enter the SIM44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
(;(&87(
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
(Normal end (Auto transition))
20-C Copy color balance adjustment (Manual

adjustment)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(

replaced.
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7

&203/(7(
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.

5(68/7
(;(&87(
a. General
(Abnormal end (Auto transition))

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
(55256(1625$'-8670(17
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to

adjust the copy density (15 point for each color) of CMYK. This is
used at the following situation. When the result of auto adjustment
described above is not existing within the range of reference. When
a fine adjustment is required. When there is request from the user
for changing (customizing) the color balance.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color balance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
(;(&87(
8)
1)
The print engine section must have been properly adjusted.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
2)
The CCD gamma must have been properly adjusted.
Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG0317FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy
color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color
balance and density check.)
3)
Set the color patch image adjustment pattern on the document

table, and place 5 sheet of white paper on it.
4)
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, perform the following procedures.
9)
Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.

(SIM 44-21)
10) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution)

(SIM44-26)
11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG0317FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
the copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy
color balance and density check.)
Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy
color balance and density are not in the specified range, there may
be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treatments,
and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the
beginning.
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results of the
copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ 20C) (Manual
adjustment).
Copy color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure
flowchart (SIM46-21)
Start
Execute ADJ21B (Copy color balance and density adjustment)

(Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM46-21 mode, and select A3 (11 " x 17 ") paper.
(Automatic selection)
(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
Refer to the printed adjustment check pattern, and select a
target adjustment color with the color keys (C, M, Y, K).
Select a target adjustment level with the scroll key.
Enter the adjustment value with 10 key.
(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
Check the patch color balance and density in the process
gray of the color balance check pattern. (If the gray color is
slightly shifted to Magenta, the color balance is properly
adjusted.)
Are the color balance

and density at the satisfactory level?
NO
YES
Cancel the SIM46-21 mode.
Perform the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
(SIM44-21)
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the
test chart. (*1)

NO
YES
Check to confirm that the initial setting of the half tone image correction is
properly set. (*2)
Perform the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
(SIM44-21)
Perform the half tone image correction. (SIM44-26)
NO

YES
*1:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print
engine for any problems.
*2:
If the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is not properly adjusted, satisfactory
color balance and density cannot be obtained. In
this case, check the print engine for any problems.
Set the service target for the automatic copy color balance
adjustment. (SIM63-7)
End
1)
Enter the SIM46-21 mode.
Patch B may not be copied.

Patch A must not be copied.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a

request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
&/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@
$ 32,17

% 32,17

converted into the natural gray color balance by the color correction table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance
target is DEF 1.)
& 32,17

' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
.
&
(;(&87(
<
4)
Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
2.
The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 - 755 (1 - 999).

When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance
and density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
EXECUTE
10-key
End of print
EXECUTE
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To

decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satisfied.
&/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@
$ 32,17

% 32,17
& 32,17
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high

and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient

way of adjustment.
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
. 32,17
/ 32,17
.
&
(;(&87(
<
2.
2)

selected.)
3)
Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color

balance is satisfactory.
6)
Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) and a user's document according to necessity in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed
Photo mode (Manual) to check the adjustment result.
7)
Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone
image correction.)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Low density
High density
&/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
;
/
%
$M
CMY
Blend
3
/CZ
#
&
'
) *
/ 0 1 2
(;(&87(

2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
3) Patch A of each of Y, M, C,
5(68/7
&203/(7(

4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK

not be reversed.
level.
5(68/7
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
&/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7
(55256(1625$'-8670(17
(5525.&0<
5(68/7
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
Immediately after execution of ADJ 20C (Color balance adjustment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this procedure.
Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) and a user's document according to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and
check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the
copy color balance/density check.)
When ADJ 20B (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is executed

with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically executed.
If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
specified level, there may be another cause.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the

operation is started.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treatments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment

data as the reference data for the half tone correction.
8)
Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction.

(Forcible execution)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
9)
NOTE: If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register

the color balance as the service target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service
target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be
made in the next color balance adjustment.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode to make an adjustment to the similar color
balance as the registered color balance.
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
(Gamma setting of auto color balance adjustment service color balance target)
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a certain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
(;(&87(
There are following three kinds of the target.
Factory color balance (gamma) target
User color balance (gamma) target

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
Service color balance (gamma) target

In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjustment) is executed with SIM 46-21).
5(68/7
&203/(7(

* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
5(68/7
(;(&87(
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as

improper.
Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
Type
Factory color
balance (gamma)
target
Service color
balance (gamma)
target
Descriptions
There are three kinds of the color balance target,
and each of them is specified according to the
machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
This target is used when the user requests to
customize the color balance to user's desired
level. In advance, the user's unique color balance
must be registered as the service color balance
target. The above registration (setting) is made
by the serviceman with SIM 46-21 to adjust the
color balance and with SIM 63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment. When,
therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the user's
color balance adjustment is also changed. When,
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance
is set to the factory color balance target set with
SIM 63-11. The default setting (factory setting) of
the color balance is same as the factory color
balance target. (Emphasized on color
reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the
color balance to the factory color balance target
Type
User color
balance (gamma)
target
Descriptions
Same color balance as the service color balance
(gamma) target When the service color balance
target is changed, this color balance target is also
changed accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance
automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Use SIM 63-11 to select one of the three

kinds of color balance targets.
Factory color balance
target (DEF1)
target (DEF2)
target (DEF3)

target (DEF1)

target (one of DEF1 - 3)

target
(one of DEF1 - 3)
Service color balance

target
Factory setting

target (Unique)
Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the optional color

balance, and use SIM 63-7 to register it.

target
Execute SIM 63-8.

(The service color balance target is the
same as the factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment

Color balance target for
the user color balance
adjustment

target
Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)

By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =

Service color balance target/Color balance
target for the user color balance adjustment
Factory color balance target

(DEF2)
SIM63-8
+b* Direction of Yellow

(DEF1) = Service color balance
target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment

(DEF1)
Hue
Direction
of Green
Item
Content
Default
DEF1
The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target is
selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color correction
table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
DEF1
(A)
Direction
of Red
DEF2
DEF3
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

(DEF3)

SIM63-8
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24).
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be

judges as follows.
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance

can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with
SIM 63-11.
When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting

the service color balance target in SIM 46-24 is unsatisfactory or
abnormal.

This color balance is same as the service color balance target in
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). When, therefore,
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 46-21. If the color balance is not customized,
this procedure is not required.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
to register the service color balance target data by using adjustment pattern that was printed in this mode.
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously
b. Setting procedure
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the
service color balance target)
1)
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment

is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
adjustment.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.

It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it
from discoloration and dirt.
Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual

adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
2)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
*+,-.
The service color balance target data are basically registered

immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
46-21.
012
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
.
&
<
6(783

3)
Press [SETUP] key.
4)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly

adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 20C) on the document
table.
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
be sure to execute this procedure.
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM

64-7 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the
printed pattern is normal.
&/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(77,1*6(59,&(
(When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by

SIM 64-7, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press
[EXECUTE] key to print.)
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not execute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
5)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
$5(<28685("
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.
<(6
12
(;(&87(
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target.
20-D Copy density adjustment (Each color copy

mode) (Whole adjustment) (Normally
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
density and high density part at each copy density individually.
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
copy by each the copy mode individually.
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the
copy mode individually.
(;(&87(
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.

6)
Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image

(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(

The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
from the user, execute this adjustment.
1)
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@

$ $872

% 7(;7
& 7(;735,17('3+272
' 7(;73+272
( 35,17('3+272
) 3+272*5$3+
* 0$3
+ /,*+7
, 7(;7&23<72&23<
- 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
(;(&87(
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color

(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
/ 7(;7&2/25721((1+$1&(0(17

/2:
+,*+
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q

(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
judged as abnormal.
2.
OK
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.

7)

Press [OK] key.

The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjustment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service target.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@

$ $872

% 7(;7
& 7(;735,17('3+272
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the color
balance target for the user color balance adjustment to the same
color balance as the factory color balance target)
' 7(;73+272
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance target with SIM 63-7.
+ /,*+7
( 35,17('3+272
) 3+272*5$3+
* 0$3
, 7(;7&23<72&23<

- 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
/ 7(;7&2/25721((1+$1&(0(17
/2:
+,*+
2.
2)
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

Display/Item
AUTO
Auto
TEXT
Text
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
Text/Printed
Photo
TEXT/PHOTO
Text/Photograph
PRINTED PHOTO
Printed Photo
PHOTOGRAPH
Photograph
MAP
Map
LIGHT
Light document
TEXT
(COPY TO COPY)
Text (Copy
document)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
Text/Printed
Photo (Copy
document)
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
TEXT
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PHOTOGRAPH
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
MAP
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
SINGLE COLOR
Text
(Color tone
enhancement)
Text/Printed
Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
Text/Photograph
(Color tone
enhancement)
Printed Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
Photograph
(Color tone
enhancement)
Map
(Color tone
enhancement)
Single color
K
L
R
S
SINGLE COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
Single color
(Copy document)
TWO COLOR
Two-color
(Red/Black) copy
TWO COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
Two-color
(Red/Black) copy
(Copy document)
3)
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
Content
4)
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Default
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the

normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
20-E Copy density adjustment (Each

monochrome copy mode) (Whole
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to
adjust)
* When there is necessity to change copy density of the low density and high density part at each copy mode individually.
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
copy by each the copy mode individually.
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the
copy mode individually.
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
from the user, execute this adjustment.
1)
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the normal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
$ $872

LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
% $872
& 7(;7
' 7(;735,17('3+272
( 7(;73+272
) 35,17('3+272
* 3+272*5$3+
+ 0$3
, 7(;7&23<72&23<
- 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
/ /,*+7
/2:
+,*+
2.
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjusting the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
mode and change the adjustment value.
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@

$ $872

% $872
& 7(;7
' 7(;735,17('3+272
( 7(;73+272
) 35,17('3+272
* 3+272*5$3+
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased.
+ 0$3
, 7(;7&23<72&23<
- 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
/ /,*+7
/2:
+,*+
2.
2)
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

Display/Item
AUTO1
Auto 1
AUTO2
Auto 2
TEXT
Text
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
Text/Printed
Photo
TEXT/PHOTO
Text/Photograph
PRINTED PHOTO
Printed Photo
PHOTOGRAPH
Photograph
MAP
Map
TEXT
(COPY TO COPY)
Text (Copy
document)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
Text/Printed
Photo (Copy
document)
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
LIGHT
Light document
K
L
3)
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Content
1)
Default

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
7(;7
7(;73573+272
35,17('3+272
0$3
/,*+7
&23<25*
3+2727(;73+272
(;(&87(

TEXT

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
$ 32,17

% 32,17
& 32,17

' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
50
50
50
50
&
<
(;(&87(
2.
10-key
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjusting the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
&/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
$ 32,17

% 32,17
& 32,17

' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
density is decreased.
4)
&/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the normal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result
/ 32,17
.
&
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
<
2.
[SYSTEM
SETTINGS] key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the

normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
(;(&87(
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
$ 32,17


% 32,17
& 32,17

' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
20-F Copy color balance adjustment (Color

balance adjustment at each density level in
each color copy mode)
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
.
&
<
(;(&87(
2.
2)
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
* When there is necessity to change the color balance and gamma

by each the copy mode individually.
3)
Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color

key.
4)
Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll

key.

This is to adjust the color balance at each density level in each
color copy mode. Normally individual adjustments are not required.
This adjustment is executed when there is a request from the user.
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
Density level
(Point)
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Adjustment
value range
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
Default
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
Item/Display
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
5)
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
POINT16
POINT17
Density level
(Point)
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Point 16
Point 17
Adjustment
value range
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
Default
2)
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density is decreased.
When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected
with the color keys are collectively adjusted.
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
printed out.
3)
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by

referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more
practically to make a copy and check it.

&/26(
$ 32,17

20-H Condition setting of document density

reading operation (exposure) in the
monochrome auto copy mode
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for document density in monochrome auto copy mode.
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*

printed out.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
% 32,17
When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of document, change the setting.
& 32,17

' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
* When a copy with correct density is not obtained in monochrome

auto mode.
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
(;(&87(
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print
2.

1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*

$ 32,17

500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
* When there is necessity to change the gamma in monochrome

mode.
Default
When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively

adjusted.
1)
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
POINT16
POINT17
Adjustment
value range
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density is decreased.
20-G Monochrome copy density/gamma

adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode)
This is to adjust each density level in each monochrome copy

mode. Normally individual adjustments are not required. This
adjustment is executed when there is a request from the user.
Density level
(Point)
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Point 16
Point 17
Item/Display
The color balance at each density level (point) and the density
can be checked by referring to this printed adjustment pattern.
However, it is more practically to make a copy and check it.
Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll

key.
% 32,17
& 32,17

' 32,17
&/26(
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$(
$(B02'(
02'(
02'(
$(B6723B&23<
5($/7,0(
6723
$(B6723B)$;
2))
21
$(B6723B6&$1
5($/7,0(
6723
35(6&$1
$(B),/7(5
62)7
1250$/
6+$53
$(B:,'7+
)8//
3$57
35(6&$1
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17

. 32,17
/ 32,17
(;(&87(
2.
2)
Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE

STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below.
Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or
"PART", in some cases.
Display/Item
AE_MODE
AE_STOP_COPY
AE_STOP_FAX
AE_STOP_SCAN
Content
Auto exposure
mode
Auto B/W exposure
Stop (for copy)
Auto B/W exposure
Stop (for FAX)
Auto B/W exposure
Stop (for scanner)
AE_FILTER
Auto exposure filter

setting
AE_WIDTH
AE exposure width
Set value
MODE1,
MODE2
REALTIME/
STOP/
PRESCAN
ON/OFF
REALTIME/
STOP/
PRESCAN
SOFT
NORMAL
SHARP
FULL
PART
Document table/DSPF mode

3 to 7mm
Default
MODE1
STOP
AE WIDTH = FULL
ON
STOP
NORMAL
Document table mode

FULL
3 to 7mm
NOTE: MODE1:
High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
MODE2:
Normal gamma
100mm
STOP:
Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of
document, decides the output image density according to
the density of that part. (The output image density is constant at whole area.)
REALTIME:
Reads the density of width of the document one by one,
decides the output image density according to the density
of each part of the document. (The output image density
may be not constant at whole area.)
AE WIDTH = PART
DSPF mode
PRESCAN:
The densities of the all surface of document are once
scanned, and the output image density is determined
according to the average of the scanned densities. (The
output image density is even for all the surface.)
AE WIDTH FULL:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode
is 3 - 7 mm (leading edge of document) x Document width.
No relationship to PRESCAN MODE
3 to 7mm
100mm
AE WIDTH = PART
AE WIDTH PART:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode
is 3 - 7 mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width).
No relationship to PRESCAN MODE
Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:
When the density of the document of the read area is light,
output image density is increased by control. When the
density of the document of the read area is dark, output
image density is decreased by control.
Document density detection area
20-J Copy density adjustment for low density

section (Each copy mode)
20-I Document background density

reproducibility adjustment in the
monochrome auto copy mode
Use to adjust image density low density area in copy mode.
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background

density in monochrome auto copy mode.
When there is a desire to no reproducing the document background or reproducing the low density image, adjust this.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
When there is a desire to no reproducing the document background or reproducing the low density image, adjust this.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
* When there is request from the user.
1)

1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17
$ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
$

&/26(

% &2/25&23<7(;7
& &2/25&23<35,17('3+272
' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
$ &23<2&
( &2/25&23<7(;73+272
% &23<563)
) &2/25&23<0$3
& 6&$12&
* &2/25&23</,*+7
' 6&$1563)
+ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
( )$;2&
, &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
) )$;563)
- &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<

. &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/ &2/25386+7(;7
2.
10-key
OK
2.
10-key

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
$ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

% &2/25&23<7(;7
& &2/25&23<35,17('3+272

' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
&/26(
( &2/25&23<7(;73+272
) &2/25&23<0$3
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
&/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17
OK
$ &23<2&
* &2/25&23</,*+7
% &23<563)
+ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
& 6&$12&
, &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<

- &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
' 6&$1563)
. &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
( )$;2&
/ &2/25386+7(;7
) )$;563)
2.
2)
Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

Display/Item
2.
2)
Select the adjusting mode "COPY: OC", "COPY: RSPF" with

the scroll key.
3)
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is decreased.
Display/Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
COPY : FOC
COPY : RSPF
SCAN : OC
SCAN : RSPF
FAX : OC
FAX : RSPF
Content
Copy mode (for OC)
Copy mode (for RSPF)
Scanner mode (for OC)
Scanner mode (for RSPF)
FAX mode (for OC)
FAX mode (for RSPF)
Set
value
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
COLOR COPY :
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
COLOR COPY : TEXT
COLOR COPY :
PRINTED PHOTO
COLOR COPY :
PHOTOGRAPH
COLOR COPY :
TEXT/PHOTO
COLOR COPY : MAP
COLOR COPY : LIGHT
Default
196
196
196
196
196
196
COLOR COPY :
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
COLOR COPY : TEXT
(COPY TO COPY)
COLOR COPY :
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
Content
Text print
(color copy)
Text (color copy)
Printed photo
(color copy)
Photograph
(color copy)
Text/Photograph
(color copy)
map (color copy)
Light document
(color copy)
Copy document,
Text print
(color copy)
Copy document,
Text
(color copy)
Copy document,
Printed photo
(color copy)
Set
value
1-9
Default
3
1-9
1-9
3
5
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
5
6
1-9
1-9
1-9
Display/Item
K
L
M
N
O
P
3)
Content
COLOR PUSH:TEXT/
PRINTED PHOTO
COLOR PUSH:TEXT
COLOR PUSH:PRINTED
PHOTO
COLOR
PUSH:PHOTOGRAPH
COLOR PUSH:TEXT/
PHOTO
COLOR PUSH:MAP
Text print
(color PUSH)
Text (color PUSH)
Printed photo
(color PUSH)
Photograph
(color PUSH)
Text/Photograph
(color PUSH)
map (color PUSH)
Set
value
1-9
Default
3
1-9
1-9
3
5
1-9
1-9
1-9
2)
Display/Item (Copy mode)

A
BLACK TEXT
(SLOPE)
BLACK TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
COLOR TEXT
(SLOPE)
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background and the low density image is decreased.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, adjust by ADJ20D and

ADJ20E.
20-K Color copy text, line image edge gamma,

density adjustment / Text Map mode
gamma, density adjustment
3)
COLOR TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
ED TEXT
(SLOPE)
ED TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Content
Black character edge
gamma skew
adjustment
density adjustment
Color character edge
gamma skew
adjustment
density adjustment
Text/Map mode
gamma adjustment
(Text/Map mode)
Text/Map mode
density adjustment
(Text/Map mode)
Adjust
ment
range
1 - 99
Default
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

When the adjustment values of item A and C are changed, the
gamma at the line edge section is changed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the image contrast of character and
line edge is decreased.
(Adjustment 1)
By changing Text/Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, automatic copy
mode Text, line image edge section gamma and the density, the
reproducibility of text and line profile can be varied optionally.
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B and D are

increased, the image density at the line edge section is
increased, and vice versa.
With this adjustment, the density and the thickness of fine text and
lines can be varied.
Check the result of this adjustment by text/printed photo copy mode
(manual).
4)
Press [OK] key.
5)
Press [Close] key to exit the simulation.
6)
Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode

(manual), check the copy.
* When the reproducibility of text and line copy image is changed.
When checking, use a copy of the document with a thin character and line image.

If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27


1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

obtained.
&/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(

% %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37

& &2/257(;76/23(
' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
( ('7(;76/23(
) ('7(;7,17(5&(37
2.
10-key
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(

% %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37

& &2/257(;76/23(
' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
( ('7(;76/23(
) ('7(;7,17(5&(37
2.
(Adjustment 2)
This adjustment is used to change the gamma and the density in
the Text/Map copy mode.
* To change the contrast and the density of the Text/Map copy
mode images.
20-L Color document reproducibility adjustment

in the monochrome copy mode
Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow
image when printing color document that included the red/yellow
image in monochrome copy mode.

1)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, use SIM46-27 to change the

adjustment value.

* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red
image in case of making a color copy of the color document in
monochrome copy mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(

% %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
& &2/257(;76/23(

' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
( ('7(;76/23(

) ('7(;7,17(5&(37

1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
2.
$ 5*
10-key

% %*

OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(

% %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37

$5(<28685("
'()$8/7
& &2/257(;76/23(

' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
<(6
12
(;(&87(
10-key
( ('7(;76/23(

) ('7(;7,17(5&(37
DEFAULT
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$ 5*
2.
2)
Display/Item (Copy mode)

A
B
C
D
E
3)
BLACK TEXT
(SLOPE)
BLACK TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
COLOR
TEXT(SLOPE)
COLOR TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
ED TEXT (SLOPE)
ED TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Content
gamma skew
adjustment
density adjustment
gamma skew
adjustment
density adjustment
Text/Map mode
gamma adjustment
(Text/Map mode)
Text/Map mode density
adjustment
(Text/Map mode)
Adjust
ment
range
1 - 99

% %*

Default
50
$5(<28685("
'()$8/7
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
<(6
12
EXECUTE
(;(&87(
NO

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$ 5*
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50

% %*

$5(<28685("
'()$8/7
<(6
12
(;(&87(
YES
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item E is

changed, the gamma (contrast) is changed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the contrast is
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item F is
increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
4)
Press [OK] key.
5)
Press [CLOSE] key to cancel the simulation mode.
6)
Make a copy in the Text/Map copy mode (manual), and check

the output print.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$ 5*

% %*

'()$8/7
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
2)

Display/Item
(Copy mode)
A
B
3)
Adjust
ment
range
0 - 99
0 - 99
Content
R/G
B/G
Gray making setting (R/G)

Gray making setting (B/G)
Default
21
0
2)
Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode
key.
3)
Display/Item (Copy
mode)
MANUAL
TEXT PRT

When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased,
copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
TEXT
When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased,

copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.
4)
Press [OK] key.
5)
Make a copy in monochrome text/printed phto copy mode

(manual), check the copy.
PRINTED
PHOTO
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37

obtained.
PHOTO
20-M Black ingredient amount adjustment in

color copy mode
TEXT
PHOTO
Use to adjust the black ingredient amount in the color copy mode.
(except character and line image)
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part
changes.
MAP

* When reproduction as solid of black image is required.
* To make the black background and the dark area darker
* When change of gradation of the shade part is required.
CP ORG/
TEXT PRT

1)
COPY ORG/
TEXT

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
7(;7357
7(;7
35,17('3+272
3+272
7(;73+272
0$3
0$18$/
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
120$/
COPY ORG/
PHOTO
120$/
120$/
120$/
LIGHT
ORIGINAL
120$/
120$/
$872

(-)LUT2

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
7(;7357
7(;7
35,17('3+272
3+272
7(;73+272
0$3
0$18$/
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
$872
120$/
120$/
120$/
120$/
120$/
120$/

Select
button
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Content
Default
Text print
(Manual)
(+) LUT1
Text (Manual)
(+) LUT1
Printed photo
(Manual)
(+) LUT1
Photograph
(Manual)
NORMAL
Text/
Photograph
(Manual)
NORMAL
Map (Manual)
(+) LUT1
Copy
document/
Text printed
(Manual)
(+) LUT1
Copy
document/
Text (Manual)
(+) LUT1
Copy
document/
Printed photo
(Manual)
(+) LUT1
Light
document
(Manual)
(+) LUT1
Display/Item (Copy
mode)
AUTO
AUTO0
AUTO1
AUTO2
AUTO3
AUTO4
AUTO5
AUTO6
4)
Select
button
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Content
Default
Auto mode
judgment 0
(+) LUT1
20-N Sharpness adjustment in the monochrome

auto copy mode (Normally unnecessary to
adjust)
Use for sharpness adjustment of the high density image in color
auto copy mode.
Auto mode
judgment 1
(+) LUT1
This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image

shade part.
* When changing the sharpness of copy image in auto copy mode.
(obtain crispy image)(decreases moire)
Auto mode
judgment 2
NORMAL
* When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image

shade part (for decrease of asperity)
* To make the black background and the dark area darker.
* To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.
Auto mode
judgment 3
NORMAL

1)
Auto mode
judgment 4
(+) LUT1

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&2/25$87202'(),/7(5$'-8670(17
$ 6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872
Auto mode
judgment 5
(+) LUT1

% $87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
& &2/25&23<&0<21
' &2/25&23<.21
( 6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
) &2/25&23<&0<21
* &2/25&23<.21
+ %:&23<21
Auto mode
judgment 6
, &2/25386+5*%21
(+) LUT1
- %:386+21
2.
10-key
Press the black ingredient amount select button.

OK
When reproduction as solid of black image is required:

Selects + button
When there is desire to darken copy of black image:
Selects + button
When a dark color image is reproduced in the black:
Selects - button
5)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&2/25$87202'(),/7(5$'-8670(17
$ 6&5((1),/7(5/(9(//

Make a copy in color copy mode and check the copy.
% $87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
& &2/25&23<&0<21
' &2/25&23<.21
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-38 mode

and change the adjustment value.
( 6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
+ %:&23<21
) &2/25&23<&0<21
* &2/25&23<.21
, &2/25386+5*%21
- %:386+21
2.
2)

Display/Item
SCREEN
FILTER LEVEL
Content
H
Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern

image in auto copy mode
AUTOMODE
FILTER LEVEL
COLOR
COPY:CMY
COLOR
COPY:K
SINGLE
COLOR:CMY
2 COLOR
COPY:CMY
G
H
I
2 COLOR
COPY:K
B/W COPY
COLOR
PUSH:RGB
B/W PUSH
3)
AUTO
SOFT
CENTER
HIGH
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto

copy mode
Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image
in color copy mode
Soft filter applying setting to K image in
color copy mode
in sigle color copy mode
in 2-color copy mode
Soft filter applying setting to K image in
color copy mode
Soft filter applying setting in monochrome
copy mode
Soft filter applying setting to image in push
scan color mode
scan monochrome mode
Strong
emphasis
Soft
emphasis
Auto
SOFT
CENTER
HIGH
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Setting
range
1
3
1
2
3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Adjustment item A:
When selecting AUTO, filter is selected according to dot pattern state automatically and adjusts sharpness.
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
numeric value to decrease moire.
Adjustment item B:
Select HIGH to obtain clear images. Select SOFT to reduce
moire.
Adjustment item C - J:
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part
improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
Press [OK] key.
5)
Make a copy and check the copy image.
3 (Auto)
NOTE
Apply to auto copy mode only
Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter

process mode).
4)
Default

2 (CENTER)
1 (ON)
Available for the high density image

except text and line image
1 (ON)
1 (ON)
1 (ON)
1 (ON)
1 (ON)
1 (ON)
1(ON)
When setting ON, smoothness in the

image shade part improves by
applying soft filter.
(asperity decreases)
20-O Copy high density part density correction

setting (Prevents against tone gap)
If a tone gap occurs on part of high density in color mode, or if there
is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density,
change the setting.
This setting normally not required. When, however, there are case
of following, change the setting.
Display/Item
E
YELLOW MAX
TARGET
BLACK MAX
TARGET

a. Adjustment procedure
500
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone

gap is better.
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
to item A and B.
20-P Copy color balance adjustment (Single

color copy mode) (Normally not required)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(

0 - 999
If these values is changed, be sure to execute the copy color balance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment)
500
NOTE: Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If

these values is changed, density of the high density part is
changed.
Default
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
1)
Scanner target value for

YELLOW maximum
density correction
BLACK maximum density
correction
Setting
range
0 - 999
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.

* When there is necessity to increase the density of the part of
high density.
Content
This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in
the single color copy mode to the user's request.
% .(1$%/(',6$%/(
& &<$10$;7$5*(7
' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
The adjustment is made by changing Y, M, C components of each

color.
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there

is a request from the user.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
required in the following cases.
2.
10-key
OK


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
1)
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(

% .(1$%/(',6$%/(
& &<$10$;7$5*(7

' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
&/26(
6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
$ 5('

% *5((1
& %/8(
' &<$1
( 0$*(17$
) <(//2:
2.
2)
Select the item A, B with the scroll key.

Display/Item
CMY
(0:ENABLE
1:DISABLE)
K
(0: ENABLE
1: DISABLE)
CYAN MAX
TARGET
MAGENTA MAX
TARGET
Content
CMY engine
maximum density
correction mode
Enable
1
CMY engine
maximum density
correction mode
Disable
0
K engine maximum
density correction
mode Enable
1
K engine maximum
density correction
mode DIsable
CYAN maximum density
correction
MAGENTA maximum
density correction
Setting
range
Default
&
2.
<
10-key
0-1
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783
$ 5('

% *5((1
& %/8(
' &<$1
0-1
( 0$*(17$
) <(//2:
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
&
<
2.
2)
Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3)
Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.
4)
Adjustmen
t range
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
Display/Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
RED
GREEN
BLUE
YELLOW
MAGENTA
CYAN
C
0
255
255
0
0
255
Default
M
255
0
200
0
255
0
When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY

LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D
(COPY HIGH)".
Y
200
255
0
255
0
0
Item/Display
A
COPY : LOW
SCAN : LOW
FAX : LOW
COPY : HIGH

SCAN : HIGH
FAX : HIGH
5)
Press [OK] key.
6)
7)
Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
copy.
20-Q Copy density adjustment in the RSPF mode

3)
Content
RSPF copy mode exposure
adjustment (Low density side)
RSPF scanner mode exposre
PSPF FAX mode exposure
RSPF copy copy mcde
exposure adjustment
(High density side)
RSPF scanner mode exposre
RSPF FAX mode exposure
adjustment
(High density side)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
48
1 - 99
48
1 - 99
48
1 - 99
53
1 - 99
53
1 - 99
53

In case of increase of image density, input large numeric
value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small
numeric value.
* When copy in RSPF mode differs from copy in document table

mode.
4)
Press [OK] key.
* When copy density in RSPF mode is low or too high.
5)
* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
6)
Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
copy.
* When the RSPF unit is disassembled.



20-R Auto color balance adjustment by the user

(Copy color balance auto adjustment
enable setting and adjustment)
1)
a. General

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$ &23</2:

In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color calibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user operation with SIM 26-53.
% 6&$1/2:
C )$;/2:
D &23<+,*+
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
( 6&$1+,*+
F )$;+,*+
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the

operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.
2.

10-key

OK
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.

* When the EEPROM of the PCU PWB is replaced.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$ &23</2:

% 6&$1/2:
C )$;/2:
D &23<+,*+
( 6&$1+,*+
F )$;+,*+
2.
2)
1)
5)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) on the document table.
Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left
side.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color

patch image (adjustment pattern).
&/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,21
$ <(612

Thin line
2.
10-key
6)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment

is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.
OK
ADJ 21 Printer color balance/density

adjustment

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,21
$ <(612
(1) Note before execution of the printer color balance/density

adjustment

(Requisite condition before execution of the printer color balance/

density adjustment)
Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been completed properly.
(This adjustment is required in the following cases.)
2.
2)
3)
Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.

When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
(Yes).
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
Press [OK] key.
(Note)
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration
(automatic adjustment of copy color balance and density) is not displayed in the user program mode.
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjustment))
Remark:
This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set
with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the above settings are
not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made properly.
1)
* Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjustment is required. Refer to the page of the ADJ 20 print color balance/density adjustment.
(2) Printer color balance/density check
Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be sure to
execute the following procedures in advance.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26)
Enter the system setting mode.
2)
Enter the copy setting mode.
3)
Press the auto color calibration key.
4)

(Procedure)
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.
a. When the PCL mode is supported:

Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed
color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the natural gray
color balance by the color table. (When the color balance target is
DEF 1.)
21-A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto

adjustment)
a. General
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) automatically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the print modes are revised.)
There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjustment.
1)
Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24

is used.)
2)
Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program

mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the
same level.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the

serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
b. When the PCL mode is not supported: (In the case of GDI
model)
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
black patch to check the color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully

understood.
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)
*1
Low density
High density
;
1)
The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed

properly.
2)
/
%
$M
CMY
Blend
3
/CZ
#
&
'
) *
/ 0 1
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and

BK is very slightly copied.
Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and
BK are not copied.
*1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section are not printed.
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) procedure

Start
Execute ADJ21A (Printer color balance and density adjustment) (Automatic adjustment).
Enter the SIM67-24 mode, and select A3
(11" x 17" ) paper.
(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
Select the factory target or the service target, and
press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is
scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Automatic adjustment color balance target change

Change the factory color balance and density
target which is available in 3 kinds.(SIM67-26)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or

unclear copy. (*4)
NO
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the half tone

image correction is automatically performed.)
Though the factory color

balance and density target
(available in 3 kinds) is changed, satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained (SIM67-26), or the
service target is selected.
Cancel SIM67-24.
NO
PCL printer?
YES
YES
Execute ADJ21B (Printer color balance and density
adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25) (*3)
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and density
adjustment. (*2)
Use SIM67-25 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the printer color balance and density.
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print

check pattern, and check the printer
color balance and density.
Are the color balance and

density at the satisfactory
level?
YES
NO
*1:
When the color balance and density are customized and
registered as the service target, select the service target.
*2:
If the initial setting of the half tone image correction is not
properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for
any problems.
*3:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
with ADJ21B (Printer color balance and density adjustment)
(Manual adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the print engine for
any problems.
*4:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check
pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
End
1)
Remark:
(Descriptions on [FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key in the
color balance auto adjustment menu.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
&/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
[FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key are used to select one of

the above two.
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be

selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
67-27.)
Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable) When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory target
gamma data are the same.
(;(&87(
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping.

2)

selected.)
3)

Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper

on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
*1
For the service target, the customized color balance gamma

can be registered with SIM 67-28.
5)
Press [OK] key on the operation panel.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
*1
2.
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
4)

[EXECUTE] key.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS

MODE" is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7(6735,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
)$&725<
6(59,&(
(;(&87(

and prints the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed.
&/26(
6)
Check the color balance and density.

adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted
into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When
the color balance target is DEF 1.)
There are two methods to check the color balance and density.
(Method 1)
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch
image is within the following specifications.
(Method 3)
Only for the machine which support the PCL mode. (For the
machine which supports only the GDI mode, this procedure
cannot be used.)
*1
Low density
High density
;
Use SIM64-5 to print the print test pattern, and check the color
balance and density.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out.
Use SIM64-5 to print the print test pattern, and check the color
balance and density. (Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density check.)
%
$M
When the factory target is selected in the procedure 4) and the

auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained on the color balance and the density, use SIM 67-26
to change the factory color balance target and repeat the procedures from 1).
3
/CZ
#
&
'
) *
/ 0 1
20C).

When the service target is selected in the procedure 4) and the

auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
21C).

BK are not copied.

not be reversed.
level.
(Method 2)
Cancel SIM 67-25.

For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
adjustment is completed.
If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21B).
21-B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual

adjustment)
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment is required.
Refer to the page of the ADJ print color balance/density adjustment.
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
a. General
*1
Low density
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to

adjust the printer density (17 pts for each color) of C, M, Y and K.
This is used at the following situation. When the result of auto
adjustment described above is not existing within the range of reference. When a fine adjustment is required. When there is request
from the user for changing (customizing) the color balance.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
High density
;
$M
CMY
Blend
3
/CZ
#
&
'
) *
/ 0 1
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color balance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
1)
After execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment.
2)
When setting the color patch image adjustment pattern on the

document table, place 5 sheets of white paper on the color
patch image adjustment pattern.
3)

BK are not copied.
The max. density section is not blurred.
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure
Start
Execute ADJ21C (Printer color balance and density

adjustment (Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM67-25 mode, and select A3
(11 " x 17 ") paper. (Automatic selection.)
Check the printed adjustment check pattern,
and select a target adjustment color with the
color keys (C,M,Y,K).
Select a target adjustment density level with the
scroll key.
Enter the adjustment value with 10 key.
Check the patch color balance and density in the
process gray of the color balance check pattern.
(If the gray color is slightly shifted to Magenta,
the color balance is properly adjusted.)

NO
YES
Cancel the SIM67-25 mode.
NO
PCL printer?
YES
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and density
adjustment result. (*2)
Use SIM67-25 to print the color
balance check pattern, and check the
printer color balance and density.

Are the color balance and

density at the satisfactory
level?
YES
Set the service target for the automatic
printer color balance adjustment.
(SIM67-27)
NO
*1:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print
engine for any problems.
*2:
If the initial setting of the half tone image correction
is not properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance
and density cannot be obtained. In this case, check
the print engine for any problems.
End
1)
3)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color

balance is satisfactory.
&/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$ 32,17

*1
% 32,17
& 32,17
Low density
High density
' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
.
&
(;(&87(
<
2.
$M
10-key
CMY
Blend
OK
3
/CZ
#
&
'
) *
/ 0 1

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(

35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$ 32,17

% 32,17
& 32,17

BK are not copied.
' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17

+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
.
&
(;(&87(
<
EXECUTE

not be reversed.
2.
EXECUTE

level.
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a

request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$ 32,17

% 32,17
& 32,17

adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted
into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When
the color balance target is DEF 1.)
' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
4)
Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5)
/ 32,17
.
2)
&
<
(;(&87(
2.

selected.)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
The adjustment value is set in the range of 0 - 255 (1 - 99).

When SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance
and density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 50.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satisfied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
6)
Cancel SIM 67-25.

For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
adjustment is completed.
7)
Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
color balance and the density.
NOTE: Only for the machine which support the PCL mode. (For
the machine which supports only the GDI mode, this procedure cannot be used.)
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE]
key. The print test pattern is printed.
8)
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register

the color balance as the service target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
the next color balance adjustment.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the registered color balance.
NOTE: If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register the color balance as the service target. If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service
target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be
made in the next color balance adjustment.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode to make an adjustment to the similar color
balance as the registered color balance.
(Gamma setting of auto color balance adjustment service

color balance target)
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a certain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
There are following three kinds of the target.
Factory color balance (gamma) target
Service color balance (gamma) target
User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjustment) is executed with SIM 67-25.
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
Type
Factory color
balance
(gamma)
target
Service color
balance
(gamma)
target
User color
balance
(gamma)
target
Descriptions
There are three kinds of the color balance
target, and each of them is specified according
to the machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select
one of them as the factory target. The default
setting (factory setting) is the color balance
(DEF1) which emphasizes color reproduction.
This target is used when the user requests to
customize the color balance to user's desired
level. In advance, the user's unique color
balance must be registered as the service color
balance target. The above registration (setting)
is made by the serviceman with SIM 67-25 to
adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to
register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment. When,
therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the user's
color balance adjustment is also changed.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the
color balance is set to the factory color balance
target set with SIM 67-26. The default setting
(factory setting) of the color balance is same as
the factory color balance target. (Emphasized
on color reproduIf the user does not request for
customizing the color balance, be sure to use
SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the factory
color balance targetction (DEF1))
Same color balance as the service color
balance (gamma) target When the service color
balance target is changed, this color balance
target is also changed accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance
automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
target (DEF1)
Use SIM 67-26 to select one of the three

kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1)


target (DEF2)
target (DEF3)


target
Factory setting

target (Unique)
Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the optional color

balance, and use SIM 67-27 to register it.
Execute SIM 67-28.

(The service color balance target is
the same as the factory color balance
target.)

target

Color balance target for
the user color balance
adjustment

target
Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)

By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28

(DEF2)
SIM67-28
+b* Direction of Yellow

(DEF1)
Hue
Direction
of Green
Item
Content
Default
operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color table
in an actual printer mode and print is made. (Factory setting)
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target is
selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction
of Red
Factory color balance target (DEF1)

= Service color balance target/Color
balance target for theuser color balance
adjustment
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the color
table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

(DEF3)

SIM67-28
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-28).
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
purpose of registration)
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance

can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with
SIM 67-26.
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is

customized with SIM 67-25. If the color balance is not customized,
this procedure is not required.

This color balance is same as the service color balance target in
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24). When, therefore,
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do

not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from
discoloration and dirt.
5)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
The service color balance target data are basically registered

immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
67-25.
&/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judges as follows.
When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting
the service color balance target in SIM 67-24 is unsatisfactory or
abnormal.
(;(&87(
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.

6)
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image

(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.

This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance

adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%$6(
%&'()
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was

made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
*+,-.
/012
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the
service color balance target)
1)
Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual

adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment

is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
adjustment.
2)
5(3($7
<
2.

In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.

Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjustment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service target.

&/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q

(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
judged as abnormal.
7)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (K, C,
M and Y) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the color
balance target for the user color balance adjustment to the same
color balance as the factory color balance target)
*+,-.
/012
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance target with SIM 67-27.
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 6726, be sure to execute this procedure.
.
&
<
6(783

3)
Press [SETUP] key.
4)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly

adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21C) on the document
table.
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(59,&(
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another

machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance (manual) was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color
balance requested by the user and it was registered as the
service color balance target with SIM 67-27.
$5(<28685("
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.
<(6
12
(;(&87(
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target.
21-C Printer density adjustment (low density part

density adjustment) (Normally unnecessary
to adjust)
This procedure is to adjust image density of low density area in
printer mode.
Adjust to reproduction (not reproduction) setting of the low density
image.

1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
* When reproduction of low density image is required. When reproduction of low density image is not required, conversely.
&/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(

% .(1$%/(',6$%/(
& &<$10$;7$5*(7
' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7

1)

2.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
10-key
&/26(
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
$ $3$7&+,1387
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(

% .(1$%/(',6$%/(
& &<$10$;7$5*(7
' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
2.
10-key
OK
2.
2)
Select the item A, B with the scroll key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
$ $3$7&+,1387
Display/Item
A
CMY
(0: ENABLE
1:DISABLE)
K
(0:ENABLE
1: DISABLE)
CYAN MAX
TARGET
MAGENTA MAX
TARGET
YELLOW MAX
TARGET
BLACK MAX
TARGET

2.
2)
Content
&/26(
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key.

In case of increase of the image density on low density part,
increase the adjustment value. In case of increase of the
image density on low density part, increase the adjustment
value. For diluting the image density on low density part,
decrease the adjustment value.
21-D Printer high density part desnsity

correction setting (high density part tone
gap countermeasure) (Normally
unnecessary to the setting change)
CMY engine
maximum density
correction mode
Enable
1 CMY engine
maximum density
correction mode
Disable
0 K engine maximum
density correction
mode Enable
1 K engine maximum
density correction
mode Disable
correction
MAGENTA maximum
density correction
YELLOW maximum
density correction
correction
Setting
range
0-1
Default
0
0-1
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
This procedure is to adjust image density of low density area in

printer mode.
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B

gap is better.
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.

* When there is necessity to increase the density of the part of
high density.
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1

to item A and B.
(NOTE) If the setting values of item C, D, E and F are changed,

density of the high density part is changed.
When these values are changed, be sure to perform the printer
color balance and density adjustment. (Automatic adjustment)
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjustment))

Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made
properly.
21-E Auto color balance adjustment by the user

(Printer color balance auto adjustment
ENABLE setting and adjustment)
1)
Enter the system setting mode.
2)
Enter the printer setting mode.
3)
Press the auto color calibration key.
a. General
4)
5)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) on the document table.
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color calibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user operation with SIM 26-54.
CAUTION: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the
user's understanding on the automatic adjustment of
the copy color balance and density and the user's operational ability are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the
operating procedures, notes, and operations to the
user.
Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left
side.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color

patch image (adjustment pattern).

Thin line

1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,212)35,17(5
$ <(612
6)


is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.
21-F Copy/Printer color balance and density

adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
2.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,212)35,17(5
$ <(612

replaced.



a. General
2.
2)
Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.

When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
(Yes).
3)
Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration
(automatic adjustment of printer color balance and density) is not
displayed in the user program mode.
SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy color balance and

density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
Since it is desirable to perform the copy color balance adjustment
(automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer color balance
and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
this mode.
This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the automatic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM6724). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
each of the auto copy/printer color balance and the density adjustment individually.
b. Adjustment procedures
Copy/printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(SIM46-74) procedure flowchart
Start
Execute ADJ21F Copy color balance and density/Printer color balance and density
adjustment (automatic density). (SIM46-74)
(Copy color balance and density adjustment (automatic adjustment)
Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A4 (11" x 17") paper. (Automatic selection)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory target or the
service target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1)
(Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment))
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory target or the
service target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1)
Automatic adjustment color balance target change

Change the factory color balance and density target
which is available in 3 kinds. (SIM63-11)
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the half tone image correction is automatically
performed.) (*3)
NO
Cancel SIM46-74.
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result.
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) to make a copy in the Text
/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color balance and density.
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the patch color
balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to
Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)

(available in 3 kinds) is
changed, satisfactory color
balance and density are
not obtained (SIM63-11),
or the service target is
selected.
YES
NO
Are the color balance and density

at the specified level?
Execute ADJ20C (Copy color balance and density

adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM46-21/44-21)
(*3)
YES
Check that the initial setting of the half tone image correction was properly
performed. (*2)
Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction. (*2)
Execute ADJ21A (Printer color balance and

density adjustment)
(Automatic adjustment). (SIM67-24)
Execute the half tone image correction. (SIM44-26)

Automatic color balance target change
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) to make a copy in
the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the color balance and density.
Change the factory color balance and density

(available in 3 kinds). (SIM67-26)
NO
NO
Are the color balance and density

at the specified level?
(available in 3 kinds) is
changed, satisfactory color
balance and density are
not obtained (SIM67-26),
or the service target is
selected.
YES
NO
PCL printer?
YES
Check the printer color balance and density adjustment result with the self print
check pattern.
YES
Use SIM64-5 to print the self print check

pattern, and check the printer color balance
and density.

and density at the
specified level?
Execute ADJ21C (Printer color balance

and density adjustment)
(Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25)
NO
YES
End
*1:
When the color balance and
density are customized and
registered as the service
target, select the service
target.
*2:
If the initial setting of the half
tone image correction is not
properly adjusted, satisfactory
color balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this
case, check the print engine
for any problems.
*3:
If satisfactory color balance and
density are not obtained with
ADJ20C (Copy color balance
and density adjustment) (Manual
adjustment) (SIM46-21/44-21),
check the print engine for any
problems.
*4:
If there is any streak or unclear
copy on the printed check
pattern, check the print engine
for any problems.
1)
4)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+

3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5

[EXECUTE] key.
When the color balance is customized by the manual color balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's request,
and the color balance is registered with SIM63-7 as the service
target, if the color balance is required to be adjusted, select the
[SERVICE] target.
)257+,6$'-8670(17

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
(;(&87(
2)

The high density process control is performed, and the copy
color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. (A3 or
11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.)
)$&725<

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
352&21(;(&87,1*
6(59,&(
(;(&87(

and prints the color balance check patch image.
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
Low density
High density
;
/
(;(&87(
3)

Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
%
$M
3
/CZ
#
&
'
) *
/ 0 1
Remark:
(Descriptions on the factory service key button in the color balance automatic adjustment menu)
automatic adjustment: the factory target and the service target.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance
(The color balance can be selected from the three kinds of
fixed ones with SIM63-11.)
Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable)
When shipping from the factory, the service target gamma data
and the factory target gamma data are the same.
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping from
the factory. For the service target, a customized color balance
gamma can be registered with SIM63-7.
5)

The printer color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed
out. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
*1
Low density
High density

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
&21),507+($'-3$7&+$1'35(66>(;(&87(@72$'-2)5(*,675$7,21(;(
$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
$M
3
/CZ
#
&
'
) *
/ 0 1
(;(&87(
6)

procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
*1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section is not printed.
8)
The initial setting menu of the half tone image correction is displayed. Press [OK] key.
The initial setting of the half tone image correction is performed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
PRINTER CALIBRATION
*1
*1
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
2.
9)
When "COMPLETE THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the

adjustment operation is completed. Cancel SIM46-74.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
7)

[EXECUTE] key.
&/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7
12:5(*,67(5,1*7+(1(:7$5*(72)+$/)721(352&2167
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes valid only when the both
adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer mode are
completed.
For example, if the copy color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is canceled, the adjustment result is invalid.
10) Check the copy color balance and density.
(Method 1)
2.
The printer color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically

performed and the color balance check patch image is printed
out.
Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG0317FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
the copy color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the
copy color balance and density check.)
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained

from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
20C).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to execute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
(Method 2)
Low density
High density
$M
CMY
Blend
3
/CZ
%
&
'
) *
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, perform the following procedures.
13) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
14) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)
the copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy
color balance/density check.)
Though the procedures 13) - 15) are performed, the copy color
balance and density are not in the specified range, there may
be another cause.
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results

of the copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ
20C) (Manual adjustment).

the copy color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the
copy color balance and density check.)
Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treatments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After

completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
/ 0 1 2
16) Check the printer color balance and density.

(Method 1)
Incase that the PCL mode is supported (for the machines
where only the GDI mode is supported, this method cannot be
used)
Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
color balance and the density.

Set each setting value to the default and press [EXECUTE]

key, and the print test pattern is printed.

BK are not copied.
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density

check.)


converted into the natural gray color balance by the color table
in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance target is DEF
1.)
11) Use SIM 44-26 to perform the half tone image correction.
(Compulsory execution)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
(;(&87(
(Method 2)
Use SIM67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
compare the black patch color balance of each process (CMY)
with the black patch. This procedure allows checking the color
balance adjustment result correctly.
ADJ 22 Adjusting the fusing paper

guide position
* When the fusing section is disassembled.
*1
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
Low density
High density
* When a wrinkle is made on paper in the fusing section.
* When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper rear

edge section.
1)
Loosen the fixing screw C.
2)
Shift the fusing paper guide in the arrow direction A or B (up

and down direction).
%
$M
CMY
Blend
3
/CZ
#
&
'
) *
/ 0 1

BK are not copied.

C
B

converted into the natural gray color balance by the color table
in an actual printer mode. (When the color balance target is
DEF 1.)
If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the density is not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the
manual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21B).
The standard fixing position is the center of the marking scale.

Change the position depending on the situation.
* When a wrinkle is formed on paper, change the position
upward (in the arrow direction A).
* When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper
rear edge section, shift the position downward (in the arrow
direction A).
ADJ 23 Document size sensor

adjustment
* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.
* When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
* When U2 trouble has occurred.
23-A Document size sensor detection point

adjustment
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6:
3'
3'
3'
3'
3'
3'
3'

Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw

and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is
returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit
top from the table glass is 32 r0.5mm by slowly tilting the document detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust.
(If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the document detection function may malfunction.)
23-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size

sensor
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783

=':'%76'?
(;(&87(
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
#

32+
-0.5mm
=':'%76'?
Adjustment
failed
(;(&87(
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
2&
(;(&87(
2)
Execute the sensor adjustment without document.

With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3)
Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press

[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT PHOTO
SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
2)
Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width position.
3)
ADJ 24 Manual paper feed tray paper

size (width) sensor adjustment
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal

display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
(;(&87(
4)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
5)

display.
EXECUTE
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper

feed guide is recognized.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
(;(&87,1*
6)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
7)

display.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
8)
Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width position.
9)
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
3$326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
EXECUTE

display.
Repeat the above procedure to adjust

the A4R width MIN POSITION.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual

paper feed guide is recognized.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is

displayed.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
(;(&87(
ADJ 25 RSPF tray paper size (width)

sensor adjustment (RSPF
mode)
1)
ADJ 26 Touch panel coordinate setting

* The operation panel has been replaced.


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
1)
2)
Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
2)
Set the tray document guide to the max. width position, and
press [EXECUTE] key. The button is highlighted and the tray
size volume maximum value adjustment is started.
* During the adjustment, "EXECUTING..." is displayed.
* After completion of the tray size volume maximum value
adjustment, the set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM
and the display is shifted to the tray volume A4R size adjustment value start screen. (Each set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM at each setting.)
3)
Set the tray document guide to A4R width position and press
[EXECUTE] button. The pressed button is highlighted and the
tray A4R size adjustment is started.
4)
Adjust the tray volume A5R size and the tray size volume minimum value according to the above procedures.
5)
Completion of the adjustment, "COMPLETE" is displayed. If

the adjustment is not completed normally for any reason,
"ERROR" is displayed. In that case, the adjustment must be
executed again.
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds

and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the display returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
ADJ 27 Image loss, void area, image

off-center, image magnification
ratio auto adjustment with
SIM50-28
<Adjustment item and content>

NO.
1
2
3
4
Display
TRAYVOLMAX
TRAYVOLA4R
TRAYVOLA5R
TRAYVOLMIN
Content
Tray size volume maximum value
Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
Tray volume A5R size adjustment
Tray size volume minimum value
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with

SIM50-28.
* ADJ 8 Print image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section)
* ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
When one of 1-4 in the above table is selected, the guide plate is
shifted to each position of the four widths of the guide plate shown
in the table below. The value of the document width sensor
(RSPF_WIDTH) A/D value is saved to EEPROM.
* ADJ 14/15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
<Guide plate positions and widths on the mechanism and A/D values to be saved>
(Menu in SIM50-28 mode)
Widths on the mechanism

NO
1
2
3
4
Guide
plate
position
Maximum
position
Middle
position (L)
Middle
position (S)
Minimum
position
AB
series
INCH
series
299
299
210
Code in
the figure
below
A/D
value,
code in
the figure
below
AD_MAX
215.9
WIDTH
_MAX
WITH_P1
AD_P1
148.5
139.7
WITH_P2
AD_P2
118
118
WITH_MIN
AD_MIN
* ADJ 16 Scan image off-center adjustment

* ADJ 17 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
Display/Item
OC ADJ
Remark
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
A4R OR
LTR
A5R OR
INVR
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
Content
Image loss off-center sub scanning direction
image magnification ratio adjustment
Main scanning direction image magnification
ratio adjustment
(RSPF mode)
Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center
(each paper feed tray, duplex mode)
adjustment
Adjustment result display
Display of data used when an adjustment is
executed
27-A Print image main scanning direction image

magnification ratio automatic adjustment
1)
6)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
12:(;(&87,1*
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'-
%.0$*$'-
63)$'-
6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7
'$7$
5(35,17
(;(&87(
The following item is automatically adjustment.

* Print image main scanning direction image magnification
ratio

2)
Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key button.
3)
Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
(Any paper size will do.)
7)
Press [OK] key.

The adjustment result becomes valid.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7
&6
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26(
3/($6(386+&$.(<
&6

(;(&87(
4)
5)

27-B Image off-center automatic adjustment
1)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direction)

NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document

guide.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'-
%.0$*$'-
63)$'-
6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7
'$7$

2)
Select [SETUP/PRINT] ADJ with the key button.
3)
Select [ALL] with the key button.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
/($'
2))6(7
$//

(Note)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button, the following items
can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are
executed simultaneously.
4)
27-C Copy lead edge image reference position

adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning
direction image magnification ratio
1)
Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7
&6
&6
&6
&6
/&&
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'-
%.0$*$'-
63)$'-
6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7
'$7$
$'8

(;(&87(

5)
6)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direction)
2)
Select [OC ADJ] with the key button.
3)
Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
(Any paper size will do.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(

guide.
0)7
&6
&6
(;(&87(
4)
5)

(Any direction)


guide.
7)

* Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* Print image off-center adjustment
8)
Press [OK] key.

Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.
6)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7
12:(;(&87,1*
5(35,17
(;(&87(

* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image
off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
7)
Press [OK] key.


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
3/($6(386+&$.(<

27-D SPF mode image off-center, image lead

edge position, sub scanning direction
image magnification ratio automatic
1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'-
%.0$*$'-
63)$'-
6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7
'$7$

2)
Press the [SPF ADJ] button.
<Adjustment Item List>

SPF original leading edge adjustment (front side)
SPF original off-center adjustment (front side)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,'(
SPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment (front side)
&/26(
8)
6,'(
SPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the SPF.
$//

3)
Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette

used to print SPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corresponding button:
SIDE1: SPF adjustment for the front side
SIDE2: SPF adjustment for the back side
ALL: SPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
4)
Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print SPF

adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)
5)
Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts self-print

of SPF adjustment patterns.
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
self-printing SPF adjustment patterns.
When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you
can start SPF adjustments.
6)
SPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the SPF.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the

cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print
SPF adjustment patterns again.
9)
Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts loading

SPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
reading SPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the back side, the next screen appears where
you can view the results of the adjustments.
<Adjustment Item List>
SPF original leading edge adjustment (back side)
SPF original off-center adjustment (back side)
SPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment (back side)
10) The adjustment result screen appears.

This screen shows the current values along with the previous
values in parentheses.
SPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides)
again.
SPF adjustment patterns again.
7)
* To have the machine start re-reading the SPF adjustment

patterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] button.
* To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] button.
Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts reading

SPF adjustment patterns (for the front side).
* To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]

button.

reading and calculating SPF adjustment patterns (for the
front side).
11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and
return to the top menu, press the [OK] button.
* To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] button.
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for

the front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the front side, the next screen appears where
you can have the machine start reading SPF adjustment
patterns (for the back side).
MX-3100N
[7]
SIMULATION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
General (Including basic operations)
The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the

machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes in
an earlier stage, and make various setups and adjustments speedily
for improving the serviceability of the machine.
1)
Various adjustments
2)
Setting of the specifications and functions
3)
Canceling troubles
4)
Operation check
5)
Counters check, setting, clear
6)
Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data check,

clear.
7)
Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data

transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of the

operation panel of the machine.
A. Basic operation
(1)
Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode

1)
Copy mode key ON o Program key ON o Asterisk (*) key ON o

CLEAR key ON o Asterisk (*) key ON o Ready for input of a
main code of simulation
2)
Entering a main code with the 10-key o START key ON.

Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.
3)
Entering a sub code with the 10-key o START key ON.
4)
Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5)
The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected item.

Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simulation
operation.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1)
Press [CA] key.
(Note for the simulation mode)

Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the
machine is in the simulation mode. If the power switch should be
turned OFF in the simulation mode, a malfunction may be resulted. In
this case, turn OFF/ON the main power source.
MX-3100N SIMULATION 7 1
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.

Press the SYSTEM
SETTINGS key
Standby for entry of

SIM code.
Enter the main code of
SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM
is displayed.
NO
Press the START button.

YES
Standby for entry of SIM

sub code
YES
<Exclusion type>
You have to exit
simulation mode
before entering into
this mode for self
printing type.
Is there a sub code ?

NO
Enter SIM sub code with

the 10-key.
Select the mode and the

item with the scroll key
and the item key.
Press the START button.
NO
YES
If there is no item.
Operation check ?
NO
Do you want
to perform another
simulation ?
NO
YES
NO
Do you
want to end the
simulation ?
Press the EXECUTE button

and OK button.
The display is made according to

the selected some and the item.
YES
Data clear ?
NO

and OK button.
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
Adjustments
or setting (counter data
change) ?
NO
Operation is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
(Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you
want to change the
content ?
NO
The changed content

is stored.
YES
Enter the new setting and

adjustment values.
The simulation mode

is canceled.

and OK button.
Operation is made according

to the selected mode and item.
Operating conditions
check ?
YES
Is it the same
simulation main
code?
In the power OFF/ON type
simulation, OFF/ON
message is
Press the SYSTEM
displayed by the
SETTINGS key
SYSTEM
SETTINGS key.
YES

and OK button.
YES
Press the clear all key.
2.
List of simulation codes
Main
1
Sub
1
2
5
1
2
3
2
3
10
2
3
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
6
1
6
8
9
12
1
2
6
2
10
13
14
15
16
3
1
-
17
21
22
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
19
90
Functions
Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit.
Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits.
Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the auto document feed unit and the control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the document feed unit section and the
control circuits.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the auto document feed unit and the control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit.
Used to adjust the finisher.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray, and the control
circuit of those.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of
those.
Used to check the operations of the paper feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) and the LCC paper
transport clutch (LTRC).
Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the load in the transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the control
circuits.
Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the primary transport unit and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the fusing separation.
Used to set the operating conditions of aging.
Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
Used to display the warm-up time.
Color setting in the color copy test mode (Used to check the copy operation and the image quality for each
color).
The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation)
Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control circuit.
*When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the control
circuit. *When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and
its control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/U2/LCC/PF troubles.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large capacity paper feed tray) trouble.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position. * Presumption of the faulty point by
this data is possible.
Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section).
Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version, and
the counter list.
Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section.
Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed)
Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the number
of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge).
Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
Used to output the various set data lists.
Section
Scanner (reading)
Scanner (reading)
Scanner (reading)
RSPF
RSPF
RSPF
Finisher
Finisher
Finisher
Desk/Large capacity tray
(LCC)
Desk/Large capacity tray
(LCC)
Paper feed desk/Large
capacity tray (LCC)
Operation panel
Fusing
Scanner (reading)
Process
Paper transport/Paper exit
section
Others
Process (Transport)
Fusing
Others
RSPF
Process (Developing)
Process (Charging)
Process (Transport)
Duplex
Duplex
LCC
MFP PWB / PCU PWB /
SCU PWB
Firmware
Paper feed, ADU, LCC

FAX
RSPF
Process
Main
23
Sub
2
5
6
7
9
10
15
30
31
1
Functions
Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of troubles of misfeed is
considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the paper transport section.
Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the
counters.)
Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit. (After
completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)
Used to clear the copy counter.
Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After replacement of the OPC drum, clear the counter.)
Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
Used to initialize the administrator password.
Used to initialize the service mode password.
Used to check the operations of the developing section.
Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment)
1
2
Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1).

Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size is changed, this simulation
must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
Used to set the specifications of the auditor .(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)
Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start to
drive the fusing heater lamp)
Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There
are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center binding
mode.
Used to set the copy speed mode of postcards.
Used to set functions.
Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting (copy mode)
User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting (printer mode)
Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
Poster, enlargement continuous shoot, card scan, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity)
adjustment
Used to set the OSA trial mode.
Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) (FSS
function)
Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)
Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry
number. (FSS function)
Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history.
(FSS function)
Used to check the high-density, half-tone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error
history.
Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the
control circuits.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control circuit.
80
24
1
2
3
4
25
26
3
5
6
10
18
30
35
38
41
49
50
52
53
54
65
69
73
27
74
78
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
30
13
14
1
2
33
Section
Paper feed, Paper transport
Process (Developing
section)
Image process
(Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Paper exit
Paper feed
Auditor
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Main
40
41
43
Sub
2
7
1
2
3
1
4
20
24
1
Functions
Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment.
Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.)
Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-4.
Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section.
2
4
6
9
Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor (registration sensor).
Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation.
Used to execute the high density process control forcibly.
Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation.
12
Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor
(registration sensor).
13
14
Used to perform the color image sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration.
Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor.
16
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
37
43
1
2
4
5
8
9
10
16
19
Used to display the toner density control data.

Used to set the half tone process control target.
Used to display the toner patch density level in the half tone process control operation.
Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the half tone process control operation.
Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the half tone process control.
Used to execute the half tone process control compulsorily.
Used to clear the correction data of the half tone process control.
Used to set the process control execution conditions.
Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job.
Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Manual adjustment)
Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
Used to display the identification information of the developing unit.
Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
Used to adjust the scan image density.
Used to adjust the copy color balance and the gamma (for each color copy mode).
Used to adjust the monochrome copy density and the gamma (for each monochrome copy mode).
Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode
documents.
Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported).
Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Single color copy mode)
Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default.
Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy images, texts, and line image edges.
Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.
Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color copy mode.
Used to adjust the color document reproducibility in the monochrome copy mode.
Used to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode.
Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
21
22
23
44
46
21
23
24
25
26
27
30
32
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Section
Paper feed
Paper feed
Image process
(Photoconductor/
Cleaning)
Process
Process
Process
Image process
(Photoconductor/
Cleaning)
Image process
(Photoconductor/
Developing)
Process (OPC drum,
development)/Fusing/LSU
Developing system
Process
Process
Process
Process
Process
Process
Process
Process
Process
Developing system
Main
46
Sub
45
47
51
52
60
61
62
48
49
50
63
74
1
5
6
1
3
1
2
5
6
7
10
12
20
21
22
51
53
55
56
60
61
62
24
27
28
1
2
6
7
8
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
3
4
1
2
3
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
Functions
Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode.
Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode.
(The set values of SIM46-51 are set to the default values.)
Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and
the auto exposure mode.
Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
Used to perform the firmware update.
Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
Copy image position, image loss adjustment
Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (This simulation is a simplified version of SIM
50-1).
Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (RSPF mode)
Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (RSPF mode). (This simulation is a simplified
version of SIM 50-6.)
Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position. (The adjustment is made
separately for each paper feed section.)
Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment. (The adjustment is made separately for each
scan mode.)
Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
Used to adjust the image registration. (Main scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto adjustment)/OPC drum
phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 50-20, 21, and 22.
Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary transport voltage.
Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF resist
roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image position on the
paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF document width.
Used to adjust the RSPF document size width sensor.
Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document scan position.
Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SRAM, and HDD (including user authentication data and address
data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB image memory (SDRAM).
Used to set the MFP PWB onboard SDRAM.
Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection.
Used to set the laser power.
Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit)
Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area).
Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation manual area)
Used to delete the job log data.
Used to delete the document filing data.
Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual area)
Section
Scanner section
RSPF
RSPF
LSU
Main
63
64
65
67
Sub
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
11
1
2
4
5
6
7
1
2
5
17
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
33
33
34
36
52
52
70
Functions
Used to display the shading correction result.
Used to perform shading.
Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment.
Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
Used to display the scan level and the density level of the copy color balance adjustment patch.
Used to register the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Used to set the default of the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Printer test print. (Self print) (256 gradations)
Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Used to print the adjustment pattern of the test print .(Self print). (The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is
printed.)
Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
Used to check the operation panel key input.
Printer reset
Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
Used to set the target color balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment.
Used to set the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment.
Used to set the default of the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment.
Used to set YES/NO of sending the machine calibration data and the half tone correction data to a client PC.
(For GDI printer)
Used to clear the printer calibration value.
Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. (for PCL/PS)
Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. (for GDI)
Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. (Support for the high density section
tone gap)
Used to adjust the density in the low density section.
Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. (for PCL/PS)
Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. (GDI)
MFP PWB SRAM data clear
Section
Scanner
Scanner
Operation panel section
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
MFP PWB
3.
Details of simulation
1-5
Operation test/check
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner

(reading) unit and the control circuit.
1-1
Scanner (reading)
Section
Purpose
Operation/Procedure

(reading) unit and the control circuit.
1)
Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
2)
Scanner (reading)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan

resolution (operation speed).
1)
Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
2)

Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the
scan resolution (operation speed).
Item/Display
OC SCAN
300DPI
Operation mode
300DPI
(346.0mm/s)
400DPI
(259.5mm/s)
600DPI
(173.0mm/s)
1200DPI
(86.5mm/s)
400DPI
600DPI
1200DPI
Item/Display
OC SCAN
300DPI
Operation mode
300DPI
(346.0mm/s)
400DPI
(259.5mm/s)
600DPI
(173.0mm/s)
1200DPI
(86.5mm/s)
400DPI
Default value
300DPI
(346.0mm/s)
600DPI
1200DPI
Default value
300DPI
(346.0mm/s)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6&$11(5&+(&.
2&6&$1
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
300DPI
'3,
'3,
'3,

&/26(
6&$11(5&+(&.
2&6&$1
300DPI
'3,
'3,
'3,
(;(&87(

(;(&87(
1-2
2-1
Purpose
Section
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner

(reading) section and the related circuits.
Scanner (reading)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto

document feed unit and the control circuit.
RSPF
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
The operating status of the sensor is displayed.
1)
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home position.
Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
key.
2)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit operations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (operation speed).
6&$11(56(1625&+(&.
MHPS
Item/Display
(SINGLE)
300DPI
400DPI
600DPI
(DOUBLE)

300DPI
400DPI
600DPI
Operation mode
300DPI
(259.5mm/s)
400DPI
(259.5mm/s)
600DPI
(173.0 mm/s)
300DPI
(259.5mm/s)
400DPI
(259.5mm/s)
600DPI
(173.0 mm/s)
Default value
300DPI
(259.5mm/s)
300DPI
(259.5mm/s)
2-3

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
63)$*,1*
63)6&$1
'3,
300DPI
'3,
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads

in the auto document feed unit and the control circuit.
RSPF
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel
key.
2)

The selected load performs the operation.
(;(&87(
'28%/(
SINGLE
2-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the document
feed unit section and the control circuits.
Section
SPFM
SPRM_F
SPRM_R
SPFC
SRRC
SGS
STMPS
RSPF transport motor

RSPF paper feed reverse motor (normal rotation)
RSPF paper feed reverse motor (reverse rotation)
RSPF paper feed clutch
RSPF document exit gate solenoid
Finish stamp solenoid
RSPF
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
are highlighted.
SSET
SOCD
SCOV
SPED
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPLS1
SPLS2
STMPU
SWD_LEN
SWD_AD
RSPF installation detection

RSPF open/close detector
RSPF cover open/close detector
RSPF document empty detector
RSPF document pass detector 1
(Paper enter detection)
(Resist roller front document transport detection)
RSPF document pass detector 3 (Document scanning
front document transport detection)
(Reverse gate front document transport detection)
(Document reverse rear document transport detection)
RSPF document length detector 1 (Short)
RSPF document length detector 2 (Long)
SPF stamp unit installation detector
RSPF guide plate position
RSPF document width sensor (volume) output level

63)6(1625&+(&.6:'B/(1 6('B$'
66(7
62&'
6&29
63('
633'
633'
633'
633'
63/6
63/6
67038
&/26(
63)287387&+(&.
63)0
6350B)
63 50B5
63)&
655&
6*6
67036
(;(&87(

3
3-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and
the control circuit.
Finisher
Operation/Procedure
&/26(
633'

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Section
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

are highlighted.
<Inner finisher>

FED
FBED
FULD
FMLLD
FLLD
FSLD1
FSLD2
FRLD
FBRD
FFJHPD
FRJHPD
FJPD
FSTPD
FSHPD
FSTHPD
Entry port paper detection (Status detection "1")

Tray paper detection
Tray upper limit detection
Tray intermediate lower limit detection
Tray lower limit detection
Paper surface detection 1
Paper surface detection 2
Roller up/down detection
Belt separation detection
Alignment HP detection front
Alignment HP detection rear
Alignment guide position detection
Staple tray paper detection
Staple drive HP detection
Staple shift HP detection
FSD
FSTD
FDSW
FFANLK
FPRPD
FPUC
FPHPD
FPSHPD
FPPD1
FPPD2
FPPD3
FPPD4
FPPD5
FPPD6
FPDD
FPPEND
FPDES1
FPDES2
Staple empty detection

Staple lead edge position detection
Door open detection
Fan motor lock detection
Punch rear position detection (Status detection "1")
Punch unit connection detection
Punch HP detection
Punch side resist HP detection
Punch paper surface detection 1
Punch dust detection
Punch paper rear edge detection
Punch destination detection 1
Punch destination detection 2
<Saddle stitch finisher>

FATPD
FPMRS
PDPPD1
PDPPD2
PDCS
FTULD
FTLLD
FTLMRS
FPLD
FPPD1
FSHS
FSLS
FSSSW1
FSED
FPDFS
FDTPD
FPD
FPCHPS
FPHPS
FTPS
FFL
FSSHPS
FPAPHS_F
FPAPHS_R
FPTS
FPES1
FPES2
FPES3
FPES4
FSMRS
FPPD2
FSPHS
FSTPD
FSSW1
FCD1
FCD2
FDRHS
FPPD3
FSATPD
FSSSW2
FPHHD
FGHPS
FSAPHS
FSPGHS
FSRHS
FPDD
FSSHS
FSSES
FSSCS
FPPS
FCD
FSSSHS
Paper alignment tray paper detector

Punch motor rotation sensor
Paper pass paper transport detector 1
Paper pass paper transport detector 2
Paper pass cover Open/Close sensor
Tray upper limit detector
Tray lower limit detector
Tray lift motor rotation sensor
Paper surface detector
Paper delivery detector 1
Staple home position sensor
Staple lead edge sensor
Staple safety switch
Staple empty detector
Punch dust sensor
Delivery tray paper detector
Punch unit detection (connector)
Punch home position sensor
Punch unit home position sensor
Tray position sensor
Fan lock signal
Stapler shift home position sensor
Paper alignment plate home position sensor F
Paper alignment plate home position sensor R
Punch timing sensor
Punch paper edge sensor 1
Saddle motor rotation sensor
Paper transport detector 2
Saddle plate home position sensor
Saddle exit tray paper detector
Safety switch 1
Cover detector 1
Cover detector 2
Delivery roller home position sensor
Paper transport detector 3
Saddle paper alignment tray paper detector
Stapler safety switch 2
Paper hold home position sensor
Gripper home position sensor
Saddle alignment plate home position sensor
Saddle paper guide home position sensor
Saddle roller home position sensor
Delivery detector
Saddle staple home position sensor
Saddle staple sensor
Saddle staple cover sensor
Punch paper position sensor
Finisher connection detector
Finisher saddle stapler shift home position sensor

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
),16(1625&+(&.
3'33'
&/26(
3'33'
3'&6
)33'
)3$3+6B)
)3$3+6B5
)$73'
)*+36
)'73'
)3/'
)33'
)63+6
)673'
)6056
)78/'
)7//'
)7/056
)6+6
)66+36
)6('
)6/6
)736
)&'
)&'
)66:
)&'
)666:
))/
)'5+6
)33'
)6$73'
)666:
)3++'
)6$3+6
)63*+6
)65+6
)3''
)66+6
)66(6
)66&6
)666+6

3-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in

the finisher and the control circuit.
Finisher
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel

key.
2)

<Inner finisher>
FINRPS
FSLS
FPDS
FBRS
FRM
FSWM
FAM
FFJM
FRJM
FSM
FFSM
FTLM
FFANM
FPNM
FPSM
Entry port reverse pass solenoid

Paper surface detection solenoid
Paddle solenoid
Belt separation solenoid
Registration motor
Oscillation motor
Bundle exit paper exit motor
Alignment motor front
Alignment motor rear
Staple shift motor
Staple motor
Tray lift motor
Fan motor
Punch motor
Punch side resist motor

FPTM1
FPAM-F
FSSM
FTLM
FSM
FPM
FPSM
FPAM-R
PDPGS
PDPTM
PDCF
FPTM2
FDRLM
FSDM
FGM
FSPTM
FSPAM
FSPM
FSDSM
FPHS1
FPHS2
Paper transport motor 1

Paper alignment motor F
Stapler shift motor
Tray lift motor
Staple motor
Punch motor
Punch shift motor
Paper alignment motor R
Paper pass paper gate solenoid
Paper pass paper transport motor
Paper pass cooling fan
Paper transport motor 2
Finisher paper exit roller lift motor
Saddle motor
Gripper motor
Saddle paper transport motor
Saddle paper alignment motor
Saddle positioning motor
Saddle staple motor
Paper holding solenoid 1
Paper holding solenoid 2
Item/Display

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
),1/2$'&+(&.
3'3*6
3'370
3'&)
)370
)'5/0
)*0
)3$0)
)3$05
)660
)60
)7/0
)370
)6'0
)6370
)63$0
)630
)6'60
)3+6
)3+6
STAPLE BOTH
STAPLE
PITCH
PUNCH
CENTER
PUNCH HOLE
M
(;(&87(
SADDLE_ADJ
UST_POS
GRIPPER_PO
S

3-10
Purpose
Finisher
Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key on the touch
panel.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
<Inner finisher>
Item/Display
A
B
C
G
H
FRONT
ADJUST
REAR ADJUST
STAPLE REAR
STAPLE
FRONT
STAPLE BOTH
STAPLE
PITCH
PUNCH
CENTER
PUNCH HOLE
Content
Alignment position
adjustment (front)
Alignment position
adjustment (rear)
Staple binding position
adjustment
(one position at the rear)
adjustment
(one position in front)
adjustment (center position
of two positions binding)
adjustment (staple pitch of
two positions binding)
Punch center positioning
sensor
Punch hole adjustment
(paper transport direction)
Setting
range
2 - 18
Default
value
10
2 - 18
10
SADDLE
POSITION
FOLDING
POSITION
FRONT
ADJUST
REAR ADJUST
STAPLE REAR
STAPLE REAR
R
STAPLE
FRONT
STAPLE
FRONT R
B
C
35 - 62
50
35 - 65
50
30 - 60
50
35 - 65
50
35 - 65
50
In general, when the saddle binding position and the saddle folding positions are adjusted to the center by this simulation, the above trouble will not occur.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
68 - 132
100
$ 6$''/(326,7,21

68 - 132
&/26(
),1,6+(5$'-8670(17
% )2/',1*326,7,21
& )5217$'-867
' 5($5$'-867
100
( 67$3/(5($5
) 67$3/(5($55
* 67$3/()5217
68 - 132
100
+ 67$3/()52175
, 67$3/(%27+
- 67$3/(3,7&+
68 - 132
. 381&+&(17(5
100
/ 381&++2/(
2.
37 - 63
50
42 - 58
50
4
4-2

Item/Display
Punch hole position

adjustment
Saddle alignment position
adjustment
Gripper exit position
adjustment
Default
value
50
The saddle binding position adjustment and the saddle

folding position adjustment can be executed in the system
setting menu. However, the adjustments in the system setting are based on the adjustment value of this simulation.
If, therefore, the adjustment value of this simulation is set
to an extreme level, the adjustment range in the system
setting may be narrowed. (Adjustment range in the system
setting r5.0mm)
Operation/Procedure
1)

adjustment (two positions at
the center)
adjustment (two positions in
pitch)
Punch center adjustment
Setting
range
45 - 55
NOTE: "A: SADDLE POSITION (Saddle binding position adjustment)" and "B: FOLDING POSITION (Saddle folding position adjustment"
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.

Section
Content
Content
Saddle stitch position
adjustment
Saddle folding position
adjustment
Paper alignment position
adjustment (Front)
Paper alignment position
adjustment (Rear)
adjustment
(one position at the rear)
adjustment (one position at
the rear)
adjustment
(one position in front)
adjustment (one position in
front)
Purpose
Setting
range
25 - 75
Default
value
50
25 - 75
50
35 - 65
50
Operation/Procedure
35 - 65
50
25 - 75
50
45 - 75
50
25 - 75
50
25 - 55
50
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray, and the control circuit of those.
Section
Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
are highlighted.
<Desk>
DCSI1
DPFD1
DLUD1
DPED1
DCSPD1
DCSS11
DCSS12
DCSS13
DCSS14
Desk 1 installation detection

Desk 1 transport detection
Desk 1 upper limit detection
Desk 1 paper empty detection
Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detection
Desk 1 rear edge detection 1
DCSI2
DPFD2
DLUD2
DPED2
DCSPD2
DCSS21
DCSS22
DCSS23
DCSS24
DSW_DSK
Desk 2 installation detection

Desk 2 transport detection
Desk 2 upper limit detection
Desk 2 paper empty detection
Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detection
Desk transport cover open/close detection

'6./&&/2$'&+(&.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'3)0
'/80
'38&
'75&
'38&
'/80
<A4 LCC>
LPFD
LUD
LDD
LPED
LCD
LDSW
LRE
L24VM
LLSW
LTOD
LCC transport sensor

LCC tray upper limit sensor
LCC tray lower limit sensor
LCC tray paper empty sensor
LCC tray insertion detection
LCC upper open/close detection SW
LCC lift motor encoder sensor
LCC24V power monitor
LCC upper limit SW
LCC main unit connection detection
(;(&87(

4-5
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper

feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC)
and the LCC paper transport clutch (LTRC).
Paper feed desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Section
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
'6./&&6(1625&+(&.
'&6,
&/26(
'3)'
'/8'
'3('
'&63'
'&66
'&66
'&66
'&66
'&6,
'3)'
'/8'
'3('
'&63'
'&66
'&66
'&66
'&66
'6:B'6.
[Check the ON operation]

Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
highlighted.
[Check the OFF operation]
Press the highlighted button which is ON.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'(6./&&6<1&521,=,1*6,*1$/&+(&.

'75&
'75&2))
/75&
/75&2))
4-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads

in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and
the control circuit of those.
Section
Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
touch panel key.
2)

<Desk>
DPFM
DLUM1
DPUC1
DLUM2
DPUC2
DTRC
5
5-1
Desk main motor

Desk 1 lift-up motor
Desk 1 paper feed clutch
Desk 2 lift-up motor
Desk 2 paper feed clutch
Desk transport clutch
<A4 LCC>
LPFM
LLM
LPFC
LPFS
LTRC
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display

returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
display is maintained.
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,

LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Section
Operation panel
Operation/Procedure
The LCD is changed as shown below.
LCC transport motor

LCC lift motor
LCC paper feed clutch
LCC paper feed solenoid
LCC transport clutch
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX o
MIN o the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
checked.
5-3
Purpose
NO.05-01
SIMULATION
7(67

lamp and the control circuit.
Scanner (reading)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

key.
2)

The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
&23</$03&+(&.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
2&&23</$03
(;(&87(

5-2
5-4
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater

lamp and the control circuit.
Fusing
Section
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)

key.
Operation/Procedure
2)

The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.
Heater lamp operation check method:

Remove the rear cabinet, open the PWB holder, and the heater
lamp lighting status can be checked from the clearance between
the frames.
HL_UM
HL_US
HL_LM
HL_UW
Heater lamp upper main

Heater lamp upper sub
Heater lamp upper main (For warm-up)
Process
1)
Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
2)

The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec.
DL_K
DL_C
DL_M
DL_Y
Discharge lamp K
Discharge lamp C
Discharge lamp M
Discharge lamp Y

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
',6&+$5*(/$03&+(&.
'/B.
'/B&
'/B0
'/B<

6,08/$7,2112
&/26(
7(67
+($7(5/$03/2$'6(783
+/B80
+/B/0
+/B86
+/B8:
$//
(;(&87(

(;(&87(

6-2
Purpose
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in

the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

key.
2)
1)

key.
2)

Load operation check method:
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
Paper feed
LSU
Item/Display
PFM
RRM
POMF
POMR
FUM
CPFM
OSM
CPFC
1TURC
PCSS
WTNM
PTCHT
CLUM1
CPUC1
CLUM2
CPUC2
MPUC
MPFS
MPGS
LSUSS
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
)(('287387&+(&.
550

Load operation check method:
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
Item/Display
POFM
Content
Transport motor
Registration motor
Paper exit motor (normal rotation)
Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)
Fusing motor
Tray paper feed motor
Shifter motor
Primary transport separation clutch
PTC heater
Tray 1 lift-up motor
Tray 1 paper feed clutch
Tray 2 lift-up motor
Tray 2 paper feed clutch
Manual feed take-up solenoid
LSU shutter solenoid
3)0

Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
Section
Transport/
process
Others
Operation/Procedure
Paper transport/Paper exit section
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan

motor and its control circuit.
6-1
320)
OZFM
PSFM
CCFM
RCFM
FUFM
MFPFAN
Content
Paper exit cooling fan motor
(POFM_F and POFM_R are simultaneously ON.)
Ozone fan motor
(PSFM, PSFM2 are simultaneously ON.)
Process cooling fan motor
Fusing fan motor
Controller fan motor

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)$1/2$'6(783
32)0
2=)0
36)0
&&)0
5&)0
)8)0
0)3)$1
$//
(;(&87(

6-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the primary

transport unit and the control circuit.
3205
)80
&3)0
260
&3)&
785&
3&66
:710
37&+7
&/80
&38&
&/80
&38&
Operation/Procedure
038&
03)6
03*6
/6866
1)
Press [TC1] key to highlight it.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation. (Separation

operation is repeated in the sequence of BLACK o COLOR
o FREE,)
Process (Transport)
Section
(;(&87(

During this operation, the transport belt status (the operation mode
position) is displayed.
BLACK
COLOR
FREE
Monochrome mode
position
Color mode position
Non-transport
position
Monochrome mode position o Color

mode position o Non-transport
position o (Monochrome mode
position) The operation is repeated.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&/26(
$*,1*7(676(77,1*
75$16)(5/2$'&+(&.
326,7,21
7&
$*,1*
,17(59$/
0,6)(('',6$%/(
)86,1*',6$%/(
:$5083',6$%/(
'9&+(&.',6$%/(
6+$',1*',6$%/(
&&'*$,1)5((
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
6-6

7-6
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing

separation.
Fusing
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [FUSER] key to highlight it.
2)
Press [EXCUTE] key, and fusing pressure applying and fusing

pressure release are repeated.
During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is displayed.
Fusing pressure applying o Fusing
pressure release o (Fusing pressure
applying) The operation is repeated.
Fusing pressure
applying
Fusing pressure
release
FREE
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging

cycle.
Section
Operation/Procedure
PRINT
Setting
Purpose
1)
Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10key.
2)
Press [OK] key.

The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained hereafter unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
,17(59$/$*,1*&<&/(7,0(6(783
$ &<&/(7,0(6(&
&/26(
)86(5/2$'&+(&.
326,7,21

2.
)86(5
(;(&87(
7-8
Purpose
Operation display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.

Section
7-1
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of

aging.
Section
Others
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
warm-up is displayed
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the target to be set with the touch panel key.
2)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
:$50837,0(',63/$<6(77,1*
6(&21'6
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.

AGING
INTERVAL
MISFEED DISABLE
FUSING DISABLE
WARMUP DISABLE
DV CHECK DISABLE
SHADING DISABLE
CCD GAIN FREE
Aging operation setup

Intermittent setup
JAM detection enable/disable setup
Fusing operation enable/disable setup
Warm-up skip setup
DV unit detection enable/disable setup
Shading disable setup
No setting of the CCD gain adjustment
(;(&87(
7-9
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode

(Used to check the copy operation and the
image quality for each color).
8-1
Purpose
Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of

the developing voltage in each print mode
and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the copy color with the touch panel key.

(Two or more colors can be selected.)
2)
Section
Copying is performed with the selected color.
Operation/Procedure
The key of the selected color is highlighted.
When [CLOSE] key is pressed, the display goes into the copy operation menu in the simulation mode.
K
C
M
Y
Setup/cancel of black
Setup/cancel of cyan
Setup/cancel of magenta
Setup/cancel of yellow
1)
2)
Select a target item to be adjusted with [n] [p] buttons.
3)
Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
4)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
35,17,1*&2/256(/(&7&2/2502'(
&
Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch

panel.
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each

item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.


The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
<
Key
Item/Display
MIDDLE
(;(&87(

7-12
Purpose
MIDDLE SPEED
DVB_K
MIDDLE SPEED
DVB_C
MIDDLE SPEED
DVB_M
MIDDLE SPEED
DVB_Y
LOW SPEED
DVB_K
LOW SPEED
DVB_C
LOW SPEED
DVB_M
LOW SPEED
DVB_Y
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets

setting (for aging operation)
Section
LOW
RSPF
Operation/Procedure
1)
Set document reading quantity with 10-key.

(Setting range:0 - 255)
2)
Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
Content
K developing bias
set value at middle
speed
C developing bias
set value at middle
speed
M developing bias
set value at middle
speed
Y developing bias
set value at middle
speed
K developing bias
set value at low
speed
C developing bias
set value at low
speed
M developing bias
set value at low
speed
Y developing bias
set value at low
speed
Setting
range
0-600
0-600
0-600
0-600
0-600
0-600
0-600
0-600

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
25,*,1$/66(77,1*

$ 25,*,1$/6
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387

$ 0,''/(63((''9%B.

% 0,''/(63((''9%B&

& 0,''/(63((''9%B0
' 0,''/(63((''9%B<
2.
0,''/(
/2:
(;(&87(
2.
8-2
Purpose
Key
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of

the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit. *When
the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed
are also adjusted simultaneously.
MIDDLE
Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch

panel.
2)
Select a target item to be adjusted with [n] [p] keys.
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified

on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
LOW/
HIGH
A
B
C

4)

The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
Content
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_K
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_C
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_M
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_Y
LOW SPEED
GB_K
LOW SPEED
GB_C
LOW SPEED
GB_M
LOW SPEED
GB_Y
Operation/Procedure
1)
A
B
Process (Charging)
Section
Item/Display
K charging/grid bias set

value at middle speed
C charging/grid bias set
M charging/grid bias set
Y charging/grid bias set
K charging/grid bias set
value at low speed
C charging/grid bias set
value at low speed
M charging/grid bias set
value at low speed
Y charging/grid bias set
value at low speed
Adjust
ment
range
150 850
150 850
150 850
150 850
150 850
150 850
150 850
150 850

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$ 0,''/(63(('*%B.

% 0,''/(63(('*%B&
& 0,''/(63(('*%B0

' 0,''/(63(('*%B<
0,''/(
/2:
(;(&87(
2.
8-6
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of

the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Process (Transport)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Enter the default value specified on the following list.

The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
TC1 LOW SPEED CL K

TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K
TC1 LOW SPEED CL C
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C
TC1 LOW SPEED CL M
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M
TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y
TC1 LOW SPEED BW K
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K
TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
TC2 PLAIN CL DPX
TC2 PLAIN BW SPX
TC2 PLAIN BW DPX
TC2 HEAVY CL SPX
TC2 HEAVY CL DPX
TC2 HEAVY BW SPX
TC2 HEAVY BW DPX
Content
Primary transport
bias reference
value
Color
K
C
M
Y
Black/White
Secondary
transport bias
reference value
Color
K
Standard
paper
Black/White
Color
Black/White
Heavy
paper
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Setting
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
80
109
80
109
80
109
80
109
80
109
130
120
99
99
78
78
78
68
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 30PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
Default value
of actual
output value
6PA
10PA
6PA
10PA
6PA
10PA
6PA
10PA
6PA
10PA
40PA
35PA
25PA
25PA
15PA
15PA
15PA
10PA
Setting
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
51 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
78
68
78
78
63
0
0
85
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
2PA 100PA
0V -1500V
0V -1500V
0V -1500V
Default value
of actual
output value
15PA
10PA
15PA
15PA
8PA
0V
0V
-500V
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
1 - 255
1 - 255
1 - 255
1 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
100
100
100
100
184
184
184
131
93
149
149
149
0V 4KV
0V 4KV
0V 4KV
0V 4KV
0.5KHz 2KHz
0.5KHz 2KHz
0.5KHz 2KHz
0.5KHz 2KHz
0V 2KV
0V 2KV
0V 2KV
0V 2KV
2.5KV
2.5KV
2.5KV
2.5KV
0.5KHz
0.5KHz
0.5KHz
0.5KHz
-1.0KV
-1.4KV
-1.4KV
-1.4KV
0: OFF
1-6: Environment conditions
0-6
0: OFF
10: Lighting-up fully
0 - 10
Item/Display
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
TC2 OHP CL
TC2 OHP BW
TC2 ENVELOPE CL
TC2 ENVELOPE BW
TC2 CLEANING
TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD
TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD
TC2 CLEAN CLEANING
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
AG
AH
AI
AJ
AK
AL
AM
VPTC LOW SPEED CL

VPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL
VPTC LOW SPEED BK
VPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK
FPTC LOW SPEED CL
FPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL
FPTC LOW SPEED BK
FPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK
DCPTC LOW SPEED CL
DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL
DCPTC LOW SPEED BK
DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED
BK
PTC_HT
AN
HT_DUTY
Content
Secondary
transport bias
reference value
Secondary
transport cleaning
bias reference
value
PTC applied
voltage control (AC
constant voltage
setting)
PTC applied
voltage control
(frequency setting
value)
PTC applied
voltage control
(DC constant
voltage setting
value)
PTC heater
operating
environment
setting
Setting of the
supply power in
PTC heater
constant operation
(Duty ratio setting)
Color
Black/White
Color
Black/White
Cleaning process
In low speed print
In middle speed print
Cleaning
Color
Black/White
Color
Black/White
Color
Black/White

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
OHP
Envelope
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
In low speed
In middle speed
Always ON
0% 100%
50%
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 7&/2:63(('&/.

9-2
% 7&0,''/(63(('&/.
& 7&/2:63(('&/&
Purpose
' 7&0,''/(63(('&/&
( 7&/2:63(('&/0
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse
section (duplex section) and its control circuit.
) 7&0,''/(63(('&/0
* 7&/2:63(('&/<
+ 7&0,''/(63(('&/<
, 7&/2:63(('%:.
- 7&0,''/(63(('%:.
. 7&3/$,1&/63;
Section
/ 7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87(
2.
Duplex
Operation/Procedure
are highlighted.
DSW_ADU
APPD1
APPD2

ADU transport detection 1
ADU transport detection 2

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
$'86(1625&+(&.
'6:B$'8
&/26(
$33'
$33'

9-3
Purpose

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
721(502725$&7,9$7,21
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in

the paper reverse section (duplex section)
and its control circuit.
710B.
710B&
710B0
710B<
Duplex
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

key.
2)

(;(&87(


ADUM_L
ADU motor lower
13
$'8/2$'&+(&.
$'80B/

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
13-Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
(;(&87(
&/26(
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21

10
10-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner

supply mechanism (toner motor) and the
related circuit.
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
When [ALL ] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the

toner cartridges.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
unit, resulting in overtoner.
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner cartridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by making a few black background copy in the single color copy
mode of the target color.
TNM_K
TNM_C
TNM_M
TNM_Y
<(6
12
(;(&87(
14
Section
$5(<28685("
14-Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/

U2/LCC/PF troubles.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
7528%/(&$1&(//$7,2127+(5
Toner motor K
Toner motor C
Toner motor M
Toner motor Y
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
15
17
15--
17--
Purpose
Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large

capacity paper feed tray) trouble.
Section
Purpose
LCC
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.

Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
1)
2)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3)7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
&/26(
/&&7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
$5(<28685("
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
<(6
12
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
21
16
21-1
16-Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.

MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Section
Setting
Purpose
Purpose
2)
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance

counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing cleaning roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not
clarify.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
1)
Select a target item of setting with [n] [p] key on the touch
panel.
&/26(
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
2)
3)

Item/Display
A
B
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
MAINTENANCE
COUNTER
(TOTAL)
MAINTENANCE
COUNTER
(COLOR)
Content
Setting range
Maintenance
counter
(Total)
Maintenance
counter
(Color)
0
: Default
1 - 300: 1K - 300K
999
: Free
0
: Default
1 - 300: 1K - 300K
999
: Free
Default
value
100K
60K

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0$,17(1$1&(&<&/(6(783
$ 0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5727$/

% 0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5&2/25

2.
TC2 BELT RANGE
22
TC2 BELT DAY
22-1
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/

Check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each

section and each operation mode.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
TOTAL OUT (COL)

TOTAL (BW)
Total output quantity of

black and white
Total output quantity of
color
Total use quantity of black
and white
TOTAL (COL)
Total use quantity of full

color
TOTAL (2COL)
Total use quantity of 2-color
TOTAL (3COL)
Total use quantity of 3-color
TOTAL
(SGL_COL)
COPY (BW)
COPY (COL)
COPY (2COL)
Total use quantity of single

color
Black and white copy
counter
Full color copy counter
2-color copy counter
COPY (SGL_COL)
Single color copy counter
PRINT (BW)
PRINT (COL)
Black and white print

counter
Full color print counter
PRINT (2COL)
2-color print counter
PRINT (3COL)
3-color print counter
PRINT (SGL_COL)
Single color print counter
DOC FIL (BW)

DOC FIL (COL)
DOC FIL (2COL)
DOC FIL
(SGL COL)
OTHER (BW)
OTHER (COL)
MAINTENANCE
ALL
MAINTENANCE
COL
TC1 BELT
TC1 BELT RANGE
TC1 BELT DAY

TC2 BELT
Black and white document

filing print counter
Color document filing print
counter
2-color document filing
print counter
Single color document filing
print counter
Black and white other
counter
Color other counter
Maintenance counter
(Total)
Maintenance counter
(Color)
Primary transport unit print
counter
Primary transport unit
accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
Use day of primary
transport unit (Day)
Secondary transport unit
print counter
DRUM LIFE (C)

DRUM LIFE (M)
Change the display page with [n] [p] key on the touch panel.
TOTAL OUT (BW)
FUSER UNIT
FUSER ACUM
DAY
DRUM LIFE (K)
All prints including

jams
All prints including
jams
Effective paper
(including self print,
excluding jams)
Effective paper
excluding jams)
Effective paper
excluding jams)
Effective paper
excluding jams)
Effective paper
excluding jams)
Billing target
(excluding self print)
Billing target
Billing target
Billing target
Billing target
Billing target
Billing target
Billing target
Billing target
Billing target
Billing target
Billing target
Billing target
Self print quantity
DRUM LIFE (Y)

DEVE LIFE (K)
DEVE LIFE (C)
DEVE LIFE (M)
DEVE LIFE (Y)
PTC
Secondary transport unit

accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
Use day of secondary
transport unit (Day)
Fusing unit print counter
Use day of fusing unit
(Day)
Accumulated number of
drum rotations K (%)
drum rotations C (%)
drum rotations M (%)
drum rotations Y (%)
developer rotations K (%)
developer rotations C (%)
developer rotations M (%)
developer rotations Y (%)
PTC counter

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&2817(5',63/$<
727$/287%:
35,17&2/
727$/287&2/
35,17&2/
727$/%:
35,176&/B&2/
727$/&2/
'2&),/%:
727$/&2/
'2&),/&2/
727$/&2/
'2&),/&2/
727$/6*/B&2/
'2&),/6*/&2/
&23<%:
27+(5%:
&23<&2/
27+(5&2/
&23<&2/
0$,17(1$1&($//
&23<6*/B&2/
0$,17(1$1&(&2/
35,17%:
7&%(/7
35,17&2/
7&%(/75$1*(

22-2
Purpose
Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total numbers of misfeed

and troubles. (When the number of total
jam is considerably great, it is judged as
necessary for repair.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
-$07528%/(&2817(5',63/$<
0$&+,1(-$0
563)'63)-$0
7528%/(
Self print quantity

22-3
22-5
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the

misfeed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this
data is possible.
Purpose
Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each

unit (section).
Section
Firmware
Operation/Procedure
Section
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
*For the list of the jam codes, Refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12]
OTHERS.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$<
33'B1&3)'B60)775$<
33'B1&3)'B633'B1'3)'B1
/&&33'B35,'3)'B1/&&
32'B633'B35,75$<)3''B6
)'230)7

22-4
Purpose
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.

When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
S/N
ICU (MAIN)
ICU (BOOT)
LANGUAGE
GRAPHIC
IMG DATA ROM
COLOR PROFILE
PCU
SCU
FAX (MAIN)
FAX2 (MAIN)
DESK
LCC
FINISHER
PUNCH
NIC
POWER-CON
E-MANUAL
ESCP
PDL
Serial No.
ICU (Main section)
ICU (Boot section)
Language support data version
Graphic data for LCD
MFP ASIC Flash ROM data
Color profile
PCU
SCU
FAX (main section)
FAX 2-Line (Main section) (Japan only)
Desk unit
Side LCC
Finisher
Punch unit
NIC
Power controller
Operation manual (HDD storage)
ESCP font ROM
PDL font ROM
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Section
&/26(
61
,&80$,1
Operation/Procedure
381&+
,&8%227
1,&
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.

(The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
/$1*8$*(
32:(5&21
*5$3+,&
(0$18$/
,0*'$7$520
(6&3
* For the list of the trouble codes: Refer to "2. Trouble code list" in
tht "[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE".
&2/25352),/(
3'/
3&8
6&8
)$;0$,1121(
)$;0$,1121(
'(6.121(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
/&&
&/26(
),1,6+(5
7528%/(&2'('$7$',63/$<
())/

)/))
)/))
22-6
))+(
8)/(
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data

(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the
firmware version, and the counter list.
Section

Operation/Procedure
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
1)
Select the print list mode with 10-key.

Item/Display
A
DATA PATTERN
Print list
mode
1
2
3
2)
Print content
Firmware version,
counter data, etc.
SIM50-24 data
Data related to the process
control
Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step

1) .

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'$7$35,1702'(
&/26(
3$3(5)(('&2817(5',63/$<
75$<
$ '$7$3$77(51

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
75$<

75$<
75$<
0)7727$/
0)7+($9<
0)72+3
0)7(19
/&&
$'8
(;(&87(
2.

22-8
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations

(counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF,
and the scan (reading) unit.
22-10
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration

(option, internal hardware).
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
The counter values of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scanner
related counters are displayed.
The system configuration is displayed.
SPF
SCAN
STAPLER
PUNCHER
STAMP
SADDLE STAPLER
SADDLE V FOLD
COVER
HP_ON
OC LAMP TIME
Document feed quantity

Number of times of scan
Staple counter
Puncher counter
Stamp counter
Saddle staple counter
Saddle finisher V fold counter
Cover open/close counter
Number of scanner HP detection
Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section
(* hour * minutes)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
(The model names of the installed devices and options are displayed.)
MACHINE
SPF
STAMP
DESK
LCC
PUNCHER
&/26(
FINISHER
25*67$3/(&2817(5',63/$<
63)
6&$1
FAX
NETWORK SCANNER
67$3/(5
381&+(5
67$03
6$''/(67$3/(5
PRINTER
6$''/(9)2/'
&29(5
+3B21
PS
XPS
SECURITY
2&/$037,0(
MX-2600G
MX-3100G
MX-2600N
MX-3100N
MX-RPX2
STANDARD
AR-SU1
MX-DEX6
MX-DEX7
MX-LCX1
MX-PNX1A
MX-PNX5A
MX-FNX9
MX-FN10
MX-FXX2
MX-NSX1/
STANDARD
MX-PBX3/
STANDARD
MX-PKX1
MX-PUX1
MX-FR10U

MX-FR10
22-9
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print

quantity) of each paper feed section.
Section
Paper feed, ADU, LCC
Operation/Procedure
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT TOTAL
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
MFT ENV
LCC
ADU
Tray 1 paper feed counter

Manual paper feed counter (Total)
Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC)
ADU paper feed counter
(Paper reverse section)
AIM
MX-AMX1
SDRAM (SYS)
SDRAM (ICU)
HDD
BARCODE
INTERNET-FAX
ACM
*****MB
*****MB
*****MB
AR-PF1
MX-FWX1
MX-AMX2
EAM
MX-AMX3
Main unit
Automatic document
feeder
Finish stamp
Desk unit
Large capacity tray
(LCC)
Punch unit
Finisher
FAX kit
Network scanner
expansion kit
Printer expansion kit
PS expansion kit
XPS expansion kit
Security kit (DSK)
commercial version
Security kit (DSK)
authentication version
Application
integration module
SDRAM capacity
SDRAM capacity
Hard disk capacity
Bar code font
I-Fax expansion kit
Application
communication
module
External account
module

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0$&+,1(6<67(0

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
63)-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$<
0$&+,1(0;*
360;3.;

63)0;53;
;360;38;

67$03$568
6(&85,7<0;)58

'(6.0;'(;
$,00;$0;

/&&0;/&;
6'5$06<60%

381&+(50;31;$
6'5$0,&80%

),1,6+(50;)1;
+''0%

)$;0;);;
1,&67$1'$5'

)$;0;)/;
%$5&2'($53)

)$;0(025<$500
)217$53)

+$1'6(70;+1;
,17(51(7)$;0;):;

1(7:25.6&$11(50;16;
9(1'25&96+

35,17(50;3%;

22-11

22-13
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/

receive) of FAX.
(Only when FAX is installed)
Section
FAX
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the

process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge).
Section
Process
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
are displayed.
The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are
displayed.
FAX OUTPUT
FAX OUTPUT_L2
FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)

FAX print quantity counter (for line 2)
(Japan only)
FAX send counter
FAX receive counter
FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
(Japan only)
FAX send time
FAX receive time
Number of carrier prefix adding
communications
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND IMAGES
SEND IMAGES_L2
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
ACR SEND
DRUM CTRG K
DRUM CTRG C
DRUM CTRG M
DRUM CTRG Y
DRUM RANGE K
DRUM RANGE C
DRUM RANGE M
DRUM RANGE Y

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)$;&2817(5',63/$<
)$;287387
)$;287387B/
)$;6(1'
)$;5(&(,9('
6(1',0$*(6
6(1',0$*(6B/
DRUM DAY K
DRUM DAY C
DRUM DAY M
DRUM DAY Y
DEVE CTRG K
DEVE CTRG C
DEVE CTRG M
DEVE CTRG Y
DEVE RANGE K
6(1'7,0(
DEVE RANGE C
5(&(,9('7,0(
$&56(1'
DEVE RANGE M

22-12
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions

and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as
necessary for repair.)
Section
DEVE RANGE Y
DEVE DAY K
DEVE DAY C
DEVE DAY M
DEVE DAY Y
TONER MOTOR K
TONER MOTOR C
TONER MOTOR M
TONER MOTOR Y
TONER TURN K
RSPF
Operation/Procedure
TONER TURN C
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
TONER TURN M
*For the list of the jam codes, Refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12]
OTHERS.
TONER TURN Y
Drum cartridge print counter (K)

Drum cartridge print counter (C)
Drum cartridge print counter (M)
Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (K)
(cm) (C)
(cm) (M)
(cm) (Y)
Number of day that used drum (Day) K
Number of day that used drum (Day) C
Number of day that used drum (Day) M
Number of day that used drum (Day) Y
Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Developer cartridge print counter (C)
Developer cartridge print counter (M)
Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling
distance (cm) (K)
distance (cm) (C)
distance (cm) (M)
distance (cm) (Y)
Number of day that used developer (Day) K
Number of day that used developer (Day) C
Number of day that used developer (Day) M
Number of day that used developer (Day) Y
Toner motor print counter (K)
Toner motor print counter (C)
Toner motor print counter (M)
Toner motor print counter (Y)
Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec)
(K)
(C)
(M)
(Y)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
352&(66&$575,'*(',63/$<
'580&75*.
'(9(&75*.
'580&75*&
'(9(&75*&
'580&75*0
'(9(&75*0
'580&75*<
'(9(&75*<
'5805$1*(.
'(9(5$1*(.
'5805$1*(&
'(9(5$1*(&
'5805$1*(0
'(9(5$1*(0
'5805$1*(<
'(9(5$1*(<
'580'$<.
'(9('$<.
'580'$<&
'(9('$<&
'580'$<0
'(9('$<0
'580'$<<
'(9('$<<
22-90
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Change the display with [n] [p] key.
2)
Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
All setting list

Printer test page

22-19
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters

related to the scan - image send.
5GEVKQP
Address registration
list (*)
Operation/Procedure
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner
NET SCN ORG_B/W
NET SCN ORG_CL
NET SCN ORG_2CL
NET SCN ORG_SGL
INTERNET FAX
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX SEND
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX SEND
MAIL COUNTER
FTP COUNTER
SMB SEND
USB CNT
TRIAL MODE_B&C
SCAN TO HDD_B/W
SCAN TO HDD_CL
SCAN TO HDD_2CL
SCAN TO HDD_SGL
Network scanner document read quantity

counter (B/W scan job)
counter (Color scan job)
counter (2-Color scan job)
counter (Single-color scan job)
Number of internet FAX output
Number of internet FAX sending page
Number of internet FAX receive
Number of internet FAX send
Number of times of E-MAIL send
Number of FTP send
Number of SMB send
Number of times of USB storage
Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (SINGLE color)
Document filing list

System setting list
Receive rejection
number table
Receive rejection/
allow address
domain table
To Email
Transfer table list
To administrator
Transfer list
Web setting list
Meta data set list
ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST

PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
PS FONT LIST
PS KANJI FONT LIST
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
NIC PAGE
INDIVIDUAL LIST
GROUP LIST
PROGRAM LIST
MEMORY BOX LIST
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
INBOUND ROUTING LIST

DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
WEB SETTING LIST
METADATA SET LIST
* When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK

model, this setting is invalid.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/,6735,17
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
$//&867206(77,1*/,67
3&/6<0%2/6(7/,67
3&/,17(51$/)217/,67
3&/(;7(1'(')217/,67

36)217/,67
36.$1-,)217/,67
&/26(
36(;7(1'(')217/,67
1,&3$*(
,1',9,'8$//,67
*5283/,67
1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5',63/$<
1(76&125*B%:
352*5$0/,67
0(025<%2;/,67
1(76&125*B&/
$//6(1',1*$''5(66/,67
'2&80(17),/,1*)2/'(5/,67
1(76&125*B&/
$'0,16(77,1*6/,67&23<
$'0,16(77,1*6/,6735,17
1(76&125*B6*/
$'0,16(77,1*6/,67,0$*(6(1'
$'0,16(77,1*6/,67'2&),/,1*
,17(51(7)$;287387
$'0,16(77,1*6/,676(&85,7<
$'0,16(77,1*6/,67&20021
,17(51(7)$;6(1'287387
$//$'0,1,675$7256(77,1*6/,67
$17,-81.)$;180%(5/,67
,17(51(7)$;5(&(,9(
$17,-81.0$,/'20$,11$0(/,67
,1%281'5287,1*/,67
,17(51(7)$;6(1'
(;(&87(
0$,/&2817(5
)73&2817(5
60%6(1'
86%&17
75,$/02'(B% &

23

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'$7$35,1702'(3$3(5)(('
3$3(5)(('7,0(/,67
23-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of

paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
troubles of misfeed is considerably great,
the judgment is made that repair is
required.)
Section
(;(&87(
Operation/Procedure

Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
24
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
-$07528%/('$7$35,1702'(
35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(-$07528%/(35,17
24-1
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.
(;(&87(
MACHINE
RSPF
TROUBLE
23-80
Purpose
The target counter is cleared.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed

and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper transport section. Used
to output the list of the operation status of
the sensor and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the paper transport section.
Section
Machine JAM counter

RSPF JAM counter
Trouble counter

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
-$07528%/(&2817(5'$7$&/($5
0$&+,1(
563)
7528%/(
Paper feed, Paper transport
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
paper transport is outputted.
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors
in the paper feed and transport section.
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sensor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ.
SECTION
STANDARD
CURRENT (*1)
PREVIOUS (*1)
MAXIMUM (*1)
MINIMUM (*1)
Operation content (Trigger name - Detection

operation or load operation name)
Reference value (ms)
Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the
final paper
Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job
on the final paper
Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list
has no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the market.
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

24-2
Purpose
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT TOTAL
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
MFT ENV
LCC
ADU

Manual paper feed counter (Total)
Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC)
ADU paper feed counter

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3$3(5)(('&2817(5&/($5
75$<
75$<
75$<
75$<
0)7727$/
0)7+($9<
0)72+3
0)72+3
/&&
$'8
$5(<28685("
MAINTENANCE ALL
MAINTENANCE COL
TC1 BELT
TC1 BELT RANGE
Maintenance counter (Total)

Maintenance counter (Color)
Primary transport unit print counter
Primary transport unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
Use day of primary transport unit (Day)
Secondary transport unit print counter
Secondary transport unit accumulated
traveling distance (cm)
Use day of secondary transport unit (Day)
Fusing unit print counter
Use day of fusing unit (Day)
PTC counter
TC1 BELT DAY

TC2 BELT
TC2 BELT RANGE
<(6
12
(;(&87(

TC2 BELT DAY

FUSER UNIT
FUSER ACUM DAY
PTC

24-3
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Purpose
Data clear
&/26(
0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5&/($5
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the

scan (reading) unit counter.
0$,17(1$1&($//
0$,17(1$1&(&2/
7&%(/7
7&%(/75$1*(
7&%(/7'$<
7&%(/7
7&%(/75$1*(
7&%(/7'$<
)86(581,7
)86(5$&80'$<
37&
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

SPF
SCAN
STAPLER
PUNCHER
STAMP
SADDLE STAPLER
SADDLE V FOLD
COVER
HP_ON
OC LAMP TIME
$5(<28685("
RSPF document feed counter

Scan counter
Staple counter
Puncher counter
Stamp counter
Saddle staple counter
Saddle finisher V fold counter
Cover open/close counter
HP detection count
OC section lamp total lighting time
67$3/(5
381&+(5
67$03
6$''/(67$3/(5
6$''/(9)2/'
&29(5
+3B21
2&/$037,0(
Data clear
Section
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared

automatically.
Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Number of day that used developer (Day) K
Developer cartridge print counter (C)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
Number of day that used developer (Day) C
Developer cartridge print counter (M)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Number of day that used developer (Day) M
Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
Number of day that used developer (Day) Y
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

24-4
Purpose

Operation/Procedure
25*287387&2817(5'$7$&/($5
6&$1
(;(&87(
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After

replacement of developer, clear the
counter.)
&/26(
63)
12
24-5
Purpose

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
<(6
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the

printer counters of the transport unit and
the fusing unit. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'(9(/23(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5
.
&
<
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

24-6
24-9
Data clear
Purpose
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter

and the self print mode print counter.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
Operation/Procedure
2)
1)
3)
Press [YES] key.
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.
COPY BW
COPY COL
SINGLE COLOR
2COLOR
Copy counter (B/W)

Copy counter (COLOR)
Single color
2-color

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&23<&2817(5'$7$&/($5
&23<%:
&23<&2/
6,1*/(&2/25
&2/25
PRINT BW
PRINT COL
PRINT (2COL)
PRINT (3COL)
PRINT (SGL_COL)
OTHER BW
OTHER COL
Print counter (B/W)

Print counter (COLOR)
Print counter (2-colors)
Print counter (3-colors)
Print counter (Single color)
Other counter (B/W)
Other counter (COLOR)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
35,1727+(5&2817(5&/($5
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
35,17%:
35,17&2/
35,17&2/
35,176&/B&2/
27+(5%:
27+(5&2/
35,17&2/

24-7
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After

replacement of the OPC drum, clear the
counter.)
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
24-10
Section
Data clear
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
1)
2)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter.

(Only when FAX is installed)
3)
Press [YES] key.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Drum cartridge print counter (K)

Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Number of day that used drum (Day) K
Drum cartridge print counter (C)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
Number of day that used drum (Day) C
Drum cartridge print counter (M)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Number of day that used drum (Day) M
Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
Number of day that used drum (Day) Y

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'580&75*&2817(5&(/$5
.
&
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

FAX OUTPUT
FAX OUTPUT_L2
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND IMAGES
SEND IMAGES_L2
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
ACR SEND
<
(;(&87(

FAX Print quantity counter (for line 1)

FAX Print quantity counter (for line 2)
(Japan only)
FAX send counter
FAX receive counter
(Japan only)
FAX send time
FAX receive time
Number of carrier prefix adding
communications

24-30

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)$;&2817(5'$7$&/($5
)$;287387
)$;287387B/
)$;6(1'
)$;5(&(,9('
6(1',0$*(6
6(1',0$*(6B/
6(1'7,0(
5(&(,9('7,0(
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator password.

Section
$&56(1'
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The administrator password is initialized.
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

If the administrator password of system setting and Web page is

forgotten, execute this simulation to set the password to "admin"
(default).
24-15

Data clear
Purpose
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$'0,13$66:25',1,7,$/,=(
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the

scan mode and the image send.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.

$5(<28685("
NET SCN ORG_B/W

counter (B/W scan job)
counter (COLOR scan job)
counter (2-color scan job)
counter (single color scan job)
Number of internet FAX output
NET SCN ORG_CL

NET SCN ORG_2CL
NET SCN ORG_SGL
INTERNET FAX
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX
SEND OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX
SEND
MAIL COUNTER
FTP COUNTER
SMB SEND
USB CNT
TRIAL MODE_B&C
SCAN TO HDD_B/W
SCAN TO HDD_CL
SCAN TO HDD_2CL
SCAN TO HDD_SGL
<(6
12
(;(&87(
24-31
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode password.

Section
Operation/Procedure
Number of internet FAX sending page

Number of internet FAX receive
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The service mode password is initialized.
If the password of Web page is forgotten, execute this simulation to

set the password to "service" (default).
Number of internet FAX send

Number of times of E-MAIL send
Number of FTP send
Number of SMB send
Number of times of USB storage
Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (SINGLE color)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6(59,&(3$66:25',1,7,$/,=(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5
1(76&125*B%:
1(76&125*B&/
1(76&125*B&/
1(76&125*B6*/
,17(51(7)$;287387
,17(51(7)$;6(1'287387
,17(51(7)$;5(&(,9(
,17(51(7)$;6(1'
0$,/&2817(5
)73&2817(5
60%6(1'
86%&17
75,$/02'(B% &
6&$172+''B%:
6&$172+''B&/
6&$172+''B&/
$5(<28685("
6&$172+''B6*/
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

<(6
12
(;(&87(
Toner density control

adjustment value in the
low speed process mode
25
25-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the developing section.

Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys.
2)

The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is displayed.
TCD_K
TCD_C
TCD_M
TCD_Y
TCV_K
TCV_C
TCV_M
TCV_Y
Toner density control

adjustment value in the
medium speed process
mode
control voltage level in
the low speed process
mode
Process (Developing section)
Section
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y
AT DEVE VO_L_K
AT DEVE VO_L_C
AT DEVE VO_L_M
AT DEVE VO_L_Y
AT DEVE VO_M_K
AT DEVE VO_M_C
AT DEVE VO_M_M
AT DEVE VO_M_Y
Toner density sensor K

Toner density sensor C
Toner density sensor M
Toner density sensor Y
Toner density sensor control voltage level K
Toner density sensor control voltage level C
Toner density sensor control voltage level M
Toner density sensor control voltage level Y

control voltage level in
the medium speed
process mode

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B.
$7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B&
$7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0
$7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9($'-B/B<
$7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
NOTE: The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this

simulation.
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge

installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
unit, resulting in overtoner and a trouble.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
.
&
<

(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
721(56(1625287387021,725
26
7&'B.
7&'B&
7&'B0
7&'B<
26-1
7&9B.
7&9B&
Setting
Purpose
7&9B0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1).
7&9B<
Paper exit
Section
Operation/Procedure
/2:
0,''/(
(;(&87(

Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner

density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment)
Section
2)
This setting is required to use the paper exit tray unit (MX-TRX1).
25-2
Purpose
1)
0
1
Item/Display
YES
NO
Image process (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Operation/Procedure
Content
Paper exit tray : YES
Paper exit tray : NO
&/26(
5,*+775$<6(783
1)
Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel.
2)
$ <(612

The developing motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the toner density
sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is
displayed.
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density control level.
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the reference toner density level is not set normally.
Do not execute this simulation except when new developer is supplied. If it is executed in other cases, undertoner or overtone may
occur, causing a trouble.
2.
26-2
Item/Display
Setting
Purpose
PF ADJ
Content
ON
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large

capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size
is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
Paper feed
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a paper size to be changed with the touch panel.

LCC
G/LBS SET
0
1
2
0
1
OFF
8.5 x 11
A4
B5
GRAM
LBS

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6,=(6(783
/&&
h
$
*/%66(7
*5$0
/%6
%
VENDOR
MODE (*)
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
FUSER_IN
COUNTUP
TIMING
FUSER_OUT
EXIT_OUT

26-3
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor
.(Setting must be made according to the
auditor use conditions.)
Auditor
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.

Item/Display
BUILT-IN
AUDITOR
OUTSIDE
AUDITOR
P10
EC1
NONE
P VENDOR1
P VENDOR2
DOC ADJ
P OTHER
S_VENDOR
ON
OFF
MODE
3
EXIT_
OUT
(*) Details of the vendor mode
Setting
Purpose
Continuous printing is
performed in the duplex
print mode.
If the remaining money
expires during continuous
printing, the sheets in the
machine are discharged
without being printed on the
back surfaces.
Continuous printing is not
performed in the duplex
print mode. (The remaining
amount is checked for
printing every surface in all
the printing process.)
If the remaining money
expires during printing, the
sheet is discharged without
printing on the back
surface.
Vendor mode 1
Vendor mode 2
Vendor mode 3
When the paper lead edge
passes the fusing rear
sensor.
When the paper rear edge
passes the fusing rear
sensor.
When the paper rear edge
passes the paper exit
sensor in the main unit, the
right tray, and the after
process unit.
Default
value
OFF
Content
Built-in auditor mode
(standard mode) operation.
EC1 mode operation
No external connection
vendor is used.
Coin vendor mode
(Only the copy mode can
be controlled.)
Vendor mode
communicating with the
parallel I/F (for DocuLyzer)
(Japan only)
NOT USED
Serial vendor mode
Support for the auditor in
document filing print
No support for the auditor in
document filing print
Default
value
P10
NONE
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
Completion
of the
specified
quantity.
(Money
remaining)
Condition 1
Operation 1
Operation 1
Operation 1
Insufficient money during

copy job
BW/Color
(no money
remaining)
Color
(Money
remaining)
Condition 2
Operation 2
Operation 1
Operation 3
Condition 3
Operation 2
Operation 2
Operation 2
Completion
of the
specified
quantity.
(No money
remaining)
Condition 4
Operation 1
Operation 1
Operation 3
Operation 1:
Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
which can be changed in the system setting.
Operation 2:
Auto clear is not made.
Operation 3:
The display is shifted to the initial screen.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$8',7256(783
OFF
%8,/7,1
3
(&
2876,'($8',725
121(
39(1'25
327+(5
6B9(1'25
'2&$'-
3)$'-
21
2))
9(1'2502'(
02'(
02'(
02'(
&2817837,0,1*
)86(5B,1
)86(5B287
(;,7B287
21
39(1'25
2))

26-5

Setting
Purpose
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'(67,1$7,216(783
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total

counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/
11x17 size)
Section
86$
&$1$'$
,1&+
-$3$1
$%B%
(8523(
8.
$86
$%B$
&+,1$
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
2)
Enter the setting value with 10-key

1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
3)
Press [OK] key.
(;(&87(
The set value in step 2) is saved.

Item/Display
Content
A
B
TOTAL (B/W)
TOTAL (COL)
Total counter (B/W)

Total counter (Color)
C
D
MAINTE (B/W)
MAINTE (COL)
Maintenance counter (B/W)

Maintenance counter
(Color)
Developer counter
(B/W)
Developer counter
(Color)
DEV (B/W)
DEV (COL)
Default
value
1
(Japan)
2
(Except
Japan)
2

26-10
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network

scanner.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.

TRIAL MODE
( 0 : YES 1 : NO )
0
1
Trial mode setting

Trial mode cancel (Default)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(

$h&281783
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
$ 727$/%:

&/26(
1(7:25.6&$11(575,$/02'(6(783
% 727$/&2/
$ 75,$/02'(<(612
& 0$,17(%:
' 0$,17(&2/

( '(9%:

) '(9&2/
2.
2.
26-6
26-18
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed

magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
The selected set content is saved.

U.S.A.
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner

save mode operation.
(For the Japan and the UK versions.)
United States of America

Canada
Inch series, other destinations
Japan
AB series (B5 detection), other destinations
Europe
United Kingdom
Australia
AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
China
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

Item
Display
COPY
PRINTER
Content
0
1
0
1
Copy toner save mode is inhibited.

Copy toner save mode is allowed
Printer toner save mode is
inhibited.
Printer toner save mode is
allowed.
Default
value
0

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$ 21&($1<
$ &23<<(612
&/26(
7528%/(0(025<02'(6(783
721(56$9(02'(6(783
% 35,17(5<(612

2.
2.
26-30
26-38
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
standards). (For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

0
1
2)
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the

maintenance life is reached.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.

Control allowed
Control inhibited
Item/Display
A
Press [OK] key.
Content
MAINTENANCE
LIFE OVER
0
1
Print continue
Print stop
* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due

to the power frequency, etc.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
1 (CE not supported)

EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
Default
value
0
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
&/26(
(1*,1(/,)(29(56(77,1*
$ 0$,17(1$1&(/,)(29(5&217,18(6723

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&(0$5.&21752/6(77,1*
$ <(612
2.

26-41
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS)
in the center binding mode.
2.
Section
Operation/Procedure
26-35
1)
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4

trouble history when a same trouble
occurred repeatedly. There are two display
modes: display as one trouble and display
as several series of troubles.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

0
1
2)
Only once display.

Any time display.

0
1
2)
AMS Disable
AMS Enable
Press [OK] key.

<Default value of each destination>

U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
Press [OK] key.

0 (Disable)
0 (Disable)
0 (Disable)
0 (Disable)
0 (Disable)
EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
1 (Enable)
1 (Enable)
0 (Disable)
0 (Disable)
0 (Disable)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3$03+/(702'($066(77,1*
$ <(612

Destination
USA
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
UK
AUS
AB_A
CHINA
26-49
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)

&/26(
/2:
Item D
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2-color
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
2-Color/Single
Counter
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
(*3) Target paper (postcard, envelope, label sheet, tab sheet, OHP)
If it is set to "0," the operation is stopped when 30 sheets of a same
kind are discharged continuously. When, however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and discharged and less than 30 sheets of a kind
are continuously discharged, the operation is performed similarly to
that of setting value "1".
&23<63(('02'(6(783
Single
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards

mode.
3267&$5'
Mode
Set value
Setting
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Item B
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
(*2) Item B: COLOR MODE set value (OFF: Displayed/ON: Not displayed)
2.
Purpose
Item A
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
+,*+
If it is set to "1," the operation is stopped when the paper exit tray is
full or when 500 sheets (94mm thick) are discharged.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)81&7,216(77,1*
$ %:5(9(56(<(6
26-50
Purpose

Setting
% &2/2502'(
& ),1,6+(5)81&7,21<(6
' &2/2502'(35,17(5
Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
( )(('75$<&2/25<(6
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
3)
2.
Item/Display
Content
BW REVERSE
COLOR MODE
FINISHER
FUNCTION
0
BW reverse copy Disable
1
BW reverse copy Enable
2-color/Single color copy mode
Enable/Disable setting
0
Finisher special paper
The number of paper exit is
limited.
1
Finisher special paper
The number of paper exit is
not limited.
0
All colors and monochrome
counters are displayed.
1
All are displayed except for
the 3-color print counter.
2
Monochrome and full color
print counters are displayed.
0
Paper feed tray color display
ON during paper feed
1
Paper feed tray color display
OFF during paper feed
COLOR MODE
(PRINTER)
FEED TRAY
COLOR
(*1) Default values for each destination of item A/B/D
Default
value
Refer
to *1
Refer
to *1/*2
0
Refer
to *3
Refer
to *1
26-52
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper

(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
or not.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

0
1
2)
Count up
No count up
Press [OK] key.

Destination
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
Default
0 (Counted)
0 (Counted)
0 (Counted)
1 (Not counted)
0 (Counted)
Destination
EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
Default

0 (Counted)
0 (Counted)
1 (Not counted)
0 (Counted)
0 (Counted)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,212)35,17(5
$ <(612

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$%/$1.3$3(5&281702'(6(783
$ <(612

2.
26-65
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode.

Section
2.
Operation/Procedure
Use the touch key to set.
26-53
Purpose
Item
Setting
Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance

adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting
(copy mode)
Section
LIMIT
SHEETS(L)
Inhibit
Allow (Default)
25
30
Press [OK] key.
SADDLE
COPIES
ON
OFF

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
ON
OFF

0
1
2)
50
LIMIT
COPIES
Operation/Procedure
1)
LIMIT
SHEETS
Set
value
30
&/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,21
$ <(612
Content
Number of sheets of
stapling: Max. 30
Number of sheets of
stapling: Max. 50
Number of sets of stapling:
Max. 50 sets
Number of sets of stapling:
Not Limited
Number of sheets of
stapling: Max. 25
Number of sheets of
stapling: Max. 30
Number of sets loaded in
the saddle staple: Limited
(*1)
Number of sets loaded in
the saddle staple: Not
Limited
Setting
range
30 or 50
Default
value
50
ON or
OFF
ON
25 or 30
25
ON or
OFF
ON
*1: 1-5 sheets (20 sets) / 6-10 sheets (15 sets)/10-15 sheets (10
sets)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
),1,6+(5$/$5002'(6(78367$3/(/,0,7
/,0,76+((76
2.

/,0,7&23,(6
21
2))
/,0,76+((76/

6$''/(&23,(6
21
2))
26-54
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance

adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting
(printer mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

0
1
2)
Inhibit
Allow (Default)
Press [OK] key.


D: Setting of the allowable quantity of copy/print/FAX after displaying the message when item B is set to "0" (the message is displayed at toner near end). (Range: 0 - 200 sheets)
26-69
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for

toner near end.
Section
The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the

assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 5%.
(The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
size and the print ratio.)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Set values of Item D and the number of output print allowed
2)
1: Print Disable after toner near end
3)
Press [OK] key.
2: 25 sheets print Enable after toner near end
The set value in step 2 is saved.

Item/Display
Content
TONER
PREPARATION
(0 : YES 1 : NO)
TONER NEAR
END
(0 : YES 1 : NO)
TONER END
TONER END
COUNT
TONER E-MAIL
ALART
The toner preparation

message is
displayed.
1
The toner preparation
message is not
displayed.
0
The toner near end
message is
displayed.
1
The toner near end
message is not
displayed.
1
Operation Enable in
TONER END
2
Operation STOP in
TONER END
3
Operation STOP in
TONER END
Setting of the number of
copy/print/FAX outputs
Enable after TONER
NEAR END.
0
Condition for Low
status send of E-mail
alert
When the toner
preparation message
is displayed (in near
near toner end)
1
Condition for Low
status send of E-mail
alert
When near toner end
Setting
range
0-1
Default
value
0-1

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
1-3
1-5
0-1
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
&/26(
721(51($5(1'6(77,1*
2
( Japan)
3
(Except
Japan)
$ 721(535(3$5$7,21<(612

% 721(51($5(1'<(612

& 721(5(1'
' 721(5(1'&2817
( 721(5(0$,/$/$57
2.
26-73
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Poster, enlargement continuous shoot, card

scan, A3 wide copy mode image loss
(shade delete quantity) adjustment
Section
Set value
Toner preparation
message
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)

NOTE: When item B is set to "0" and item D to a desired number,
printing can be made after toner near end. However, insufficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may be
resulted depending on the using conditions. When item D
is set to "1" printing is disabled after toner near end. this
case, toner end display is made in the toner near end status, and copy/print/FAX outputs are disabled.
<List of Default values and set values for each destination>

Destination
Toner near end message

0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
1 (Not Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
0 (Displayed)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
(shade delete quantity) is increased.
Item/Display
A
DELETING
SHADOW ADJ
(M)
DELETING
SHADOW ADJ
(S)
(Contents of set items)

A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
when the toner remaining quantity reaches 25%.
B: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
when the toner near end status is reached.
C: Enable/Disable setting of the machine operation when the toner
end status is reached.
For except Japan, performs operation of set value "3" regardless of
the setting value.
Content
Rear frame side
image loss quantity
(shade delete
quantity) adjustment
Lead edge image
loss quantity (shade
delete quantity)
adjustment
Setting
range
0 - 50
0 - 50
Default value
0
(Adjustment
amount:
0.1mm/step)
0
(Adjustment
amount:
0.1mm/step)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
27
'(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-8670(17
$ '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-0
27-1
% '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-6
Purpose

Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

0
1
2.
26-74
2)
Setting
Purpose
Not detection
Detection
Press [OK] key.

Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.

Section

Operation/Procedure
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.
OSA TRIAL
MODE
(0 : YES 1 : NO)
$ ',6$%/(<(6

Item/Display
A
&/26(
',6$%/,1*2)87528%/(
Content
0
1
Used to set the

OSA trial mode.
OSA trial mode is
canceled.
Setting
range
0-1
Default
value
1
2.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
26$75$,$/02'(6(77,1*
27-2
$ 26$75,$/02'(<(612
Setting
Purpose

Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2.
26-78
Purpose
2)
3)
Press [SET] key.

Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote

operation panel.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be set with touch panel.

[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
USER
FAX_NO.
SERVA
TEL_NO.
Enter a password with 10 key. (5 - 8 digits)

The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW.
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2)
Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)

Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
If the connection process is not completed normally
when registering the FSS, calling to the HOST may
be continuously made every time when the power is
turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted.
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
HOST.
Press [SET] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
523(3$66:25'6(77,1*
35(6(17
1(:
6(7
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)66)81&7,216(783,1387
35(6(17
1(:
86(5)$;B12
3$86(
6(7
6(59$7(/B12

27-4
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

Item/Display
A
FSS MODE
Content
NEB1
NEB2
NFB1
NFB2
B
C
RETRY_BUSY
TIMER (MINUTE) _BUSY
D
E
RETRY_ERROR
TIMER (MINUTE) _ERROR
TONER ORDER
TIMING (K)
TONER ORDER
TIMING (C)
TONER ORDER
TIMING (M)
TONER ORDER
TIMING (Y)
100% - 75%
74% - 50%
49% - 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% - 75%
74% - 50%
49% - 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% - 75%
74% - 50%
49% - 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% - 75%
74% - 50%
49% - 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
Set the FSS MODE
Exclusive for
send in NE-B
mode
Send/Receive
in NE-B mode
Exclusive for
send in NE-F
mode
Send/Receive
in NE-F mode
Resend number setting when busy
Resend timer setting (minute) when
busy
Resend number setting when error
Resend timer setting (minute) when
error
Toner order auto send
100% - 75%
timing setting (K)
74% - 50%
49% - 25%
25% or less
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% - 75%
timing setting (C)
74% - 50%
49% - 25%
25% or less
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% - 75%
timing setting (M)
74% - 50%
49% - 25%
25% or less
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% - 75%
timing setting (Y)
74% - 50%
49% - 25%
25% or less
NEAREND
EMPTY
Setting
range
0-3
0
3
0 - 15
1 - 15
2
3
* 0: No retry
0 - 15
1 - 15
1
1
* 0: No retry
0-5
0-5
0-5
0-5
&/26(
)66)81&7,216(783
$ )6602'(1(%

Remarks

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Default value
% 5(75<B%86<
& 7,0(50,187(B%86<
' 5(75<B(5525
( 7,0(50,187(B(5525
) 721(525'(57,0,1*.
* 721(525'(57,0,1*&
+ 721(525'(57,0,1*0
, 721(525'(57,0,1*<
2.
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
3 (49%-25%)
3 (49%-25%)
3 (49%-25%)
3 (49%-25%)
27-5
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the
machine tag No.) (FSS function)
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Section
Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.

The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW.
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2)
FSS
FUNCTION
ALERT
Press [SET] key.
FSS function enable

FSS function disable (*1) (Default)
Alert call enable (*2) (Default)
Alert call disable
*1 The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to

Enable. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.)
No alert cause
Maintenance
Service call
Toner send request
Toner collection request

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
0
1
0
1
*2 Alert send timing
Operation/Procedure
1)
Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert

When the maintenance timing is reached.
When pressing Service call.
When the toner order automatic send setting is
reached.
Revision of the toner installation date (only for
a new product)
Alert resend
&/26(
7$*6(77,1*
35(6(17
1(:

6(7
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)66)81&7,216(783)81&7,21
$ )81&7,21<(612
% $/(57<(612

27-6
2.
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.

(FSS function)
Section
0
1
2)
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading
gain adjustment retry number.
(FSS function)
Operation/Procedure
1)
27-9
Purpose
Allow (Default)
Inhibit
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press [OK] key.
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0$18$/6(59,&(&$//6(783
$ <(612
FEED TIME 1
0100
FEED TIME 2
0100
GAIN
ADJUSTMENT
RETRY
JAM ALERT
1 - 20

D
2.
1100
27-7
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout.

(FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
Threshold value of the paper

transport time between sensors
(Main unit) (50: Default)
Threshold value of the paper
transport time between sensors
(RSPF) (50: Default)
Threshold value of the gain
adjustment retry number
(11: Default)
Alert judgment threshold value
for occurrence of continuous
jams
Alert judgment threshold value
for occurrence of continuous
jams (Setting of the number of
times of continuous jams as the
alert for continuous jams)
(Default: 10 times)
* Item A: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;

100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
* Item C: Setting of 20 is invalid.


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
Item name
)66)81&7,21$'-8670(17
$ )(('7,0(

% )(('7,0(
& *$,1$'-8670(175(75<
' -$0$/(57
2.
SCAN GAIN
ADJ1
SCAN GAIN
ADJ2
SCAN GAIN
ADJ3
SCAN GAIN
ADJ4
SCAN GAIN
ADJ5
Display Item
Occurrence
date (Display)
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
Retry
number
8 digits
Scanner gain
adjustment retry history
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
27-10

Data clear
Purpose
Content
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history

information. (FSS function)
&/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7
'$7(5(75<
/68
/68
Section
'(6.
'(6.
Operation/Procedure
),1,6+(5
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.
),1,6+(5
6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
Target history
Serial communication retry number history

High density process control error history
Half tone process control error history
Automatic registration adjustment error history
Gain adjustment retry history
Paper transport time between sensors

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,21+,6725<&/($5
6&$1*$,1$'-

27-12
Purpose
Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high-density, half-tone

process control and the automatic registration adjustment error history.
(FSS Function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The high density, the half tone, and the automatic registration
adjustment error history are displayed.
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
27-11
Others
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication

retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
Item name
LSU1
LSU2
DESK1
DESK2
FINISHER1
FINISHER2
Display Item
Occurrence
date (Display)
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
HV_ERR1
HV_ERR2
HV_ERR3
HV_ERR4
HV_ERR5
H_TONE ERR1
H_TONE ERR2
H_TONE ERR3
H_TONE ERR4
H_TONE ERR5
AUTO REG ADJ1
AUTO REG ADJ2
AUTO REG ADJ3
AUTO REG ADJ4
AUTO REG ADJ5
High density error history 1

Half tone error history 1
Automatic registration adjustment error history 1

Retry
number
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
Content
Serial communication
retry number history
display
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7$'-8670(17B(5525
'$7((5525&2'(
+9B(55
+9B(55
+9B(55
+9B(55
+9B(55
+B721((55
+B721((55
+B721((55
+B721((55
+B721((55
$8725(*$'-
$8725(*$'-
$8725(*$'-
$8725(*$'-
$8725(*$'-
8 digits

8 digits
27-13
Others
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport

time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display
Main
unit
RSPF
FEED TIME1
FEED TIME2
FEED TIME3
FEED TIME4
FEED TIME5
FEED TIME6
FEED TIME7
FEED TIME8
FEED TIME9
FEED TIME10
FEED TIME1(SPF)
FEED TIME2(SPF)
FEED TIME3(SPF)
FEED TIME4(SPF)
FEED TIME5(SPF)
FEED TIME6(SPF)
FEED TIME7(SPF)
FEED TIME8(SPF)
FEED TIME9(SPF)
FEED TIME10(SPF)
Content
Occurrence date
History of paper transport time between sensors 1

History of paper transport time between SPF
sensors 1
sensors 2
sensors 3
sensors 4
sensors 5
sensors 6
sensors 7
sensors 8
sensors 9
sensors 10
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
Code
between
sensors
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
99/99/99 99:99:99

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7)(('7,0(
Passing time
Reference
passing time
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
99/99/99 99:99:99
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
99/99/99 99:99:99
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
99/99/99 99:99:99
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
99/99/99 99:99:99
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
99/99/99 99:99:99
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
99/99/99 99:99:99
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
99/99/99 99:99:99
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
99/99/99 99:99:99
5 digits
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
27-14
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection

test mode.
'$7(6(1625&2'(3$667,0(67$1'$5'7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

0
1

2)
Disable (Default)
Enable
Press [OK] key.


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)667(6702'(6(783
$ &211(&7,217(6702'(212))

2.
CSS2
MPFD
MPLD
MTOP1
MTOP2
MPED
30
30-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the
paper feed section and the control circuits.
Section

Manual feed paper length detection
Manual feed tray retraction detection
Manual feed tray extension detection

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
75$<6(1625&+(&.0$,1
Operation/Procedure
&3)'
&/8'
&3('
&63'
&66
&3)'
&/8'
&3('
&63'
&66
03)'
03/'
0723
0723
03('
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are highlighted.
PPD1
PPD2
POD1
POD2
POD3
TFD2
TFD3
HPOS
DSW_R
DSW_C
DSW_F
DHPD_K
DHPD_CL
1TNFD
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
Resist detection
Main unit paper exit detection
Main unit right tray paper exit full detection
Shifter home detection
Right door open/close detection
Tray 1 transport cover open/close detection
Front cover open/close detection
K phase detection
CL phase detection
Waste toner full detection
Primary transport belt separation CL detection
Primary transport belt separation BK detection

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(

33
33-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card

reader sensor and the control circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
0$,181,76(1625&+(&.
33'
33'
32'
32'
32'
7)'
7)'
+326
'6:B5
'6:B&
'6:B)
'+3'B.
'+3'B&/
71)'
78'B&/
78'B.
CARD
DATA
CLOCK
Card Yes/No detection

Card number signal detection
Reference clock signal detection

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&$5'5($'(56(1625&+(&.
&$5'
'$7$
&/2&.

30-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed
section and the control circuits.
Section
Operation/Procedure
CPFD1
CLUD1
CPED1
CSPD1
CSS1
CPFD2
CLUD2
CPED2
CSPD2

Tray 1 upper limit detection
Tray 2 paper YES/NO detection
Tray 2 paper remaining detection

40
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
%<3$6675$<9$/8(6(77,1*
$ 0$;326,7,21
40-2

% 3326,7,21

& 3326,7,21
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
' 0,1326,7,21
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor

adjustment.
Paper feed
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
2)
2.
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.

3)
Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4).
4)
41
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.

5)
Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R).
41-1
6)
Purpose
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
7)
Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
8)
Section
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
Operation/Procedure
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is

displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
MAX POSITION
P1(A4)POSITION
P2(A4R)POSITION
MIN POSITION

Manual feed max. width

Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
Manual feed min. width
OCSW
Document cover status
PD1 - 7
Document detection
sensor status
Open: Normal display

Close: Highlighted
No document: Normal display
Document present: Highlighted

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(

%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
&/26(
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6:
3'
3'
3'
3'
3'
3'
3'
(;(&87(

40-7
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
41-2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the

manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Section
Paper feed
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor

detection level.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
Operation/Procedure
2)
1)
3)
Press [OK] key.
Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without

place a document on the document table.
2)
Set A3 (11 x 17") paper on the document table, and press

[EXECUTE] key.
The sensor level without document is recognized.
Item/Display
Content
A
B
MAX POSITION
P1(A4) POSITION
P2(A4R) POSITION
MIN POSITION
Manual feed max. width

Manual feed P1 position width
(A4)
Manual feed P2 position width
(A4R)
Manual feed min. width
Default
value
241
231
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.

When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.
140
19

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
41-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
Item/Display
OCSW
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
(;(&87(
Content
Original cover SW
Document detection 1
Detection level range

0-1 ("1" to Close)
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3'6(1625',63/$<
2&6:
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @

43
43-1
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each

mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
HL_UM READY
HL_LM READY
HL_US READY
HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW
HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW
HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW
HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL
HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL
HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL
WARMUP FUMON HL
_UM T
WARMUP FUMOFF HL
_LM T
Content
Ready standby TH_UM set value
Ready standby TH_LM set value
Ready standby TH_US set value
Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value
Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value
Black-White plain paper TH_US set value
Color plain paper TH_UM set value
Color plain paper TH_LM set value
Color plain paper TH_US set value
Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_UM set value
(Temperature when the fusing roller starts rotation in
warm-up)
(when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 50qC or less)
Fusing motor pre-rotation end TH_LM set value
(Time (sec) from completion of warm-up to stop of rotation
of the fusing roller) (when the fusing temperature in warmup is 50qC or less)
Setting
range
70 - 230
30 - 200
70 - 230
70 - 230
30 - 200
70 - 230
70 - 230
30 - 200
70 - 230
30 - 200
30 - 200
Group 1
SW-A SW-B
170
180
105
105
150
160
165
175
140
140
175
180
165
175
140
140
175
180
155
155
75
75
Default value
Group 2
SW-A SW-B
175
185
105
105
155
165
170
180
140
140
180
185
170
180
140
140
180
185
155
155
75
75
Group 3
SW-A SW-B
175
185
105
110
155
165
170
180
140
140
180
185
170
180
140
140
180
185
155
155
75
75
Setting
range
Item/Display
Content
WARMUP END TIME
Warm-up complete time (warm-up time (sec))

(when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 50qC or less)
Heavy paper TH_UM set value
Heavy paper TH_LM set value
Heavy paper TH_US set value
OHP-TH_UM set value
OHP-TH_LM set value
OHP-TH_US set value
Envelope TH_UM set value
Envelope TH_LM set value
Envelope TH_US set value
Glossy paper TH_UM set value
Glossy paper TH_LM set value
Glossy paper TH_US set value
preheating TH_UM set value
preheating TH_US set value
Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value
(Job Ready temperature)
preheating TH_LM set value
Heavy paper 2TH_UM set value
Heavy paper 2TH_LM set value
Heavy paper 2TH_US set value
Warm-up TH_UM set value
(when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less)
Warm-up TH_LM set value
Warm-up TH_US set value
AF-AH applying time
(Time (sec) for shifting from the control temperature in
warm-up to the normal control temperature)
Warm-up TH_UM set value
(when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above)
Warm-up TH_LM set value
Warm-up TH_US set value
AJ-AL applying time (Timer from completion of Ready)
Fusing roller rotation start TH_UM (when the fusing
temperature in warm-up is alpha qC or above)
Warm-up complete time (sec) (when the fusing
Job Ready TH_UM temperature (when the fusing
Threshold value applied to Sim43-1-AN-AP
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
HL_UM HEAVY PAPER

HL_LM HEAVY PAPER
HL_US HEAVY PAPER
HL_UM OHP PAPER
HL_LM OHP PAPER
HL_US OHP PAPER
HL_UM ENV PAPER
HL_LM ENV PAPER
HL_US ENV PAPER
HL_UM GLOSS PAPER
HL_LM GLOSS PAPER
HL_US GLOSS PAPER
HL_UM E-STAR
HL_US E-STAR
PRE-JOB
AB
AC
AD
AE
AF
HL_LM E-STAR
HL_UM HEAVY2 PAPER
HL_LM HEAVY2 PAPER
HL_US HEAVY2 PAPER
HL_UM WARMUP_120L
AG
HL_LM WARMUP_120L
AH
HL_US WARMUP_120L
AI
LO_WARMUP_TIME
AJ
HL_UM WARMUP_120H
AK
HL_LM WARMUP_120H
AL
HL_US WARMUP_120H
AM
AN
HI_WARMUP_TIME
HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP
AO
HI_WU_END_TIME
AP
HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP
AQ
HI_WARMUP_BORDER
30 - 255
Group 1
SW-A SW-B
53
68
Default value
Group 2
SW-A SW-B
56
73
Group 3
SW-A SW-B
55
73
70 - 230
30 - 200
70 - 230
70 - 230
30 - 200
70 - 230
70 - 230
30 - 200
70 - 230
70 - 230
30 - 200
70 - 230
30 - 200
30 - 200
30 - 200
170
140
175
165
135
165
180
145
180
180
140
160
145
130
160
170
140
175
165
135
165
180
145
180
180
140
160
145
130
160
170
140
175
165
135
165
180
145
180
180
140
160
145
130
160
170
140
175
165
135
165
180
145
180
180
140
160
145
130
160
170
140
175
165
135
165
180
145
180
180
140
160
145
130
160
170
140
175
165
135
165
180
145
180
180
140
160
145
130
160
30 - 200
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
70 - 230
50
170
140
175
170
50
170
140
175
180
50
170
140
175
170
50
170
140
175
180
50
170
140
175
170
50
170
140
175
180
30 - 200
105
105
105
105
105
105
70 - 230
165
175
165
175
165
175
0 - 255
90
90
90
90
90
90
70 - 230
170
180
175
185
175
185
30 - 200
105
105
105
105
105
105
70 - 230
150
160
155
165
155
165
0 - 255
30 - `200
10
125
10
125
10
125
10
125
10
125
10
125
0 - 255
40
40
40
40
40
40
70 - 230
140
140
140
140
140
140
1 - 119
50
50
50
50
50
50
Destination link item (When the destination setting is changed with SIM26-6, the set value is changed linking with the destination.)
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Japan
U.S.A.
Europe
China
Canada
U.K.
AB_B
Inch
AUS
SW-A
SW-B
AB_A
Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
NOTE: When the destination is changed with SIM26-6 after changing this set value, the set values of the destination link items are reset to the default.
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US
Fusing upper thermister main center

Fusing lower thermister main
Fusing upper thermister sub edge
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)86(57(036(783)253$3(5
$ +/B805($'<

% +/B/05($'<

& +/B865($'<
' +/B803/$,13$3(5%:
( +/B/03/$,13$3(5%:
) +/B863/$,13$3(5%:
* +/B803/$,13$3(5&/
+ +/B/03/$,13$3(5&/
, +/B863/$,13$3(5&/
- :$5083)8021+/B807
. :$5083)802))+/B/07
/ :$5083(1'7,0(
2.
43-4
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in

each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW

DUP
HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW
DUP
HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW
DUP
PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
APP CNT
HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL
DUP
HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL
DUP
HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL
DUP
PLAIN PAPER CL DUP APP
CNT
HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW
DUP
HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW
DUP
HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW
DUP
HEAVY PAPER BW DUP
APP CNT
HL_UM HEAVY PAPER CL
DUP
HL_LM HEAVY PAPER CL
DUP
HL_US HEAVY PAPER CL
DUP
HEAVY PAPER CL DUP
APP CNT
HL_UM HEAVY2 PAPER
BW DUP
HL_LM HEAVY2 PAPER
BW DUP
HL_US HEAVY2 PAPER
BW DUP
Content
Setting
range
Group 1
SW-A SW-B
165
175
Default value
Group 2
SW-A SW-B
170
175
Group 3
SW-A SW-B
170
180
Black-White plain paper duplex TH_UM set value
70 - 230
Black-White plain paper duplex TH_LM set value
30 - 200
100
100
100
100
100
100
Black-White plain paper duplex TH_US set value
70 - 230
165
180
165
180
170
180
Black-White plain paper duplex mode fusing temperature

applying start image (*1)
Color plain paper duplex TH_UM set value
0 - 60
70 - 230
165
175
170
175
170
180
Color plain paper duplex TH_LM set value
30 - 200
100
100
100
100
100
100
Color plain paper duplex TH_US set value
70 - 230
165
180
165
180
170
180
Color plain paper duplex applying number of sheets
0 - 60
Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value
70 - 230
170
170
170
170
170
170
Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value
30 - 200
100
100
100
100
100
100
Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_US set value
70 - 230
175
175
175
175
175
175
Black-White heavy paper duplex mode fusing temperature

Color Heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value
0 - 60
70 - 230
170
170
170
170
170
170
Color Heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value
30 - 200
100
100
100
100
100
100
Color Heavy paper duplex TH_US set value
70 - 230
175
175
175
175
175
175
Color Heavy paper duplex mode fusing temperature

Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex TH_UM set value
0 - 60
70 - 230
170
170
170
170
170
170
Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex TH_LM set value
30 - 200
100
100
100
100
100
100
Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex TH_US set value
70 - 230
175
175
175
175
175
175
Item/Display
T
HEAVY2 PAPER BW DUP

APP CNT
HL_UM HEAVY2 PAPER CL
DUP
HL_LM HEAVY2 PAPER CL
DUP
HL_US HEAVY2 PAPER CL
DUP
HEAVY2 PAPER CL DUP
APP CNT
U
V
W
X
Setting
range
Content
0 - 60
Group 1
SW-A SW-B
1
1
Default value
Group 2
SW-A SW-B
1
1
Group 3
SW-A SW-B
1
1
Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing

temperature applying start image (*1)
Color Heavy paper 2 duplex TH_UM set value
70 - 230
170
170
170
170
170
170
Color Heavy paper 2 duplex TH_LM set value
30 - 200
100
100
100
100
100
100
Color Heavy paper 2 duplex TH_US set value
70 - 230
175
175
175
175
175
175
0 - 60
Color Heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing temperature

Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Japan
U.S.A.
Europe
China
Canada
U.K.
AB_B
Inch
AUS
AB_A
SW-A
SW-B
Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US

HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)86(57(036(783)253$3(5
$ +/B803/$,13$3(5%:'83

% +/B/03/$,13$3(5%:'83
& +/B863/$,13$3(5%:'83
' 3/$,13$3(5%:'83$33&17
( +/B803/$,13$3(5&/'83
) +/B/03/$,13$3(5&/'83
* +/B863/$,13$3(5&/'83
+ 3/$,13$3(5&/'83$33&17
, +/B80+($9<3$3(5%:'83
- +/B/0+($9<3$3(5%:'83
. +/B(+($9<3$3(5%:'83
/ +($9<3$3(5%:'83$33&17
2.
43-20
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction

under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1qC Change

Correction
value
Input value

Item/Display
A
HL_UM READY LL
HL_LM READY LL
HL_US READY LL
HL_UM PLAIN BW LL
-49
-25
-5
25
49
25
45
50
55
75
99
ContentSetting
Correction value for TH_UM set value in Ready standby under LL
environment
Correction value for TH_LM set value in Ready standby under LL
environment
Correction value for TH_US set value in Ready standby under LL
environment
Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value under
LL environment
Default value
Group 2 Group 3
55
55
Setting
range
1 - 99
Group 1
55
1 - 99
55
55
55
1 - 99
55
55
55
1 - 99
55
55
55
Item/Display
ContentSetting
HL_LM PLAIN BW LL
HL_US PLAIN BW LL
HL_UM PLAIN CL LL
HL_LM PLAIN CL LL
HL_US PLAIN CL LL
WARMUP FUMON HL_UM

T LL
WARMUP FUMOFF HL_LM

T LL
Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value under
LL environment
Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_US set value under
LL environment
Correction value for Color plain paper TH_UM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for Color plain paper TH_LM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for Color plain paper TH_US set value under LL
environment
Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_UM set value
(temperature when the fusing roller starts rotation in warm-up) under
LL environment
Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_LM set value
LL environment
Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment
(Under LL environment, the warm-up complete time does not depends
on this set value. When the temperature reaches the specified level,
warm-up is completed.)
Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for heavy paper TH_LM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under LL
environment
Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under LL environment
Correction value for OHP TH_LM set value under LL environment
Correction value for OHP TH_US set value under LL environment
Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under LL environment
Correction value for envelope TH_LM set value under LL environment
Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under LL environment
Correction value for glossy paper TH_UM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for glossy paper TH_LM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for glossy paper TH_US set value under LL
environment
Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL
environment
Correction value for resetting from preheating TH_UM set value (Job
Ready temperature) under LL environment
Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_US set value under LL
environment
Correction value for TH_UM set value in warm-up under LL
environment
(when the fusing temperature is 120qC or below)
Correction value for TH_LM set value in warm-up under LL
environment
Correction value for TH_US set value in warm-up under LL
environment
Correction value for AF-AH applying time (timer from Ready complete)
under LL environment
Correction value for TH_UM set value in warm-up under LL
environment
Correction value for TH_LM set value in warm-up under LL
environment
Correction value for TH_US set value in warm-up under LL
environment
Correction value for AJ-AL applying time (timer from Ready complete)
under LL environment
L
(*1)
WARMUP END TIME LL
HL_UM HEAVY LL
HL_LM HEAVY LL
HL_US HEAVY LL
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
HL_UM OHP LL
HL_LM OHP LL
HL_US OHP LL
HL_UM ENVELOPE LL
HL_LM ENVELOPE LL
HL_US ENVELOPE LL
HL_UM GLOSS LL
HL_LM GLOSS LL
HL_US GLOSS LL
HL_UM E-STAR LL
HL_US E-STAR LL
AA
PRE-JOB LL
AB
HL_LM E-STAR LL
AC
HL UM HEAVY2 CL LL
AD
HL LM HEAVY2 CL LL
AE
HL US HEAVY2 CL LL
AF
HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL
AG
HL_LM WARMUP_120L LL
AH
HL_US WARMUP_120L LL
AI
LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL
AJ
HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL
AK
HL_LM WARMUP_120H LL
AL
HL_US WARMUP_120H LL
AM
(*1)
HI_WU_TIME_LL
Setting
range
Default value
Group 2 Group 3
55
55
1 - 99
Group 1
55
1 - 99
55
55
55
1 - 99
55
55
55
1 - 99
55
55
55
1 - 99
55
55
55
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
80
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
60
60
60
60
60
60
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
50
Item/Display
Setting
range
ContentSetting
AN
HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL
AO
(*1)
HI_WU_END_TIME_LL
AP
HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL
AQ
HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL
Correction value for fusing roller rotation start TH_UM under LL

environment (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha qC or
above)
Correction value for warm-up complete time (sec) under LL
above)
Correction value for Job Ready TH_UM temperature under LL
above)
Correction value for the threshold value alpha applied to SIM43-1-ANAP under LL environment
Group 1
1 - 99
Default value
Group 2 Group 3
50
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
55
1 - 99
50
*1: 1 Count = 1sec Change

Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Japan
U.S.A.
Europe
China
Canada
U.K.
AB_B
Inch
AUS
AB_A
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US

HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17//
$ +/B805($'<//

% +/B/05($'<//
& +/B865($'<//
' +/B803/$,1%://
( +/B/03/$,1%://
) +/B863/$,1%://
* +/B803/$,1&///
+ +/B/03/$,1&///
, +/B863/$,1&///
- :$5083)8021+/B807//
. :$5083)802))+/B/07//
/ :$5083(1'7,0(//
2.
43-21
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction

under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
Correction
value
Input value

Item/Display
A
HL_UM READY HH
HL_LM READY HH
HL_US READY HH
HL_UM PLAIN BW HH
HL_LM PLAIN BW HH
HL_US PLAIN BW HH
-49
-25
-5
25
49
25
45
50
55
75
99
ContentSetting
Correction value for TH_UM set value in Ready standby under HH
environment
Correction value for TH_LM set value in Ready standby under HH
environment
Correction value for TH_US set value in Ready standby under HH
environment
Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value
under HH environment
Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value under
HH environment
Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_US set value under
HH environment
Setting
range
Default value
Group 2 Group 3
45
45
1 - 99
Group 1
45
1 - 99
45
45
45
1 - 99
45
45
45
1 - 99
45
45
45
1 - 99
45
45
45
1 - 99
45
45
45
Item/Display
G
HL_UM PLAIN CL HH
HL_LM PLAIN CL HH
HL_US PLAIN CL HH
WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T

HH
WARMUP FUMOFF HL_LM T

HH
L
(*1)
M
WARMUP END TIME HH

HL_UM HEAVY HH
HL_LM HEAVY HH
HL_US HEAVY HH
P
Q
R
S
HL_UM OHP HH
HL_LM OHP HH
HL_US OHP HH
HL_UM ENVELOPE HH
HL_LM ENVELOPE HH
HL_US ENVELOPE HH
HL_UM GLOSS HH
HL_LM GLOSS HH
HL_US GLOSS HH
HL_UM E-STAR HH
HL_US E-STAR HH
AA
PRE-JOB HH
AB
HL_LM E-STAR HH
AC
HL UM HEAVY2 CL HH
AD
HL LM HEAVY2 CL HH
AE
HL US HEAVY2 CL HH
AF
HL_UM WARMUP_120L HH
AG
HL_LM WARMUP_120L HH
AH
HL_US WARMUP_120L HH
AI
LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH
AJ
HL_UM WARMUP_120H HH
AK
HL_LM WARMUP_120H HH
AL
HL_US WARMUP_120H HH
AM
HI_WU_TIME_HH
AN
HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_HH
ContentSetting
Correction value for Color plain paper TH_UM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for Color plain paper TH_LM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for Color plain paper TH_US set value under HH
environment
Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_UM set value
HH environment
Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_LM set value
HH environment
Correction value for warm-up complete time under HH environment
Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for heavy paper TH_LM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under HH
environment
Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under HH environment
Correction value for OHP TH_LM set value under HH environment
Correction value for OHP TH_US set value under HH environment
Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for envelope TH_LM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under HH
environment
Correction value for glossy paper TH_UM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for glossy paper TH_LM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for glossy paper TH_US set value under HH
environment
Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under HH
environment
Correction value for resetting from preheating TH_UM set value
(Job Ready temperature) under HH environment
Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_US set value under HH
environment
Correction value for TH_UM set value in warm-up under HH
environment
Correction value for TH_LM set value in warm-up under HH
environment
Correction value for TH_US set value in warm-up under HH
environment
Correction value for AF-AH applying time (timer from Ready
complete) under HH environment
Correction value for TH_UM set value in warm-up under HH
environment
Correction value for TH_LM set value in warm-up under HH
environment
Correction value for TH_US set value in warm-up under HH
environment
Correction value for AJ-AL applying time (timer from Ready
complete) under HH environment
Correction value for fusing roller rotation start TH_UM under HH
environment (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha qC
or above)
Setting
range
Default value
Group 2 Group 3
45
45
1 - 99
Group 1
45
1 - 99
45
45
45
1 - 99
45
45
45
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
45
1 - 99
45
1 - 99
45
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
45
1 - 99
45
1 - 99
45
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Item/Display
AO
HI_WU_END_TIME_HH
AP
HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_HH
AQ
HI_WARMUP_BORDER_HH
Setting
range
ContentSetting
Correction value for warm-up complete time (sec) under HH
or above)
Correction value for Job Ready TH_UM temperature under HH
or above)
Correction value for the threshold value alpha applied to SIM43-1AN-AP under HH environment
Group 1
1 - 99
Default value
Group 2 Group 3
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50

Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Japan
U.S.A.
Europe
China
Canada
U.K.
AB_B
Inch
AUS
AB_A
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US

HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++
$ +/B805($'<++

% +/B/05($'<++
& +/B865($'<++
' +/B803/$,1%:++
( +/B/03/$,1%:++
) +/B863/$,1%:++
* +/B803/$,1&/++
+ +/B/03/$,1&/++
, +/B863/$,1&/++
- :$5083)8021+/B807++
. :$5083)802))+/B/07++
/ :$5083(1'7,0(++
2.
43-22
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup

under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
Correction
value
Input value
-49
-25
-5
25
49
25
45
50
55
75
99

Item/Display
A
HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL
HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP LL
HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL
PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT

LL
HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP LL
HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP LL
HL_US PLAIN CL DUP LL
ContentSetting
Upper TH_UM under LL environment
Correction value for Black-White plain paper duplex
Lower TH_LM under LL environment
Upper TH_US under LL environment
Black-White plain paper under LL environment
Correction value for duplex mode fusing temperature applying start
image (*1)
Upper TH_UM color under LL environment
Correction value for plain paper duplex
Lower TH_LM color under LL environment
Upper TH_US color under LL environment
Setting
range
Default value
Group 2 Group 3
60
60
1 - 99
Group 1
60
1 - 99
60
60
60
1 - 99
60
60
60
1 - 99
50
50
50
1 - 99
60
60
60
1 - 99
60
60
60
1 - 99
60
60
60
Item/Display
H
PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT

LL
HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL
HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP LL
HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL
L
M
HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT

LL
HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP LL
HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP LL
HL_US HEAVY CL DUP LL
HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT

LL
HL_UM HEAVY2 BW DUP
LL
HL_LM HEAVY2 BW DUP
LL
HL_US HEAVY2 BW DUP
LL
HEAVY2 BW DUP APP
CNT LL
HL_UM HEAVY2 CL DUP
LL
HL_LM HEAVY2 CL DUP LL
HL_US HEAVY2 CL DUP LL
HEAVY2 CL DUP APP CNT

LL
Q
R
S
T
U
Setting
range
ContentSetting
Color plain paper under LL environment
Correction value for duplex mode fusing temperature applying start
image (*1)
Correction value for TH_UM set value in Black-White heavy paper
duplex under LL environment
Correction value for TH_LM set value in Black-White heavy paper
Correction value for TH_US set value in Black-White heavy paper
Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode fusing
temperature applying start image under LL environment (*1)
Correction value for color heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value under
LL environment
Correction value for color heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value under
LL environment
Correction value for color heavy paper duplex TH_US set value under
LL environment
Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode fusing
Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_UM
set value under LL environment
Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_LM
Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_US
Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing
Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_UM set
value under LL environment
Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_LM set
Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_US set
Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing
1 - 99
Group 1
50
Default value
Group 2 Group 3
50
50
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
50

Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Japan
U.S.A.
Europe
China
Canada
U.K.
AB_B
Inch
AUS
AB_A
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US

HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17//'83
$ +/B803/$,1%:'83//

% +/B/03/$,1%:'83//
& +/B863/$,1%:'83//
' 3/$,1%:'83$33&17//
( +/B803/$,1&/'83//
) +/B/03/$,1&/'83//
* +/B863/$,1&/'83//
+ 3/$,1&/'83$33&17//
, +/B80+($9<%:'83//
- +/B/0+($9<%:'83//
. +/B86+($9<%:'83//
/ +($9<%:'83$33&17//
2.
43-23
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup

under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
Correction
value
Input value
-49
-25
-5
25
49
25
45
50
55
75
99
Item/Display
A
HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH
HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP HH
HL_US PLAIN BW DUP HH
D
E
PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT

HH
HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP HH
HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP HH
HL_US PLAIN CL DUP HH
PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT

HH
HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP
HH
HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP
HH
HL_US HEAVY BW DUP
HH
HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT
HH
HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP HH
HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP HH
HL_US HEAVY CL DUP HH
HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT

HH
HL_UM HEAVY2 BW DUP
HH
HL_LM HEAVY2 BW DUP
HH
HL_US HEAVY2 BW DUP
HH
HEAVY2 BW DUP APP
CNT HH
HL_UM HEAVY2 CL DUP
HH
HL_LM HEAVY2 CL DUP
HH
HL_US HEAVY2 CL DUP
HH
HEAVY2 CL DUP APP CNT
HH
I
J
K
L
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Setting
range
ContentSetting
Correction value for TH_UM Black-White plain paper duplex mode
Correction value for TH_LM Black-White plain paper duplex mode
Correction value for TH_US Black-White plain paper duplex mode
Correction value for Black-White plain paper duplex mode fusing
temperature applying start image under HH environment (*1)
Correction value for TH_UM Color plain paper duplex mode under HH
environment
Correction value for TH_LM Color plain paper duplex mode under HH
environment
Correction value for TH_US Color plain paper duplex mode under HH
environment
Correction value for Color plain paper duplex mode fusing temperature
applying start image under HH environment (*1)
Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_UM
set value under HH environment
Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_LM set
value under HH environment
Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_US set
Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode fusing
Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_UM set value
Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_LM set value
Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_US set value
Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode fusing
Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_UM
Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_LM
Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_US
Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing
Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_UM set
Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_LM set
Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_US set
Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing
Default value
Group 2 Group 3
45
45
1 - 99
Group 1
45
1 - 99
50
50
50
1 - 99
45
45
45
1 - 99
50
50
50
1 - 99
45
45
45
1 - 99
50
50
50
1 - 99
45
45
45
1 - 99
50
50
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50

Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Japan
U.S.A.
Europe
China
Canada
U.K.
AB_B
Inch
AUS
AB_A
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US

HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++'83
$ +/B803/$,1%:'83++

% +/B/03/$,1%:'83++
& +/B863/$,1%:'83++
' 3/$,1%:'83$33&17++
( +/B803/$,1&/'83++
) +/B/03/$,1&/'83++
* +/B863/$,1&/'83++
+ 3/$,1&/'83$33&17++
, +/B80+($9<%:'83++
- +/B/0+($9<%:'83++
. +/B86+($9<%:'83++
/ +($9<%:'83$33&17++
2.
43-24
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 434.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

Item/Display
A
NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US
NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM
LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US
LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM
HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US
HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM
G
(*2)
H
(*2)
I
(*2)
J
(*1)
Correction
value
Input value
-49
-25
-5
25
49
25
45
50
55
75
99
Content
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
55
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
60
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 60
NN_120_FUS_DUP_CNT
Correction value for duplex mode HL_UM, HL_US immediately after warm-up under NN
environment
(when the fusing temperature is less than 120qC)
Correction value for duplex mode HL_LM immediately after warm-up under NN
environment
Correction value for duplex mode HL_UM, HL_US immediately after warm-up under LL
environment
Correction value for duplex mode HL_LM immediately after warm-up under LL
environment
Correction value for duplex mode HL_UM, HL_US immediately after warm-up under HH
environment
Correction value for duplex mode HL_LM immediately after warm-up under HH
environment
Item A, B applying start screen under NN environment
LL_120_FUS_DUP_CNT
Item A, B applying start screen under LL environment
1 - 60
10
HH_120_FUS_DUP_CNT
Item A, B applying start screen under HH environment
1 - 60
COOL_DOWN_HEAVY
Cool down time heavy mode

(The time for turning and keeping OFF the heater lamp when the heavy paper mode
fusing temperature is returned to the normal temperature.)
Cool down time OHP mode
(The time for turning and keeping OFF the heater lamp when the OHP mode fusing
temperature is returned to the normal temperature.)
Cool down time envelope mode
(The time for turning and keeping OFF the heater lamp when the envelope mode fusing
temperature is returned to the normal temperature.)
Thin paper BW-TH_UM
1 - 60
15
1 - 60
30
1 - 60
40
100 - 190
150
K
(*1)
COOL_DOWN_OHP
L
(*1)
COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP
HL UM THIN PAPER BW
Item/Display
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
HL LM THIN PAPER BW
HL US THIN PAPER BW
HL UM THIN PAPER CL
HL LM THIN PAPER CL
HL US THIN PAPER CL
HL UM THIN PAPER READY
HL UM REC PAPER BW
HL LM REC PAPER BW
HL US REC PAPER BW
HL UM REC PAPER CL
HL LM REC PAPER CL
HL US REC PAPER CL
HL UM REC PAPER READY
Setting
range
100 - 190
100 - 190
100 - 190
100 - 190
100 - 190
100 - 190
100 - 190
100 - 190
100 - 190
100 - 190
100 - 190
100 - 190
100 - 190
Content
Thin paper BW-TH_LM
Thin paper BW-TH_US
Thin paper COL-TH_UM
Thin paper COL-TH_LM
Thin paper COL-TH_US
Thin paper Ready-TH_UM
Recycled paper BW-TH_UM
Recycled paper BW-TH_LM
Recycled paper BW-TH_US
Recycled paper COL-TH_UM
Recycled paper COL-TH_LM
Recycled paper COL-TH_US
Recycled paper Ready-TH_UM
Default
value
130
160
150
130
160
165
165
130
175
165
130
175
170

*2: 1 Count = 1 sheet Change
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US

HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US


6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
)86(57(035(6(7
$ 11BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86

% 11BB)86B'83B+/B/0
& //BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86
' //BB)86B'83B+/B/0
( ++BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86
) ++BB)86B'83B+/B/0
* 11BB)86B'83B&17
+ //BB)86B'83B&17
, ++BB)86B'83B&17
- &22/B'2:1B+($9<
. &22/B'2:1B2+3
/ &22/B'2:1B'(9(/23
2.
44
Item/Display
MD LD
44-1
Setting
Purpose
MD EV
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section.
Section
MD DL
Operation/Procedure
1)

(The selected item is highlighted.)
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
MD DL EV
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially required.
Item/Display
HV
HT
TC
MD VG
Content
Normal operation high
density process control
Normal operation half
tone process control
Transfer output
correction
Membrane decrease
grid voltage correction
Setting
range
Normal
(Disable
: 1 : NO)
Reverse
(Enable :
0 : YES)
Default
value
Enable
Enable
Enable
TN_HUM
NOTE
TN_AREA
TN_LIFE
TN_COV
Enable
Content
Membrane laser power
voltage correction
Membrane decrease
environment grid
voltage correction
Membrane decrease
discharge light quantity
correction
Membrane decrease
environment discharge
light quantity
correction
Toner density humidity
correction
Toner density area
correction
Toner density life
correction
Toner density print
ratio correction
Setting
range
Normal
(Disable
: 1 : NO)
Reverse
(Enable :
0 : YES)
Default
value
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
NOTE
Item/Display
Content
TN_PROCON
Toner density process

control correction
Toner density
environment correction
Toner density
correction
unconditional supply
Toner forcible
consumption mode
1pixel half tone
process control
correction
Auto registration
adjustment
Auto registration
adjustment execution
error check
Drum phase fitting
Toner density
correction
Half tone process
control printer
correction feedback
PTC environment
correction
PTC life correction
TN_ENV
TN_DRIP
TN_SPEND
PHT
AR_AUTO
AR_ERROR
DM_PHASE
SENSITIVITY
PRT_HT
PTC_ENV
PTC_LIFE
Setting
range
Normal
(Disable
: 1 : NO)
Reverse
(Enable :
0 : YES)
Default
value
Enable
NOTE
Item/Display
A
PCS_CL LED ADJ
PCS_K LED ADJ
C
D
E
PCS_CL DARK
PCS_K DARK
PCS_K GRND
PCS_K BELT MAX
PCS_K BELT MIN
Enable
PCS_K BELT DIF
Enable
REG_F LED ADJ
Enable
REG_R LED ADJ
REG_F DARK
REG_R DARK
REG_F GRND
REG_R GRND
REG_F BELT MAX
REG_F BELT MIN
REG_F BELT DIF
REG_R BELT MAX
REG_R BELT MIN
REG_R BELT DIF
REG_F PATCH (K)
REG_F PATCH (C)
REG_F PATCH (M)
REG_F PATCH (Y)
REG_R PATCH (K)
REG_R PATCH (C)
AA
REG_R PATCH (M)
AB
REG_R PATCH (Y)
Enable
Enable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable:
Correction ON
Enable:
Correction ON

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
02'(6(77,1*
+9
+7
7&
0'9*
0'/'
0'(9
0''/
0''/(9
71B+80
71B$5($
71B/,)(
71B&29
71B352&21
71B(19
71B'5,3
71B63(1'
3+7
$5B$872
$5B(5525
'0B3+$6(
6(16,7,9,7<
357B+7
37&B(19
37&B(19
(;(&87(

44-2
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image

density sensor (registration sensor).
Section
Process
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed automatically.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is displayed.
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Content
Color sensor light
emitting quantity
adjustment value
Black sensor light
emitting quantity
adjustment value
Dark voltage of color
Dark voltage of black
Belt substrate when
the item B
adjustment is
completed.
Belt substrate input
max. value
min. value
difference
(Item E - Item F)
Registration sensor
light emitting
quantity adjustment
value F
Registration sensor
light emitting
quantity adjustment
value R
Registration sensor
dark voltage F
Registration sensor
dark voltage R
Belt substrate when
the item I adjustment
is completed.
Belt substrate when
the item J adjustment is completed.
max. value (F side)
min. value (F side)
difference
(Item O - Item P)
max. value (R side)
min. value (R side)
difference
(Item R - Item S)
Patch light receiving
potential F(K)
potential F(C)
potential F(M)
potential F(Y)
potential R(K)
potential R(C)
potential R(M)
potential R(Y)
Setting
range
1 - 255
Default
value
21
1 - 255
21
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0
0
0
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
1 - 255
56
1 - 255
56
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 256
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
Error name
Black sensor adjustment
abnormality
Color sensor adjustment
abnormality
Substrate scan abnormality
Registration sensor F
adjustment abnormality
Registration sensor R
adjustment abnormality
Registration substrate F
scan abnormality
Registration substrate R
scan abnormality
Error content
PCS_K LED ADJ error
The target is not reached by 3 times of
retry.
PCS_CL LED ADJ error
retry.
PCS_K GRND error
Effective difference between the upper
and lower values of the belt substrate
circuit, outside the range
REG_F LED ADJ error
retry.
REG_R LED ADJ error
retry.
REG_F GRND error
REG_R GRND error
Item/Display
Content
BIAS_CL
STANDARD DIF
BIAS_BK
STANDARD DIF
I
J
BIAS PATCH
INTERVAL
Y_PAT TARGET ID
M_PAT TARGET ID
C_PAT TARGET ID
K_PAT TARGET ID
HV BK_GROUND
LIMIT
Bias (for color)

reference calculation
difference
Bias (for black)
reference calculation
difference
Patch bias output
interval
Patch density
standard value
(yellow)
Patch density
standard value
(magenta)
Patch density
standard value
(cyan)
Patch density
standard value
(black)
Patch position
substrate light
receiving effective
range value
Setting
range
0 - 255
Default
value
60
0 - 255
1 - 255
60
1 - 255
122
1 - 255
129
1 - 255
115
1 - 255
1 - 255
29

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
352&21*$,1$'-8670(17
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3&6B&//('$'-
5(*B)*51'
3&6B./('$'-
5(*B5*51'
3&6B&/'$5.
5(*B)%(/70$;
3&6B.'$5.
5(*B)%(/70,1

3&6B.*51'
5(*B)%(/7',)
' /('B.287387
3&6B.%(/70$;
5(*B5%(/70$;
( 3&6$'-670(17/,0,7
3&6B.%(/70,1
5(*B5%(/70,1
) %(/7*5281'',)
3&6B.%(/7',)
5(*B5%(/7',)
* %,$6B&/67$1'$5'',)
5(*B)/('$'-
5(*B)3$7&+.
+ %,$6B%.67$1'$5'',)
5(*B5/('$'-
5(*B)3$7&+&
, %,$63$7&+,17(59$/
5(*B)'$5.
5(*B)3$7&+0
- <B3$77$5*(7,'
5(*B5'$5.
5(*B)3$7&+<
352&21,1,7,$/'(16,7<6(783
$ 3&6B&/7$5*(7

% 3&6B.7$5*(7
& /('B&/287387
. 0B3$77$5*(7,'
(;(&87(
/ &B3$77$5*(7,'

2.
44-4
Purpose
44-6
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation.
Section
Process
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process

control forcibly.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
Operation/Procedure
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
Process
In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.

(Refer to the table below.)
In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
Item/Display
A
PCS_CL TARGET
PCS_K TARGET
LED_CL OUTPUT
LED_K OUTPUT
PCS ADJSTMENT
LIMIT
BELT GROUND DIF
Content
Color sensor target
set value
Black sensor target
set value
Color sensor light
emitting quantity set
value
Black sensor light
emitting quantity set
value
Sensor adjustment
target limit value
Effective difference
between the belt 1
circuit substrate
upper and lower limit
values
Setting
range
1 - 255
Default
value
98
1 - 255
208
1 - 255
21
1 - 255
21
1 - 255
1 - 255
Result display
COMPLETE
ERROR
INTERRUPTION
Content description
Normal complete
Abnormal end
Forcible interruption
Details of error display

CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR
K_HV_ERR
C_HV_ERR
M_HV_ERR
Y_HV _ERR
TIMEOUT_ERR
Content description
Color sensor adjustment abnormality
Black sensor adjustment abnormality
K high density process control abnormality
C high density process control abnormality
M high density process control abnormality
Y high density process control abnormality
Time out

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
352&21&2038/625<(;(&87,21
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
44-9
Operation data display
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high

density process control operation.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN],[OTHER] keys.

Mode
CPY/PRN
P (PROCON)
N(M)
(NORMAL (MIDDLE))
N(L)
(NORMAL (LOW))
OTHER
High density process control GB/DV data

(KCMY)
(Actual output voltage level/base voltage
level)
GB: 230 - 850

DV: 0 - 700
Default
value
GB: 630
DV: 430
High density normal (Medium speed

display) GB/DV data (KCMY)
level)
GB: 230 - 850

DV: 0 - 700
GB: 630
DV: 430
High density normal (Low speed display)

GB/DV data (KCMY)
level)
GB: 230 - 850

DV: 0 - 700
GB: 600
DV: 400
Item/Display (*: Correction value)
TN/TC
DRUM
VG
LD
HV
BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/***

CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
TN HUD AREA
TN HUD DATA
TC TMP AREA
TC TMP DATA
TC HUD AREA
TC HUD DATA
MD HUD AREA
MD HUD DATA
MD K STEP
MD C STEP
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER
MD C DRUM COUNTER
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
MD K REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD C REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD C REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
Content
Toner control display humidity area

Toner control display humidity AD value
Transfer display temperature area
Transfer display temperature AD value
Transfer display humidity area
Transfer display humidity AD value
Membrane decrease display humidity area
Membrane decrease display humidity AD
value
Drum membrane decrease correction STEP
display (KCMY)
Display range
1 - 14
0 - 1023
1-9
0 - 1023
1-9
0 - 1023
1 - 14
0 - 1023
9
0
4
0
4
0
9
0
0-4
Membrane decrease drum traveling

distance area (KCMY)
0 - 20
Drum membrane decrease grid voltage

correction display (KCMY)
0 - 255
Drum membrane decrease laser power

voltage correction (KCMY)
0 - 255
High density membrane decrease

environment GB correction display (KCMY)
0 - 255
Mode
Drum membrane decrease environment

grid voltage correction display (KCMY)
0 - 255
Default
value
0
Drum membrane decrease discharge light

quantity correction (%)
0 - 100
50
-100 - 100
0-1
-
0
-
0 - 99999999
0 - 99999999
Item/Display (*: Correction value)
OTHER
CP
DL
DL EV
CRUM
CNT
MD K REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***

MD C REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
DESTINATION
MODEL TYPE
CRUM DEST_K
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M
CRUM DEST_Y
PROCON COUNT HV
Drum membrane decrease environment

discharge light quantity correction (%)
Machine side management CRUM

destination (Main unit data)
Machine model type
CRUM destination (CRUM data)
High density process control number of

executions
Half tone process control number of
executions
PROCON COUNT HT

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
352&21'$7$',63352&211250$/01250$//

%/$&.B3*%B'9B
Mode
TARGET
(1 page)
Item/Display
CARB DATA
SEAL ADJ
DATA
&<$1B3*%B'9B
0$*(17$B3*%B'9B
<(//2:B3*%B'9B
%/$&.B0*%B'9B%/$&.B/*%B'9B
ADK_SL (K)
&<$1B0*%B'9B&<$1B/*%B'9B
0$*(17$B0*%B'9B0$*(17$B/*%B'9B
<(//2:B0*%B'9B<(//2:B/*%B'9B
ADK_INT(K)
&3<351
27+(5

44-12
Purpose
TARGET (K)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the

high density process control and the image
density sensor (registration sensor).
Section
Image process (Photoconductor/Developing)
Operation/Procedure
Display range
Content
TARGET
(C/M/Y)
PATCH
1-5
(Page 1-2)
n-1
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys.

n-2
n-3
n-4
n-5
PATCH
6-10
(Page 1-2)
n-1
n-2
n-3
n-4
n-5
Content
Calibration plate
detection level
Jig patch seal
detection level when
executing SIM 44-13
Development
characteristics
gradient coefficient
(High density process
control operation)
Development
characteristics
intercept level (High
density process
control operation 0V)
High density process
control target density
level (K)
control target density
level (C/M/Y)
control nth time patch
density level 1 (n=15)
Patch data nth time
patch 2 (n=1-5)
Patch data nth time
patch 3 (n=1-5)
Patch data nth time
patch 4 (n=1-5)
BK only
Patch data nth time
patch 5 (n=1-5)
BK only
Patch data nth time
patch 1 (n=6-10)
Patch data nth time
patch 2 (n=6-10)
Patch data nth time
patch 3 (n=6-10)
Patch data nth time
patch 4 (n=6-10)
BK only
Patch data nth time
patch 5 (n=6-10)
BK only
Display
range
0 - 255
Default
value
108
1 - 255
108
-9.99 9.99
-999.9 999.9
0.00 255.00
0.00 255.00
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
Item/Display
TH_LM
Content
Fusing lower thermister main A/D
value (temperature qC)
TH_US
Fusing upper thermister sub A/D

value (temperature qC)
TEMPRATURE
Temperature thermister
HUMIDITY
Humidity sensor
TH1_LSU
LSU thermister 1 A/D value

(temperature qC)
3$7&+7$5*(7'$7$',63/$<
&$5%'$7$
6($/$'-'$7$
$'.B6/.
$'.B,17.
7$5*(7.
7$5*(7&
7$5*(70
7$5*(7<
7$5*(7
3$7&+

3$7&+
44-13
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Display range
Temperature:
0 - 255qC(r1qC)
AD value: 0-1023
Temperature:
0 - 255qC(r1qC)
AD value: 0-1023
Temperature:
-40.0 - 60.0qC
(r0.1qC)
AD value: 0-1023
Humidity:
5.0-90.0% (r0.1%),
AD value: 0-1023
Temperature:
5.0-60.0qC
(r0.1qC)
AD value: 0-255
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the color image sensor

(image registration sensor F) calibration.

Section
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Operation/Procedure
&/26(
6(1625'$7$',63/$<021,725
7+B80GHJ;;;
1)
Attach the calibration jig.
2)
7+B80B$';;;
Calibration is performed, and the data are displayed.
7+B86GHJ;;;
7+B80B$'GHJ;;;
7+B/0GHJ;;;
7(035$785(GHJ;;;
Item/Display
Content
PCS_CL CARB OUT
PCS_CL LED ADJ
Calibration plate
sensor value
Color sensor light
emitting quantity
adjustment value
Setting
range
1 - 255
Default
value
108
1 - 255
21
+80,',7<;;;
7+B/68GHJ;;

44-16
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(

3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 3&6B&/&$5%287
&/26(
3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17
3&6B&/'$5.
3&6B&/&$5%287
3&6B&//('$'-
3&6B&//('$'-
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density control

data.
Developing system
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.

The toner density control data are displayed.
(;(&87(
(;(&87(

44-14
TONER
DEN_ST (M)
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor.
Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/
LSU
Section
Operation/Procedure
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine

temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
Item/Display
TH_UM
TH_UM_AD1
TH_UM_AD2
Content
Fusing upper thermister main
detection temperature (qC)
Difference AD input value (AD
value)
compensation temperature (qC)
AD value (AD value)
detection sensor AD value (AD
value)
Item/
Display
TONER
DEN_LT (M)
TONER
DEN_LT (L)
TONER
DEN_ST (L)
Display range
Temperature:
0 - 255qC(r1qC)
AD value: 0-1023
Temperature:
0.0-255.0qC
(r0.2qC)
AD value: 0-1023
AD value:0-1023
Content
The current toner density sensor
output value (final value) at the
medium speed
The current toner density reference
value display (including all the
correction values) at the medium
speed
The current toner density sensor
output value (final value) at the low
speed
The current toner density reference
value display (including all the
correction values) at the low speed
Setting
range
1 - 255
Default
value
129
128
129
128
Item/Display
AUTO DEVE
(M)
ALL (M)
AUTO DEVE
(L)
ALL (L)
AREA
HUD
PRINT RATE
PROCON
LIFE
SENSITIVITY
Content
Auto
development
adjustment
value
(At the
medium
speed)
All the
correction
reference
values
(At the
medium
speed)
Auto
development
adjustment
value
(At the low
speed)
All the
correction
reference
values
(At the low
speed)
Area
correction
value
Humidity
correction
value
Print ratio
correction
value
Process
control
correction
value
Life
correction
value
Sensitivity
correction
value
Sensor output value

after completion of
SIM25-02
(at the medium
speed)
Setting
range
1 - 255
Default
value
128
Correction reference
value which
calculated all the
correction values for
the auto
development
adjustment value
(at the medium
speed)
Sensor output value
after completion of
SIM25-02
(at the low speed)
Correction reference
value which
calculated all the
correction values for
the auto
development
adjustment value
(at the low speed)
Correction value for
the environment
area
change in humidity
Item/Display
AUTO DEVE
VO (M)
ALL VO (M)
AUTO DEVE
VO (L)
ALL VO (L)
-127 127
0
AREA VO
HUD VO

document print ratio
high density process
control result
PRINT RATE
VO

the developer life
PROCON VO
Correction for the

toner density
sensitivity
1 - 999
500
LIFE VO
SENSITIVITY
VO
ENV VO
Content
Auto
development
adjustment
control
voltage
(at the
medium
speed)
All the
correction
reference
control
voltages
(at the
medium
speed)
Auto
development
adjustment
control
voltage
(at the low
speed)
All the
correction
reference
control
voltages
(at the low
speed)
Area
correction
control
voltage
Humidity
correction
control
voltage
Print ratio
correction
control
voltage
Process
control
correction
control
voltage
Life
correction
value control
voltage
Sensitivity
correction
control
voltage
Environment
correction
control
voltage
Item/Display
AUTO DEVE
AREA
AREA
Sensor control
voltage value after
completion of
SIM25-02
(at the medium
speed)
Default
value
128
-127 127
1 - 999
500
-127 127
Setting
range
1 - 14
Default
value
8
Control voltage
reference value
which calculated all
the correction values
for the auto
development
adjustment value
(at the medium
speed)
Sensor control
voltage value after
completion of
SIM25-02
(at the low speed)
Control voltage
reference value
which calculated all
the correction values
for the auto
development
adjustment value
(at the low speed)
Control voltage
correction value for
the environment
area
Control voltage
change in humidity
Control voltage
the document print
ratio
Control voltage
the high density
process control
result
Control voltage
the developer life
Control voltage
the toner density
sensor
Control voltage
the high humidity
environment
Content
Area in the
auto
development
adjustment
Current area
Setting
range
1 - 255
Humidity area
display in the
automatic developer
adjustment
Current humidity
area display

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&/26(
+$/)721(&255(&75(68/7
37.37&37037<
721(5&21752/'$7$',63/$<
721(5'(1B/70
721(5'(1B670
721(5'(1B/7/
721(5'(1B67/
37.37&37037<
%$6(
,'
,'
,'
,'
,'
,'
,'
,'
,'
,'
,'
,'
%$6(
,'
,'
,'
,'

.
&
1(;7
<

44-24
44-21
Function (Purpose) Used to set the half tone process control
target.
Process
Section
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and

the correction level in the half tone process
control operation.
Process
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
The half tone process control target is set and the operation data
are displayed.
2)
Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
Display
Content
Normal complete
sensitivity adjustment error
Black image density sensor
sensitivity adjustment error
High density process control error
[YMCK]
Other errors
COMPLETE
ERROR COLOR SENSOR
ADJUSTMENT
ERROR BLACK SENSOR
ADJUSTMENT
[YMCK]
OTHER
Category
Coefficient
Item/Display
[EX-LOW]
[LOW]
[CONNECT]
[MID]

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
[HIGH]
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
[CONNECT POINT]
Reference
value
Correction
value
For printer
[SENSOR_TARGET]
[S_VALUE]
[PRINTER_S_VALUE]
(;(&87(
[PRINTER_BASE_DITHER
_VALUE]
44-22
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density

level in the half tone process control operation.
Section
[PRINTER_AUTO_HT
_VALUE]
[BEFORE S_VALUE]

Previous
correction
value
Content
Coefficient of the
approximation formula of
the minimum density
Coefficient of the
the low density
Coefficient of the
when connecting the low
density and the medium
density
Coefficient of the
the medium density
Coefficient of the
the high density
Each density section
connection output ratio
Half tone process control
reference value
Half tone process control
correction value
Printer half tone process
control correction value
Printer half tone process
control reference dither
value
Printer auto density
adjustment correction value
Previous half tone process
control value
Process
Operation/Procedure
1)

Select the display mode with [1ST STEP],[2ND STEP] key.

The toner patch density level made in the half tone process
control operation is displayed.
Item/Display
ID_n
BASE1
BASE5
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
+$/)721(352&215(68/7',63/$<
>(;/2:@$%
>/2:@$%&
>&211(&7@$%
>0,'@$%&
Content
Patch data display (n=1-16)
Belt substrate data (START)
Belt substrate data (LAST)
>+,*+@$%
>&211(&732,17@
&
<
1(;7

44-25

Setting
Purpose
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the

correction value for the half tone process
control.
&/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
Process
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2)
Select a target adjustment density level with [n] [p] key on the
touch panel.
3)
4)
Press [OK] key.
(;(&87(
Item/Display
A
Content
LOW FIELD
LOWER LIMIT
Low density
approximate
expression data
lower limit value
Low density
approximate
expression data
upper limit value
Medium density
approximate
expression data
lower limit value
Medium density
approximate
expression data
upper limit value
Reference point of
the highlight
correction amount
LOW FIELD
UPPER LIMIT
MID FIELD
LOWER LIMIT
MID FIELD
UPPER LIMIT
HIGHLIGHT
POINT
Setting
range
0 - 255
Default value
K
CMY
98
2
44-27
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half

tone process control.
Process
Section
Operation/Procedure
0 - 255
0 - 255
60
40
90
15
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The correction data of the half tone process control are
cleared.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
+$/)721(352&21$'-8670(17'$7$&/($5
0 - 255
144
1-8

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$5(<28685("
+$/)721(352&21,1,7,$/9$/8(',63/$<
$ /2:),(/'/2:(5/,0,7

% /2:),(/'833(5/,0,7

& 0,'),(/'/2:(5/,0,7
' 0,'),(/'833(5/,0,7
( +,*+/,*+732,17
&
2.
<
44-26
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process control compulsorily.
Section
Process
Operation/Procedure
The half tone process control is performed and the operation data
are displayed.
COMPLETE
INTERRUPTION
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR
[YMCK]
CONNECTION_ERR
Normal complete
Forcible interruption
Color image density sensor sensitivity
adjustment error
Black image density sensor sensitivity
adjustment error
High density process control error [YMCK]
Communication abnormality
<(6
12
(;(&87(
44-28
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution

conditions.
Section
Process
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
3)
Mode
Process control
Enable/Disable
setting
Item/Display
A
INITIAL
SW ON
Content
YES
NO
TIME
Enable
Disable
0-1
0
1
When supplying the power (when

clearing shut-off.)
Color process
control Enable
Process control
Disable
BK process control
Enable
Pixel count
judgment
(Judgement is
based on the setting
value of item K, L.)
Color process
control Enable
Process control
Disable
BK process control
Enable
Pixel count
judgment
(Judgement is
based on the setting
value of item K, L.)
Color process
control Enable
Process control
Disable
BK process control
Enable
Color process
control Enable
Process control
Disable
BK process control
Enable
0-3
Enable
Inhibit
0-1
0
1
Enable
Inhibit
0-1
0
1
Enable
Inhibit
0-1
0
1
Key operation
display
Key operation NO
display
0-1
HUM judgment is made when turning

ON the power and after passing
TIME.
HUM
REV1
YES
NO
REV2_BK
YES
NO
REV2_CL
YES
NO
REFRESH
MODE(*1)
YES
NO
Default
value
0
When warm-up after clearing the

counter of the OPC drum and the
developer unit
After passing the specified time from

leaving READY continuously (Time
can be changed by INTERVAL TIME)
HUM_LIMIT
Setting range
The temperature and humidity in side

the machine are monitored only
during a job for every 2hours (set by
item N). When the changes in the
temperature and the humidity are
greater than the specified level (the
set value of item O) in comparison
with the previous process control.
The accumulated traveling distance
of BK or M position OPC unit
reaches the specified level after
turning the power.
of BK position OPC drum unit
reaches the specified level from
execution of the previous density
correction.
of M position OPC drum unit reaches
the specified level from execution of
the previous density correction.
Select of YES/NO of the manual
process control key with key
operation
1
2
3
0-3
1
2
3
0-2
1
2
0-2
1
2
Mode
Item/Display
Process control
conditions
setting
Registration
adjustment
setting
Secondary
transfer
cleaning setting
Content
DAY
When the next warm-up if there is no

color job after a color job after
passing the specified days from
execution of the previous color
process control
PIX_RATIO_BK
Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified

value entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
Magnification ratio setting (%) of the color (CMY) toner count
specified value entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
Passing time setting of "TIME"(h: hour)
PIX_RATIO_CL
INTERVAL TIME
HUM HOUR
HUM_DIF
BK_RATIO
M_RATIO
Magnification ratio setting (%) of the M position OPC drum

traveling distance of "REV2_CL
COLOR BORDER
Magnification ratio setting (%) of the

M position OPC drum traveling
distance when executing the BK
process control
Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring

time of "HUM" (h: hour)
Area difference specified value when compared with the
execution of the previous process control of "HUM
Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the
BK position OPC drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK
BK ONLY
HT_DIF
RG_ON_SYNC
V
W
X
RG_TEMP_TIMER
RG_PERM_TIMER
RG_HOUR_TIMER
2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME1
2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME2
AA
2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME3
CL
ALL
CL/BK
1999
1 - 999
10
1 - 999
10
1-255
(1-255: 1-255h passed)
1 - 24
12
1-9
1-999
(Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
1-999
(Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
0 - 999
0
15
0-6
1999
0
1-5
6
1 - 255
15
20
40
Execution timing setting after turning ON the power

Span setting from execution Disable to Enable
Span setting of timer execution
0 - 240 (MINUTE)
0 - 15 (HOUR)
0-15 (Above)+(HOUR)
60
1
5
Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment

threshold value 1
threshold value 2
threshold value 3
1 - 999
200
1 - 999
300
1 - 999
500
&/26(
$ ,1,7,$/<(6
% 6:21
& 7,0(
' +80B/,0,7
( +80
) 5(9<(6
* 5(9B%.<(6
+ 5(9B&/<(6
, 5()5(6+02'(12
- '$<
. 3,;B5$7,2B%.
/ 3,;B5$7,2B&/
2.
0-2
352&217,0,1*$'-8670(17
0 - 999
Default
value
1
0
1
2

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
BK process control
is executed without
judgment of ratio of
the M OPC drum
traveling distance.
(Addition)
1 - 999(%)
Disable/Enable setting and setting of Enable 5 time

the number of repetition of the BK
Disable 1-5 times
process control when monochrome
Inhibit
print is continued.
Bias change difference value used for judgment of HT
process control
Select of synchronous/asynchronous of the power ON
process control
When the color balance or the density change is not within the
allowable range, the user can perform the process control manually
and forcibly. However, toner is consumed grater than as usual. This
point must be explained to the user clearly.

Disable of the
specified days
judgment
1 - 999 days passing
*1: When REFRESH MODE setting is enabled (0), the menu of the
user process control execution button is displayed on the user system setting menu.
Setting range
44-29

Purpose
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Setting
$ &23<+93+7+7
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the

process control during a job.
Section
&/26(
+$/)721(6(77,1*

% 35,17(5+93+7+7
& )$;+93+7+7
' 6(/)35,17+93+7+7
Process
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

Item/Display
A
2.
Content
COPY
B
C
PRINTER
FAX
SELF
PRINT
During copy
job
During print job
During FAX
print job
During self
print
Setting range
0-4
0
1
2
3
4
No
execution
HV only
HV o PHT
Default
value
4
4
4
HV o HT
HV o PHT
o HT
44-31
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Manual adjustment)
Section
Process
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simulation, but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment).
HV: High density process control
1)
Select item A with [n] [p] key.
HT: Half tone process control
2)
Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment pattern with

10 key.
3)
Press [EXCUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed out.)
4)
Select an adjustment pattern whose deflection is within two

scale lines on the adjustment pattern of C,M, Y colors.
PHT: Not operate
Item/Display
A
PRINT MODE
COLOR
PAPER
5)
Select item B with [n] [p] key.
6)
Enter the adjustment pattern sheet number selected in procedure 4).
7)
8)
The adjusted adjustment pattern is printed.
Content
45deg
Print mode
45
degrees
90deg
90
degrees
SET
VALUE
SET
VALUE
Phase adjustment value
BKoCL
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
Tray selection
Deflection check pattern print for every 45 degrees (8-sheet

print)
(1)0q (2)45q (3)90q(4)135q (5)180q (6)225q (7)270q (8)315q
* The number in () is printed on the output pattern.
Deflection check pattern print for every 90 degrees (4-sheet
print)
(1)0q (2)90q (3)180q (4)270q
* The number in () is printed on the output pattern.
Deflection check pattern print at the set value (1-sheet print)

&/26(
'580326,7,216(77,1*
$ 35,1702'(6(79$/8(

% &2/25
& 3$3(5&6
(;(&87(
2.
1-3
Default
value
3
(SET
VALUE)
Angle step 0q (1) o 45q (2) o 90q (3) o 135q (4) o 180q (5)
o 225q (6) o 270q (7) o 315q (8)
Manual paper feed
Main unit 1 stage
Main unit 2 stage
Option paper feed desk 1 stage
Option paper feed desk 2 stage
LCC
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Setting range
1-8
1
2
3
4
5
6
1-6
3
(CS2)
44-37
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a set target color with the touch panel.
2)
Select a target item with [n] [p] buttons.
3)
4)
NOTE:
When the print density is varied in the continuous printing operation, this simulation is used.
Current DV Bias
voltage
Low speed mode

Heavy paper mode
Middle speed mode
High speed mode

Monochrome mode
Time (T) from
termination of
continuous outputs
to start of the next
output operation
Low speed mode

Heavy paper mode
Middle speed mode
High speed mode

Monochrome mode
Item/Display
Black CMY
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
F
F
G
H
I
J
G
K
H
L
I
M
J
N
K
O
L
P
M
Q
N
R
S
T
U
-
less than 300[v]

300[v] or more, less than 450[v]
450[v] or more
less than 300[v]
450[v] or more
less than 300[v]
450[v] or more
Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB
10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec]
240 [sec] or more
240 [sec] or more
240 [sec] or more
Default value
Black CMY
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
3
3
1
1
1
1
4
4
3
3
1
1
1
1
4
4
3
3
1
1
1
1
Variable range
0-5
(*1)
1-12
<Use example>
44-43
(*1)
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is greater
than that of the first sheet, decrease the set value.
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is smaller
than that of the first sheet, increase the set value.
When the set value is 0 (Default), the correction level does not
work.
Purpose
Section
Developing system
Operation/Procedure
The identification number and the identification signal level of the
developing unit are displayed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification information of the developing unit.
Item/Display
&/26(
Content
,0$*('(16,7<'9%$'-8670(176(77,1*

$ '9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B

% '9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B
DVCH KIND K
DVCH KIND C
DVCH KIND M
DVCH KIND Y
DVCH_AD_K
DVCH_AD_C
DVCH_AD_M
DVCH_AD_Y
& '9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B
' '9B$'-B&/B.B0B'$7$B
( '9B$'-B&/B.B0B'$7$B
) '9B$'-B&/B.B0B'$7$B
* '9B$'-B%.B+B'$7$B
+ '9B$'-B%.B+B'$7$B
, '9B$'-B%.B+B'$7$B
- '9B$'-B67$57B&/B.B/B
. '9B$'-B67$57B&/B.B/B
/ '9B$'-B67$57B&/B.B/B
&
<
2.
M X-3100N SIM U LATIO N 7 67
K color development unit

identification number
C color development unit
M color development unit
Y color development unit
K color developing unit identification
number AD value
C color developing unit identification
number AD value
M color developing unit
identification number AD value
Y color developing unit identification
number AD value
Display
range
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
Item/Display

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PHOTOGRAPH
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
MAP (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
SINGLE COLOR
Text/Printed
Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
Text/Photograph
(Color tone
enhancement)
Printed Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
Photograph
(Color tone
enhancement)
Map
(Color tone
enhancement)
Single color
SINGLE COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
TWO COLOR
Single color
(Copy
document)
2-color (red/
black) copy
TWO COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
'(9(/23(581,7$'021,725
'9&+.,1'.
'9&+.,1'&
'9&+.,1'0
'9&+.,1'<
'9&+B$'B.
'9&+B$'B&
'9&+B$'B0
'9&+B$'B<
P

46
46-1
Purpose
Adjustment (Color copy mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy

mode.
Section
2-color (red/
black) copy
(copy document)
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)

TEXT
Text
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
Text/Printed
Photo
TEXT/PHOTO
Text/Photograph
PRINTED PHOTO
Printed Photo
PHOTOGRAPH
Photograph
MAP
Map
LIGHT
Light document
TEXT(COPY TO
COPY)
Text (Copy
document)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
Text/Printed
Photo (Copy
document)
Printed Photo
(Copy
document)
Text (Color tone
enhancement)
TEXT (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
&/26(
% 7(;7
& 7(;735,17('3+272
' 7(;73+272
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
Content
Auto
50
50
$ $872
( 35,17('3+272
) 3+272*5$3+
* 0$3
+ /,*+7
, 7(;7&23<72&23<
- 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy density is decreased.
AUTO
1 - 99
1 - 99
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
adjustment value.
LOW
HIGH

Item/Display
Default
value
50
50
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

3)
LOW
HIGH
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
Content
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<

/ 7(;7&2/25721((1+$1&(0(17
/2:
+,*+
2.
46-2
Purpose
Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy

mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)

3)
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
adjustment value.
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy density is decreased.
Item/Display
Content
AUTO1
Auto 1
AUTO2
Auto 2
TEXT
Text
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
Item/Display
D
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
Text/Printed
Photo
TEXT/PHOTO
Text/
Photograph
PRINTED PHOTO
Printed Photo
PHOTOGRAPH
Photograph
MAP
Map
TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
Text (Copy
document)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
Text/Printed
Photo (Copy
document)
Printed Photo
(Copy
document)
Light
document
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
LOW
HIGH
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
Content
LIGHT

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>6&$11(5@

$ $872

% 7(;7
& 7(;735,17('3+272
' 7(;73+272
( 35,17('3+272
) 3+272*5$3+
* 0$3
2.
46-5
Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image

send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
$ $872

1)
panel.
2)
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
% $872

& 7(;7
' 7(;735,17('3+272
( 7(;73+272
3)
) 35,17('3+272
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is

* 3+272*5$3+
+ 0$3
, 7(;7&23<72&23<
- 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
Item/Display
/ /,*+7
/2:
+,*+
A
B
C
2.
46-4
Purpose
Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image

send mode.
Section
D
E
F
G
AUTO TEXT
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
Content
Automatic/Text
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
$ $8727(;7


A
B
C
D
E
F
G
AUTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
Content
Auto
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
% 7(;7
& 7(;735,17('3+272
' 7(;73+272
( 35,17('3+272

Item/Display
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>6&$11(5@
3)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
) 3+272*5$3+
* 0$3
2.
Item/Display
46-8
Purpose
Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color

balance RGB.
FAX : LOW
COPY : HIGH
SCAN : HIGH
FAX : HIGH
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch
panel.
2)
panel.
3)
4)
Content
adjustment
(Low density side)
RSPF copy copy mode
exposure adjustment
(High density side)
RSPF scanner mode
exposre adjustment
(Low density side)
adjustment (high density)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
48
1 - 99
53
1 - 99
53
1 - 99
53

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
area and the high density area.
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$ &23</2:
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the

target color is increased, and vice versa.

% 6&$1/2:
)$;/2:
&23<+,*+
( 6&$1+,*+
Item/Display
Content
LOW DENSITY POINT
HIGH DENSITY POINT
Low density correction

amount
High density correction
amount
Default
value
50
)$;+,*+
50
2.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($'-8670(17&2/256&$11(502'(
$ /2:'(16,7<32,17

46-10
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance and

the gamma (for each color copy mode).
% +,*+'(16,7<32,17

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
2)
Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the

touch panel.
3)
panel.
4)
2.

46-9
Purpose
Adjustment (RSPF mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density.

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an adjustment target mode with [OC] and [RSPF] keys

on the touch panel.
2)
panel.
3)

4)
5)

TEXT
TEXT/PRT PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTO + TEXT/PHOTO
MAP
LIGHT
COPY ORG
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
mode, and the fax mode.
Item/Display
A
COPY : LOW
SCAN : LOW
Content
RSPF copy mode exposure
adjustment
(Low density side)
RSPF scanner mode
exposure adjustment
(Low density side)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
48
1 - 99
48
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Printed Photo
Photograph + Text/Printed Photo
Map
Light document
Copy document
Density level
(Point)
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Setting range
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
Default
value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
Density level
(Point)
Point 15
Point 16
Point 17
Item/Display
O
P
Q
POINT15
POINT16
POINT17
Setting range
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
Default
value
500
500
500

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
7(;7
7(;73573+272
35,17('3+272
0$3
/,*+7
&23<25*
46-19
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the

density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode documents.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with touch panel.
3+2727(;73+272
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is

saved.
Item/Display
(;(&87(
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
POINT16
POINT17
AE_STOP_COPY
Auto B/W exposure

Stop (for copy)
AE_STOP_FAX
Auto B/W exposure

Stop (for FAX)
Auto B/W exposure
Stop (for scanner)
AE_FILTER
Auto exposure filter

setting
AE_WIDTH
AE exposure width
Setting range
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
373 - 627
Default
value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$(B02'(
ON
STOP
NORMAL
FULL
&/26(
02'(
02'(
$(B6723B&23<
5($/7,0(
6723
$(B6723B)$;
2))
21
$(B6723B6&$1
5($/7,0(
6723
35(6&$1
$(B),/7(5
62)7
1250$/
6+$53
$(B:,'7+
)8//
3$57
NOTE:
MODE 1
MODE 2
STOP
REALTIME
PRESCAN
AE WIDTH FULL
% 32,17
& 32,17
AE WIDTH PART
' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
(;(&87(
35(6&$1

$ 32,17

REALTIME/
STOP/
PRESCAN
SOFT
NORMAL
SHARP
FULL/PART
STOP

(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
MODE1,
MODE2
REALTIME/
STOP/
PRESCAN
ON/OFF
Default
value
MODE1
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$(

Density level
(Point)
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Point 16
Point 17
Auto exposure mode
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

Item/Display
AE_MODE
AE_STOP_SCAN
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy density and the gamma (for each monochrome
copy mode).
3)
Set value

46-16
Purpose
Content
2.
High gamma (high contrast images)

Normal gamma
The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is
scanned, and the output image density is determined
according to the scanned density. (The output image
density is even for all the surface.)
The densities of the document width are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is
determined according to the density in each area of
document. (The output image density may not be
even for all the surface.)
The densities of the all surface of document are
scanned sequentially, and the output image density is
determined according to the average of the scanned
densities. (The output image density is even for all the
surface.)
The document density scan area in the monochrome
auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x
the document width. This is not related to the prescan
mode.
The document density scan area in the monochrome
auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x
100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN
mode.
46-21
46-23
Adjustment
Purpose
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual

adjustment)
Section
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy

high density section (High density tone gap
supported).
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)

touch panel.
Operation/Procedure
2)
panel.
3)

4)
1)

0
1
2)

Enable
Inhibit
Item/Display
A
CMY
(0 : ENABLE
1 : DISABLE)
K
(0 : ENABLE
1 : DISABLE)
CYAN MAX
TARGET
MAGENTA MAX
TARGET
YELLOW MAX
TARGET
BLACK MAX
TARGET
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in

the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value.
Density level
(Point)
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Point 16
Point 17
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
POINT16
POINT17
Setting range
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
Default
value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@
$ 32,17

Content
0
CMY engine
highest density
correction mode :
Enable
1
CMY engine
highest density
correction mode :
Disable
0
K engine highest
density correction
mode : Enable
1
K engine highest
density correction
mode : Disable
CYAN maximum
density correction
MAGENTA maximum
density correction
YELLOW maximum
density correction
BLACK maximum
density correction
Setting
range
0-1
Default
value
0
0-1
0 - 999
629
0 - 999
532
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A
and B to "0.
gap is better.
* To increase the density in the high density area further, set items
A and B to "1.
% 32,17
& 32,17

' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these

values are changed, the density in the high density area is
changed.
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
.
&
<

(;(&87(
2.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(

% .(1$%/(',6$%/(
& &<$10$;7$5*(7
' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
2.
46-24

Adjustment
Purpose
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment

(Auto adjustment)
$ 5('

Section
% *5((1
& %/8(
' &<$1
( 0$*(17$
Operation/Procedure
) <(//2:
1)
2)
Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,

select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
3)
&
The copy color balance automatic adjustment is performed,

then the adjustment result pattern is printed.
4)
Press [OK] key.

The half tone correction target registration is processed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
2.
<
46-26
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the single color mode color

balance set value to the default.
Section
Operation/Procedure
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The color balance value of the single color mode is reset to the
default value.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6,1*/(&2/2502'(67$1'$5'5$7(6(783
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
46-27
)$&725<
6(59,&(
(;(&87(
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy

images, texts, and line image edges.
46-25
Section
Purpose
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Single color copy mode)
1)
Section
2)
Operation/Procedure
3)
1)
panel.
Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the

touch panel.
2)
panel.
3)
4)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the

target color is increased, and vice versa.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Item/Display
Setting
range
RED
GREEN
BLUE
YELLOW
MAGENTA
CYAN
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
C
0
255
255
0
0
255
Default value
M
Y
255
200
0
255
200
0
0
255
255
0
0
0
D
E
Item/Display
(Copy mode)
BLACK TEXT
(SLOPE)
BLACK TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
COLOR TEXT
(SLOPE)
COLOR TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
ED TEXT
(SLOPE)
ED TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Content
gamma skew
adjustment
density adjustment
gamma skew
adjustment
density adjustment
Text/Map mode gamma
adjustment (Text/Map
mode)
Text/Map mode density
adjustment (Text/Map
mode)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
When the adjustment values of items A, C, and E are changed, the

gamma of text and line edge image density section is changed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the image contrast of character and line edge
is decreased.
When the adjustment values of items B, D, and F are increased,
the image density of text and line edge section is decreased, and
vice versa.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
&/26(
3)

adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
and the low density image is decreased.
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(

Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background

density reproducibility in the monochrome
auto copy mode.

&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
46-32
% %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37

& &2/257(;76/23(
' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
( ('7(;76/23(
) ('7(;7,17(5&(37
2.
46-30
Item/Display
Content
A
B
C
D
COPY : OC
COPY : RSPF
SCAN : OC
SCAN : RSPF
E
F
FAX : OC
FAX : RSPF
Copy mode (for OC)

Copy mode (for RSPF)
Scanner mode (for OC)
Scanner mode
(for RSPF)
FAX mode (for OC)
FAX mode (for RSPF)

Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corresponding to the resolution mode with 10 key.

Item/Display
SCAN
RESOLUTION
SW
Content
Scan resolution
selection
(COPY: COLOR)
Scan mode
OC
RSPF
OC
RSPF
Mode1
Mode2
Setting
range
0-1
0
1
( )$;2&
Default
value
0
2.

&/26(
6&$15(62/87,216(77,1*
$ 6&$15(62/87,216:
& 6&$12&
) )$;563)
Resolution in the sub scanning direction

(DPI)
25-99%
100-200%
201-400%
[Magnifica[Magnifica[Magnification ratio]
tion ratio]
tion ratio]
600
600
1200
600
600
1200
300
600
1200
400
600
1200
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
% &23<563)
' 6&$1563)
Mode2
&/26(
$ &23<2&
1)
Mode1
196
196
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
Operation/Procedure
Mode
1 - 250
1 - 250

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Section
Default
value
196
196
196
196
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub

scanning direction in the copy mode.
2)
Setting
range
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
1 - 250
46-36
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color

copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target adjustment item with [n] [p] key on the touch
panel.
2)
3)
By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in

the 2-color copy mode can be performed.

Item/Display
2.
A
B
C
D
E
F
RED
GREEN
BLUE
CYAN
MAGENTA
YELLOW
Content
R output color
G output color
B output color
C output color
M output color
Y output color
Setting
range
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
Default value
C
M
Y
0
255
200
255
0
255
255
200
0
255
0
0
0
255
0
0
0
255

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
5('%/$&.&2/25&23<$'-8670(17
$ 5('

46-38
Purpose
& %/8(
&<$1
Section
0$*(17$
Operation/Procedure
<(//2:
1)
&
2.
<
Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode
key.
2)
3)
Press the black component amount select key.
This adjusts black ingredient amount in the color copy mode.

(except character and line image)
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part
changes.
46-37
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black component

amount in the color copy mode.
% *5((1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the color document reproducibility in the monochrome copy mode.
Item/Display (Copy mode)

MANUAL
Section
TEXT PRT
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target item with [n] [p] keys on the touch panel.
2)
3)
4)
Press [YES] key.
TEXT
This simulation is used to adjust the reproducibility of red and yellow images when copy a color document of red and yellow images
in the monochrome mode.
Item/Display
A
B
Default
value
21
0
Content
R/G
B/G
Gray making setting (R/G)

Gray making setting (B/G)
PRINTED
PHOTO
PHOTO
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, it is set to the default value.

When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased, copy
density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment value is
decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased, copy
density of red image is increased. When the adjustment value is
decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
TEXT
PHOTO
MAP
&/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$ 5*

% %*

CP ORG/
TEXT PRT
COPY ORG/
TEXT
'()$8/7
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
COPY ORG/
PHOTO
LIGHT
ORIGINAL
Select
button
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Content
Text print
(Manual)
Default
value
(+) LUT1
Text (Manual)
(+) LUT1
Printed photo
(Manual)
(+) LUT1
Photographic
paper
(Manual)
NORMAL
Text/
Photograph
(Manual)
NORMAL
Map (Manual)
(+) LUT1
Copy
document/
Text printed
(Manual)
(+) LUT1
Copy
document/
Text (Manual)
(+) LUT1
Copy
document/
Printed photo
(Manual)
(+) LUT1
Light
document
(Manual)
(+) LUT1
Item/Display (Copy mode)

AUTO
AUTO0
AUTO1
AUTO2
AUTO3
AUTO4
AUTO5
AUTO6
Select
button
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT2
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Default
value
(+) LUT1
Content
Auto mode
judgment 0
Item/Display
B
200 x 200 [DPI]

OFF
200 x 200 [DPI]
ON
200 x 400 [DPI]
OFF
200 x 400 [DPI]
ON
400 x 400 [DPI]
OFF
400 x 400 [DPI]
ON
600 x 600 [DPI]
OFF
600 x 600 [DPI]
ON
C
D
Auto mode
judgment 1
(+) LUT1
E
F
Auto mode
judgment 2
NORMAL
H
I
Auto mode
judgment 3
Content
200 x 200 [DPI]
half tone OFF
200 x 200 [DPI]
half tone ON
200 x 400 [DPI]
half tone OFF
200 x 400 [DPI]
half tone ON
400 x 400[DPI]
half tone OFF
400 x 400[DPI]
half tone ON
600 x 600[DPI]
half tone OFF
600 x 600[DPI]
half tone ON
Setting
range
0-2
Default
value
1
0-2
0-2
0-2
0-2
0-2
0-2
0-2
NORMAL

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
,0$*(6(1'6+$531(66$'-8670(17
Auto mode
judgment 4
$ h>'3,@2))
(+) LUT1

% h>'3,@2))
& h>'3,@21
' h>'3,@2))
( h>'3,@21
) h>'3,@2))
* h>'3,@21
Auto mode
judgment 5
(+) LUT1
Auto mode
judgment 6
(+) LUT1
+ h>'3,@2))
, h>'3,@21
2.
46-40
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.

(Collective adjustment of all the modes)
Section

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
7(;7357
7(;7
35,17('3+272
3+272
7(;73+272
0$3
0$18$/
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
/87
120$/
120$/
Operation/Procedure
1)
Set the original on the original table.
2)
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted.
120$/
120$/
120$/
Item/Display
A
120$/
$872
EXPOSURE
LEVEL(ALL)

Content
Used to adjust the FAX
send image density.
(Collective adjustment of all
the modes)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
46-39
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup

Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send

images.
Section
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;$//
$ (;32685(/(9(/$//

Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large

numeric value to decrease moire.
(;(&87(
Item/Display
A
200 x 100 [DPI]

OFF
Content
200 x 100 [DPI]
half tone OFF
Setting
range
0-2
Default
value
1
2.
46-41
Item/Display
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose

(Normal)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)

Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Content
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
EXECUTE AUTO
MODE
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
Auto
Exposure 1
Exposure 2
Exposure 3
Exposure 4
Exposure 5
Print
Auto
mode Exposure 1
Exposure 2
Exposure 3
Exposure 4
Exposure 5
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1-6
1
2
3
4
5
6
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXECUTE
MODE
AUTO
EXP1
EXP2
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
1
(AUTO)
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO
H_TONE
EXP1
H_TONE
EXP2
H_TONE
EXP3
H_TONE
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the document and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F,
and press [EXECUTE] key.
EXP4
H_ONE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
EXP5
H_TONE
&/26(
(;(32685($'-8670(17)$;1250$/
$ $872

(;32685(
(;32685(
Content
Fine/Exposure 2/
Half tone
Fine/Exposure 3/
Half tone
Fine/Exposure 4/
Half tone
Fine/Exposure 5/
Half tone
Print
Fine/Auto
mode Fine/
Exposure 1
Fine/
Exposure 2
Fine/
Exposure 3
Fine/
Exposure 4
Fine/
Exposure 5
Fine/
Automatic/
halftone
Fine/
Exposure 1
/Half tone
Fine/
Exposure 2
/Half tone
Fine/
Exposure 3
/Half tone
Fine/
Exposure 4
/Half tone
Fine/
Exposure 5
/Half tone
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
112
1
2
1
(AUTO)
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the document and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
(;32685(
(;32685(
(;32685(
(;(&87(02'($872

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(;(32685($'-8670(17)$;),1(
$ $872
(;(&87(
2.

(;32685(
& (;32685(
' (;32685(
46-42
( (;32685(
) (;32685(
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
$872+B721(

(Fine)
(;(&87(
1)
2)
3)

AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
- (;32685(+B721(
/ (;32685(+B721(
Operation/Procedure
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
, (;32685(+B721(
. (;32685(+B721(
Section
Item/Display
+ (;32685(+B721(
Content
Fine/Automatic
Fine/Exposure 1
Fine/Exposure 2
Fine/Exposure 3
Fine/Exposure 4
Fine/Exposure 5
Fine/Automatic/
Half tone
Fine/Exposure 1/
Half tone
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 - 99
50
2.

46-43
Purpose
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Adjustment/Setup
&/26(
(;(32685($'-8670(17)$;683(5),1(
$ $872

(Super Fine)

(;32685(
& (;32685(
' (;32685(
Section
( (;32685(
) (;32685(
Operation/Procedure
$872+B721(
1)
2)
3)
+ (;32685(+B721(
, (;32685(+B721(
- (;32685(+B721(
. (;32685(+B721(
/ (;32685(+B721(

Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1
H_TONE
EXPOSURE2
H_TONE
EXPOSURE3
H_TONE
EXPOSURE4
H_TONE
EXPOSURE5
H_TONE
EXECUTE AUTO
MODE
EXP1
I
J
K
L
M
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO
H_TONE
EXP1
H_TONE
EXP2
H_TONE
EXP3
H_TONE
EXP4
H_TONE
EXP5
H_TONE
Content
Super Fine/Auto
Super Fine/Exposure 1
Super Fine
/Auto/Half tone
/Half tone
/Half tone
/Half tone
/Half tone
/Half tone
Print
Super Fine
mode
/Auto
Super Fine
/Exposure 1
Super Fine
/Exposure 2
Super Fine
/Exposure 3
Super Fine
/Exposure 4
Super Fine
/Exposure 5
Super Fine
/Auto
/Half tone
Super Fine
/Exposure 1
/Half tone
Super Fine
/Exposure 2
/Half tone
Super Fine
/Exposure 3
/Half tone
Super Fine
/Exposure 4
/Half tone
Super Fine
/Exposure 5
/Half tone
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
112
1
(AUTO)
2
3
4
5
6
7
(;(&87(
2.
46-44
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup

(Ultra fine)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)

Item/Display
A
B
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
10
11
12
Content
Ultra Fine/Auto
Ultra Fine/Exposure
1
Ultra Fine/Exposure
2
Ultra Fine/Exposure
3
Ultra Fine/Exposure
4
Ultra Fine/Exposure
5
Ultra Fine/Auto/Half
tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure
1/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure
2/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure
3/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure
4/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure
5/Half tone
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Item/Display
M
EXECUTE
MODE
Content
AUTO
Print
mode
Ultra Fine/
Auto
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 1
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 2
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 3
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 4
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 5
Ultra Fine/
Auto/Half
tone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure
1/Half tone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 2
/Half tone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 3
/Half tone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 4
/Half tone
Ultra Fine/
Exposure 5
/Half tone
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO
H_TONE
EXP1
H_TONE
EXP2
H_TONE
EXP3
H_TONE
EXP4
H_TONE
EXP5
H_TONE
Setting
range
11
12
2
Default
value
1
(AUTO)
Item/Display
G
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXECUTE
MODE
EXP2
EXP3
9
EXP4
10
EXP5
AUTO
H_TONE
EXP1
H_TONE
11
12
EXP2
H_TONE
EXP3
H_TONE
EXP4
H_TONE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
EXP5
H_TONE
(;(32685($'-8670(17)$;8/75$),1(
$ $872

AUTO
EXP1
(;32685(
& (;32685(
' (;32685(
Content
600dpi/Auto
/Half tone 1
600dpi/Exposure 1
/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 2
/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 3
/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 4
/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 5
/Half tone
Print
600dpi/Auto
mode 600dpi/
Exposure 1
600dpi/
Exposure 2
600dpi/
Exposure 3
600dpi/
Exposure 4
600dpi/
Exposure 5
600dpi/Auto/
Half tone
600dpi/
Exposure 1
/Half tone
600dpi/
Exposure 2
/Half tone
600dpi/
Exposure 3
/Half tone
600dpi/
Exposure 4
/Half tone
600dpi/
Exposure 5
/Half tone
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
112
1
2
1
(AUTO)
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
( (;32685(
) (;32685(
$872+B721(
+ (;32685(+B721(
, (;32685(+B721(
- (;32685(+B721(

. (;32685(+B721(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
/ (;32685(+B721(
(;(&87(
2.
$ $872

46-45
(;32685(
& (;32685(
' (;32685(
Purpose
( (;32685(
Adjustment/Setup
) (;32685(

(600dpi).
$872+B721(
Section
- (;32685(+B721(
2)
3)
(;(&87(

A
B
C
D
E
F
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
, (;32685(+B721(
/ (;32685(+B721(
Item/Display
+ (;32685(+B721(
. (;32685(+B721(
Operation/Procedure
1)
&/26(
(;(32685($'-8670(17)$;'3,
Content
600dpi/Auto 1
600dpi/Exposure 1
600dpi/Exposure 2
600dpi/Exposure 3
600dpi/Exposure 4
600dpi/Exposure 5
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
2.
46-47
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy

and scan images (JPEG).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
Operation
mode
PUSH SCAN
(GRAY)
(Scanner
(Monochrome
half-tone
mode))
Item/Display
Content
SCA
N(G)
(*1)
Medium
compres
sion
mode 1
Low
compres
sion
Medium
compres
sion
mode 2
Medium
compres
sion
Medium
compres
sion
mode 3
High
compres
sion
MIDDLE
1
MIDDLE
2
The set value is saved.

Operation
mode
COPY
(COLOR)
(COPY
(COLOR
mode))
Item/Display
Content
COPY
(C)
Low
compres
sion
(Color)
Medium
compres
sion
(Color)
High
compres
sion
(Color)
Super
low
compres
sion
(Color)
Low
compres
sion
(Gray)
Medium
compres
sion
(Gray)
High
compres
sion
(Gray)
Super
low
compres
sion
(Gray)
Medium
compres
sion
mode 1
Low
compres
sion
Medium
compres
sion
mode 2
Medium
compres
sion
Medium
compres
sion
mode 3
High
compres
sion
LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH
LOWER
COPY
(GRAY)
(COPY
(Monochrome
half-tone
mode))
COPY
(G)
LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH
LOWER
PUSH SCAN
(COLOR)
(Scanner
(Color mode))
SCAN
(C)
(*1)
MIDDLE
1
MIDDLE
2
MIDDLE
3
Setting
range
0
Default
value
0
(LOW)
MIDDLE
3
Setting
range
0
Default
value
0
(MID
DLE1)
*1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image compression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity

in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other hand, however, the image quality of some documents may be remarkably
reduced.

0
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
0
(LOW)
&/26(
&23<6&$10)335,17&2035(665$7($'-8670(17
$ &23<&/2:

% &23<*/2:

& 6&$1&0,''/(
' 6&$1*0,''/(
2.
46-51
Purpose
0
0
(MID
DLE1)
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy

mode heavy paper mode and the image
process mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key

[PAPER/DITHER].
Select the gamma adjustment of PAPER (heavy paper mode)
or DITHER (image process mode).
When DITHER (image process mode) is selected, the detailed

select menu is displayed. Select an item for the gamma adjustment on that menu.
2)

touch panel.
3)
touch panel.
4)
5)
Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key.

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is outputted.
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is

made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust
the image density.
Item/Display
HEAVY
DITH1
DITH2
DITH3
DITH4
Content
Copier heavy paper gamma
Black edge
Color edge
Color error diffusion
Monochrome error diffusion
Density level
(Point)
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Point 16
Point 17
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
POINT16
POINT17
Color
KCMY
K
KCMY
KCMY
K
Setting range
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
245 - 755
Default
value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
46-52
Purpose
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
2)
3)
Press [YES] key.
4)
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&23<&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(5
+($9<3$3(5
%/$&.('*(
&2/25('*(
&2/25('
%:
$//

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy
mode heavy paper and the image process
mode. (The set values of SIM46-51 are set
to the default values.)
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

&/26(
&23,(5+($9<3$3(5*$00$$'-8670(17+($9<
46-60
$ 32,17

% 32,17
' 32,17
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color

auto copy mode.
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
Section
+ 32,17
Operation/Procedure
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
.
&
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
& 32,17
3$3(5',7+(5
<
(;(&87(
1)
2)
Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter

process mode).
3)
Press [OK] key.
2.
Use to sharpness adjustment of the high density image in color

auto copy mode.
This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image
shade part.
Item/Display
A
SCREEN FILTER
LEVEL
Content
H
Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern

image in auto copy mode
AUTOMODE
FILTER LEVEL
COLOR COPY :
CMY
COLOR COPY : K
SINGLE COLOR :
CMY
2 COLOR COPY :
CMY
2 COLOR COPY : K
AUTO
SOFT
CENTER
HIGH
OFF
ON
Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto

copy mode
in color copy mode
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Soft filter applying setting to K image in color

copy mode
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter

to C/M/Y images of the 2-color copy mode

in sigle color copy mode
Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter

to K images of the 2-color copy mode
Strong
emphasis
Soft
emphasis
Auto
SOFT
CENTER
HIGH
OFF
ON
Setting
range
1
Remarks
3 (Auto)
Applied to the auto copy

mode only.
2 (CENTER)
Applied to the auto copy

mode only.
1 (ON)
Available for the high

density image except text
and line image
2
3
1
2
3
0
1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
0
1
0
1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
0
1
0
1
Default value
1 (ON)
1 (ON)
1 (ON)
1 (ON)
When it is set to ON, the

soft filter is applied and the
smoothness in the dark
image area is improved.
(Roughness is reduced.)
Item/Display
H
B/W COPY
COLOR PUSH :
RGB
B/W PUSH
Setting
range
0
1
0
1
0
1
Content
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Soft filter applying setting in monochrome

copy mode
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON

scan color mode
scan monochrome mode
Default value
Remarks
1 (ON)
1 (ON)
1 (ON)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&2/25$87202'(),/7(5$'-8670(17
$ 6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872

% $87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
& &2/25&23<&0<21
' &2/25&23<.21
( 6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
) &2/25&23<&0<21
* &2/25&23<.21
+ %:&23<21
, &2/25386+5*%21
- %:386+21
2.
46-61
Purpose

Adjustment/Setup
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
$ 6(*0(176:,7&+>7;7216&5@

Section
% 6(*0(176:,7&+>/,1(6&5@
& 6(*0(176:,7&+>60$//6&5@
' 6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7@
( 6(*0(17$'-867>&/7;7@
Operation/Procedure
1)
&/26(
6(*0(17/(9(/$'-8670(17
) 6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7&/7;7@
panel.
2)
Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
3)
Press [OK] key.
* 6(*0(17$'-867>%.&/@
+ 6(*0(17$'-867>7;721%*@
, 6(*0(17$'-867>6&5@
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is specially required.
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from
the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some documents.
Item/Display
A
B
C
SEGMENT:
SWITCH [TXT ON
SCR]
SEGMENT:
SWITCH [LINE SCR]
SEGMENT:
SWITCH [SMALL
SCR]
SEGMENT:
ADJUST [BK TXT 1]
SEGMENT:
ADJUST [CL TXT 1]
SEGMENT:
ADJUST [BK TXT 2 ,
CL TXT 2]
SEGMENT:
ADJUST [BK/CL]
SEGMENT:
ADJUST [TXT ON
BG]
SEGMENT:
ADJUST [SCR]
Content
Detection ON/OFF:
Text on dot
etection ON/OFF:
line screen
Detection ON/OFF:
Dot in a small area
Detection level
adjustment:
Black text 1
Detection level
adjustment:
Color text 1
Detection level
adjustment:
Black text 2, Color
text 2
Detection level
adjustment:
Chroma/Achroma
judgment
Detection level
adjustment:
Text on background
Detection level
adjustment:
Dot
Setting
range
0-1
Default
value
0
0-1
0-1
2.
46-62
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the

ACS, the area separation, the background
image process, and the auto exposure
mode.
Section
1-5
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
1-5
1-5
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from

the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some documents.
Item/Display
1-5
1-5
1-5
SW_ACS
TEXT_IMAGE
TEXT_BLANK
Content
ACS judgment
reference area
adjustment
SIM display item:
Text/Image judgment
priority level select
SIM display item:
Text/Blank judgment
priority level select
Setting
range
0-1
Default
value
1
0-6
0-4
Item/Display
D
AE_AREA_LV
AE_LV_CC
AE_LV_MC
AE_LV_CS
AE_LV_MS
AE_JUDGE
_LV_L
AE_JUDGE
_LV_C
AE
_ONOFF
_CC
AE
_ONOFF
_MC
AE
_ONOFF
_CS
AE
_ONOFF
_MS
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Content
SIM display item:
Color AE judgment
target area adjustment
value
AE background
detection division result
adjustment:
For color copy
AE background
adjustment:
For monochrome copy
AE background
adjustment:
For color scan
AE background
adjustment:
For monochrome scan
SIM display item:
Color AE background
density threshold value
SIM display item:
Color AE background
density threshold value
AE mode ON/
ON
OFF switch :
OFF
For color copy
AE mode ON/
ON
OFF switch :
OFF
For monochrome copy
AE mode ON/
ON
OFF switch :
OFF
For color scan
AE mode ON/
ON
OFF switch :
OFF
For monochrome scan
Setting
range
0-6
Default
value
3
0-8
Item/Display
A
E
0-8
G
0-8
0-4
0 - 10
0-1
0
1
0 (ON)
0-1
0
1
0 (ON)
0-1
0
1
0 (ON)
0-1
0
1
0 (ON)
M
N
O
P
Copy document,
Character
(color copy)
Copy document,
Printed photo
(color copy)
Text print
(color PUSH)
Text
(color PUSH)
Printed photo
(color PUSH)
Photograph
(color PUSH)
Text/Photograph
(color PUSH)
Map
color PUSH)
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
1-9
&/26(
$ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
% 7(;7B,0$*(

& 7(;7B%/$1.
% &2/25&23<7(;7
& &2/25&23<35,17('3+272
' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
' $(B$5($B/9
( &2/25&23<7(;73+272
( $(B/9B&&
) &2/25&23<0$3
) $(B/9B0&
* &2/25&23</,*+7
* $(B/9B&6
+ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
+ $(B/9B06
, &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
, $(B-8'*(B/9B/
- &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
- $(B-8'*(B/9B&
. &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
. $(B212))B&&21
/ &2/25386+7(;7
/ $(B212))B0&21
2.
2.
46-74
46-63
Purpose
Default
value
3
%*5(029($'-8670(17
$ 6:B$&6

Text
(color copy)
Printed photo
(color copy)
Photograph
(color copy)
Text/Photograph
(color copy)
Map
(color copy)
Light document
(color density)
Copy document,
Character print
(color copy)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
09,(:-8'*(0(17/(9(/$'-8670(17
Text print
(color copy)
Setting
range
1-9

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
COLOR COPY :
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
COLOR COPY :
TEXT
COLOR COPY :
PRINTED PHOTO
COLOR COPY :
PHOTOGRAPH
COLOR COPY :
TEXT/PHOTO
COLOR COPY :
MAP
COLOR COPY :
LIGHT
COLOR COPY :
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
COLOR COPY :
TEXT
(COPY TO COPY)
COLOR COPY :
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
COLOR PUSH :
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
COLOR PUSH :
TEXT
COLOR PUSH :
PRINTED PHOTO
COLOR PUSH :
PHOTOGRAPH
COLOR PUSH :
TEXT/PHOTO
COLOR PUSH :
MAP
C
0-8
Content
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low

density section.
Section
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto

adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
and the low density image is decreased.
Operation/Procedure
This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 continuously.
To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic
adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic
adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations.
1)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is

performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is
printed.
2)

3)

is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed.
4)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
5)

6)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment
result pattern is printed.
7)
Press [OK] key, and the half tone correction target is registered.
Item/Display
D
SPF (SUB)
SPFB (MAIN)
SPFB (SUB)
Content
RSPF document front
surface magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
RSPF document back
(Main scan)
RSPF document back
(Sub scan)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes effective only when the

adjustment operations in the both modes are completed all
the way. For example, when the copy color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is canceled, the adjustment result is not effective.

% &&'68%

& 63)0$,1
' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
2.

3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
48-5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
Scanner section
Section
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(
1)
48
panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.

48-1
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction
and the sub scanning direction).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is

adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is specified, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
this adjustment.
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
Item/Display
Content
A
B
MR (HI)
MR(MID)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification

ratio is increased.
C
D
MR(LO)
SPF(HI)
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corresponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
SPF(MID)
Scanner motor (High speed)

Scanner motor
(Reference speed)
Scanner motor (Low speed)
Document feed (SPF) motor
(High speed)
Document feed (SPF) motor
(Reference speed)
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corresponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
Item/Display
A
CCD (MAIN)
CCD (SUB)
SPF (MAIN)
Content
SCAN main scanning
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
SCAN sub scanning
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
RSPF document front
(Main scan)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
1 - 99
50

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0272563(('$'-8670(17
$ 05+,

% 050,'

& 05/2
' 63)+,
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
( 63)0,'
2.
49
48-6
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each

motor.
Section
49-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
Select an adjustment target mode with [COLOR] [MONO]

[HEAVY] keys on the touch panel.
Operation/Procedure
2)
panel.
1)
Save the firmware to the USB memory.
2)
Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the
operation panel section.)
3)
4)
Press [OK] key.

When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,

and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
Item/Display
A
RRM
Resist
motor
correction
value
DVM_K
Developing
K motor
correction
value
FSM
Fusing
motor
correction
value
DVM_CL
PFM
POM
FUSER
SETTING
RRM
START
RRM END
F
G
Content
Mode Select
Color
Mono
chrome
Heavy
paper
Color
Mono
chrome
Heavy
paper
Color
Mono
chrome
Heavy
paper
Color
Heavy
paper
Developing
CL motor
correction
value
Paper transport motor
correction value.
Paper exit motor
correction value
Fusing speed select
timing
RRM speed
increasing start timing
RRM speed
increasing end timing
COLOR
MONO
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
HEAVY
COLOR
MONO
47
1 - 99
46
1 - 99
37
HEAVY
COLOR
MONO
HEAVY
46
COLOR
HEAVY
1 - 99
46
COLOR
1 - 99
50
COLOR
1 - 99
50
HEAVY
1 - 99
50
HEAVY
1 - 255
HEAVY
1 - 255
30
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from the default value, a jam, paper wrinkle, or image
quality trouble may occur.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
9(/2&,7<$'-8670(17
3)
Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel.
4)
Select a target firmware.
5)
6)
Press [YES] key.
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
The selected firmware is updated.

When the operation normally completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Item/Display
CONFIG
ICU (MAIN)
ICU (BOOTM)
ICU (BOOTS)
LANGUAGE
GRAPHIC
SLIST
PCU (BOOT)
PCU (MAIN)
DESK (BOOT)
DESK (MAIN)
A4LCC (BOOT)
A4LCC (MAIN)
FIN (BOOT)
FIN (MAIN)
1KFIN (BOOT)
1KFIN (MAIN)
1KPUNCH (BOOT)
1KPUNCH (MAIN)
SCU (BOOT)
SCU (MAIN)
FAX (BOOT)
FAX(MAIN)
FAX OPTION(BOOT)
FAX OPTION(MAIN)
ESCP_FONT
PDL_FONT
ANIMATION
IMAGE_DATA
COLOR PROFILE
WEB HELP
UNICODE
Content
Configuration data
ICU Main section former half
ICU Boot section main
ICU Boot section sub
Language support data program
(General term)
Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU Boot section
PCU Main section
Desk unit BOOT section
Desk unit MAIN section
Side LCC (A4) Boot section
Side LCC (A4) main section
Inner finisher BOOT section
Inner finisher MAIN section
1K finisher Boot section
1K finisher Main section
Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher
Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher
SCU Boot section
SCU Main section
FAX1 Boot section
FAX1 Main section
FAX2 Boot section (Japan only)
FAX2 Main section (Japan only)
ESC/P font
PDL font
Animation data
MFP ASIC data
Color profile
WEB help
UNICODE table
List of error displays in case of abnormal end
$ 550

Item/Display
% '90B.
& )60
CONF
ICUM
ICUBM
ICUBS
LANG
' '90B&/
( 3)0
) 320
&2/25
0212
+($9<
2.
GRAPH
SLIST
PCUB
PCUM
DESKB
DESKM
Content
Configuration data
ICU Main section former half
ICU Boot section main
ICU Boot section sub
Language support data program
(General term)
Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU Boot section
PCU Main section
Desk unit BOOT section
Desk unit MAIN section
Item/Display
LCC4B
LCC4M
FINB
FINM
FIN1B
FIN1M
1PUNB
1PUNM
SCUB
SCUM
FAXB
FAXM
FXOPB
FXOPM
ESCP
PDL
ANIME
IMGDT
CORP
WEBHP
UNICD
Content
Side LCC (A4) Boot section
Side LCC (A4) main section
Inner finisher BOOT section
Inner finisher MAIN section
1K finisher Boot section
1K finisher Main section
Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher
Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher
SCU Boot section
SCU Main section
FAX1 Boot section
FAX1 Main section
FAX2 Boot section (Japan only)
FAX2 Main section (Japan only)
ESC/P font
PDL font
Animation data
Image ASIC data
Color profile
WEB help
UNICODE table

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(XVEEG
',5!)2/'(5
),/(
),/(
',5!)2/'(5

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(0$18$/83'$7(XVEEG
',5!)2/'(5
),/(
),/(
',5!)2/'(5

(Folder select display 1)
50
50-1
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjustment

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)

Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
default.
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment

SIDE: Side image loss adjustment

3)
49-3
Item/Display
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the
HDD.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Insert the USB memory into the main unit.

* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE EMANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1.
2)
Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The display is shifted to the operation manual update menu.)
C
D
E
F
G
The current version and the update version are displayed.

3)
4)
Lead
edge
adjustment
value
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes

active from gray out.
When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is

updated.
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
RRCA
RRCB-CS12
RRCB-CS34
RRCB-LCC
RRCB-MFT
Image
loss area
setting
value
Void area
adjustment
RRCB-ADU
LEAD
SIDE
DENA
DENB
FRONT/
REAR
Offcenter
adjustment
Magnifica
tion ratio
correction
OFSET_OC
SCAN
_SPEED
_OC
Content
Document lead
edge reference
position (OC)
Standard
Resist
Tray
motor
ON
Desk
timing
LCC
adjust- Manual
ment
paper
feed
ADU
Lead edge image
loss area setting
Side image loss
area adjustment
Lead edge void
area adjustment
Rear edge void
area adjustment
FRONT/REAR
void area
adjustment
SCAN sub
scanning
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
Setting
range
0 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
1 - 99
0 - 99
50
30
0 - 99
20
1 - 99
30
1 - 99
30
1 - 99
20
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Item/Display
N
O
P
Sub
scanning
direction
print area
correction
value
DENB-MFT
DENB-CS1
DENB-CS2
DENB-CS3
DENB-CS4
DENB-LCC
DENB-ADU
Content
Manual feed
correction value
Tray 1 correction
value
Tray 2 correction
value
Tray 3 correction
value
Tray 4 correction
value
LCC correction
value
ADU correction
value
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
50-2
Purpose
Adjustment
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and

the image loss. (This simulation is a simplified version of SIM 50-1).
1 - 99
50
Operation/Procedure
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Section
1)
Set item A (L1) and item B (L2) to 0.
2)
Place a rule on the left edge of the document table, and make
a copy at a magnification ratio of 400%.
3)
Measure the length of L1 and L2 on the copied image in the

unit of 0.1mm (referring to the figure below). Enter the adjustment values of L1 x 10 and L2 x 10. Be sure to enter the both
adjustment values of L1 and L2.
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying

the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step)
L1: Distance from the lead edge of the copied image to 10mm
scale.
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When

the value is increased, the timing is delayed.
L2: Distance from the paper lead edge to the copy image lead
edge.
B - F. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (resist roller ON) for the image position on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the
value is increased, the timing is advanced.
L1
G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/

step)
Paper lead
edge
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.

H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
(0.1mm/step)
I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step)
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
L2
J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/

step)
400% enlargement copy
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.

K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
Fig. 1
4)
5)
Make a copy at the magnification ratio of 100%, and adjust the

rear edge void.
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$ 55&$

% 55&%&6
Item/Display
& 55&%&6
' 55&%/&&
( 55&%0)7
) 55&%$'8
* /($'
Actual
measurem
ent value
L1
+ 6,'(
, '(1$
- '(1%
. )52175($5
L2
2.
Image loss
area
setting
value
LEAD
SIDE
Description
Distance from the
image lead edge to
the scale of 10mm.
(Platen 400%,
0.1mm increment)
Distance from the
paper lead edge to
the image lead edge
(0.1mm increment)
Lead edge image
loss amount setting
(When the
adjustment value is
increased, the image
loss is increased.)
Side edge image
loss amount setting
(When the
adjustment value is
increased, the image
loss is increased.)
Setting
range
0 - 999
Default
value
-
0 - 999
0 - 99
30
0 - 99
20
Item/Display
E
Void area
adjustment
DENA
DENB
FRONT/
REAR
Description
Lead edge void area
adjustment (When
the adjustment value
is increased, the void
is increased.)
Rear edge void area
adjustment (When
the adjustment value
is increased, the void
is increased.)
FRONT/REAR void
amount adjustment
(When the
adjustment value is
increased, the void is
increased.)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Same as the adjusted items of SIM50-01 except for A and B.
Default
value
30
The values adjusted with A and B are reflected to the document

lead edge reference position (RRC-A) of SIM50-01 and all the
paper lead edge positions (RRCB-**).
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
1 - 99
30

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(&$/&
$ /
1 - 99

20
% /
& /($'
' 6,'(
( '(1$
) '(1%
* )52175($5
(;(&87(
50-5
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image

position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with [n] [p] key on the
touch panel.
2)
3)

The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4)
Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 3.0r2.0mm

paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Item/Display
A
DEN-C
DEN-B
FRONT/REAR
DENB-MFT
DENB-CS1
DENB-CS2
DENB-CS3
DENB-CS4
Content
Used to adjust the print
lead edge image
position.
(PRINTER MODE)
Rear edge void area
adjustment
FRONT/REAR void area

adjustment
Manual feed rear edge
void area adjustment
correction value
area adjustment
correction value
area adjustment
correction value
area adjustment
correction value
area adjustment
correction value
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
30
1 - 99
30
1 - 99
20
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
NOTE
Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the printer. When the
adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the printer print start position
in the paper transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment value
of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in the
sub scanning direction for the paper transport direction is decreased by
0.1mm.
Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and right edges of paper.
When the adjustment value is increased, the void amount is increased.
Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the adjustment value of
DEN-B
Item/Display
Content
DENB-LCC
DENB-ADU
K
L
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
LCC rear edge void aria

adjustment correction
value
ADU rear edge void aria
adjustment correction
value
Number of print
Tray
Manual
selection
paper feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
Duplex
Yes
print
No
selection
DUPLEX
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 999
1-6
1
1
2 (CS1)
0-1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
1 (NO)

paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead
edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
NOTE
Item/Display
D
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$ '(1&

% '(1%
& )52175($5
Image
loss
amount
setting
SIDE1
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
Image
loss
amount
setting
SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
' '(1%0)7
( '(1%&6
) '(1%&6
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
* '(1%&6
+ '(1%&6
, '(1%/&&
OFSET_SPF1
OFSET_SPF2
SCAN_SPEED_SPF1
SCAN_SPEED_SPF2
- '(1%$'8
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5&6
(;(&87(
2.
50-6
Adjustment
Purpose

the image loss. (RSPF mode)
RSPF
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
3)

Item/Display
SIDE1
SIDE2
Image
loss
amount
setting
SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
Content
Front surface
document scan
position
adjustment
(CCD)
Back surface
document scan
position
adjustment
(CCD)
Front surface
lead edge image
loss amount
setting
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
Content
Front surface side
image loss
amount setting
Front surface rear
edge image loss
amount setting
Back surface lead
edge image loss
amount setting
Back surface side
image loss
amount setting
Back surface rear
edge image loss
amount setting
SPF front surface
document offcenter adjustment
SPF back surface
document offcenter adjustment
RSPF document
front surface
magnification
ratio (Sub scan)
RSPF document
back surface
magnification
ratio (Sub scan)
Setting
range
0 - 99
Default
value
20
0 - 99
30
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
30
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing

is delayed.
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
is increased.
Item E - H: When appearing the shadow image on the rear edge
part, increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow image.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
1 - 99
50
$ 6,'(

% 6,'(
& /($'B('*(6,'(
' )5217B5($56,'(
( 75$,/B('*(6,'(
) /($'B('*(6,'(
* )5217B5($56,'(
0 - 99
20
+ 75$,/B('*(6,'(

, 2)6(7B63)
- 2)6(7B63)
. 6&$1B63(('B63)
/ 6&$1B63(('B63)
2.
5)
50-7
Adjustment
Purpose

Item/Display

the image loss (RSPF mode). (This simulation is a simplified version of SIM 50-6.)
Content
L4
L5
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
RSPF
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0.
3)
Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and make a copy in the

RSPF duplex mode.
4)
Measure the size of the printed image. Enter the actual measurement value of distance a (RSPF) to L4 and L5 in the unit of
0.1mm.
(Adjustment value "1" for 0.1mm)
L4: Distance a (RSPF front surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm)
L5: Distance a (RSPF back surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm)
E
F
G
H
Distance (SPF 200%,

0.1mm unit) from the front
surface image lead edge to
the scale of 10mm.
Distance (SPF 200%,
0.1mm unit) from the back
surface image lead edge to
the scale of 10mm.
Front surface lead edge
image loss amount setting
Front surface side image
loss amount setting
Front surface rear edge
Back surface lead edge
Back surface side image
loss amount setting
Back surface rear edge
Setting
range
0 - 999
Default
value
-
0 - 999
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
30
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
20
0 - 99
30
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss

is increased.
Items C - H are linked with items C - H of SIM50-06.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)&$/&
$ /

% /
& /($'B('*(6,'(
' )5217B5($56,'(
( 75$,/B('*(6,'(
) /($'B('*(6,'(
* )5217B5($56,'(
+ 75$,/B('*(6,'(
Distance "a"
(;(&87(
50-10
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Item/Display
A
B
BK-MAG
MAIN-MFT
C
D
E
F
G
MAIN-CS1
MAIN-CS2
MAIN-CS3
MAIN-CS4
MAIN-LCC
Content
Main scan print magnification ratio BK
Print off center adjustment value
(Manual paper feed)
Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1)
Print off center adjustment value
(Large capacity tray)
panel.
2)
3)
60 - 140
1 - 99
Default
value
100
50
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
50
50
50
50
50
Setting range
NOTE
Item/Display
Content
MAIN-ADU
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
SUB-MFT
SUB-CS12
SUB-CS34
SUB-LCC
SUB-ADU
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
DUPLEX
YES
NO
Default
value
50
Setting range
Print off center adjustment value (Duplex)

(NOTE) If the adjustment items A - G are
not properly adjusted, this adjustment
cannot be executed properly.
Resist motor ON
Manual paper feed
timing adjustment
Standard cassette
DESK
LCC
ADU
Number of print
Tray selection
Manual paper feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
Duplex print
Yes
selection
No
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 999
1-6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0-1
0
1
50
50
50
50
50
1
2 (CS1)
NOTE
Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
1 (NO)
Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is
decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased.
Item B - H: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*

% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7
- 68%&6
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
(;(&87(
2.
50-12
Purpose

Adjustment
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center

position adjustment. (The adjustment is
made separately for each scan mode.)
&/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$ 2&

% 63)6,'(

& 63)6,'(
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
3)
2.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is

shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
Item/Display
A
OC
SPF(SIDE1)
SPF(SIDE2)
Content
Document table image offcenter adjustment
SPF front surface image offcenter adjustment
SPF back surface image offcenter adjustment
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
50-20
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
3)

Item/Display
Content
Setting range
CYAN (FRONT)
1 - 199
CYAN (REAR)
1 - 199
100
MAGENTA (FRONT)
1 - 199
100
MAGENTA (REAR)
1 - 199
100
YELLOW (FRONT)
1 - 199
100
YELLOW (REAR)
1 - 199
100
PAPER
Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Cyan)

(F side)
Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Cyan)
(R side)
Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Magenta)
(F side)
Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Magenta)
(R side)
Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Yellow)
(F side)
Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Yellow)
(R side)
Tray selection
Default
value
100
MFT
DUPLEX
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
Duplex print selection
Manual
paper feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
Select
Not select
NOTE
Adjustment Item
List
Adjustment
pattern print
conditions setting

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21
$ &<$1)5217

50-21
% &<$15($5
Purpose
& 0$*(17$)5217

' 0$*(17$5($5
) <(//2:5($5

* 08/7,&2817
Section
+ 3$3(5&6
, '83/(;12
Operation/Procedure
1)
(;(&87(
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
CYAN
MAGENTA
YELLOW
MULTICOUNT
PAPER
MFT
DUPLEX
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
( <(//2:)5217
2.
panel.
2)
3)
Content
Setting range
Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Cyan)

Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Magenta)
Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Yellow)
Number of print
Tray selection
1 - 199
1 - 199
1 - 199
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
Duplex print selection
Manual
paper feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
Yes
No
Default
value
100
100
100
1
2
NOTE
Adjustment Item
List
Adjustment
pattern print
conditions
setting

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(176&$11,1*',5(&7,21

Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main

scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto
adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
$ &<$1
50-22
% 0$*(17$
& <(//2:
' 08/7,&2817
( 3$3(5&6
) '83/(;12
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
(;(&87(
Select a target adjustment item with [REGIST] or [DRUM POS]

or [ALL] key.
2.
ALL
REGIST
DRUM POS
2)
The image resist adjustment (in the main scanning

direction and the sub scanning direction) and the OPC
drum phase adjustment are automatically performed.
The image resist adjustment (in the main scanning
direction and the sub scanning direction) is automatically
performed.
The OPC drum phase adjustment (automatic adjustment)
is automatically performed.

The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjustment data are displayed.
NOTE: The contents of the following list are mainly used by the
technical division, and are not necessary for the market.
Item/Display
ALL
Image
registration
adjustment/
OPC drum
phase
adjustment
REGIST
(Auto image
registration
adjustment)
MAIN F
Content
Display
Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning

direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is F side)
direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is F side)
direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is F side)
direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is R side)
direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is R side)
direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is R side)
Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning
direction) (Cyan drum to black drum)
direction) (Magenta drum to cyan drum)
direction) (Yellow drum to magenta drum)
Calculated result of print skew amount (Cyan)
Calculated result of print skew amount (magenta)
Calculated result of print skew amount (yellow)
1.0 199.0
1.0 199.0
1.0 199.0
1.0 199.0
1.0 199.0
1.0 199.0
1.0 199.0
1.0 199.0
1.0 199.0
-99.9 99.9
-99.9 99.9
-99.9 99.9
C
M
Y
MAIN R
C
M
Y
SUB
C
M
Y
SKEW
DRUM POS
(Auto OPC
drum phase
adjustment)
PHASE
Phase
adjustment
value BK
o CL
Angle step
0q(1) o 45q(2) o 90q(3) o 135q(4) o 180q(5) o 225q(6)
o 270q(7) o 315q(8)
1-8
Default
value
100
NOTE
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
-
If the value is plus, R is

displayed to left side of
numerical value. If the
value is minus, L is
displayed to left side of
numerical value.
When the value is -4 +4, "(OK)" is place at
the back of the value.
For the other cases,
"(NG)" is displayed. *1
Same item as SIM4431.
*1: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value.
When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the value.
When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the value.
At that time, the values under the decimal point are rounded.
<Error displays in case of abnormal end >
Forcible
end error
Basic
error
Error
code
-
Error display
Error content
Description
SUSPENDED
Door open end
SUSPENDED
CA end
Door open during

operation
CA button pressed
during operation
Unconfirmed
operation during
operation
(Power OFF)
BK or ALL Color
toner EMPTY
detection
Other condition
TONNER
EMPTY 01
Toner Empty
BEFORE
BEHAVIOR
02
SENSOR
CALIBRATIO
N 04
TIME OVER
05
Other
condition
PROCESS
CONTROL 07
SUB BLACK
FRONT 10
Process
control error
Number of line
error sub
scanning color
(Black) F
Pitch error sub
scanning color
(Black) F
Number of line
error sub
scanning color
(Black) R
Pitch error sub
scanning color
(Black) R
Number of line
error sub
scanning color
(Cyan) F
Pitch error sub
scanning color
(Cyan) F
Adjustment
value number
error sub
scanning color
(Cyan) F
Result value
error sub
scanning color
(Cyan) F
Number of
lines error sub
scanning color
(Cyan) R
Pitch error sub
scanning color
(Cyan) R
Adjustment
value number
error sub
scanning color
(Cyan) R
Result value
error sub
scanning color
(Cyan) R
Number of
lines error sub
scanning color
(Magenta) F
7
Sub
scanning
adjustment
error
OFF end
10
11
SUB BLACK
FRONT 11
15
SUB BLACK
REAR 15
16
SUB BLACK
REAR 16
20
SUB CYAN
FRONT 20
21
22
SUB CYAN
FRONT 21
SUB CYAN
FRONT 22
23
SUB CYAN
FRONT 23
25
SUB CYAN
REAR 25
26
SUB CYAN
REAR 26
27
SUB CYAN
REAR 27
28
SUB CYAN
REAR 28
30
SUB
MAGENTA
FRONT 30
Calibration
error
Time error
Sub
scanning
adjustment
error
Error
code
31
The target is not

reached by 3 times
of retry of F or R
No data are
obtained for 90sec
from data
acquisition
Process control
error detection
The pitch data
number are not the
specified value.
The pitch data are
not within the
allowable range.
The pitch data are
not within the
specified range.
The pitch data are
not within the
allowable range.
The pitch data
number are not the
specified value.
The pitch data are
not within the
allowable range.
The calculation
result value is not
within the
allowable range.
The variation in the
calculation result
value is above the
allowable range.
The pitch data
number are not the
specified value.
The pitch data are
not within the
allowable range.
The calculation
result value is not
within the
allowable range.
calculation result
value is above the
allowable range.
The pitch data
number are not the
specified value.
32
Error display
Error content
Description
SUB
MAGENTA
FRONT 31
SUB
MAGENTA
FRONT 32
Pitch error sub

scanning color
(Magenta) F
Adjustment
value number
error sub
scanning color
(Magenta) F
Result value
error sub
scanning color
(Magenta) F
Number of
lines error sub
scanning color
(Magenta) R
Pitch error sub
scanning color
(Magenta) R
Adjustment
value number
error sub
scanning color
(Magenta) R
Result value
error sub
scanning color
(Magenta) R
Number of
lines error sub
scanning color
(Yellow) F
Pitch error sub
scanning color
(Yellow) F
Adjustment
value number
error sub
scanning color
(Yellow) F
Result value
error sub
scanning color
(Yellow) F
Number of
lines error sub
scanning color
(Yellow) R
Pitch error sub
scanning color
(Yellow) R
Adjustment
value number
error sub
scanning color
(Yellow) R
Result value
error sub
scanning color
(Yellow) R
The pitch data are

not within the
allowable range.
The calculation
result value is not
within the
allowable range.
33
SUB
MAGENTA
FRONT 33
35
SUB
MAGENTA
REAR 35
36
SUB
MAGENTA
REAR 36
SUB
MAGENTA
REAR 37
37
38
SUB
MAGENTA
REAR 38
40
SUB
YELLOW
FRONT 40
41
SUB
YELLOW
FRONT 41
SUB
YELLOW
FRONT 42
42
43
SUB
YELLOW
FRONT 43
45
SUB
YELLOW
REAR 45
46
SUB
YELLOW
REAR 46
SUB
YELLOW
REAR 47
47
48
SUB
YELLOW
REAR 48

calculation result
value is above the
allowable range.
The pitch data
number are not the
specified value.
The pitch data are
not within the
allowable range.
The calculation
result value is not
within the
allowable range.
calculation result
value is above the
allowable range.
The pitch data
number are not the
specified value.
The pitch data are
not within the
allowable range.
The calculation
result value is not
within the
allowable range.
calculation result
value is above the
allowable range.
The pitch data
number are not the
specified value.
The pitch data are
not within the
allowable range.
The calculation
result value is not
within the
allowable range.
calculation result
value is above the
allowable range.
Main
scanning
adjustme
nt error
Error
code
50
51
55
Error display
Error content
Description
MAIN BLACK
FRONT 50
Number of
lines error
main scanning
color (Black) F
Pitch error
main scanning
color (Black) F
Number of
lines error
main scanning
color (Black) R
Pitch error
main scanning
color (Black) R
Number of
lines error
main scanning
color (Cyan) F
Pitch error
main scanning
color (Cyan) F
Adjustment
value number
error main
scanning color
(Cyan) F
Result value
error main
scanning color
(Cyan) F
Number of
lines error
main scanning
color (Cyan) R
Pitch error
main scanning
color (Cyan) R
Adjustment
value error
main scanning
color (Cyan) R
Result value
error main
scanning color
(Cyan) R
Number of
lines error
main scanning
color
(Magenta) F
Pitch error
main scanning
color
(Magenta) F
Adjustment
value number
error main
scanning color
(Magenta) F
Result value
error main
scanning color
(Magenta) F
Number of
lines error
main scanning
color
(Magenta) R
Pitch error
main scanning
color
(Magenta) R
The pitch data

number are not the
specified value.
MAIN BLACK
FRONT 51
MAIN BLACK
REAR 55
56
MAIN BLACK
REAR 56
60
MAIN CYAN
FRONT 60
61
MAIN CYAN
FRONT 61
62
MAIN CYAN
FRONT 62
63
65
MAIN CYAN
FRONT 63
MAIN CYAN
REAR 65
66
MAIN CYAN
REAR 66
67
MAIN CYAN
REAR 67
68
MAIN CYAN
REAR 68
70
MAIN
MAGENTA
FRONT 70
71
MAIN
MAGENTA
FRONT 71
72
MAIN
MAGENTA
FRONT 72
73
MAIN
MAGENTA
FRONT 73
75
MAIN
MAGENTA
REAR 75
76
MAIN
MAGENTA
REAR 76
Error
code
77
Main
scanning
adjustme
nt error
The pitch data are

not within the
allowable range.
The pitch data are
not within the
specified range.
The pitch data are
not within the
allowable range.
The pitch data
number are not the
specified value.
The pitch data are
not within the
allowable range.
The calculation
result value is not
within the
allowable range.
calculation result
value is above the
allowable range.
The pitch data
number are not the
specified value.
The pitch data are
not within the
allowable range.
The calculation
result value is not
within the
allowable range.
calculation result
value is above the
allowable range.
The pitch data
number are not the
specified value.
Others
Error display
Error content
MAIN
MAGENTA
REAR 77
Adjustment
value error
main scanning
color
(Magenta) R
Result value
error main
scanning color
(Magenta) R
Number of
lines error
main scanning
color (Yellow)
F
Pitch error
main scanning
color (Yellow)
F
Adjustment
value error
main scanning
color (Yellow)
F
Result value
error main
scanning color
(Yellow) F
Number of
lines error
main scanning
color (Yellow)
R
Pitch error
main scanning
color (Yellow)
R
Adjustment
value error
main scanning
color (Yellow)
R
Result value
error main
scanning color
(Yellow) R
Other errors
78
MAIN
MAGENTA
REAR 78
80
MAIN
YELLOW
FRONT 80
81
MAIN
YELLOW
FRONT 81
82
MAIN
YELLOW
FRONT 82
83
MAIN
YELLOW
FRONT 83
85
MAIN
YELLOW
REAR 85
86
MAIN
YELLOW
REAR 86
87
MAIN
YELLOW
REAR 87
88
MAIN
YELLOW
REAR 88
99
OTHER 99
Description
The calculation
result value is not
within the
allowable range.
calculation result
value is above the
allowable range.
The pitch data
number are not the
specified value.
The pitch data are

not within the
allowable range.
The calculation
result value is not
within the
allowable range.
calculation result
value is above the
allowable range.
The pitch data
number are not the
specified value.
The pitch data are

not within the
allowable range.
The calculation
result value is not
within the
allowable range.
calculation result
value is above the
allowable range.
Other errors

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
The pitch data are

not within the
allowable range.
The calculation
result value is not
within the
allowable range.
calculation result
value is above the
allowable range.
The pitch data
number are not the
specified value.
&/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:
&/1*
0/1*
</1*
3+$6(

5(*,67
The pitch data are

not within the
allowable range.
'580326
$//
(;(&87(

50-24
Purpose
(This simulation is normally not used in the

market.)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2,

50-20, 21 and 22.
Section
Item
classific
ation
Phase
adjustment
status
check
Operation/Procedure
Display
Item content
REG_EXE_CNT
Number of
executions of
the registration
adjustment
(Auto
execution)
Number of
success of the
registration
adjustment
(Auto
execution)
Registration
adjustment
registration
counter
Calculated
correction
amount in the
main scan
direction F in
the auto
registration
adjustment
Calculated
correction
amount in the
main scan
direction R in
the auto
registration
adjustment
Calculated
correction
amount in the
sub scan
direction in the
automatic
registration
adjustment
Registration
value
correction
amount from
the previous
time, main
scan F
Registration
value
correction
amount from
the previous
time, main
scan R
Registration
value
correction
amount from
the previous
time, sub scan
REG_SUC_CNT
REG_CNT
REG_M_F
(VALUE)
REG_M_R
(VALUE)
REG_SUB
(VALUE)
REG_M_F (DIF)
REG_M_R (DIF)
REG_SUB (DIF)
Setting
range
Related
SIM
0 - 99999999
50-22
PHASE_ADJ
PHASE_STATE
NOTE: This simulation is mainly used by the technical division, and

is not necessary for the market.
Item
classific
ation
Registration
adjustment
status
check
Display
PHASE_LEVEL
PHASE
_WEIGHT
0 - 99999999
0 - 99999999
1.0 - 199.0
(r0.1 unit)
50-22
Sensor
calibration
status
check
REG_LED (F)
REG_LED (R)
50-22
REG_V (F)
REG_V (R)
1.0 - 199.0
(r0.1 unit)
50-22
REG_DARK (F)
REG_DARK (R)
1.0 - 199.0
(r0.1 unit)
50-22
Sampling
status
check (1)
START_SUB
(F)_U
START_SUB
(F)_D
-199.0 199.0 (r0.1

unit)
50-20,
22
START_SUB
(R)_U
START_SUB
(R)_D
START_MAIN
(F)_U
-199.0 199.0 (r0.1

unit)
50-20,
22
START_MAIN
(F)_D
START_MAIN
(R)_U
-199.0 199.0 (r0.1

unit)
50-21,
22
START_MAIN
(R)_D
STD_PITCH
_SUB (F)_U
Item content
Phase
adjustment
(1: This time
value,
2: Previous
time value)
Phase state
(1: This time
value,
2: Previous
time value)
Phase
deflection level
(before
weighting)
Phase
deflection level
(after
weighting)
(1: This time
value,
2: Previous
time value)
Registration
sensor current
light emitting
value F
Registration
sensor current
light emitting
value R
Registration
sensor current
light receiving
value F
Registration
sensor current
light receiving
value R
Registration
sensor dark
potential F
Registration
sensor dark
potential R
Sampling start
value Sub scan
F (Rising)
Sampling start
value Sub scan
F (Falling)
Sampling start
value Sub scan
R (Rising)
Sampling start
value Sub scan
R (Falling)
Sampling start
value Main
scan F (Rising)
Sampling start
value Main
scan F (Falling)
Sampling start
value Main
scan R (Rising)
Sampling start
value Main
scan R
(Falling)
Sampling
reference pitch
Sub scan F
(Rising)
Setting
range
Related
SIM
1-8
50-22
1-8
50-22
0-99.9
(r0.1 unit)
50-22
0-99.9
(r0.1 unit)
50-22
1 - 255
44-02,
70-11,
50-22
1 - 255
44-02,
70-11,
50-22
0 - 255
44-02,
70-11,
50-22
0 - 255
44-02,
70-11,
50-22
0 - 255
44-02,
70-11,
50-22
44-02,
70-11,
50-22
50-22
0 - 255
-300.00 300.00
(r0.01 unit)
-300.00 300.00
(r0.01 unit)
-300.00 300.00
(r0.01 unit)
-300.00 300.00
(r0.01 unit)
-300.00 300.00
(r0.01 unit)
-300.00 300.00
(r0.01 unit)
-300.00 300.00
(r0.01 unit)
-300.00 300.00
(r0.01 unit)
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
Item
classific
ation
Sampling
status
check (1)
Display
Item content
STD_PITCH
_SUB (F)_D
Sampling
reference pitch
Sub scan F
(Falling)
Sampling
reference pitch
Sub scan R
(Rising)
Sampling
reference pitch
Sub scan R
(Falling)
Sampling
reference pitch
Main scan F
(Rising)
Sampling
reference pitch
Main scan F
(Falling)
Sampling
reference pitch
Main scan R
(Rising)
Sampling
reference pitch
Main scan R
(Falling)
Sampling
reference pitch
all-color
average value
Sub scan F
(Rising)
Sampling
reference pitch
all-color
average value
Sub scan F
(Falling)
Sampling
reference pitch
all-color
average value
Sub scan R
(Rising)
Sampling
reference pitch
all-color
average value
Sub scan R
(Falling)
Sampling
reference pitch
all-color
average value
Main scan F
(Rising)
Sampling
reference pitch
all-color
average value
Main scan F
(Falling)
Sampling
reference pitch
all-color
average value
Main scan R
(Rising)
STD_PITCH
_SUB (R)_U
STD_PITCH
_SUB (R)_D
STD_PITCH
_MAIN (F)_U
STD_PITCH
_MAIN (F)_D
STD_PITCH
_MAIN (R)_U
STD_PITCH
_MAIN (R)_D
TOTAL_PITCH
_SUB (F)_U
TOTAL_PITCH
_SUB (F)_D
TOTAL_PITCH
_SUB (R)_U
TOTAL_PITCH
_SUB (R)_D
TOTAL_PITCH
_MAIN (F)_U
TOTAL_PITCH
_MAIN (F)_D
TOTAL_PITCH
_MAIN (R)_U
Setting
range
Related
SIM
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
Item
classific
ation
Sampling
status
check (1)
Sampling
status
check (2)
Display
TOTAL_PITCH
_MAIN (R)_D
LINEAR_SUB
_F_U
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
LINEAR_SUB
_R_D
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
LINEAR_MAIN
_F_U
LINEAR_SUB
_F_D
LINEAR_SUB
_R_U
LINEAR_MAIN
_F_D
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
LINEAR_MAIN
_R_U
50-22
LINEAR_MAIN
_R_D
Sampling
status
check (3)
PITCH_SUB_F
_U
PITCH_SUB_F
_D
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
PITCH_SUB_R
_U
PITCH_SUB_R
_D
50-22
PITCH_MAIN_F
_U
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
PITCH_MAIN_F
_D
PITCH_MAIN_R
_U
50-22
PITCH_MAIN_R
_D
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
Sampling
status
check (4)
ADJ_LINEAR
Item content
Sampling
reference pitch
all-color
average value
Main scan R
(Falling)
Sampling
linearity Sub
scan F (Rising)
Sampling
linearity Sub
scan F (Falling)
Sampling
linearity Sub
scan R (Rising)
Sampling
linearity Sub
scan R
(Falling)
Sampling
linearity Main
scan F (Rising)
Sampling
linearity Main
scan F (Falling)
Sampling
linearity Main
scan R (Rising)
Sampling
linearity Main
scan R
(Falling)
Sampling pitch
calculation
value Sub scan
F (Rising)
Sampling pitch
calculation
value Sub scan
F (Falling)
Sampling pitch
calculation
value Sub scan
R (Rising)
Sampling pitch
calculation
value Sub scan
R (Falling)
Sampling pitch
calculation
value Main
scan F (Rising)
Sampling pitch
calculation
value Main
scan F (Falling)
Sampling pitch
calculation
value Main
scan R (Rising)
Sampling pitch
calculation
value Main
scan R
(Falling)
Sampling
linearity after
correction
Setting
range
Related
SIM
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-50.00-50.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-100.00 100.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
50-22
Item
classific
ation
Sampling
status
check (5)
Display
LINEAR_AVE
_S_F_U
LINEAR_AVE
_S_F_D
LINEAR_AVE
_S_R_U
LINEAR_AVE
_S_R_D
LINEAR_AVE
_M_F_U
LINEAR_AVE
_M_F_D
LINEAR_AVE
_M_R_U
LINEAR_AVE
_M_R_D
Sampling
status
check (6)
NOISE_LINE
_S_F_U
NOISE_LINE
_S_F_D
NOISE_LINE
_S_R_U
NOISE_LINE
_S_R_D
NOISE_LINE
_M_F_U
NOISE_LINE
_M_F_D
NOISE_LINE
_M_R_U
NOISE_LINE
_M_R_D
Item content
Sampling
linearity
average value
Sub scan F
(Rising)
Sampling
linearity
average value
Sub scan F
(Falling)
Sampling
linearity
average value
Sub scan R
(Rising)
Sampling
linearity
average value
Sub scan R
(Falling)
Sampling
linearity
average value
Main scan F
(Rising)
Sampling
linearity
average value
Main scan F
(Falling)
Sampling
linearity
average value
Main scan R
(Rising)
Sampling
linearity
average value
Main scan R
(Falling)
Sampling noise
removal line
number Sub
scan F (Rising)
Sampling noise
removal line
number Sub
scan F (Falling)
Sampling noise
removal line
number Sub
scan R (Rising)
Sampling noise
removal line
number Sub
scan R
(Falling)
Sampling noise
removal line
number Main
scan F (Rising)
Sampling noise
removal line
number Main
scan F (Falling)
Sampling noise
removal line
number Main
scan R (Rising)
Sampling noise
removal line
number Main
scan R
(Falling)
Setting
range
Related
SIM
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
-100.00100.00
(r0.01unit)
50-22
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
Item
classific
ation
Sampling
status
check (7)
Display
VALID_LINE
_MAX_S_F_U
VALID_LINE
_MAX_S_F_D
VALID_LINE
_MAX_S_R_U
VALID_LINE
_MAX_S_R_D
VALID_LINE
_MAX_M_F_U
VALID_LINE
_MAX_M_F_D
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
Item content
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at
MAX Sub
scanning F
(Rising)
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at
MAX Sub
scanning F
(Falling)
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at
MAX Sub
scanning R
(Rising)
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at
MAX Sub
scanning R
(Falling)
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at
MAX Main
scanning F
(Rising)
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at
MAX Main
scanning F
(Falling)
Setting
range
Related
SIM
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
1-16(r1unit)
50-22
1-16(r1unit)
50-22
Item
classific
ation
Sampling
status
check (7)
Display
VALID_LINE
_MAX_M_R_U
VALID_LINE
_MAX_M_R_D
VALID_LINE
_MIN_S_F_U
VALID_LINE
_MIN_S_F_D
VALID_LINE
_MIN_S_R_U
VALID_LINE
_MIN_S_R_D
VALID_LINE
_MIN_M_F_U
Item content
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at
MAX Main
scanning R
(Rising)
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at
MAX Main
scanning R
(Falling)
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at MIN
Sub scanning
F (Rising)
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at MIN
Sub scanning
F (Falling)
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at MIN
Sub scanning
R (Rising)
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at MIN
Sub scanning
R (Falling)
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at MIN
Main scanning
F (Rising)
Setting
range
Related
SIM
1-16(r1unit)
50-22
1-16(r1unit)
50-22
Item
classific
ation
Sampling
status
check (7)
Display
VALID_LINE
_MIN_M_F_D
VALID_LINE
_MIN_M_R_U
VALID_LINE
_MIN_M_R_D
1-17(r1unit)
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
50-22
Temperature
correction value
check
TEMP_ADJ_M1
TEMP_ADJ_M2
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
TEMP_ADJ
_SUB
Temperature
check
1-17(r1unit)
50-22
TEMP_BACK
_TH1
TEMP_BACK
_TH2
TEMP_TH1_F
_HISTORY
1-16(r1unit)
TEMP_TH1_R
_HISTORY
50-22
TEMP_TH2_F
_HISTORY
TEMP_TH2_R_
HISTORY
Error
record
status
check
ERROR
HISTORY
Item content
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at MIN
Main scanning
F (Falling)
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at MIN
Main scanning
R (Rising)
Adjacent data
linearity
difference in
the effective
line after
removing the
sampling noise
Line No. at MIN
Main scanning
R (Falling)
Temperature
correction
value in the
previous print
Main scan
writing
Temperature
correction
value in the
previous print
Main scan
magnification
ratio
Temperature
correction
value in the
previous print
Sub scan
Temperature in
the previous
print
(Thermister 1)
Temperature in
the previous
print
(Thermister 2)
Reference
temperature
(Thermister 1)
F
Reference
temperature
(Thermister 1)
R
Reference
temperature
(Thermister 2)
F
Reference
temperature
(Thermister 2)
R
Error record
status check
Setting
range
Related
SIM
1-16(r1unit)
50-22
1-16(r1unit)
50-22
1-16(r1unit)
50-22
-99.9-99.9
(r0.1unit)
-99.9-99.9
(r0.1unit)
-99.9-99.9
(r0.1unit)
5.0-60.0
(r0.1qC)
5.0-60.0
(r0.1qC)
5.0-60.0
(r0.1qC)
50-20,
21, 22
5.0-60.0
(r0.1qC)
50-20,
21, 22
5.0-60.0
(r0.1qC)
50-20,
21, 22
5.0-60.0
(r0.1qC)
50-20,
21, 22
50-22

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$8725(*,675$7,21'$7$',63/$<
5(*B(;(B&17
Item/Display
FAX
send
5(*B68&B&17
5(*B&17
&
<
%$&.
1(;7

Image
loss
amount
setting
SPF
SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE2)
FRONT
_REAR
(SPF_SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE2)
50-27
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment

of scanned images in the FAX or image
send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]

key.
2)
panel.
3)
4)

Item/Display
FAX
send
Image
loss
amount
setting
OC
LEAD_EDGE
(OC)
FRONT
_REAR (OC)
TRAIL_EDGE
(OC)
Image
loss
amount
setting
SPF
SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE1)
FRONT
_REAR
(SPF_SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE1)
Content
OC lead
edge
image loss
amount
setting
OC side
image loss
amount
setting
OC rear
edge
image loss
amount
setting
Front
surface
lead edge
image loss
amount
setting
Front
surface
side image
loss
amount
setting
Front
surface
rear edge
image loss
amount
setting
Setting
range
0 - 100
Default
value
30
(3mm)
0 - 100
20
(2mm)
0 - 100
20
(2mm)
0 - 100
When
image
send
mode
(Except
for FAX
and
copy)
0 - 100
LEAD_EDGE
(OC)
FRONT
_REAR(OC)
TRAIL_EDGE
(OC)
Image
loss
amount
setting
SPF
SIDE1
LEAD_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE1)
FRONT
_REAR
(SPF_SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE1)
20
(2mm)
G
0 - 100
Image
loss
amount
setting
OC
20
(2mm)
Image
loss
amount
setting
SPF
SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE2)
FRONT
_REAR
(SPF_SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SPF_SIDE2)
30
(3mm)
Content
Back
surface
lead edge
image loss
amount
setting
Back
surface
side image
loss
amount
setting
Back
surface
rear edge
image loss
amount
setting
OC lead
edge
image loss
amount
setting
OC side
image loss
amount
setting
OC rear
edge
image loss
amount
setting
Front
surface
lead edge
image loss
amount
setting
Front
surface
side image
loss
amount
setting
Front
surface
rear edge
image loss
amount
setting
Back
surface
lead edge
image loss
amount
setting
Back
surface
side image
loss
amount
setting
Back
surface
rear edge
image loss
amount
setting
Setting
range
0 - 100
Default
value
20
(2mm)
0 - 100
20
(2mm)
0 - 100
30
(3mm)
0 - 100
0
(0mm)
0 - 100
0
(0mm)
0 - 100
0
(0mm)
0 - 100
0
(0mm)
0 - 100
0
(0mm)
0 - 100
0
(0mm)
0 - 100
0
(0mm)
0 - 100
0
(0mm)
0 - 100
0
(0mm)
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is

increased.
1step = 0.1mm

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6&$11(5)$;6(1'$//('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$ /($'B('*(2&

% )5217B5($52&

& 75$,/B('*(2&

' /($'B('*(63)B6,'(
(3) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image magnification

ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
1)
Select [SPF ADJ] on the touch panel.
2)
Select the adjustment mode; SIDE 1(Front surface) or SIDE

2(Back surface) or ALL(Both modes).
3)
Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern

print.
4)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is

printed.
5)
Set the adjustment pattern on the RSPF.
6)

scanned.
( )5217B5($563)B6,'(

) 75$,/B('*(63)B6,'(
* /($'B('*(63)B6,'(
+ )5217B5($563)B6,'(
, 75$,/B('*(63)B6,'(
)$;
6&$11(5
2.
When ALL is selected in the procedure 2), perform procedures 5) and 6) for both of the front surface and the back
surface.
50-28
Purpose
Adjustment
7)
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image

loss, void area, image off-center, and image
magnification ratio.
Press [OK] key.
(4) Print lead edge adjustment image off-center (Each paper feed
tray, duplex mode) adjustment
1)
Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] on the touch panel.
2)
Select the adjustment mode; LEAD (print lead edge adjustment) or OFF SET (image off-center) or ALL (both modes).
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with

SIM50-28.
3)
Select the paper feed tray for the adjustment pattern print.
(Two or more trays can be selected.)
* ADJ 8 Print image magnification ratio adjustment

(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section)
4)

printed.
* ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
5)
* ADJ 14/15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
6)

scanned.
Section
Operation/Procedure
* ADJ 16 scan image off-center adjustment
When two or more paper feed trays are selected in the procedure 3), perform procedures 5) and 6) for the adjustment
pattern printed with each paper.
* ADJ 17 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section)

* ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
Item/Display
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
Content
Main scanning direction image magnification
ratio adjustment
(RSPF mode)
Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center
(each paper feed tray, duplex mode)
adjustment
Adjustment result display
Adjustment operation data display
7)
Press [OK] key.
RESCAN: The adjustment pattern is scanned.

REPRINT: The adjustment pattern is printed again.
RETRY: Shifts to the top menu.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'-
%.0$*$'-
63)$'-
6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7
'$7$
(1) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image magnification

ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
1)
Select [OC ADJ] on the touch panel.
2)

print.
3)

printed.
4)
5)

scanned.
6)
Press [OK] key.
(2) Main scan direction image magnification ration adjustment

1)
Select [BK-MAG ADJ] on the touch panel.
2)

print.
3)

printed.
4)
5)

scanned.
6)
Press [OK] key.


51
51-1
Item/Display
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the

secondary transport voltage.
Section
A
B
Content
TC2 ON
TIMING
TC2 OFF
TIMING
Secondary transfer voltage ON timing

setting
Secondary transfer voltage OFF timing
setting
Default
value
40
60
Operation/Procedure
1)
panel.
2)
3)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
75$16&5,37,217,0,1*6(783
$ 7&217,0,1*
When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF timing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
increased, the timing is delayed.

% 7&2))7,0,1*

When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed

by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
2.
51-2
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and
the RSPF resist roller. (This adjustment is
performed when there is a considerable
variation in the print image position on the
paper or when paper jams frequently
occur.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or

[ENGINE] keys.
2)
3)
4)
Mode
SIDE1
Display/Item
A
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW
NORMAL_THIN _HIGH
NORMAL_THIN _LOW
RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW
RANDOM_THIN _LOW
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
Content
RSPF front surface document deflection amount
adjustment value
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
adjustment value
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
adjustment value
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
adjustment value
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
adjustment value
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
adjustment value
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
Mode
SIDE2
ENGINE
Display/Item
A
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_2
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_2
TRAY1(S)
TRAY1(L)
TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(S)
TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(L)
TRAY2(S)
TRAY2(L)
TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(S)
TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(L)
MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(S)
MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(L)
MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(S)
MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(L)
M
N
MANUAL OHP
MANUAL ENV
ADU PLAIN PAPER(S)
ADU PLAIN PAPER(L)
ADU HEAVY PAPER(S)
ADU HEAVY PAPER(L)
DESK(S)
DESK(L)
DESK HEAVY PAPER(S)
DESK HEAVY PAPER(L)
A4LCC
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
1 - 99
50
LT size (215mm) or less
1 - 99
40
LT size (216mm) or above
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
1 - 99
40
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
1 - 99
40
Content
RSPF back surface document deflection amount
adjustment value 1
adjustment value 1
adjustment value 2
adjustment value 2
Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection
adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size)
adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size)
adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size)
adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size)
Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection
adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size)
Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection
adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size)
adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size)
adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size)
Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value
(Plain paper/Small size)
(Plain paper/Large size)
(Heavy paper/Small size)
(Heavy paper/Large size)
Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP)
(Envelope)
ADU/deflection adjustment value
DESK/deflection adjustment value
A4LCC/deflection adjustment value
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp
amount is decreased.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
5(*,6752//(5$'-8670(17
$ 1250$/B3/$,1B+,*+

% 1250$/B3/$,1B/2:
& 1250$/B7+,1B+,*+
' 1250$/B7+,1B/2:
( 5$1'20B3/$,1B/2:
) 5$1'20B7+,1B/2:
6,'(
6,'(
(1*,1(
2.
53

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
63)75<$'-8670(170$18$/
$ $'B0$;
53-6
Purpose
Adjustment

% $'B3

& $'B3
' $'B0,1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the

RSPF document width.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.
2)
2.
The maximum width detection level is recognized.

3)
Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width.
4)
53-8
Purpose
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document
scan position.
5)
Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width.
6)

The A5R width detection level is recognized.
Section
7)
Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.
Operation/Procedure
8)
Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
<AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment>(Auto

adjustment)
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is

displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
1
2
3
4
TRAYVOLMAX
TRAYVOLA4R
TRAYVOLA5R
TRAYVOLMIN
Tray size volume maximum value

Tray size volume minimum value

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
1)
Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document

table.
2)
Press [EXCUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the

adjustment value is saved.)
Item/Display
MEASUREMENT
DISTANCE
RRCA
63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
Document lead edge

measurement distance
Document lead edge
reference position
1)
2)

Item/Display
A
ADJUST
VALUE
(;(&87(
50
Content
RSPF mode document scan
position adjustment (Scanner
stop position adjustment)
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
10
When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop position in the RSPF mode is shifted to the right.
53-7
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the RSPF document size

width sensor.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is

shifted by 0.1mm.

Section
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Operation/Procedure
2)
3)

Item/Display
AD_MAX
AD_P1
AD_P2
AD_MIN
&/26(
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
panel.
A
B
C
D
Default
value
-
<MANUAL: RSPF mode document scan position adjustment>
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
1)
Setting
range
0-255
(0.1mm unit)
0 - 99
Content
Max. width position

A4R width position
A5R width position
Min. width position
Setting
range
0 - 1023
0 - 1023
0 - 1023
0 - 1023
Default
value
72
499
805
955
$872
0$18$/

55
56
55-1
56-1
Purpose
(Do not use this function unless specially

required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine

control operations. (SOFT SW)
Purpose
Backup
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP

PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
PWB.)
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
1)
Select a target content of data transfer.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.

Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
(1*,1(62)76:6(77,1*
6:1R
'$7$
6:1R
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is

displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.

ALL o HDD
All the memory contents are transferred to the

HDD.
The HDD contents are transferred to all the
memories.
Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
Data transfer from SRAM to HDD.
(Including the FAX memory)
When the FAX memory or an option memory
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents in
the memory for FAX are also transferred to
HDD.
Transfer from HDD to SRAM
(including the FAX memory)
When the FAX memory or an option memory
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents of
the FAX memory are also transferred to HDD.
HDD o ALL
EEPROM o HDD
HDD o EEPROM
SRAM o HDD
(;(&87(
55-2
Purpose

required.)
HDD o SRAM
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&23<'$7$
6&$11(562)76:6(77,1*
6:1R
'$7$
6:1R

$//+''
(1$%/(
+''$//
',6$%/(
((3520+''
',6$%/(
+''((3520
',6$%/(
65$0+''
',6$%/(
+''65$0
',6$%/(
(;(&87(
$5(<28685("
55-3
required.)
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
0)362)76:6(77,1*
6:1R
'$7$
&/26(
6:1R
<(6
12
(;(&87(

56-2
Purpose
Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.

SRAM, and HDD (including user authentication data and address data) to the USB
memory. (Corresponding to the device
cloning and the storage backup.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.

<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, ESRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.

Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
(;(&87(

(Machine with the DSK installed)

1)
56-3
2)
Purpose
<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SRAM, HDD
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to

the USB memory.
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
Operation/Procedure
3)
Enter the password with 10 key.
1)
4)
Press [SET] key.
2)
5)
Data backup
Section
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD

<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY DEVICE
<Data list outside the backup targets>
3)
(EEPROM/SRAM)
PWB Type
Controller
PCU
SCU

Content
Machine serial No.
Product key information
Various counter

NOTE

Copy counter/FAX
send counter etc.
Trouble history
Machine serial No.
Various counter
Machine adjustment execute
history
Trouble history
Various counter
Trouble history
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(;3257,03257'2&80(17),/,1*'$7$
'2&),/(;3257
'2&),/,03257
Maintenance counter
Maintenance counter
(HDD)

Classification
Japanese
FEP
Job end list
Log
New N/A
Operation
manual
Content
NOTE
56-4
User dictionary
Data backup
Purpose
Job end list display data

(The image send series include
the preserved job list.)
Job log
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the

USB memory.
Read from WEB is
enable.
Print history information

JAM history information
Trouble history information
Same position continuous jam
count value
Charging information
Life information
E-manual
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
3)


6,08/$7,2112
7(67

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(;3257-2%/2*'$7$
&/26(
-2%/2*(;3257
(;3257,03257),/,1*'$7$
+''(;3257
+'',03257
((352065$0(;3257
((352065$0,03257

60
60-2
Purpose
(This simulation is normally not used in the

market.)
60-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations (read/write)

of the MFP PWB image memory (SDRAM).
Section
Start the test.
Result display
OK
NG
NG
(NOT SLOT4)
NONE
DISABLE
SLOT
SLOT1
SLOT2
SLOT3
SLOT4
SLOT5
SLOT6
SLOT7
SLOT8
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the MFP PWB onboard

SDRAM.
Description
Success
Fail
Fail
When fail SLOT4 (Standard) is not installed and SLOT3
(Option) is installed.
Not installed (Including DIMM trouble)
Error at SLOT2
Description
System memory (expansion)
System memory (standard)
Local memory (image memory) (MFP expansion)
Local memory (image memory) (MFP standard)
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
panel.
2)
3)
Press [OK] key.
NOTE: Set to the default value.

Item/Display
A
SETTING
ENABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
NUMBER
OF ROW
NUMBER
OF
COLUMN
TWR
SETTING
VALUE
TRAS
SETTING
VALUE
TRC
SETTING
VALUE
TRCD
SETTING
VALUE
TRP
SETTING
VALUE
TFRC
SETTING
VALUE
CAS
LATENC
Y
TOTAL
NUMBER
OF
MBYTES
ON
BOARD
DDR
&/26(
6'5$05($':5,7(7(67
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
11BIT
12BIT
13BIT
8BIT
9BIT
10BIT
11BIT
12BIT
2CLOCK
3CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
6CLOCK
7CLOCK
6CLOCK
7CLOCK
8CLOCK
9CLOCK
10CLOCK
2CLOCK
3CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
2CLOCK
3CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
7CLOCK
8CLOCK
20CLOCK
CL=2
CL=2.5
CL=3
NONE
128M
BYTE
256M
BYTE
Content
SDRAM
setting
change
flag
DDR
setting
of
Onboard
SPD
DDR
setting
of B or
later
ROW address
width
Setting
range
0-1 0
0-2
COLUMN address
width
0-4
TWR set value
0-3
TRAS set value
0-3
TRC set value
0-4
TRCD set value
0-3
TRP set value
0-3
TFRC set value
Default
value
0
013
CAS latency
0-2
Onboard DDR total

capacity
0-2
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
1
3
0
1
2
0
1
2
Item/Display
L
NUMBER
OF ON
BOARDDDR
CS-BANK
Content
NONE
1CHIP
SELECT
2CHIP
SELECT
Onboard DDR bunk

number
Setting
range
0-2 0
1
Default
value
1
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
line images are increased.
Mode
COPY
Item/Display
A

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6'5$06(77,1*
$ 6(77,1*(1$%/(',6$%/(

% 180%(52)52:%,7
& 180%(52)&2/801%,7
' 7:56(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
( 75$66(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
) 75&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
* 75&'6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
+ 7536(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
, 7)5&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
- &$6/$7(1&<&/

. 727$/180%(52)0%<7(621%2$5'''50%<7(
/ 180%(52)21%2$5'''5&6%$1.&+,36(/(&7
2.
61
61-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection.
LSU
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
Display
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K
LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL
Content
Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
Laser abnormality (K)
Laser light emitting abnormality
(C,M,Y)
LASER
POWER
LOW (K2)
LASER
POWER
LOW (C1)
LASER
POWER
LOW (C2)
LASER
POWER
LOW (M1)
LASER
POWER
LOW (M2)
LASER
POWER
LOW (Y1)
LASER
POWER
LOW (Y2)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(BW1)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(K1)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(K2)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(C1)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(C2)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(M1)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(M2)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(Y1)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(Y2)
LASER
POWER
LOW (K1)
&/26(
/687(67
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(

61-3
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY] , [PR600/

FAX] and [PR1200] on the touch panel.
2)
panel.
3)
4)
Content
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
K1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
K2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
C1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
C2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
M1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
M2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
Y1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
Y2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
K1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
K2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
C1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
C2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
M1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
M2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
Y1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
Y2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
BW1)
Setting
range
0255
Default
value
110
Destination
linkage
0255
110
0255
120
0255
120
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
120
0255
120
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
Mode
COPY
Item/Display
R
AA
AB
AC
AD
PR600/
FAX
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(BW2)
LASER
POWER
LOW
(BW1)
LASER
POWER
LOW
(BW2)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(K)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(C)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(M)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(Y)
LASER
DUTY
LOW (K)
LASER
DUTY
LOW (C)
LASER
DUTY
LOW(M)
LASER
DUTY
LOW(Y)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(BW)
LASER
DUTY
LOW (BW)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(K1)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(K2)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(C1)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(C2)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(M1)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(M2)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(Y1)
Setting
range
0255
Default
value
110
Destination
linkage
0255
110
0255
110
LASER
POWER
LOW (K2)
0255
LASER
POWER
LOW (C1)
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (C)
0255
LASER
POWER
LOW (C2)
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (M)
0255
LASER
POWER
LOW (M1)
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (Y)
0255
LASER
POWER
LOW (M2)
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (K)
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (C)
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (M)
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (Y)
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (BW)
0255
LASER
POWER
LOW (Y1)
0255
{
P
0255
LASER
POWER
LOW (Y2)
Q
0255
0255
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (BW)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
K1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
K2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
C1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
C2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
M1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
M2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
Y1)
0255
0255
110
0255
110
0255
120
0255
120
0255
110
0255
110
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(BW1)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(BW2)
LASER
POWER
LOW
(BW1)
LASER
POWER
LOW
(BW2)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(K)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(C)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(M)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(Y)
0255
110
Content
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
BW2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
BW1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
BW2)
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (K)
Mode
PR600/
FAX
Item/Display
H
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(Y2)
LASER
POWER
LOW (K1)
Setting
range
0255
Default
value
110
Destination
linkage
0255
110
0255
110
0255
120
0255
120
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (C)
0255
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (M)
0255
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (Y)
0255
Content
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
Y2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
K1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
K2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
C1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
C2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
M1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
M2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
Y1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
Y2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
BW1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
BW2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
BW1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
BW2)
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (K)
Mode
PR600/
FAX
Item/Display
Y
AA
AB
AC
AD
PR1200
LASER
DUTY
LOW (K)
LASER
DUTY
LOW (C)
LASER
DUTY
LOW (M)
LASER
DUTY
LOW (Y)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(BW)
LASER
DUTY
LOW (BW)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(K1)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(K2)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(C1)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(C2)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(M1)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(M2)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(Y1)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(Y2)
LASER
POWER
LOW (K1)
LASER
POWER
LOW (K2)
LASER
POWER
LOW (C1)
LASER
POWER
LOW (C2)
LASER
POWER
LOW (M1)
LASER
POWER
LOW (M2)
Content
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (K)
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (C)
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (M)
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (Y)
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (BW)
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (BW)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
K1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
K2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
C1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
C2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
M1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
M2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
Y1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
Y2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
K1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
K2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
C1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
C2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
M1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
M2)
Setting
range
0255
Default
value
0
Destination
linkage
{
0255
0255
0255
0255
0255
0255
110
0255
110
0255
120
0255
120
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
Mode
PR1200
Item/Display
O
LASER
POWER
LOW (Y1)
LASER
POWER
LOW (Y2)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(BW1)
LASER
POWER
MIDDLE
(BW2)
LASER
POWER
LOW
(BW1)
LASER
POWER
LOW
(BW2)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(K)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(C)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(M)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(Y)
LASER
DUTY
LOW (K)
LASER
DUTY
LOW (C)
LASER
DUTY
LOW (M)
LASER
DUTY
LOW (Y)
LASER
DUTY
MIDDLE
(BW)
LASER
DUTY
LOW (BW)
AA
AB
0255
110
0255
110
0255
120
AC
AD
Setting
range
0255
Default
value
110
Destination
linkage
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
110
0255
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (C)
0255
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (M)
0255
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (Y)
0255
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (K)
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (C)
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (M)
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (Y)
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (BW)
0255
0255
0255
0255
0255
0255
Content
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
Y1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
Y2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
BW1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Middle speed/
BW2)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
BW1)
Used to set the
laser power
(Low speed/
BW2)
Laser DUTY
select middle
speed (K)
Laser DUTY
select low
speed (BW)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/$6(532:(5$8726(783
0255
120
$ /$6(532:(50,''/(.

% /$6(532:(50,''/(.

& /$6(532:(50,''/(&

' /$6(532:(50,''/(&
( /$6(532:(50,''/(0
0255
110
) /$6(532:(50,''/(0
* /$6(532:(50,''/(<
+ /$6(532:(50,''/(<
, /$6(532:(5/2:.
- /$6(532:(5/2:.
0255
110
. /$6(532:(5/2:&

/ /$6(532:(5/2:&
&23<
35)$;
35
2.
61-4
62-2
Adjustment
Purpose
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit)
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk

(partial).
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target item with [n] [p] key on the touch panel.
1)
2)
Enter the print conditions setting value with 10 key.
2)
Press [YES] key.
3)

The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Item/Display
A
B
Content
MULTICOUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
Print quantity (1-999)

Tray
1
Manual paper
selection
feed
2
Tray 1
3
Tray 2
4
Tray 3
5
Tray 4
6
LCC
Default
value
1
3
(CS2)
&/26(
+''5:7(673$57
$5(<28685("

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
/68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17
$ 08/7,&2817
<(6
12
(;(&87(
62-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk

(all areas).
% 3$3(5&6

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

Read/write operations are performed.
(;(&87(
2.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
+''5:7(67$//
62
62-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the hard disk format
(except operation manual area).
Section
Operation/Procedure
$5(<28685("
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.
62-6
Used to execute the hard disk format.
Purpose
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the

normal display.
<(6
12
(;(&87(
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the

hard disk.
Section
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
+'')250$7

Operation/Procedure
&/26(
1)
Select the self diag area.
2)

The self diag operation is performed.
NOTE:
E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD, use this
simulation to cheek the HDD.
SHORT S.T
EXTENDED S.T
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
Partial area diag

All area diag

normal display.
Normal completion o "OK(RESULT:0)" is displayed.

Abnormal end o "NG(RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.

* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for

some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding section.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
+'')250$7(;&(376<67(0$5($

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
60$572))/,1(7(67
6+25767
(1$%/(
(;7(1'('67
',6$%/(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
62-10
Data clear
Purpose
(;(&87(

Function (Purpose) Used to delete the job log data.

Section
Operation/Procedure
62-7
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics

error log.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

Used to delete the job log data.

normal display.

ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and

the result is printed.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
-2%&203/(7('$7$&/($5:,7+-2%/2*'$7$

normal display.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
60$57(5525/2*35,17287
35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(60$57(552535,17
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
62-11
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.

Section
(;(&87(
62-8
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

Used to delete the document filing data.
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding
the system area and the operation manual
area)

normal display.
Section

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.
&/26(
'2&80(17),/,1*'$7$&/($5
Used to execute the hard disk format.

normal display.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
NG" is displayed.
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
62-12
63
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format

in a hard disk trouble.
63-1
Section
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction

result.
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.
Section
Operation/Procedure
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system

data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
data storage area is cleared.
A
0
1
Enable
Disable (Default)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
panel.
Item/
Display
GAIN ODD
GAIN EVEN
&/26(
$872)250$76(77,1*+''7528%/(
$ <(612
1)
OFFSET
ODD
OFFSET
EVEN
SMP AVE
ODD

SMP AVE
EVEN
2.
62-13
Purpose
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (only the

operation manual area)
Scanner
TARGET
VALUE
BLACK
LEVEL
ERROR
CODE
Content
Black output level

Error code
(0, 1-14)
(for debug)
Section
2)
Press [YES] key.
0
1
2
3
4
Operation/Procedure
1)
NOTE
Gain adjustment
value
(odd number)
Gain adjustment
value
(Even number)
Offset value
(odd number)
Offset value
(even number)
Reference plate
sampling average
value (ODD)
Reference plate
sampling average
value (EVEN)
Target value
5
6
7
8
9
The operation manual data are deleted.

normal display.
10

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
+'')250$70$18$/$5($21/<
11
12
13
14
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
RSPF
WHITE
LEVEL 1ST
RSPF
WHITE
LEVEL 2ND
First scan
RSPF white
reference level
Second scan
RSPF white
reference level
No error
Loop number over
The target value is under the
specified value.
The gain set value is negative.
END is not asserted.
(Gain adjustment)
(reserve)
Underflow
Black shading error
Other error
(White shading)
(Black shading)
(Light quantity correction)
END is not asserted. (Scan)
Register check error.
(When booting/Before gain)
Register check error.
(Before light quantity
correction)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6+$',1*'$7$',63/$<
&/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&8$872$'-8670(17
*$,12''
2&
*$,1(9(1

2))6(72''

2))6(7(9(1

603$9(2''
603$9((9(1
&&&555
7$5*(79$/8(
000***
%/$&./(9(/
<<<%%%
(5525&2'(
563):+,7(/(9(/67
563):+,7(/(9(/1'

63-2
(;(&87(
2&

63-4
Purpose
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to

the reference position on the left rear frame side of the document table.
2)
Press [OC] key.
3)

Used to perform shading.

normal display.
The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to

the normal display.
&/26(
6+$',1*(;(&87,21
35(66>(;(&87(@726+$',1*67$57
4)
Select a data display mode.
THROUGH GAMMA
COPY GAMMA
SIT chart scan data

Copy mode gamma process data of the
SIT chart scan data
Image send mode gamma process data of
the SIT chart scan data
SCANNER GAMMA
Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys.

(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
63-3
Purpose
&/26(
3$7&+'$7$',63/$<2)6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&(
2&
Adjustment

Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment.
Section

&&&555
Scanner
000***
<<<%%%
Operation/Procedure
1)
Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)

on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the document table.
2)
Press [OK] key.
3)

The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is performed.
(;(&87(
2&

63-5
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup

normal display.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color

balance and gamma default setting.
After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the

adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data
display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
Press [SIDE A(OC)] key.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [OK] key
3)
The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
default.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BASE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(5*$00$6(783
6,'($2&
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
Point E target value

Point F target value
Point G target value
Point H target value
Point I target value
Point J target value
Point K target value
Point L target value
Point M target value
Point N target value
Point O target value
Background sampling value

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
63-6
*+,-.
Purpose
012
Function (Purpose) Used to display the scan level and the density level of the copy color balance adjustment patch.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with

SIM46-21 on the document table.
&
<
6(783


The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
63-8
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
Purpose

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(&+$575($',1*
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target

of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section
6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
adjustment is set to the default.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
balance as the factory color balance target.
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
63-7
&/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(77,1*6(59,&(
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to register the service target of the

copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel.
2)
Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with

SIM46-21 on the document table.
3)
4)
Press [OK] key.

The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
adjustment is registered according to the patch image of the
scanned adjustment pattern sheet.
The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the copy color balance is manually adjusted.
B
C
D
Point B target value

Point C target value
Point D target value
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
63-11
Purpose

Adjustment/Setup
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the

copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
&/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(/(&72)(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(17
7$5*(77%/
'()
'()
'()
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the target color balance with the touch panel.

Item/Display
Target color
balance
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Content
The engine color balance adjustment
target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to
Magenta. When this target is
selected, the color balance is
converted into natural gray color
balance by the color table in an actual
copy mode and print is made.
operation is slightly shifted to natural
gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is
slightly shifted to Cyan by the color
table in an actual copy mode and
print is made.
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan.
When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color
balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode
and print is made.
Default
value
DEF 1

64
64-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Set the print conditions.

Select an item to be print condition with [n] [p] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10 key.
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2)

The test print (self print) is performed.
Item/Display
PRINT PATTERN
(1,2,9 - 11,15 - 19,21,22,29)
DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2,11)
DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A:2,11)
DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9)
Content
Specification of the print pattern
(* For details, refer to the description
below.)
Setting of print dot number (M parameter)
(Self print pattern: m by n)
Setting of blank dot number
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n)
Used to specify the print gradation.
E
F
MULTI COUNT
EXPOSURE
(2 - 8 IF A: 15 - 19)
Number of print
Exposure mode
specification
PAPER
DUPLEX
PAPER TYPE
THROUGH
CHAR/PIC
CHAR/PRPIC
CHAR
PRINT PIC
PRINT PAPER
MAP
STANDARD
DITHER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
PLAIN
Tray selection
Duplex print
selection
Paper type
No process (through)
Text/Printed Photo
Text/ Photograph
Text
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Dither without
correction
Manual paper feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
Yes
No
Standard paper
Setting range
1 - 58
(Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 15 - 19, 21, 22, 29)
1-255
(Pattern 2,11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
0-255
(Pattern2,11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
1-255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
1 - 999
1-8
1
(Pattern 15-19: 2-8 except above:1-8)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1-6
0-1
1-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
1
Default value
1
1
254
255
1
8
(STANDARD
DITHER)
2 (CS1)
1 (NO)
1 (PLAIN)
<Print pattern of Item A>

Pattern
No.
1
2
9
10
11
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
29
Content
Grid pattern
Dot print
Each color 10%
area (A4/A4E)
density print
8-color belt print
4-color dot print
(sub scan)
16 gradations
+ M by N
(center gradations
only): Sub scan)
16 gradations
+ M by N
(center gradations
only): Main scan)
All background
(half tone)
256 gradations
pattern
(Other dither)
256 gradations
pattern
(For text dither)
4-point dot print

(main scan)
Slant line
Dot print 1200dpi
Pattern
generating
section
LSU-ASIC

NOTE
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6(/)35,17&2/256(59,&(

$ 35,173$77(51
Each interval is 41.86mm

(989dot).

% '27'27,)$

& '27'27,)$
' '(16,7<),;(',)$
( 08/7,&2817
) (;32685(,)$67$1'$5'',7+(5
* 3$3(5&6
+ '83/(;12
, 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
MFP ASIC
Half tone
(MFP ASIC
rear
process)
LSU-ASIC
When all colors are

selected, print is made in
CMY.
16 gradations print
The gradation is changed
for every 256 dots.
When all colors are

CMY.
When all colors are
CMY.
16 gradations are printed
in the main scanning
direction, and feedback is
made, and the next 16
gradations are printed.
(16 x 16 patch print)
Print is made from 255
gradations, and 0-254
gradations are printed.
-
&
(;(&87(
<
2.
64-2
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

2)

Item/Display
PRINT PATTERN
(1,2,9 - 11,15 - 19,21,22,29)
DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2,11)
DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A:2,11)
DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9)
Content
Print pattern specification
below.)
Setting of print dot number (M parameter)
(Self print pattern: m by n)
Setting of blank dot number
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n)
E
F
MULTI COUNT
EXPOSURE
(2 - 8 IF A: 15 - 19)
Number of print
Exposure mode
specification
PAPER
DUPLEX
PAPER TYPE
THROUGH
CHAR/PIC
CHAR/PRPIC
CHAR
PRINT PIC
PRINT PAPER
MAP
STANDARD
DITHER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
PLAIN
HEAVY
OHP
ENVELOPE
Tray selection
Duplex print
selection
Paper type
No process (through)
Text/Printed Photo
Text/ Photograph
Text
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Dither without
correction
Manual paper feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
Yes
No
Standard paper
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Setting range
1 - 58
(Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 15 - 19, 21, 22, 29)
1-255
(Pattern 2,11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
0-255
(Pattern2,11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
1-255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
1 - 999
1-8
1
(Pattern 15-19: 2-8 except above:1-8)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1-6
0-1
1-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
1
2
3
4
Default value
1
1
254
255
1
8
(STANDARD
DITHER)
2 (CS1)
1 (NO)
1 (PLAIN)

Pattern
No.
1
2
9
10
11
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
29

Pattern
generating
section
LSU-ASIC
Content
Grid pattern
Dot print
Each color 10%
area (A4/A4R)
density print
8-color belt print
4-color dot print
(sub scan)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
NOTE
&/26(
6(/)35,17%:6(59,&(
$ 35,173$77(51

% '27'27,)$

& '27'27,)$
' '(16,7<),;(',)$
( 08/7,&2817
) (;32685(,)$67$1'$5'',7+(5
* 3$3(5&6
+ '83/(;12
16 gradations
+ M by N
(center gradations
only): Sub scan)
16 gradations
+ M by N
(center gradations
only): Main scan)
All background
(half tone)
256 gradations
pattern
(Other dither)
256 gradations
pattern
(For text dither)
4-point dot print
(main scan)
Slant line
Dot print 1200dpi
Item/Display
PRINT PATTERN
B
C
D
DENSITY
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
HALFTONE
QUALITY
DITHER
PAPER TYPE
MFP ASIC
Half tone
(MFP ASIC
after
process)
, 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
Print of each color is made

for every 1/4 of the sub
scanning paper size.
When all colors are
CMY.
16 gradations print
The gradation is changed
for every 256 dots.
(;(&87(
2.
64-4
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (256 gradations)

Section
Operation/Procedure
LSU-ASIC
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
LOW
HIGH
STANDARD
HIGHQUALITY
FINE
STRAIGHT
CALIB
PLAIN
HEAVY
1)

2)
3)
Content
below.)
Number of print
Paper feed tray
Manual paper feed
selection
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
Halftone
Low line number
High line number
Image quality
Standard
setting
Fine image quality
Ultra fine text
Specification of
Straight
dither correction
Calibration
Paper type
Standard paper
Heavy paper
Setting range
1-5
1 - 255
1 - 999
1-6
0-1
0-2
1-2
0-1
Default value
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
0
1
2
1
2
0
1
128
1
2
(CS1)
0
(LOW)
1
(HIGHQUALITY)
2
(CALIB)
0

Pattern No.
1
2
3
4
5
Content
256 gradations pattern (COLOR)
256 gradations pattern (B/W)
256 gradations pattern (COLOR) (Y-M-C-K continuous)
Half tone pattern (COLOR)
Half tone pattern (B/W)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
35,17(56(/)35,17
$ 35,173$77(51

% '(16,7<
& 08/7,&2817
' 3$3(5&6
( +$/)721(/2:
) 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7<
* ',7+(5&$/,%
+ 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
&
<
(;(&87(
2.
64-5
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

2)

Item/Display
PRINT PATTERN
DITHER
C
D
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
HALFTONE
QUALITY
STRAIGHT
CALIB
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
LOW(IMAGE)
HIGH(TEXT)
STANDARD
HIGHQUALITY
FINE
INTENT
OUTPUT
PROFILE
RGB SOURCE
PROFILE
GRAY
COMPENSATION
TONER SAVE
MODE
PAPER TYPE
PERCEPTUAL
COLORIMETRIC
SATURATION
SHARP
STANDARD
SRGB
GAMMA1.6
GAMMA1.8
GAMMA2.0
TONER SAVE
K
KCMY
ON
OFF
PLAIN
HEAVY
Content
below.)
Specification of
Straight
dither correction
Calibration
Number of print
Paper feed tray
Manual paper feed
selection
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
Halftone
For Photo
For text
Image quality
Standard
setting
(600dpi, 1bit)
Fine image quality
(600dpi, 4bit)
Ultra Fine
(1200dpi, 1bit)
Rendering indent Perceptual
Color metric
Saturation
Output profile
Standard
For Photo image
RGB source
SRGB
profile
Gamma 1.6
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.0
TONER SAVE mode
Gray
K only
compensation
KCMY
Toner save mode set.
not set.
Paper type
Standard paper
Heavy paper
Setting range
1-3
1-2
1 - 999
1-6
0-1
0-2
Default value
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
0
2
1
2
(CS1)
0
(LOW)
1
(HIGHQUALITY)
1
2
0-2
0-1
0-4
0-1
0-1
0-1
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
(PERCEPTUAL)
0
(SHARP)
1
(Gamma1.6)
0 (K)
1 (OFF)
0 (PLAIN)

Pattern
No.
1
2
3

Content
COLOR
B/W
Continuous COLOR,B/W
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
35,17(56(/)35,173&/
$ 35,173$77(51

% ',7+(5&$/,%
& 08/7,&2817
' 3$3(5&6
( +$/)721(/2:
) 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7<
* ,17(173(5&(378$/
+ 287387352),/(6+$53
, 5*%6285&(352),/(65*%
- *5$<&203(16$7,21.
. 721(56$9(02'(2))
&
<
(;(&87(
2.
64-6
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)

Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

Select a print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2)

A
Item/Display
PRINT PATTERN
DITHER
C
D
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
HALFTONE
QUALITY
STRAIGHT
CALIB
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
LOW(IMAGE)
HIGH(TEXT)
STANDARD
HIGHQUALITY
FINE
INTENT
OUTPUT
PROFILE
RGB SOURCE
PROFILE
GRAY
COMPENSATION
CMY INK
SIMULATION
PAPER TYPE
PERCEPTUAL
COLORIMETRIC
SATURATION
SHARP
STANDARD
SRGB
GAMMA1.6
GAMMA1.8
GAMMA2.0
TONER SAVE
K
KCMY
OFF
SWOP
EURO
JAPAN COLOR
PLAIN
HEAVY
Content
Specification of the print pattern (* For
details, refer to the description below.)
Specification of
Straight
dither correction
Calibration
Number of print
Paper feed tray
Manual paper feed
selection
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
LCC
Halftone
Photograph
For text
Image quality
Standard
setting
(600dpi, 1bit)
Fine image quality
(600dpi, 4bit)
Ultra Fine
(1200dpi, 1bit)
Rendering indent Perceptual
Color metric
Saturation
Output profile
Standard
For Photo image
RGB source
SRGB
profile
Gamma 1.6
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.0
Gamma 0.6
Gray
K only
compensation
KCMY
Ink simulation
OFF
SWOP
EURO
JAPAN COLOR
Paper type
Standard paper
Heavy paper
Setting range
1-2
1-2
1 - 999
1-6
0-1
0-2
Default value
1
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
0
2
1
2
(CS1)
0
(LOW)
1
(HIGHQUALITY)
1
2
0-2
0-1
0-5
0-1
0-3
0-1
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
0
1
2
3
0
1
0
(PERCEPTUAL)
0
(SHARP)
1
(GAMMA1.6)
0 (K)
0 (OFF)
0 (PLAIN)

Pattern
No.
1
2
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Content
&/26(
35,17(56(/)35,1736
$ 35,173$77(51
COLOR
B/W

% ',7+(5&$/,%
& 08/7,&2817
' 3$3(5&6
( +$/)721(/2:
) 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7<
* ,17(173(5&(378$/
+ 287387352),/(6+$53
, 5*%6285&(352),/(65*%
- *5$<&203(16$7,21.
. &0<,1.6,08/$7,212))
/ 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
&
<
(;(&87(
2.
64-7
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to print the adjustment pattern of the

test print .(Self print). (The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)

2)

The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.
Item/Display
A
B
COPIES
PROC YES
ADJ
NO
Content
Number of print
0
The half tone
process
control
correction
value is
reflected.
1
The half tone
process
control
correction
value is not
reflected.
Setting
range
1 - 999
0-1
Default
value
1
1
Writing
No
Yes
65-2
Operation check/test
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Touch the touch panel.
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
the touched position is displayed in real time.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(3$7&+35,1702'(
$ &23,(6

;<
&/26(

% 352&$'-12

(;(&87(

2.
65-5
Purpose
65
Section
65-1
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
Section
Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key

input.
Operation panel section
Operation/Procedure
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen.
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to
the simulation sub number entry menu.
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu.
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on

the screen.
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
is displayed.
<Check target key>
8.5 Inch LCD model
JOB STATUS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
HOME
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AUDIT CLEAR
8.1 Inch LCD model

DOCUMENT FILING
IMAGE SEND
COPY
JOB STATUS
FUNCTION
SYSTEM SETTINGS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8.5 Inch LCD model

0
PROGRAM
CLEAR
STOP
CLEAR ALL/RESET
START (COLOR)
START (MONO)
8.1 Inch LCD model

8
9
AUDIT CLEAR
0
PROGRAM
CLEAR
STOP
CLEAR ALL/RESET
START (COLOR)
START (MONO)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
67-24
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Auto

adjustment)
Section
Printer
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)

3)
&/26(
The printer color balance auto adjustment is performed, and

the adjustment result is printed.
23(5$7,213$1(/.(<&+(&.
3/($6(386+-2%67$786.(<
4)
Press [OK] key.

The half tone correction target registration is processed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
67
67-17
(;(&87(
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Printer reset
Section

7(67
6,08/$7,2112
Printer
&/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
Operation/Procedure
7(6735,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the
NIC setting.)
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66

normal display.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
)$&725<
6(59,&(
(;(&87(
&/26(
35,17(5&21752//(50(025<&/($5
67-25
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Manual

adjustment)
Printer
Section
Operation/Procedure
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
1)

touch panel.
2)
touch panel.
3)
(;(&87(

4)

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value.
Item/Display
A
POINT1
Setting
range
1 - 99
Default
value
50
Setting
range
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
1 - 99
Item/Display
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
POINT16
POINT17
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$ 32,17

% 32,17
& 32,17

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(/(&72)357(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'7$5*(77%/
) 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
0
'()
'()
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the service target of the printer

mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section
Printer
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel.
2)
Place the printed color balance adjustment pattern sheet

printed in SIM 67-25 on the document table.
3)
4)
Press [OK] key.
+ 32,17
&
'()
67-27
* 32,17

' 32,17
( 32,17
&/26(
(;(&87(
<
2.
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance

adjustment is set according to the scanned adjustment pattern
sheet patch images.
The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
67-26
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the

printer mode auto color balance adjustment.
Printer
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the target color balance with the touch panel.

Item/Display
Target
value table
select
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Content
operation is slightly shifted to Magenta.
balance is converted into natural gray
color balance by the color table in an
actual printer mode and print is made.
operation is slightly shifted to natural
gray color balance. When this target is
selected, the color balance is slightly
shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
actual copy mode and print is made.
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan.
balance is converted into the color
balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode and
print is made.
Default
value
DEF 1
NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the printer color balance is manually adjusted.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BASE
Point B target value

Point C target value
Point D target value
Point E target value
Point F target value
Point G target value
Point H target value
Point I target value
Point J target value
Point K target value
Point L target value
Point M target value
Point N target value
Point O target value
Background sampling value

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
*+,-.
/012
&
<
6(783

67-28
67-31
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Printer
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target

of the printer mode auto color balance
adjustment.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.

Printer
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

The printer calibration data (Half tone correction data) are
cleared.
(The printer color balance correction is canceled.)
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance

adjustment is set to the default.

The service color balance target and the color balance target
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
balance as the factory color balance target.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
35,17(5&$/%5$7,21'$7$&/($5

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(59,&(
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
67-33
Purpose
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer

screen. (for PCL/PS)
(;(&87(
Section
67-30
Printer
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of sending the

machine calibration data and the half tone
correction data to a client PC. (For GDI
printer)
Section
Printer
1)
Select a target change color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key on the
touch panel.
2)
Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key.
3)
Select a target adjustment density level with [n] [p] key.
4)
5)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.

Item/Display
A
(0: YES
1: NO)
Content
0
Sending the calibration

data and the half tone
correction data to a client
PC is disabled.
Sending the calibration
data and the half tone
correction data to a client
PC is enabled.
Item/Display
Setting
range
0-1
Default
value
1

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&$/,%5$7,21'$7$5(/($6($'-8670(17
$ <(612

2.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
POINT16
POINT17
Display
SCREEN1
SCREEN2
SCREEN3
SCREEN4
SCREEN5
SCREEN6
SCREEN7
SCREEN8
SCREEN9
Content
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Point 16
Point 17
Setting
range
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
Content
600dpi 1bit Photo
600dpi 1 bit Graphics
600dpi 4 bit Photo
1200dpi 1 bit Photo
B/W 600dpi 1 bit
B/W 600dpi 4 bit
B/W 1200dpi 1 bit
Default
value
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
Display
SCREEN10
HEAVY PAPER
Content
Toner Save B/W
Printer paper kind manual gamma
correction (Heavy paper)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
$ 32,17

% 32,17

& 32,17
' 32,17

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
35,17(56&5((1*$00$$'-8670(176&5((1
( 32,17
&/26(
) 32,17
35,17(56&5((1*$00$$'-8670(176&5((1
$ 32,17
* 32,17

% 32,17
+ 32,17

& 32,17
, 32,17
' 32,17
- 32,17
( 32,17
. 32,17
) 32,17
/ 32,17
* 32,17
&
(;(&87(
<
2.
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
67-34
. 32,17
Purpose
/ 32,17
.
&
(;(&87(
<
2.
67-33
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the

printer high density section. (Support for
the high density section tone gap)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Printer
0
1
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target change color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key on the
touch panel.
2)
Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key.
3)
Select a target adjustment density level with [n] [p] key.
4)
5)
Press [OK] key.
2)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
POINT16
POINT17
Display
SCREEN1
SCREEN2
SCREEN3
SCREEN4
SCREEN5
SCREEN6
Setting
range
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
0 - 255
Content
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Point 16
Point 17
Content
600dpi 1bit Photo
600dpi 1bit Graphics
1200dpi 1bit Photo
1200dpi 1bit Graphics
B/W 600dpi 1bit
B/W 1200dpi 1bit
Default
value
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
Enable
Disable

Item/Display
A
CMY
(0: ENABLE
1: DISABLE)
K
(0: ENABLE
1: DISABLE)
CYAN MAX
TARGET
MAGENTA MAX
TARGET
YELLOW MAX
TARGET
BLACK MAX
TARGET

Item/Display
Printer
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer

screen. (for GDI)
Section
Adjustment/Setup
Content
0
CMY engine highest

density correction
mode : Enable
1
CMY engine highest
density correction
mode : Disable
0
K engine highest
density correction
mode : Enable
1
K engine highest
density correction
mode : Disable
correction
MAGENTA maximum
density correction
YELLOW maximum
density correction
correction
Setting
range
0-1
Default
value
0
0-1
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
0 - 999
500
When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set items
A and B to "0."
The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone
gap is reduced.
To increase the density in the high density section further, set
items A and B to "1.
NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these
values are changed, the density in the high density area is
changed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
+($9<3$3(5
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(
&/26(
35,17(5&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(53&/

'3,B%,7
'3,B%,7
%:
% .(1$%/(',6$%/(
& &<$10$;7$5*(7

' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
$5(<28685("
$//
<(6
12
(;(&87(

2.
67-52
67-36
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low density section.
Printer
Section
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the

printer screen. (GDI)
Printer
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [OK] key.
1)
Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel.
2)
Press [ALL] key to select all the modes.
When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images

are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
low density are images are weakly reproduced.
When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight
section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble.
When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33, it is

reset to the default.
Screen
Item/Display
1200DPI_1BIT

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Content
SCREEN3(1200dpi 1bit Photo)
SCREEN4(1200dpi 1bit Graphic)
SCREEN2(600dpi 1bit Graphic)
SCREEN5(B/W 600dpi 1bit)
600DPI_1BIT
&/26(
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
$ $3$7&+,1387
B/W

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
35,17(5&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(5*',

'3,B%,7
'3,B%,7
%:
2.
67-52
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the

printer screen. (for PCL/PS)
Section
$//
Printer
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel.
2)
Press [ALL] key to select all the modes.

When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33, it is
reset to the default.
Screen
Item/Display
HEAVYPAPER
1200DPI_1BIT
600DPI_1BIT
B/W
Content
Heavy paper screen
SCREEN6(1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
SCREEN2(600dpi 1bit Graphics)
SCREEN10(Toner Save B/W)
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(

67-70
Purpose
Function (Purpose) MFP PWB SRAM data clear
MFP PWB
Section
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Press [YES] key.

MFP PWB SRAM data is cleared.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display.
NOTE: When the MFP PWB is replaced, execute this simulation.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
65$00(025<&/($5
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
(;(&87(
MX-3100N
[8]
SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE
CODE
C.
Self diag operation
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and

displays the trouble message.
Self diag
(1)
Self diag operation and related work flow
The machine always monitors its own state.
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consumable part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble,this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the
machine to minimize the damage.
A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is

nearly expired or is expired.
A. Function and purpose
Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simulation.
1)
Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a

trouble.)
2)
The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is

stopped on detection of a trouble.)
3)
By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be

quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.)
4)
Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows

to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a consumable part.)
When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or

may not be stopped.
The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
the LCD and lamp.
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically

cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning messages must be cleared by a simulation.
Monitors the machine

conditions.
Detects/analyzes
the content.
B. Self diag message kinds

The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Class 1
User
Service
Class 2
Others
Warning
Trouble
Others
Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the

user. (Paper jam,consumable part life expiration,
etc.)
Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
-
Trouble/Warning
Warning
Trouble
The machine
is stopped.
The content
is displayed.
Trouble/Warning
Trouble
Troubleshoot
the cause.
Repair
Cancel the selfdiagnostic
message with the diagnostics (test

commands).
Reset
Standby
state
MX-3100N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 1
Warning
A consumable
part has reached
its lifetime
ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
the
consumable part.
No
OP
D. Breakdown sequence
(1)
Breakdown mode processing
a. Breakdown mode list

There are following cases of the breakdown mode.
Operatable mode
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
Scan
push
Scan
pull
ScanTo
HDD
FAX
Send
FAX
print
Print
List
print
F6 (1 line)
E7 (03, 04)
U1
U1
FAST
Notification to
host
U1
E7 (80)
A0 (02)
E7 (90)
A0 (01)
L8 (20)
U1 (01)
{
{
L4 (30)
E7 (60, 61, 65)

A0 (10 - 12, 20)
U2 (30)
U7 (50, 51)
U2 (00, 05, 10, 11, 22,
23, 24)
{
{
U2 (50)
E7 (01, 05, 06, 08, 09)
PC (--)
*10
*10
Paper feed tray 1 trouble
E7 (20, 28, 29), L6

(10)
E7 (50)
A0 (21)
F1 (50)
C1 (10, 14),
C4 (excluding 10),
E7 (21, 22, 23),
F2 (22, 40, 64, 70, 74),
H2, H3, H4, H5, H7,
L4 (excluding 30),
L8 (01, 02),
U2 (90, 91),
F3 (12)
U3
U3
U3
F3 (22)
U3
U3
U3
U6 (01)
U3
U3
U3
U6 (02)
U3
U3
U3
U6 (09,20,21,22,51)
U3
U3
U3
Paper feed tray other

troubles
Staple trouble
U6 (00,10,50)
U 11
U 11
U 11
F1(08,10)
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
F1
(21,31,41,43,45,47)
F1
(00,03,11,15,19,20,32,
33,34,36,37,38,39)
EE (EL, EU, EC)
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U4
U3
*10
U3
*10
U3
*10
U3
*10
U3
*10
U 11
*10
U4
*10
U4
*10
U4
*10
U4
U4
Kind of trouble
FAX board trouble

HDD trouble
HDD-ASIC self test
trouble
SCU communication
trouble
PCU communication
trouble
Power controler trouble
Backup battery voltage
fall
Controller fan motor
trouble
Connection trouble (MFP
detection)
Serial number
discrepancy
Vendor machine error
Memory error (included
not installed the
expansion RAM)
HDD registration data
sum error
Image memory trouble,
decode error
Personal counter
installation trouble
Laser trouble
Connection trouble (PCU
detection)
PCU section troubles
(motor, fusing, etc.)
Saddle stitch section

trouble
After-process trouble
Other troubles
Judgment
block
MFP
PCU
Trouble code
Operatable mode
Kind of trouble
General PCU color

system trouble
Judgment
block
PCU
Process control trouble

(PCU detection)
PCU section error
Connection trouble (SCU
detection)
SCU color system
troubles (SCU detection)
Anti copy system
EEPROM faction
Scanner section troubles
(mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD troubles
(shading, etc.)
SCU
FAST
Notification to
host
{
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
Scan
push
Scan
pull
ScanTo
HDD
FAX
Send
FAX
print
Print
List
print
*11
*11
*11
*11
*11
*11
*11
*11
A0 (22)
{
*12
{
*16
{
*16
{
*16
{
*16
{
*16
{
*16
{
*16
{
*16
{
*16
UC (02)
U9
U9
U9
U9
U9
UC (20)
U2 (80, 81)
L1,L3
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
E7 (10, 11, 14)
Trouble code
E7 (21 - 23),
F2 (23 - 25, 41 - 43,
65 - 67, 71 - 73,
75 - 77)
F2 (39, 58, 45, 49 - 53,
78)
C4 (10)
{ : Operation enabled, : Operation disabled

U 1 : The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
U 3 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
U 4 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section.
U 9 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
* 10 : Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
U 11 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK.
* 11 : When the color mode is inhibited in "Color mode inhibit" setting of the system setting, the operation is performed in the monochrome
mode.
* 12 : Trouble display is message of 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
* 16 : Print is enabled. Displays "Call for service. CODE: **-**".
* Trouble mode process
Machine operation enabled under some conditions.
A dialog is displayed when a trouble occurs. For the mode where operations are enabled, [OK] button is added to the message. When operations are disabled, [OK] button is not displayed, and the message is displayed until the trouble is cancelled.
* For U3, 4, 11 perform the following procedures.
When a trouble is detected during a job, the machine operation is terminated. (Trouble display/without [OK] key)
When trouble is detected other than during the JOB operating, the trouble display is not made and the JOB that relates to the trouble part
cannot be selected.
Troubles which disable the machine operations
The trouble display is always made.
* Writing to the trouble memory
Writing of a same trouble to the trouble memory can be selected with SIM 26-35.
(Sim.26-35)
0: ONCE; If same as the previous one, it is not saved. (Default)
1: ANY; Though same as the previous one, it is saved.
(2)
Power ON trouble detection sequence.

MFP event
manager
Each block
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, U1, U2, U6, PF, F3 trouble check
Trouble check is made in each block when initializing
and data are sent to the MFP PWB.
H3, H4, H5
U1
U2
PF
U6-09
F3-12, F3-22
Saved in the PCU

Saved in the MFP.
Saved in each block.
Saved in the MFP.
Saved in the PCU
Saved in the PCU
When the power is turned

on, check is made in each
block.
Communication of trouble status

[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
sim task
(Trouble cancel sequence)
When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 (Color mode
inhibition) cancel
SIM 15: LCC (U6) trouble cancel
F3-12, F3-22 cancel
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel
SIM 17: PF trouble cancel
2.
(To the corresponding block)
Trouble cancel
(The trouble memory
is initialized.)
Trouble cancel command

Trouble cancel status
is communicated.
Trouble code list
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code
code
C1
10
14
C4
00
02
03
10
E7
01
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
14
20
21
22
23
28
29
50
55
60
61
65
80
90
EE
EC
EL
EU
Trouble code content

Main charger trouble (BK)
Main charger trouble (Color)
PTC trouble
PTC heater open trouble
PTC heater short trouble
PTC no control
MFP image data error
HDD trouble
HDD-ASIC error
Standard memory/expansion memory read/write error (MFP PWB)
Image data decode error
MFP memory compatibility error (MFP PWB)
Standard memory size/Expansion memory size error (MFP PWB)
Shading error (Black correction)
Shading error (White correction)
CCD-ASIC error
LSU laser detection error (K)
LSU laser detection error (C)
LSU laser detection error (M)
LSU laser detection error (Y)
LSU-PCU connection error
LSU ASIC frequency error
Engine connection trouble
PWB information sum error (Engine detection)
Combination error between the MFP PWB and other PWB, firmware
Combination error between the MFP PWB and the PCU PWB
MFP EEPROM sum check error
MFP-SCU PWB communication error
MFP-PCU PWB communication error
Automatic toner density adjustment error (Sampling level 76 - 117/ 139 - 178)
Automatic toner density adjustment error (Overtoner)
Automatic toner density adjustment error (Undertoner)
Trouble
detection
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
SCU
SCU
SCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
PCU
PCU
PCU
Mecha
nism
Option
Electri
city
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
FAX
Supply
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code
code
F1
00
03
08
10
11
15
19
20
21
31
32
33
34
36
37
38
39
41
43
45
47
50
F2
22
23
24
25
39
40
41
42
43
45
49
50
51
58
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
F3
H2
H3
H4
H5
H7
L1
L3
12
22
00
01
02
03
00
01
02
00
01
02
30
01
10
11
12
00
00

Finisher - PCU PWB communication error
Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble
Stapler shift trouble
Staple operation trouble
Finisher grip operation trouble
Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble
Finisher alignment operation trouble F
Finisher alignment operation trouble R
Finisher fan trouble
Saddle paper folding trouble
Finisher - Punch unit communication error
Punch unit shift operation trouble
Punch operation trouble
Punch paper edge detection error
Finisher data backup RAM error
Punch data backup RAM error
Punch paper dust sensor error
Saddle paper positioning operation trouble
Saddle alignment operation trouble
Saddle staple trouble
Saddle paper transport motor trouble
Main unit - Finisher combination error
Discharge lamp trouble (K)
Discharge lamp trouble (C)
Discharge lamp trouble (M)
Discharge lamp trouble (Y)
Process thermister trouble
Toner density sensor trouble (BLACK)
Toner density sensor trouble (CYAN)
Toner density sensor trouble (MAGENTA)
Toner density sensor trouble (YELLOW)
Color image density sensor trouble
LSU thermister trouble
K drum phase sensor trouble
CL drum phase sensor trouble
Process humidity sensor trouble
Toner supply operation trouble (BK)
Toner supply operation trouble (C)
Toner supply operation trouble (M)
Toner supply operation trouble (Y)
Improper toner cartridge detection (BLACK)
Improper toner cartridge detection (CYAN)
Improper toner cartridge detection (MAGENTA)
Improper toner cartridge detection (YELLOW)
Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK)
Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN)
Toner cartridge CRUM error (MAGENTA)
Toner cartridge CRUM error (YELLOW)
Registration image density sensor trouble (Transfer belt substrate reflection rate
abnormality)
Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
Thermister open trouble (TH_UM_AD2)
Thermister open trouble (TH_LM)
Sub thermister open trouble (TH_US)
Compensation thermister open trouble (TH_UM_AD1)
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM)
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM)
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US)
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2)
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM)
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US)
Thermister input circuit trouble (TH_UM)
5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam
Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_UM_AD2).
Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_LM)
Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_US)
Scanner feed trouble
Scanner return trouble
Trouble
detection
Mecha
nism
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
SCU
SCU
Option
Electri
city
FAX
Supply
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code
code
L4
02
04
05
06
11
16
30
31
32
35
50
56
58
L6
10
L8
01
02
20
PC
U1
01
U2
00
05
10
11
22
23
24
30
50
80
81
90
91
U6
00
01
02
09
10
20
21
22
50
51
U7
50
51
UC
02
20
A0
01
02
10
11
12
20
21
22

Paper feed motor trouble
Developing motor trouble (BLACK)
Developing motor trouble (COLOR)
Transfer unit lift trouble
Shift motor trouble
Fusing pressure release trouble
MFP fan motor trouble
Paper exit cooling fan trouble
Power source cooling fan trouble
Fusing cooling fan trouble
Process fan trouble
Rear cooling fan trouble
Ozone exhaust fan trouble
Polygon motor trouble
Full wave signal detection error
Full wave signal error
MFP PWB - Mother board communication error
Personal counter not detected
Battery trouble
MFP EEPROM read/write error
HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents inconsistency
MFP PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error
MFP PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum error
MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum error
MFP PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error
MFP PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
HDD user authentication data check sum error
SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
PCU PWB - Desk paper feed unit communication error
Desk paper feeding tray 1 lift trouble
Desk paper feeding tray 2 lift trouble
LCC lift trouble
Desk paper feed unit paper transport motor trouble
PCU PWB - LCC communication error
LCC paper transport motor trouble
LCC 24V power trouble
Desk - Main unit combination trouble
LCC - Main unit combination trouble
MFP PWB - Vendor machine communication error
CPT - ASIC error
DOCC ASIC error
PCU PWB ROM error
SCU PWB ROM error
MFP PWB ROM error
Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU)
Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - SCU)
MFP firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency
PCU firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency
SCU firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency
Trouble
detection
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
SCU
SCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
SCU
SCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
PCU
SCU
Mecha
nism
Option
Electri
city
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
FAX
Supply
3.
Details of trouble code
C1-10
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
C1-14
PTC heater open trouble
PCU
The main charger unit (BK) is not installed properly.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit.
Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector.
Breakage of the high voltage harness.
MC/DV PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB.
connector. /Replace.
Replace the MC/DV PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Main charger trouble (Color)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
C4-00
C4-02
Main charger trouble (BK)
PCU
The main charger unit (CMY) is not installed
properly.
There is an abnormality in the main charger.
Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector.
Breakage of the high voltage harness.
MC/DV PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB
connector. /Replace.
Replace the MC/DV PWB.
C4-03
PTC heater short trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PTC trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
The PTC unit is not properly installed.
PTC unit trouble.
Secondary transfer PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Replace the PTC unit.
Replace the secondary transfer PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
NOTE:
When the PTC unit is broken down and repair cannot
be made because of no replacement part:
To use the machine continuously, make the setting to
ignore the PTC trouble, and the machine can be
operated tentatively.
Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "1".
This setting disables the PTC output, the heater
control, and the error detection.
After completion of repair, set the engine soft SW8-3
in SIM55-1 to "0".
C4-10
PCU
PTC unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
NOTE:
in SIM55-1 to "0".
PTC no control
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-01
PCU
The PTU unit is not installed, or the eater line
conduction trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
NOTE:
in SIM55-1 to "0".
PCU
The engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 is set to "1".
The PTC control is not executed. (The PTC does not
operate.)
When the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 is set to
"1", the PTC output, the heater control, and the error
detection are disabled. When this setting is made in
case of a PTC unit trouble, the PTC function is
disabled regardless of the PTC trouble and printing
operation can be performed.
(The mode returns to the normal PTC control mode.)
MFP image data error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP
Image data transfer error in the MFP PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness
of the MFP PWB.
Replace the MFP PWB.
E7-03
HDD trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-04
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-10
MFP
HDD-ASIC trouble.
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
booting.
Memory access is disabled.

MFP
Improper insertion of the memory.
Garbled memory data.
The memory capacity is not the specified level.
Check insertion of the memory.
Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of
the memory.
Replace the expansion memory.
Check & Remedy
E7-11
Check & Remedy
MFP
Compressed image data abnormality.
HDD connection trouble when HDD is installed.
Image data compression/transfer data garble.
MFP PWB trouble.
If the job at an occurrence of an error is a FAX job,
check the FAX PWB.
Check connection of the MFPC PWB and the HDD.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
MFP memory compatibility error (MFP

PWB)
Check & Remedy
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP
A DIMM of different specifications is installed to the
MFP memory slot.
(Support memory: ROW=13bit, Column=10bit)
DIMM trouble.
Check the installed DIMM.
Replace the DIMM.
SCU
Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
Scanner lamp lighting trouble.
CCD unit abnormality.
SCU PWB abnormality.
Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check connection of the harness to the scanner
lamp unit.
Clean the mirror, the lens, and the reference white
plate.
Check the CCD unit.
Check the SCU PWB.
CCD-ASIC error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-20
SCU
Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
scanner lamp is turned OFF.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
CCD unit abnormality.
SCU PWB abnormality.
Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check the CCD unit.
Check the SCU PWB.
Shading error (White correction)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
E7-14
MFP
A DIMM which is not 1GB is inserted into the default
slot.
DIMM trouble.
Insufficient memory size.
Replace the DIMM.
Shading error (Black correction)
Image data decode error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
E7-08
Standard memory size/Expansion

memory size error (MFP PWB)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Standard memory/expansion memory

read/write error (MFP PWB)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
E7-06
MFP
Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFP
PWB and HDD.
HDD (error file management area) data abnormality
(FAT breakage).
MFP PWB trouble.
of the MFP PWB and HDD.
Use SIM62-2,3 to check read/write operations of the
HDD.
Replace the HDD.
HDD-ASIC error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
E7-05
E7-09
SCU
SCU PWB trouble.
Check the SCU PWB.
Replace the SCU PWB.
LSU laser detection error (K)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Optical axis shift.
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
trouble.
BD PWB trouble.
Harness and connector trouble between the LD/BD
PWB and the LSU cnt PWB.
Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
LSU.
Replace the LSU.
E7-21
LSU laser detection error (C)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-22
LSU laser detection error (M)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-23
Check & Remedy
PCU
trouble.
Harness and connector trouble between the LD PWB
and the LSU cnt PWB.
LSU.
Replace the LSU.
LSU-PCU connection error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-29
PCU
trouble.
LSU.
Replace the LSU.
LSU laser detection error (Y)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
E7-28
PCU
trouble.
LSU.
Replace the LSU.
PCU
Communication error between the CPU in the PCU
PWB and the control ASIC.
Improper connection of the communication
connector between the PCU PWB and the LSU cnt
PWB (interface PWB).
Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU
cnt PWB (interface PWB)
PCU PWB or LSU cnt PWB (interface PWB) trouble
between the PCU PWB and the LSU cnt PWB
(interface PWB).
Replace the LSU cnt PWB.
LSU ASIC frequency error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator and
the internal oscillating circuit used in the LSU ASIC.
LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU ASIC PWB.
Replace the LSU cnt PWB.
E7-50
Engine connection trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-55
PWB information sum error

(Engine detection)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-60
Check & Remedy
MFP
A PWB or firmware which is not supported by the
machine specifications is detected in the MFP PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
The PWB/firmware which is not supported by the
machine specifications is connected.
Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check the MFP PWB, and replace it if necessary.
Combination error between the MFP

PWB and the PCU PWB
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
E7-65
PCU EEPROM PWB information sum error

PCU
PCU EEPROM sum check error.
PCU EEPROM trouble.
PCU EEPROM contact trouble.
Malfunction due to noises
Replace the PCU EEPROM.
Combination error between the MFP

PWB and other PWB, firmware
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
E7-61
PCU
A PWB, or firmware, or LSU which is not supported
by the machine specifications is detected in the PCU
PWB.
PCU PWB trouble.
LSU trouble.
Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check the LSU, and replace it if necessary.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace it if necessary.
MFP
Combination error between the MFP PWB and the
PCU PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check the combination between the MFP PWB and
the PCU PWB.
MFP EEPROM sum check error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP
MFP PWB EEPROM device breakdown.
Contact trouble of the MFP EEPROM device.
Malfunction due to noises.
Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
E7-80
MFP-SCU PWB communication error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP
SCU PWB connector connection trouble.
SCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
SCU PWB mother board connection trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Replace the mother board.
Check connection of the SCU PWB, the MFP PWB,
and the mother board.
Check the earth line.
EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment

error (Undertoner)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-00
E7-90
MFP - PCU PWB communication error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP
PCU PWB connector connection trouble.
PCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
PCU PWB motherboard connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Check connection of the PCU PWB, the MFP PWB,
and the mother board.
Check the earth line.
EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment

error (Sampling level 76 - 117/ 139 178)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
The sampling level in the automatic toner density

adjustment is outside of 128 r10.
PCU
Toner density sensor trouble.
Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the developing unit.
Check & Remedy
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy

adjustment is 76 or less or the control voltage is 208
or above.
PCU
Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner
density trouble, or developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Strong external noises.
Check the connector and the harness between the
finisher and the PCU PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-08
EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment
error (Overtoner)
Finisher - PCU PWB communication

error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
F1-03

adjustment is 178 or above or the control voltage is
51 or less.
PCU
Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner
density trouble, or developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU
Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
roller lift motor.
Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Stapler shift trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Stapler shift motor trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
motor.
Replace the stapler shift motor.
F1-10
Staple operation trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-11
Finisher grip operation trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-15
Check & Remedy
Lift motor trouble.

PCU
Paper exit tray lift motor trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
tray lift motor.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.
Finisher alignment operation trouble F
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-20
PCU
Grip motor trouble.
Grip arm trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the grip motor.
Replace the grip motor.
Replace the grip arm.
Finisher paper exit tray lift operation

trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
F1-19
PCU
Staple motor trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
motor.
Replace the staple motor.
PCU
Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
Overcurrent to the motor.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor F.
Replace the paper alignment motor F.
Finisher alignment operation trouble

R
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
Overcurrent to the motor.
alignment motor R.
Replace the paper alignment motor R.
F1-21
Finisher fan trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-31
Saddle paper folding trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-32
PCU
Saddle paper folding motor trouble.
Saddle paper folding mechanism trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
paper folding.
Replace the saddle paper folding motor.
Check and repair the saddle paper folding
mechanism.
Finisher - Punch unit communication

error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-33
PCU
Finisher fan motor trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Check connection between the finisher control PWB
and the fan.
Replace the fan.
PCU
Connector/harness connection trouble or
disconnection between the finisher and the punch
unit.
PCU PWB trouble.
Malfunction due to noises.
The punch unit is in the adjustment mode.
Check the connector and the harness between the
finisher and the punch unit.
Cancel the adjustment mode of the punch unit.
Punch unit shift operation trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Punch shift motor trouble.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
shifting.
Replace the punch shift motor.
Check connection of the connectors and the
harness.
F1-34
Punch operation trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-36
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
PCU
Punch paper edge sensor trouble.
Harness disconnection.
Punch control PWB trouble.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor.
Replace the punch paper edge sensor.
Replace the punch control PWB.
PCU
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10,Finisher control
PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
Punch data backup RAM error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-39
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-43
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Punch control PWB trouble.
Replace the punch control PWB.
Set the punch unit specifications, and adjust the
sensor. (Punch unit control PWB DIP SW
adjustment.)
Punch paper dust sensor error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Punch dust sensor trouble.
Punch unit control PWB trouble.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor.
harness.
Replace the punch dust sensor.
Replace the punch unit control PWB.
F1-45
PCU
Saddle alignment motor trouble.
paper alignment motor.
Replace the saddle alignment motor.
harness.
Saddle staple trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F1-47
Abnormality in the folding positioning guide motor in

the saddle section.
PCU
Saddle paper positioning guide drive motor trouble.
paper positioning motor.
Replace the saddle paper folding positioning guide
drive motor.
Saddle alignment operation trouble
Finisher data backup RAM error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
F1-38
Saddle paper positioning operation

trouble
Punch paper edge detection error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
F1-37
PCU
Punch motor trouble.
Check the punch operation.
Replace the punch motor.
harness.
F1-41
Abnormality of the staple unit drive motor in the

saddle section.
PCU
Saddle staple motor trouble.
staple motor.
Replace the saddle staple motor.
harness.
Saddle paper transport motor trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Abnormality in the drive roller oscillation motor in the

finisher saddle transport section.
PCU
Saddle paper transport motor trouble.
Fuse blown (24V line).
paper transport motor.
Replace the saddle paper transport motor.
harness.
Replace the fuse.
F1-50
Main unit - Finisher combination error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-22
Discharge lamp trouble (K)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-23
A trouble is detected when the discharge lamp open

sensor is open for 1 sec after turning ON the
discharge lamp.
PCU
Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB
(K) and the PCU PWB.
Discharge lamp PWB (K) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the discharge lamp PWB (K).
Check the harness and the connector.
Discharge lamp trouble (C)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-24
PCU
The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
model is installed.
Install a proper finisher.

discharge lamp.
PCU
(C) and the PCU PWB.
Discharge lamp PWB (C) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the discharge lamp PWB (C).
F2-39
Process thermister trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-40
Toner density sensor trouble (BLACK)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-41
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy

discharge lamp.
PCU
(M) and the PCU PWB.
Discharge lamp PWB (M) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the discharge lamp PWB (M).
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-42
Discharge lamp trouble (Y)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample
level 25 or less, or 231 or above)
Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness.
PCU PWB trouble
Toner
density
(MAGENTA)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-25
PCU
harness.
Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Toner density sensor trouble (CYAN)
Discharge lamp trouble (M)
Trouble content
PCU
Process thermister trouble.
Process thermister harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the process thermister.
Check connection of the harness and the connector.
sensor
trouble
PCU
harness.
PCU PWB trouble

discharge lamp.
PCU
(Y) and the PCU PWB.
Discharge lamp PWB (Y) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the discharge lamp PWB (Y).
F2-43
Toner density sensor trouble (YELLOW)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
level 25 or less, or 231 or above).
harness.
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-50
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-51
F2-45
PCU
Drum phase sensor trouble.
Drum drive section trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_K.".
Replace the drum phase sensor.
harness.
Repair the drum drive section.
CL drum phase sensor trouble
Color image density sensor trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-49
K drum phase sensor trouble
PCU
Color image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
trouble.
Color image density sensor trouble.
Image density sensor dirt.
Calibration plate dirt.
Calibration plate solenoid trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the color image density sensor.
harness.
Clean the image density sensor.
Replace the calibration plate.
Replace the calibration plate solenoid.
Use SIM44-2 to adjust the process control sensor
sensitivity.
LSU thermister trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
The LSU detection temperature is outside of -28qC 78qC.
LSU thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
LSU control PWB trouble.
Replace the LSU thermister.
harness.
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Replace the LSU.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-58
Process humidity sensor trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-64
PCU
Drum phase sensor trouble.
Drum drive section trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_K.".
Replace the drum phase sensor.
harness.
Repair the drum drive section.
PCU
Process humidity sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the process humidity sensor.
harness.
Toner supply operation trouble (BK)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Toner motor trouble.
Connector/harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble.
Replace the toner motor.
Replace the toner cartridge.
F2-65
Toner supply operation trouble (C)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-66
Toner supply operation trouble (M)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-67
PCU
PCU PWB trouble
Toner supply operation trouble (Y)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-70
PCU
PCU PWB trouble
PCU
PCU PWB trouble
Improper toner cartridge detection

(BLACK)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
specification.)
PCU PWB trouble
F2-71

(CYAN)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-72

(MAGENTA)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-73
Check & Remedy
PCU
specification.)
PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-75
PCU
specification.)
PCU PWB trouble.

(YELLOW)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
F2-74
PCU
specification.)
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU
Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-76
Toner cartridge CRUM error

(MAGENTA)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-77
Toner cartridge CRUM error

(YELLOW)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F2-78
PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Registration image density sensor

trouble (Transfer belt substrate reflection rate abnormality)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
F3-12
PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU
Image density (registration) sensor trouble (Sensor
sensitivity adjustment trouble).
PCU PWB trouble.
harness.
Image density (registration) sensor dirt.
Transfer belt dirt, scratch.
Replace the image density (registration) sensor.
Clean the image density (registration) sensor.
Clean or replace the transfer belt.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time.
CLUD1 sensor trouble
Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check connection of the harness and the connector
of LUD1.
Replace the lift-up unit.
F3-22
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
H2-00
Thermister open trouble

(TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
H2-01
Check & Remedy
PCU
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
harness.
Fusing unit not installed.
Replace the thermister.
Sub thermister open trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
H2-03
PCU
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
harness.
Thermister open trouble (TH_LM)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
H2-02
LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.

PCU
LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
CLUD2 sensor trouble.
Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
Replace the lift-up unit.
PCU
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
harness.
Compensation thermister open trouble (TH_UM_AD1)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
harness.
H3-00
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
H3-01
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
H3-02
PCU
The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
harness.
Power unit trouble.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the power unit.
H4-00
PCU
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.Harness and connector
connection trouble.
Power unit trouble.
heater lamp.
H4-01
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy

PCU
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
harness.
Power unit trouble.
heater lamp.
PCU
The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from turning ON the
power relay.
Thermister trouble.
Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Thermostat trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Interlock switch trouble.
Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the thermostat.
Replace the interlock switch.
heater lamp.
PCU
power relay.
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
Power unit trouble.
heater lamp.
H4-02
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
H4-30
PCU
power relay.
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
Power unit trouble.
heater lamp.
H5-01
5 times continuous POD1 not-reach

jam
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
H7-10
Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_UM_AD2).
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Thermister input circuit trouble

(TH_UM)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
The values of TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not
exceed the specified value (50 counts in AD value)
within the specified time from turning ON the
HL_UM.
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Interlock switch trouble
heater lamp.
Check & Remedy
H7-11
PCU
A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam
paper remains.)
POD1 sensor trouble.
Fusing unit installation trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the POD1 sensor.
Check the installing position of the fusing unit.
Replace the fusing unit.
PCU
level within the specified time from stopping a job
due to fall in the fusing temperature.
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
Power unit trouble.
heater lamp.
Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_LM)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
Power unit trouble.
heater lamp.
H7-12
Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
L1-00
Paper feed motor trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
L4-04
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy

SCU
Scanner feed is not completed within the specified
time.
Scanner unit trouble.
SCU PWB trouble
Scanner control PWB trouble.
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Scanner motor trouble.
Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Replace the scanner unit.
harness.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Replace the scanner motor.
L4-05
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
SCU
Scanner return is not completed within the specified
time.
Scanner unit trouble.
SCU PWB trouble
Scanner control PWB trouble.
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Scanner motor trouble.
Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Replace the scanner unit.
harness.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Replace the scanner motor.
PCU
The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
the developing motor.
Developing motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the
developing motor.
Replace the developing motor.
harness.
Developing motor trouble (COLOR)
Scanner return trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
PCU
The lock signal Is not detected within 1 sec when
turning ON the paper feed motor when warming up,
canceling a jam.
Paper feed motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed
motor.
Replace the paper feed motor.
harness.
Developing motor trouble (BLACK)
Scanner feed trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
L3-00
PCU
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
Power unit trouble.
heater lamp.
L4-02
PCU
The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
the developing motor.
Developing motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the
developing motor.
harness.
L4-06
Transfer unit lift trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
L4-11
MFP fan motor trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
L4-31
Check & Remedy
PCU
No change in the shifter home position sensor signal
is detected in the operation of the shifter initializing.
Shift motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
harness.
Shifter home position sensor trouble.
Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation.
Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter
home position sensor.
Replace the shift motor.
Replace the shifter home position sensor.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
L4-32
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy

PCU
No change in the fusing pressure release sensor
signal is detected within the specified time after
turning ON the fusing pressure release motor.
Fusing pressure release sensor trouble.
Fusing pressure release motor trouble.
Fusing pressure release level F, R trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
harness.
Replace the fusing pressure release sensor.
Replace the fusing pressure release motor.
Replace the fusing pressure release lever F, R.
L4-35
PCU
The fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time in the paper exit cooling fan operation.
Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
harness.
harness.
Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the
fan.
Replace the paper exit cooling fan.
Power source cooling fan trouble
Fusing pressure release trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
MFP
Fan motor trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.Harness and connector
connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the fan motor.
Paper exit cooling fan trouble
Shift motor trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
L4-16
When separating the primary transfer belt unit,

change in the separation position sensor
characteristics is not detected within the specified
time.
PCU
Transfer unit position sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
harness.
Transfer unit separation clutch operation trouble.
Primary transfer belt unit is not installed.
Use SIM6-3 to check the separating operation of the
transfer unit.
Install the primary transfer belt unit.
Replace the transfer unit position sensor.
Replace the transfer unit separation clutch.
L4-30
PCU
specified time in the power cooling fan operation.
Power cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
harness.
fan.
Replace the power cooling fan.
Check/replace the connector or the harness.
Fusing cooling fan trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
specified time in the fusing cooling fan operation.
Fusing cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
harness.
fan.
Replace the fusing cooling fan.
L4-50
Process fan trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
L4-56
PCU
specified time in the process fan operation.
Process fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
harness.
Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
power.
Replace the process fan.
Rear cooling fan trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
L4-58
L8-01
PCU
specified time in the rear cooling fan operation.
Rear cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
harness.
power.
Replace the rear cooling fan.
Ozone exhaust fan trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
specified time in the ozone exhaust fan operation.
Ozone exhaust fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
harness.
power.
Replace the ozone exhaust fan.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
L8-02
Check & Remedy
L8-20
PCU
No full wave signal is detected.
PCU PWB trouble
Power unit trouble.
harness.
harness.
Full wave signal error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
PCU
An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is
detected.
(The frequency is detected as 65Hz or above, or
45Hz or less.)PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
harness.
Power frequency, waveform abnormality.
harness.
Check the power waveform.
MFP PWB - Mother board communication error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PC-L6-10
Full wave signal detection error
MFP
Mother board PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Check connection between the mother board and the
MFPC PWB.
Check the earth line of the main unit.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Personal counter not detected
Polygon motor trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
The motor does not reach the specified rpm in 7 sec
after starting rotation of the polygon motor.
Polygon motor trouble.
LSU control PWB trouble.
harness.
Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
motor.
harness.
Replace the polygon motor.
Replace the LSU.
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U1-01
MFP
The personal counter is not installed.
The personal counter is not detected.
harness.
Battery trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Case 1
Cause
Check &
Remedy
Backup SRAM battery voltage fall.

MFP
1) Battery life
2) Battery circuit abnormality
Check to confirm that the battery voltage is
about 2.0V or above.
U2-00
MFP EEPROM read/write error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U2-05
HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents inconsistency
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U2-10
MFP
MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
EEPROM socket contact trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
Check the power environment.
MFP
The HDD or the MFP PWB which differs from that
before turning OFF the power is installed.
HDD trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
If there is backup data (export data by device
cloning), import it.
MFP PWB SRAM user authentication

index check sum error
U2-23
MFP PWB SRAM memory individual

data check sum error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U2-24
MFP PWB SRAM memory user

authentication counter check sum
error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy

Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U2-11
MFP
SRAM user index information (user authentication
basic data) check sum error.
MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
Transfer the user index information data in the HDD
to the SRAM.
U2-30
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
U2-22
MFP
MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum

error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP
The identifier which controls the communication
management table stored in the SRAM and the FAX
soft switch is not detected correctly.
MFP PWB trouble.
Since the data of the communication management
table and the FAX soft switch stored in the SRAM are
initialized when an error occurs, register the deleted
data again individually.
U2-50
MFP
MFP PWB trouble.
MFP PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
MFP PWB EEPROM counter check

sum error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum

error.
MFP
The check sum value for individual data of the
communication table and the sender registration
does not match.
MFP PWB trouble.
Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data related
to the content of check sum error.
Since the registered contents are deleted, register
the deleted contents again.
MFP
Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved
in the PCU PWB and that in the MFP PWB.
When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFP PWB, the
EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before
replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was
mounted on the PWB before replacement is
mounted on the new PWB.
HDD user authentication data check

sum error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP
HDD trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Initialize the data (one-touch, group, program, etc.)
related to the check sum error by turning OFF/ON
the power.
Since the registered contents are deleted, register
the deleted contents again.
Replace the HDD.
U2-80
SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U2-81
Check & Remedy
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U6-01
SCU
SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
SCU PWB trouble.
Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
and the adjustment values.
Check & Remedy
PCU
PCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
PCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
U6-02
PCU
Error when testing the communication line after
turning ON the power or canceling the simulation.
Desk control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble
PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
U2-91
PCU PWB - Desk paper feed unit communication error
SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
U2-90
SCU
SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
U6-00
PCU
DLUD1 does not turn ON within the specified time
when lift-up operation.
DLUD1 sensor trouble.
Lift unit trouble.
harness.
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the DLDU1 sensor.
Replace the lift unit.
Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
DLUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time
when lift-up operation.
DLUD2 sensor trouble.
Lift unit trouble.
harness.
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the DLDU2 sensor.
Replace the lift unit.
U6-09
LCC lift trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U6-10
PCU
No change in the lift motor rotation sensor signal is
detected within the specified time after outputting the
lift motor ON signal.
The lift motor rotation sensor signal varies though the
lift motor is stopped.
Lift motor rotation sensor trouble.
LCC control PWB trouble
Lift mechanism trouble.
Lift motor trouble.
harness.
Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the
sensor and the lift motor.
Replace the lift motor rotation sensor.
Replace the LCC control PWB.
Replace the lift mechanism.
Replace the lift motor.
Desk paper feed unit paper transport

motor trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U6-20
U6-21
PCU
Desk paper feed motor trouble (motor lock, motor
rpm abnormality, overcurrent to the motor).
harness.
Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the desk
transport motor.
Replace the desk paper feed motor.
PCU PWB - LCC communication error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
Error when testing the communication line after
turning ON the power or canceling the simulation.
LCC control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Improper combination between the main unit and the
LCC.
Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
communication line.
LCC paper transport motor trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U6-22
LCC 24V power trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U6-50
PCU
The DC24V power is not supplied from the main unit
to the LCC.
Power source unit trouble.
Check the connector and the harness in the power
line.
Desk - Main unit combination trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U6-51
PCU
No change in the paper transport motor rotation
sensor signal is detected within the specified time
after outputting the paper transport motor ON signal.
The paper transport motor rotation sensor signal
varies though the paper transport motor is stopped.
Paper transport motor rotation sensor trouble.
Mechanism trouble.
Paper transport motor trouble.
harness.
transport motor.
Replace the paper transport motor.
Replace the mechanism.
Replace the paper transport motor.
PCU
desk.
Install a desk which is proper for the main unit mode.
LCC - Main unit combination trouble
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
PCU
LCC.
Install a LCC which is proper for the main unit mode.
U7-50
MFP PWB - Vendor machine communication error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
U7-51
Communication error between the MFP and the

serial vendor.
MFP
Improper setting of the vendor machine
specifications (SIMI26-3).
Vendor machine trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
communication line. Change the specifications of the
vendor machine (SIM26-3). Replace the LCC control
PWB.
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)

Serial vendor machine trouble.
Err.XX" is displayed on the operation panel of the
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail
code.
communication line.
UC-02 CPT - ASIC error

Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
SCU
SCU PWB trouble (CPT-ASIC trouble)
A0-01
Check & Remedy
Check & Remedy
A0-10
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
A0-11
SCU
SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy
MFP
Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the PCU.
Check the combination between the MFP and the
PCU.
Firmware version inconsistency (MFP

- SCU)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
MFP
the SCU.
Check the combination between the MFP and the
SCU.
MFP firmware version and EEPROM

data version inconsistency
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
MFP
The firmware version-up is not completed properly
by interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc.
ROM trouble.
Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
again.
ROM trouble.
MFP
the image ROM (color correction ROM).
Upgrade the firmware versions of the MFP and the
image ROM (color correction ROM).
Firmware version inconsistency (MFP

- PCU)
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
A0-20
MFP
The firmware version-up is not completed properly
by interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc.
ROM trouble.
Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
again.
ROM trouble.
MFP PWB ROM error
Check & Remedy
PCU PWB ROM error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
SCU PWB ROM error
Trouble content
Detail
Cause
A0-12
UC-20 DOCC ASIC error

Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
A0-02
Check & Remedy
MFP
Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version
and the EEPROM data version.
Check the combination of the firmware.
A0-21
PCU firmware version and EEPROM

Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
A0-22
PCU
Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version
SCU firmware version and EEPROM

Trouble content
Detail
Cause
Check & Remedy
SCU
Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version
MX-3100N
[9]
MAINTENANCE
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
Maintenance list
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean S: Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate
Color items
Section
photoconductor
section
Developing
section
Part name
Drum
MC unit
Toner reception seal
Side seal F/R
Cleaner blade
MC cleaner rubber
Toner filter
DV blade
DV side seal F/R
Developer (Y)
Developer (M)
Developer (C)
Bias pin/Connector
Toner
supply
section
Toner cartridges
Supply
Mechanical
parts
Supply
Mechanical
parts
Supply
Mechanical
parts
Supply
When
calling
60
k
120
k
180
k
240
k
300
k
360
k
420
k
480
k
540
k
600
k
660
k
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are described.)
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
(P/G No.: [24]-14)

(P/G No.: [2]-68)
(P/G No.: [22]-37)
(P/G No.: [22]-22)
(P/G No.: [23]-26,
[23]-15)
User replacement for every toner empty.
Monochrome items
Section
photoconductor
section
Developing
section
Part name
Waste toner box

Drum
MC unit
Side seal F/R
Cleaner blade
MC cleaner rubber
Toner filter
DV blade
Mechanical
parts
Supply
Mechanical
parts
Supply
Mechanical
parts
Supply
DV side seal F/R

Developer
Bias pin/Connector
Toner
supply
section
Section
LSU
section
Transfer
section
Toner cartridges
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Mechanical
parts
Supply
Part name
Dust-proof glass
Belt cleaning base
Primary transfer
cleaner blade
drive gear
Intermediate transfer
belt
When
calling
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
(P/G No.: [24]-14)

(P/G No.: [2]-68)
(P/G No.: [22]-37)
(P/G No.: [22]-22)
(P/G No.: [23]-26,
[23]-15)
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k
{
-
{
S
{
S
S
{
S
{
S
S
{
S
{
S
S
{
S
{
S
S
{
S
{
S
S
{
S
(P/G No.: [2]-35)

(P/G No.: [25]-18)
(P/G No.: [27]-13)
(P/G No.: [26]-1)
MX-3100N MAINTENANCE 9 1
Section
Transfer
section
Fuser
section
Filter
section
Paper feed
section
Paper
transport
section
Part name

drive roller
Belt CL brush
follower roller
tension roller
PTC opposed roller
PTC unit
Secondary transfer
idle gear
Secondary transfer
belt follower roller
Secondary transfer
belt
Secondary transfer
belt drive roller
Secondary transfer
idle shaft
Secondary transfer
roller
Pro-reg sensor
Transfer cleaner seal
F/R
Primary transfer toner
reception seal
Secondary transfer
backup blade
Paper guides
Non-contact
thermistor
Upper thermistor
Lower thermistor
Upper separation
pawl/pawl spring
Lower separation
pawl/pawl spring
Upper heat roller gear
Upper heat roller
bearing
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
bearing
Lower heat roller
Gears
Fusing cleaning roller
bearing
Discharge brush
Ozone filter
Paper exit filter
Left cabinet filter
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Transport rollers
Sensors
Transport paper
guides
PS follower roller
PS paper dust
removal cleaner
Transport rollers
Sensors
Transport paper
guides
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
S
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
(P/G No.: [32]-46)

(P/G No.: [33]-20)
(P/G No.: [32]-11,
[32]-12)
(P/G No.: [33]-100,
[33]-101)
(P/G No.: [32]-30)
(P/G No.: [32]-31)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
(P/G No.: [32]-32)

(P/G No.: [33]-14)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
(P/G No.: [33]-15)
S
S
{
{
{
{
S
S
{
{
{
{
S
S
{
{
{
{
S
S
{
{
{
{
S
S
{
{
{
{
S
S
{
{
{
{
S
S
{
{
{
{
S
S
{
{
{
{
S
S
{
{
{
{
S
S
{
{
{
{
S
S
{
{
{
{
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
(P/G No.: [27]-9,

[28]-42)
(P/G No.: [20]-502)
(P/G No.: [29]-6)
(P/G No.: [30]-21)
(P/G No.: [30]-6)
(P/G No.: [32]-37)
(P/G No.: [47]-40)

(P/G No.: [37]-100)
(P/G No.: [26]-58)
Section
Duplex/
Paper exit
section
Drive
section
Scanner
section
RSPF
section
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Part name
Discharge brush
Transport rollers
Sensors
Gears
Transport paper
guides
Gears (Grease)
Shaft earth sections
(Conduction grease)
Belts
Sensors
Mirror/Lens/Reflector/
CCD
Table glass/SPF glass
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/drive wire
Sensors
Paper feed roller
Pickup roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Discharge brush
Transport rollers
Sensors
Belts
Gears
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
2.
Details
A. Photoconductor section
Color items
No.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part name
Drum
MC unit
Side seal F/R
Cleaner blade
MC cleaner rubber
Supply
Mechanical
parts
Supply
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
60
k
120
k
180
k
240
k
300
k
360
k
420
k
480
k
540
k
600
k
660
k
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
Remark/Refer to the Parts

Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
(P/G No.: [24]-14)

(P/G No.: [2]-68)
Monochrome items
No.
Part name
Waste toner box
2
3
4
5
6
7
Drum
MC unit
Side seal F/R
Cleaner blade
MC cleaner rubber
Mechanical
parts
Supply
Mechanical
parts
Supply
Mechanical
parts

Guide.
Block/Item No.
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
(P/G No.: [24]-14)

(P/G No.: [2]-68)
5
2
4
1)
Open the front cover.
5)
Remove the MC cleaner rubber from the MC cleaner rod.

Maintenance: Replace at every 60K (color) or every 100K
(monochrome).
2)
Remove the waste toner box.

Maintenance: Check at every 100K. (Replace as necessary.)
* Be careful to prevent against dirt of the MC cleaner rubber.

(Prevent adhesion of the oils or the toner etc.)
1
6)
Check that the lock is released as shown in (A). Loosen the

blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit.
* When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the
screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A).
A
B
3)
Remove the MC cleaner rod.
7)
Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw.

(1position for each color)
PET
4)
Insert the MC cleaner rod into the insertion port where the
cleaning guide label is attached, and clean the MC unit.
Maintenance: Clean at every call.
8)
Pinch the knob and remove the development unit.
PE
PET
* Slide the rod back and forth 3 times to cleaning the MC unit.
If the improvement effect is not obtained, clean again.
9)
Hold the lock lever, and pull out each color drum unit slowly,
and support the lower section of the unit with hand to remove.
10) Remove the screws and remove the fixing shaft.
* Hold the both ends, rotate twice by hands in the direction

shown in the figure. (For adapting the drum to the cleaning
blade.)
12) Remove the C-ring, lift the hook, and push the drum shaft.
Pull the drum shaft which extends to the opposite side until it is
caught, and rotate and remove the OPC drum.
11) Slide the OPC drum to the front side, and lift the drum rear
side, and remove the OPC drum from the hole in the front section.
(monochrome).
13) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
1
2
1
* When replacing, apply stearic acid powder to the OPC drum.
* Don't touch the OPC drum surface. (excluding the area of

within 1cm from the both ends)
* Even if it wrapped with black paper, don't apply a hard pressure.
* Apply the stearic acid powder to the whole surface of the
OPC drum.
14) Release the pawl, and remove the cover. Remove the MC unit.
(monochrome).
NOTE: Attach the cover so that there is no float on the opposite
side of the pawl.
* When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached

surface, and fit with the reference.
00.3mm
00.3mm
00.3mm
00.3mm
17) Remove the screw, and remove the DC holding plate and the
DCH lens.
15) Remove the toner receiving seal.

Maintenance: Check at every 60K (color) or every 100K
(monochrome). (Replace as necessary.)
18) Remove the screws, and remove the cleaner blade.

(monochrome).
Reference line
Reference
line
16) Remove the side seal F/R.

Maintenance: Check at every 60K (color) or every 100K
(monochrome). (Replace as necessary.)
B. Developing section
Color items
No.
1
2
3
4
Part name
Toner filter
DV blade
DV side seal F/R
Developer (Y)
Developer (M)
Developer (C)
Bias pin/Connector
Supply
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
60
k
120
k
180
k
240
k
300
k
360
k
420
k
480
k
540
k
600k
660k
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

Guide.
Block/Item No.
(P/G No.: [22]-37)
(P/G No.: [22]-22)
(P/G No.: [23]-26, [23]-15)
Monochrome items
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name
Toner filter
DV blade
DV side seal F/R
Developer
Bias pin/Connector
Supply
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S

Guide.
Block/Item No.
(P/G No.: [22]-37)
(P/G No.: [22]-22)
(P/G No.: [23]-26, [23]-15)
3
4
1
5
5 3
1)
Remove the front cabinet.
2)
5)
6)
Remove the screws.
7)
Hold the sections A, and remove the DV cover in the arrow

direction (B).
3)
Check that the lock is released as shown in (A).

Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit.
A
B
A
A
B
4)

8)
Take out the developer.
9)
Remove the cover and the toner filter.

(monochrome).

surface, and fit with the reference so that the DV side seals
F and R are inserted between the DV cover R(A) and the DV
blade (B).
00.3mm
0 0.5mm
0 0.3mm
0 0.3mm
10) Remove the DV blade.

(monochrome).
A
12) Insert the new developer.
(monochrome).

00.3mm
00.3mm
11) Remove the DV side seal F/R.

(monochrome).
NOTE: When replacing developer, use an extreme care not to drop

developer on the drive section (marked with { ).
NOTE: Note for cleaning the developing unit If the developing unit
is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower with much developer in the developing unit, static electricity may be accumulated in the unit. In order to prevent against this, note
the following items.
* metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller
surface when transporting developer or removing foreign
material from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to
the magnet roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when
handling the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as
developer attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
NOTE: When cleaning the developing unit with an air blower [duct]
Before cleaning with an air duct, remove developer from
the unit as far as possible, and ground the magnet roller
rear side cored bar as shown in the figure below and clean
the unit with an air blower. (Do not pinch the grounding wire
with a crocodile clip connector in order to prevent against
damage on the cored bar.)
Magnet roller
rear side cored bar
NOTE: After supplying developer, do not tilt the development unit.
C. Toner supply section

Color items
No.
When
calling
Part name
Toner cartridges
60
k
120
k
Supply
180
k
240
k
300
k
360
k
420
k
480
k
540
k
600
k
660
k

Guide.
Block/Item No.
1100
k

Guide.
Block/Item No.
Monochrome items
No.
When
calling
Part name
Toner cartridges
Supply
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
1)
2)
Lift the lock lever, and pull the toner cartridge out slowly and
horizontally.
Maintenance: Replacement is made by the user at every toner
empty.
900
k
1000
k
D. LSU section
No.
1
2
Part name
Dust-proof glass
Cleaning base
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k
{
-
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S

Guide.
Block/Item No.
(P/G No.: [2]-35)
1)
5)
Remove the cleaning base from the LSU cleaning rod.

Maintenance: Replace at every 100K.
2)
3)
Remove the LSU cleaning rod from the front cover.
4)
Insert the LSU cleaning rod into the insertion port and move it
forward and backward 2 or 3 times to clean the dust proof
glass.
Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.
PET
PET
E. Transfer section
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Part name
Primary transfer
cleaner blade
drive gear
Intermediate transfer
belt
drive roller
Belt CL brush
follower roller
tension roller
PTC opposed roller
PTC unit
Secondary transfer
idle gear
Secondary transfer
belt follower roller
Secondary transfer
belt
Secondary transfer
belt drive roller
Secondary transfer
idle shaft
Secondary transfer
roller
Pro-reg sensor
Transfer cleaner seal
F/R
Primary transfer toner
reception seal
Secondary transfer
backup blade
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k

Guide.
Block/Item No.
(P/G No.: [25]-18)
(P/G No.: [27]-13)
(P/G No.: [26]-1)
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
S
S
{
S
S
{
S
S
S
{
S
S
{
S
S
(P/G No.: [27]-9, [28]-42)

(P/G No.: [20]-502)
(P/G No.: [29]-6)
(P/G No.: [30]-21)
(P/G No.: [30]-6)
18
1
7
18
6
8
9
9 9
5 9
8
13
14
16
20
11
12
15
17
10
17
1)
5)
Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Making sure that

the lock is released (B), open and then pull out the drum positioning unit.
NOTE: Failure to complete this step may damage the intermediate

transfer belt.
A
B
2)
3)
6)
Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer

unit.
Open the right door.
NOTE: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
released manually, turn on the power again after completion of the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes
the transfer roller to return it to the home position.
7)
4)
Remove the screws, and remove the maintenance cover.
Loosen the blue screw.
8)
Remove the screw, and tilt the cleaner unit and remove it.
11) Remove the parts.
12) Remove the screws, and remove the paper guide.
9)
Remove the screws, and remove the primary transfer cleaner

blade.
10) Remove the screws, and remove the primary transfer belt
drive gear.
13) Fold the transfer frame and lift the rear side and put the transfer unit straight. Remove the intermediate transfer belt.
15) Clean the belt CL brush.

16) Clean the primary transfer belt follower roller (A) and the primary transfer belt tension roller (B).
[Installing method]
Make the intermediate transfer belt into triangle. Attach the
intermediate transfer belt to the transfer frame.
A
17) Disengage the engagement on the front side, and remove the
primary transfer roller.
NOTE: When installing, be careful not to bring the intermediate
transfer belt into contact with the transfer unit frame and
the gears. Use care not to touch the intermediate transfer
belt surface with bare hand.
When installing, put the unit so that the lot number specified on the back surface of the bead is on the front side.
14) Clean the primary transfer belt drive roller.
18) After replacing the intermediate transfer belt, apply Kynar.

NOTE: Do not touch the intermediate transfer belt with bare hands.
Be careful not to scratch or fold it.
a)
21) Remove each parts, and remove the secondary trasnfer idle
gear (A).
Place the primary transfer unit on a flat surface with the

top surface upward, and apply Kynar (UKOG-0123FCZZ)
to all the top surface of the belt.
NOTE:
When placing the primary transfer unit on a flat surface,
use a flat table and be careful not to scratch the belt and
not to attach a foreign material.
22) Remove the secondary belt transfer frame.
NOTE:
When installing the cleaner unit, rotate the intermediate
transfer belt so that the section where Kynar was applied
comes to the blade edge section, and install it.
b)
After inserting into the machine, make three sheets of

background copy on A3 paper.
19) Remove the PTC unit.

* When replacing the PTC unit, use SIM24-4 to reset the PTC
counter.
23) Remove each parts, and remove the secondary follower roller.
2
20) Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
24) Remove the secondary transfer belt.
1
2
25) Clean the secondary transfer belt drive roller and the secondary transfer idle shaft.
26) Remove the bearing on the front side, and remove the secondary transfer roller.
27) Push up the shutter, and clean the pro-reg sensor.

F. Fuser section
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Part name
Paper guides
Non-contact
thermistor
Upper thermistor
Lower thermistor
Upper separation
pawl/pawl spring
Lower separation
pawl/pawl spring
Upper heat roller gear
Upper heat roller
bearing
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
bearing
Lower heat roller
Gears
bearing
Discharge brush
Mechanical
parts

Guide.
Block/Item No.
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k
{
S
{
S
{
S
(P/G No.: [32]-37)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
(P/G No.: [32]-46)

(P/G No.: [33]-20)
(P/G No.: [32]-11, [32]-12)
(P/G No.: [33]-100, [33]-101)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
(P/G No.: [32]-30)

(P/G No.: [32]-31)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
(P/G No.: [32]-32)

(P/G No.: [33]-14)
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
(P/G No.: [33]-15)
2
5
5
3
6
8
1
6 9
15
6
4
8
10
14
11
13
10
14
1)
5)
Remove the screws, and remove the cover. Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the non-contact thermistor.
2)
Remove the blue screw. Release the lock, and remove the fusing unit.
6)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the upper
thermistor.
2
2
1
3)
Clean the paper guide.

4)
7)
Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
8)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the Lower
thermistor.
9)
Remove the screws, and remove the paper guide.
13) Open the paper guide.
14) Remove the fusing cleaning roller and the fusing cleaning
roller bearing.
10) Remove the screws, and remove the stay.

NOTE: When installing or removing, be careful not to scratch the
heat roller.
11) Remove the upper separation pawl and the pawl spring.
15) Remove the lower separation pawl and the pawl spring.
12) Check the discharge brush.

Maintenance: Check at every 100K.
21) Remove the screws and the clamp. Remove the screws and
the lamp holder. Remove the lower heater lamp.
NOTE: When installing, wire so that the harness of the lower heat
lamp not come in contact with the boss (A).
18) Remove the connector of the upper heater lamp.
22) Remove the screws to open the fusing unit.
19) Remove the screws and remove the lamp holder. Remove the
upper heater lamp.
NOTE: When attaching, fit the convex section of the upper heater
lamp with the hole in the cover.
23) Remove the upper heat roller unit.
20) Remove the connector of the lower heater lamp.

24) Remove the stopper from the upper heat roller, and remove
the upper heat roller gear and the upper heat roller bearing.
25) Apply grease (BARRIERTA grease: JFE552) to the upper heat

roller.
Maintenance: Lubricate at every 100K.
26) Remove the lower heat roller unit.
27) Remove the stopper from the lower heat roller, and remove the
lower heat roller bearing.
28) Apply grease (BARRIERTA grease: JFE552) to the lower heat

roller.
Maintenance: Lubricate at every 100K.
G. Filter section
No.
1
2
3
Part name
Ozone filter
Paper exit filter
Left cabinet filter
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k
S
S
{
S
S
{
S
S
{
S
S
{
S
S
{
S
S
{
S
S
{
S
S
{
S
S
{
S
S
{
S
S
{

Guide.
Block/Item No.
(P/G No.: [47]-40)
(P/G No.: [37]-100)
2
2
H. Paper feed section

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Part name
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Transport rollers
Sensors
Transport paper
guides
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{

Guide.
Block/Item No.
6
3
2
1
6
4
1)
Remove the pickup cover.
2)
Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller
(B).
5)
Remove the paper guide.
6)
Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller
(b).
b
A
3)
Open the maintenance cover, remove the separation roller.

7)
Remove the separation roller.

4)
Remove the tray 1 and 2.
I. Paper transport section

No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name
PS follower roller
PS paper dust
removal cleaner
Transport rollers
Sensors
Transport paper
guides
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
{
S
3
1
4
4
3

Guide.
Block/Item No.
(P/G No.: [26]-58)
J. Duplex/Paper exit section

No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name
Discharge brush
Transport rollers
Sensors
Gears
Transport paper
guides
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k

Guide.
Block/Item No.
3
1
3
2
3
2
2
1
2
3
3
2
2
3
K. Drive section
No.
1
2
3
4
Part name
Gears (Grease)
Shaft earth sections
(Conduction grease)
Belts
Sensors
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k

Guide.
Block/Item No.
1
(FLOIL G313S)
2
(FLOIL GE-676)
3
1
(HANARL FL955R)
L. Scanner section
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Part name
Mirror/Lens/Reflector/
CCD
Table glass/SPF glass
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/drive wire
Sensors
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{

Guide.
Block/Item No.
2
4
5
6
5
1
5
1
1
1
1
M. RSPF section
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Part name
Paper feed roller

Pickup roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Discharge brush
Transport rollers
Sensors
Belts
Gears
When
calling
100
k
200
k
300
k
400
k
500
k
600
k
700
k
800
k
900
k
1000
k
1100
k
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Mechanical
parts

Guide.
Block/Item No.
8
7
4
2
1
7
7
6
3
6
7
5
1)
Open the paper feed unit.
2)
Remove the paper guide.
3)
Remove the holder guide, and remove the paper feed roller
and the pickup roller.
4)
Remove the cover and remove the separation roller.

3.
Maintenance and disassembly
d. Drum cartridge system counters
A. Maintenance timing display

The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when
each counter reaches the set value. The relationship between the
messages and the counters is shown blow.
(1)
Code
Content
DK
The drum cartridge print counter (K) reaches 100,000

sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the
drum (K) reaches 840K.
The drum cartridge print counter (C) reaches 60,000
drum (C) reaches 840K.
The drum cartridge print counter (M) reaches 60,000
drum (M) reaches 840K.
The drum cartridge print counter (Y) reaches 60,000
drum (Y) reaches 840K.
(Maintenance timing) (Frameless)

DC
a. Maintenance counter
Code
Content
TA
When the maintenance counter (total) reaches 90% of

the set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM2638 is print stop).
When the maintenance counter (total) reaches the set
value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM26-38 is
print allowing).
When The maintenance counters (color) reaches
90% of the set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of
SIM26-38 is print stop).
When The maintenance counters (color) reaches the
set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM26-38 is
print allowing).
WhenThe maintenance counters (both of total and
color) reaches 90% of the set value of SIM21-1
(When the setting of SIM26-38 is print stop).
When The maintenance counters (both of total and
color) reaches the set value of SIM21-1 (When the
setting of SIM26-38 is print allowing).
CA
AA
Print job
Enable/
Disable
Enable
Enable
TK2
Code
Content
VK
The developer print counter (K) reaches 100,000

developer (K) reaches 840K.
The developer print counter (C) reaches 60,000
developer (C) reaches 840K.
The developer print counter (M) reaches 60,000
developer (M) reaches 840K.
The developer print counter (Y) reaches 60,000
developer (Y) reaches 840K.
VC
VM
VY
Print job
Enable/
Disable
Enable
Content
The primary transfer unit print counter reaches
200,000 sheets.
The secondary transfer unit print counter reaches
300,000 sheets.
Enable
c. Fusing unit counter
FK1
The fusing unit print counter reaches 200,000 sheets.
Print job
Enable/
Disable
Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Fusing

unit counters (number of the fusing unit print counter, days of use
of the fusing unit) clear).
Print job
Enable/
Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
[Maintenance timing] (Framed)
a. Maintenance counter
Code
TA
Content
Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-5 (Developer counters (number of the developer print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the developer) clear).
(2)
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Primary

and secondary transfer unit counters (number of the transfer unit
print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the transfer unit,
days of use of the transfer unit) clear).
Code
Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-7 (Drum

counters (number of the drum print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the drum) clear).
Enable
b. Transfer unit system counters
TK1
DY
Enable
e. Developer cartridge system counters
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Maintenance counters (total, color) clear).
Code
DM
Print job
Enable/
Disable
Enable
Content
The maintenance counters (total) reaches the set
value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to Print
Disable.
The maintenance counters (color) reaches the set
value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to Print
Disable.
The maintenance counters (both of total and color)
reaches the set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is
set to Print Disable.
CA
AA
Print job
Enable/
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Maintenance counters (total, color) clear).
(3)
[Check the waste toner box.] (Framed)
Code
-
Content
Waste toner full
Print job
Enable/
Disable
Disable
After detection of the waste toner full, reset the full detection by
opening/close of the front door.
*Firmware types
MX-3100N
[10]
FIRMWARE UPDATE
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
MAIN
BODY
Outline
Flash ROM1
ALL
ICU (PROG1)
A. Cases where update is required

ROM update is required in the following cases:
1)
When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance.
2)
When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the

machine.
3)
When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for
repair to the machine.
4)
When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be

repaired.
ICU (PROG2)
B. Notes for update

(1)
Relationship between each ROM and update
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROMs

installed in the other PWBs including options. Some combinations
of each ROMs versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
OPTION
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware

There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1)
Firmware update using media
2)
Firmware update using FTP
3)
Firmware update using Web page
4)
Emergency update (incase of an HDD breakdown)
2.
IMG-ASIC
SCU
PCU
FAX1
1K FINISHER
INNER FINISHER
LCC A4
DESK
PUNCH
CONTENTS
The following All the contents
ANIME
BOOT MAIN
CONFIG
ESCP FONT
UNI CODE
XIO FONT
PROFILE
SPDL
LANG
GRPH
WEB HELP
MAIN
IMG DATA ROM
SCU (MAIN)
PCU (MAIN)
FAX1 (MAIN)
FINISHER_1K (MAIN)
FINISHER_INNER (MAIN)
LCC_A4 (MAIN)
DESK (MAIN)
PUNCH (MAIN)
Update procedure
A. Firmware update using media

For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port
that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the
media or USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Adapter
Firmware.sfu
USB Host
Firmware.sfu
Firmware.sfu
+
USB memory
Firmware.sfu
*1:
Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory
beforehand.
The media used for the update must have a minimum of 32MB of
storage capacity.
The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function
cannot be used.
MX-3100N FIRMWARE UPDATE 10 1
The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
(1)
Firmware update procedure from the USB memory
5)
The firmware update executes by SIM49-01.

1)
Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware

into the main unit.
2)
Enter the SIM49-01. Press the key of the file to be updated.

The screen transfers to the update screen.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(XVEEG
',5!)2/'(5
),/(
),/(
&/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
Press [EXECUTE] key. ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]

becomes clear. Press [YES] to start the update of selected
firemware.
',5!)2/'(5
&21),*
&855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1
&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270
&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2276
&855(1783'$7('72
/$1*8$*(
&855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,&
&855(1783'$7('72
6/,67
&855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227
&855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1
&855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227
&855(1783'$7('72
'(6.0$,1
&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227
&855(1783'$7('72
$5(<28685("
$//
<(6
12
(;(&87(

The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE

UPDATE" title by 20 steps.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
6 (
* The number of key changes according to the number of the

sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted.
5(0$,16)25 0,187(6
&$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to

the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A STORAGE FIRMWARE
STORED ON [OK]" is displayed on the screen. Insert the
media or USB memory and push the [OK] key to open the
file. If the media have not been inserted and [OK] key is
pushed, the next screen does not appear and the screen
waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB memory is
pulled out on the file list screen, the error is detected by the
[FILE] key pressing, and the first screen appears.
3)
Current version number and the version number to be updated

will be shown for each firmware respectively.
At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the

screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
displayed.
6)
If the update is normal completion, following screen is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
),50:$5(83'$7(
&21),*
&855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1
&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270
&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2276
&855(1783'$7('72
/$1*8$*(
&855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,&
&855(1783'$7('72
6/,67
&855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227
&855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1
&855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227
&855(1783'$7('72
'(6.0$,1
&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227
&855(1783'$7('72
$5(<28685("
4)
&/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
&203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
2.
<(6
12
(;(&87(

Select the key of the firmware to be updated. The key will be

highlighted. (In this screen, [CONFIG] and [ICU(BOOTM)] are
selected.) At the same time, [EXECUTE] key appears.
If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] is gray out and
cannot be pressed.
Exit the simulation mode and turn off the power.

Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has
upgraded successfully.
7)
If the update is not normal completion, following screen is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&/26(
&/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
(55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
,&803&86&8
),50:$5(83'$7(
&21),*
&855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1
&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270
&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2276
&855(1783'$7('72
/$1*8$*(
&855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,&
&855(1783'$7('72
6/,67
&855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227
&855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1
&855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227
&855(1783'$7('72
'(6.0$,1
&855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227
&855(1783'$7('72
$//
$5(<28685("
<(6
12
2.
(;(&87(
* Press the selected key again to release the selection.

* Press [ALL] key to select all items.

* When the power supply is turned off due to a black out etc. while
updating or when the update terminated abnormally, a part of the
main program stored in HDD may be damaged and may not
booted normally.
In this case, the emergency update described later must be executed.
B. Firmware update using FTP

FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identifier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1
Machine 3
10.36.112.83
10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2
Machine 4
FTP/HTTP
Server
10.36.101.52
10.36.112.83
C. Firmware update using the Web page

An Web browser (service technicians Web page) is used to update the firmware.
1)
Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A

special firmware upgrade page appears.
2)
Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
4)
When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update completed. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
/:0
"Close the browser and open again to display latest information." will be displayed.
5)
3)
Check the firmware version of machine again.
After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firmware to the machine. Update processing begins. While processing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
appears.
D. Emergency update (incase of an HDD

breakdown)
5)
The HDD of this machine stores the main program along with the
sophisticated variations.
Check the update result.

When writing the program both to the HDD and to the Flash
ROM is normally completed, the following message is displayed.
When, therefore, the HDD breaks down, or when the HDD must be
replaced with another HDD, or when the main program is damaged
by turning OFF the power during the firmware updating, the firmware (main program) must be rewritten into the HDD by the following procedures. It is called the emergency update.
EmergencyUpdateMode
Update Succeeded
[Conditions where the emergency update is required]

The emergency update is required in the following cases:
1)
If writing to either of the HDD or the Flash ROM is failed, the

following message is displayed.
"Main Program Error" is displayed on the panel.

It means that the data are destroyed and that replacement of
the HDD is not required. The problem can be settled by execution of the emergency update only.
2)
EmergencyUpdateMode
Update Failed
"HDD Trouble (E7-03)" is displayed on the panel.

It means a HDD breakdown. The HDD must be replaced with a
new one, and the emergency update must be executed.
* When U2-05 (HDD/EEPROM/SRAM abnormality) or U2-50

(HDD data abnormality related to IMS) occurs, execute SIM16
only, and there is no need to execute the emergency update.
In this case, if Update Failed is displayed, it may the HDD

has been broken down probably. Replace the HDD with a new
one, and execute the emergency update again.
[Environment necessary for the emergency update]

1)
The MFP with the HDD where the firmware is rewritten
2)
The USB memory which stores the firmware for the emergency upgrade.
6)
Turn OFF the main power.
7)
Remove the USB memory from the USB port.
File name: emupdate_p2.sfu
8)
Turn ON the main power.
* The firmware must be stored in the root folder of the USB

memory.
9)
Check the system operates normally.
[Note]
[Emergency update procedures]
It takes about 6 minutes for the emergency update.
1)
Insert the USB memory which stores the firmware for the
emergency update into the USB port.
Never turn OFF the main power until the emergency update is
completed.
2)
Turn on the main power.
When the emergency update is completed, be sure to remove

the USB memory for the emergency update. The machine does
not boot normally with the USB memory inserted.
The firmware for the emergency update in the USB memory is

automatically recognized to start reading the USB memory.
It takes about 1 minute, and the booting animation is displayed
during this period.
3)
Check to confirm that "EmergencyUpdateMode" is displayed

on the panel.
After that, the process is automatically executed.
EmergencyUpdateMode
4)
Check the procedure.

When the process is going on normally, the following message
is displayed.
EmergencyUpdateMode
Updating ....10%
POFM_R
OSM
FUM
TFD2
HPOS
POM
HL3_U
TH3_FU
MX-3100N ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 1
TFD3
APPD2
MPUC
MPFS
MPGS
MTOP1
MTOP2
MPFD
TH/HUD_M
MPLD1
RD I/F
PWB
MPED
MPWD
MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT
DSW_ADU
POD3
APPD1
RIGHT DOOR UNIT
PPD2
PRM
HLPCD
PCSS
REGS_R
REGS_F
DVCRUM_K
ITC
DRIVER MAIN
PWB
PFM
CPFC
CPUC1
CLUM1
CPFM
CPUC2
CLUM2
RCFM
MC
TNM_K
DSW_C
CSPD1
CPED1
CLUD1
CPFD1
PAPER FEED 1
UNIT
CSS1
DVTYP_C
TCS_C
DV_C UNIT
DL_C
DVM_K
1TURC
DVCRUM_C
TONEIR_C UNT
FUFM
PAPER FEED DRIVE UNIT
DSW_R
DVTYP_K
TCS_K
DV_K UNIT
DL_K
RRM
DHPD_K
TONER_K UNIT
1TNFD
PROCESS DRIVE UNIT
1TUD_CL
WTNM
REGIST SENSOR UNIT
ADUM_L
1TUD_K
DSW_F
PTC_HV
PTC_HEATER
CSPD2
CPED2
CLUD2
CPFD2
PAPER FEED 2
UNIT
CSS2
OZFM
DVTYP_M
TCS_M
DV_M UNIT
DL_M
DHPD_CL
TNM_C
DVCRUM_M
TONER_M UNIT
DL_Y
DVM_CL
MSW
PSFM
AC IN
HL
PWB
DVTYP_Y
TCS_Y
PSFM2
TNM_Y
DV_Y UNIT
TNM_M
DVCRUM_Y
TONER_Y UNIT
AC
PWB
DCPS
PCU
PWB
TM-DRV
PWB
OPTION
WH
PWB
DH_DESK
HDD
DH1
LCC
COINVENDER
FAX2
DH_DESK
MHPS
MIM
CCD
PWB
CL INVERTER
PWB
CL
CARD
READER
Option
OPTION
USB
CN
PWB
Standards : Only Japan
DESK
SPRM
SCANNER UNIT
MOTHER
PWB
OPTION
or
USB
HUB
PWB
USB
CONV
PWB
KEYBORD
Option
DHSW
MFPC
PWB
MOTHERHUB
PWB
USB
CONV
PWB
KEYBORD
MOTHER
FAX1
OPTION
There is a standards
setting model
Only Japan
SPFM
SGS
RSPF UNIT
SCNC
PWB
FIN INNER
LSUSS
CCFM
MFPFM
RSPF
PWB
SPPD5
SPPD4
STMPS
(OPTION)
FIN 1K
LSU CNT
PWB
SRRC
SPED
SCOV
SOCD
OPE
PWB
INVERTER
PWB
PGM
LD_Y
PWB
LD_M
PWB
LD_C
PWB
LD_K
PWB
LD PWB
POWER SW
PWB
LVDS
PWB
OPERATION UNIT
SPFC
SPPD3
SPPD2
SPPD1
LSU UNIT
ORS-PD
OCSW
ORS_LED
PNC
AUDITOR
Option
SPWS
SPLS2
SPLS1
BD_K
PWB
TH1_LSU
LCD
TOUCH
PANEL
MX-3100N
[11]
ELECTRICAL SECTION
PPD1
PS UNIT
HL2_L
TH2_FU
HL4_U
HL1_U
TH1_FU
FUSER UNIT
POFM_F
POD2
POD1
DERIVERY UNIT
2TC
1.
PTC UNIT
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Block diagram
A. SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
RS232C
LEVEL CON.
D-SUB9
RS232C
FAX
(2nd)
CN
Giga
BitEther
PHY
LAN JACK
RJ45
USB HOST
TYPE-A CN
(REAR)
USB Device
TYPE-B CN
5V FAN
GMII
Programmable
Interrupt
Controller
PROGROM & OPT

FLASH DIMM
HDD ASIC
SATA
Interface
1
I2C2
Controller
I2C1
Controller

I2C
Video In
Out
Local Memory
DDR2 DIMM
SLOT
DDR/DDR2
Memory
Controlller
MFP ASIC
SCAN
ROM
LSU
SDRAM
64Mbx2
DIP
SWITCH
FLASH
LVDS
Receiver
Local
Bus
ACRE
PCIExpress
Interface
256Kbit
EEPROM
LCDC
UART
Interface
(x10)
SDRAM
Cont roller
USB2.0
Host
Controller
FPDLINK
Transmitt er
SRAM
4Mbit
PCI Express
Clock
Generater
CPLD
Local-Bus
Interface
PCI-Express
Interface
(4Lane)
RTC
Controller
SATA
Interface
0
FPDLINK
Receiver
FAN Controller
Local Bus
Controller
PCIExpress
Interface
(4lane)
RTC
USB2.0
Device
Controller
I2C 2
Cont roller
UART
MPC8533E
SOC
PCIExpress
Interface
(4lane)
SPD
SATA-IDE
Bridge
Compact
Flash
FPDLINK
Transmitter
MFPC
GbE
MAC
DDR/
DDR2
IF
SYSTEM Memory
DDR2 DIMM
SLOT
SATA
CN
SATA2
HDD
USB HOST
TYPE-A CN
(FRONT)
USB
SWITCH
SCANNER Control
System (SCU)
Mother
PIC
Micon.
LCD Pannel
LVDS
LSU Controller
(LSUC)
FAX (1st)
PCU
B. MFP CONTROLLER PWB
Board to Board Connector
I2C 1
Cont roller
FW
UART
UART
To MFPC
Via Mother
To LSU
Via Mother
Not Mount
IC44
Spread
Spectrum
DC Power
Supply
UART
UART
UART
LCC
FINISHER
DESK
Optional
X1
Xtal
19.6608MHz
IC46 or IC47
RESET IC
IC39
CPU
H8S/2373
IC35
I/O GA
IC21
Analog
MUX
IC10
D/A Conv
(TCS/REGS cont)
Analog Input
Temp/Hum sensor(TH_M/HUD_M)
LSU Thermistor(TH1_LSU)
DV detector(DVTYP_C/M/Y/K)
Multi-bypass tray width sensor(MPWD)
Sensor Input
PPD2
MUX
HC151
RD I/F PWB
IC22 / IC24 / IC25

MUX
HC151x3
IC28
PMC ASIC
I2C Bus
HV
MC / TC unit
CRUM
CRUM_K/C/M/Y
PWM
Analog Input
Fuser Themistor(TH_UM/LM/US)
Toner Detector(TCS_K/C/M/Y)
Process Cont.CL sensor(PCS_CL)
Process Cont.BK & Resist sensor(REGS_F/R)
Sensor Input
MPFD / DSW_ADU / TFD3 /
MPLD / MTOP1 / MTOP2 / MPED
DC Motor Control
Paper Feed Motor (CPFM)
Load control Output
DC Motor
Lift Up Motor
(CLUM1 / CLUM2)
Waste Toner Motor(WTNM)
Syncronous Motor
FAN Motor
Process Cooling Fan
(PCSFM/PCSFM2)
Sensor Input
CPFD1 / CPFD2 / HPOS / PPD1 /
DHPD_CL / DHPD_K /
POD3 / POD2 /
DSW_F / DSW_R / DSW_C /
CLUD1 / CLUD2 /
CSPD1 / CSPD2 /
MPGS / CPUC1 / CPUC2/

PCSS / CPFC / LSUSS1
MPUC / MPFS / 1TURC
Sensor Input
Coin Vendor
(Optional)
CV_CLCOPY /
CV_COPY
Drum Lamp
(DL_K/C/M/Y)
FAN Motor Control

PS FAN (PSFM) /
Ozone FAN (OZFM) /
PoutFAN (POFM_F/POFM_R)
Sensor Input
POD1/ HLPCD
APPD1 / APPD2 /
1TUD_K / 1TUD_CL
Drum Lamp Open Detect
DLOPEN_Y/M/C/K
HV Error Detect
MC_BK_ERR /CL
/PTC_ERR
Stepping Motor control

Pout Motor(POM) / ADU Motor(ADUML) /
Shifter Motor(OSM) /
Resist Motor(RRM) / PSF Motor(PFM) /
Fuser Motor(FUM) /
Toner Motor (TNM_K/C/M/Y)
Sensor Input
CSS1 / CPED2 / CSS2 /
CPED1 / MPFD /
TFD2 / 1TNFD / WENDD / W INID
Motor Lock Detect
POFM_LD1-2 / FAN_LD2-3 / DVM_CL_LD /
DVM_K_LD /CPFM_LD / FUM_LD /OZFM_LD
Fuser Thermistor open detect
THOPEN_UM / LM / US
PTC Heater Open Detect
PTCHT_OPEN
Option detect
RES_DSK_in / RES_LCC_in / RES_INS_in
Fuse open detect (OEM model only)
TNCRU_C/M/Y/K
Fuser unit
HL control
HL_UM/LM/US/UW
PTC
HEATER
IC34
I/O ASIC
IC31
SRAM
(1Mbit)
FLASH ROM
(16Mbit)
IC30
EEPROM
(64kbit)
Load Control Output

Coin vendor
(Optional)
I2C Bus
CLOCK
DataBus[15:0]
AddressBus[20:0]
I2C Bus
3-wired serial
DC Motor Control
DV Motor BK(DVM_K)
DV Motor CL(DVM_CL)
C. PCU PWB
D. SCANNER CONTROL PWB

3.3V
1.8V
CCD-F
(Machine side)
Tr
Tr
Tr
Tr
Tr
Tr
10V
3line color CCD
TCD2716ADG
Image data
AFE
Timing
generator
clk
RGB Rx FPD Link
SS
35bit
AFE_CSTG
SH, 1, others
16 (8Mx16bit)
Oscillator
line buf
16 (8Mx16bit)
BUFFER
AD_CLK
BUFFER
line buf
SCNcnt
AFE_CS
32bit bus
10V/5V/3V
5V/.33V
SCN
ASIC
3.3VPD
Oscillator
Two serial systems
mother
Image data
LVDS IC Tx
28bit
1.5V
CS3
12 10V
12 5V
5 3.3V
IPD/IDOCC
CTRL_A10V
CTRL_A5V
CTRL_A3.3V
CS4
1.2V
Mirror
.Moto
3.3VPD
MOTOR
DRIVER
CopyLamp
BUSBUF
powdown
MHPsensor
CS2
CPU
H8S/2373
RSPF unit
SRAM
MOTOR
DRIVER
HC151
uart, others
E2PROM
SEL_A/B/C
Sensors
CS0
F-ROM
(DIMM)
CS5
ORS LED
Touch panel
LVDS PWB (8.5 inch TFT)

or
LVDS PWB (8.1 inch mono)
IO ASIC
LCDs detection
PNL_SEL0
PNL_SEL1
PNL_SEL2
PNL_SEL3
HC151
LCD_SKT
LCDs detection
Touch panel
CCFT_CPU
/CCFT
INV PWB
Vcc REG
nLCD_DISP
(ON/OFF)
8.5 inch
LCD
Rx
28bit
KEY PWB
KEY CON
/KEYIN
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
PDSEL2
PD
Original size sensor
5V2
NINFO_LED
NPWRSW
POW_LED
WU_LED
NWU_KEY
5V2
Buzzer
LED matrix
/BZR
LED drive circuit
A[4:0]
RxD4
TxD4
RxD3
TxD3
RxD2
D[15:8]
CPU
H8S/2373
TxD2
SCK1
RxD1
TxD1
I/O port
I/O port
RxD0
TxD0
I/O GA
EPM240T100C5N
DSR_LCC
DTR_LCC
RxD_LCC
TxD_LCC
DSR_DSK
DTR_DSK
RxD_DSK
TxD_DSK
DSR_FIN
DTR_FIN
RxD_FIN
TxD_FIN
SCK_LSU
RSV_DAT
TRANS_DAT
PCU_DTR
PCU_DSR
nPCU_TxD
nPCU_RxD
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
PCU
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
P.D. Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
P.D. Schmit Inv.
P.D.
P.D.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.D.
2nd FAX
(same as 1st)
(Optional)
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
LSU ASIC
PIC
CPU
H8/3687
CPU
H8/3684
LSU
RxD
CPU
SH7706
LCC
(Optional)
DESK
(Optional)
FINISHER
(Optional)
TxD
1st FAX
(for FG Model)
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
I/ O
CPU
I/ O M30843FWGP
TxD
RxD
SCK
TxD
RxD
New
ASIC
SCN Cnt
P.D.
P.D.
TxD
O.C
Schmit Inv.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
RxD_FAX(CS)+
RxD_FAX(CS)-
TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)-
RxD_FAX(D)+
RxD_FAX(D)-
TxD_FAX(D)+
TxD_FAX(D)-
CPU
H8S/23 73
RxD
P.U.
P.U.
D[15:8]
A[4:0]
O.C
Mother
PIC
I/O ASIC
PD65892GC
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
O.C
O.C
O.C
P.U.
LVDS
P.U.
P.U.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
REQ_PIC
CLR_PIC
nRxD_PIC
nTxD_PIC
CTS_SCN
RTS_SCN
nRxD_SCN
nTxD_SCN
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
DSR_FAX(CS)
P.D.
DTR_FAX(CS)
DSR_FAX(D)
P.D.
DTR_FAX(D)
RxD_FAX(CS)
TxD_FAX(CS)
RxD_FAX(D)
TxD_FAX(D)
MFPC
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
CTS[4]
RTS[4]
CTS[3]
RTS[3]
RxD[4]
TxD[4]
RxD[3]
TxD[3]
HDD ASIC
REQ[PIC]
CLR[PIC]
RxD[PIC]
TxD[PIC]
CTS[2]
RTS[2]
RxD[2]
TxD[2]
RTS[1]
CTS[1]
TxD[1]
RxD[1]
E. SERIAL COMMUNICATION
AC IN
WH-SW
OPTION
24V2
GND
WH-L
WH-N
15A 250V
F1
VR1
A1
no-mounting
RY1
A3
NO
NC
WH PWB
OPTION
WARM HEATER SET: OPTION
A2
no-mounting
VR3
10W
7W
10W
10W
10W
LSU
10W or 14W
LCC
DESK
MAIN UNIT
SCN
CCD
LSU
OPTION
LCC
OPTION
DESK
OPTION
VR2
nomounting
MAIN UNIT
OPTION
SCN unit
OPTION
WH-L
T2.0AH/250V
F3
WH-N
MAIN POWER SW
GT
TD1
HL_MAIN
T2
T1
HL PWB
SSR1
FUSING UNIT
L2
1
GND
L1
HLOUT_UM
option
TD2
HL_SUB
T2
1
GND
N/F
HLOUT_US
THERMOSTAT TS_LM
SSR2
12A/125V
F101
drawer
TD3
HL_LOW
T2
T1
SSR3
GND
F301
HLOUT_LM
T8AH/250V
F103
T5AH/250V
THERMOSTAT TS_US
/HL_PR
INT24V1
FW
Generating
Circuit
F102
T1AH/250V
~
Z101
D101
AC PWB
+
-
DC POWER SUPPLY
SSR4
THERMOSTAT TS_UM
TD4
HL_UW
T2
T1
Voltage
Generation
+24V1
+24V2
+24V3
+24V4
+24V5
+12V
+5Vn
+3.3V
Voltage
Generation
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
1
2
GND
RY1
HLOUT_UW
F. AC power line diagram (120V)
AC IN
OPTION
WH-SW
24V2
GND
WH-L
WH-N
T10AH/250V
F2
T10AH/250V
F1
VR1
A1
no-mounting
RY1
A3
NO
NC
WH PWB
OPTION
WARM HEATER SET: OPTION
A2
no-mounting
VR3
10W
7W
10W
10W
10W
LSU
10W or 14W
LCC
DESK
MAIN UNIT
SCN
CCD
LSU
OPTION
LCC
OPTION
DESK
OPTION
F4
VR2
WH-N
T2.0AH/250V
nomounting
MAIN UNIT
OPTION
SCN unit
OPTION
WH-L
T2.0AH/250V
F3
MAIN POWER SW
GT
TD1
HL_MAIN
T2
T1
HL PWB
SSR1
FUSING UNIT
L2
1
GND
10mH
3A
HLOUT_UM
L1
TD2
HL_SUB
T2
1
GND
HLOUT_US
N/F
THERMOSTAT TS_LM
SSR2
T6.3AH/250V
F101
SSR3
FW
Generating
Circuit
drawer
TD3
Z101
HL_LOW
T2
T1
~
F102
T3.15AH/250V
D101
GND
F301
HLOUT_LM
T5AH/250V
F103
T3.15AH/250V
THERMOSTAT TS_US
/HL_PR
INT24V1
DC POWER SUPPLY
+
-
AC PWB
Reactor
SSR4
THERMOSTAT TS_UM
TD4
HL_UW
T2
T1
Voltage
Generation
+24V1
+24V2
+24V3
+24V4
+24V5
+12V
+5Vn
+3.3V
Voltage
Generation
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
1
2
GND
RY1
HLOUT_UW
G. AC power line diagram (200V)
PSU
FUSE
F204
FUSE
F205
FUSE
F202
F203
F201
FUSE
FUSE
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
24V5
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
5VL
5VL
5VO
D-GND
12V
24V3
P-GND
24V2
24V3
P-GND
P-GND
FW
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
12V
24V1
D-GND
D-GND
MFPC PWB
12V
5VL
5VO
3.3V
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
5VL
5VL
5VO
D-GND
12V
24V3
P-GND
5V_LD
24V2
P-GND
INT24V1
/INT_CNT
INT24V2
24V2
24V2
INT24V2
/INT_CNT
INT24V1
P-GND
D-GND
5V_LD
24V3
P-GND
P-GND
FW
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
12V
24V1
5VN
MOTHER PWB
FET
12V
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
LCC
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
LD_C
LD_Y
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
DESK
SCAN IN PWB or
DOCUMENT CONTROL PWB
LD_M
D-GND
D-GND
USB I/F PWB
LSUSS_C
option
LSUSS_B
P-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
option
D-GND
USB CONVERSION PWB
ADULM
PRM
2ndTC PWB
D-GND
PFM
POM
TNM_Y
INT24V2
RD I/F PWB
FUM
TNM_M
5VO
PM
LD_BK
INT24V1
INT24V1
1stTC PWB
DVM_BK
5VN
5VNPD
D-GND
PSM
TNM_C
5VO
FINISHER
24V3
P-GND
D-GND
5V_LD
MC PWB
DVM_CL
PSFM
INT24V1
TNM_K
P-GND
INT24V2
DRIVER MAIN PWB
TM DRIVER PWB
24V3
24V3
P-GND
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
LSU
PWB
TEL
LIU
PWB
INT24V2
P-GND
P-GND
INT24V2
5VNPD
P-GND
5VN
INT24V1
P-GND
24V3
24V3
P-GND
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
24V3
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
D-GND
12V
3.3V
5VS
5V
D-GND
A-GND
24V3
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
D-GND
24V5
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
FAX
MAIN
PWB
FDSW
RDSW
OSM
INT24V2
5V_LD
HDD
12V
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
INT24V1
P-GND
INT24V2
D-GND
24V1
24V2
5VNPD
5VN
5V_LD
AC PWB
PCU PWB
INT24V1
P-GND
SCAN CNT
PWB
INT24V1
5VN
5VO
3.3V
D-GND
HL_PR
5V
D-GND
24V_EXT
P-GND
5V_EXT
AVCC
5VPD
D-GND
24V1
24V
P-GND
A12V
A5V
A3.3V
D-GND
KEY OP
PWB
option
CARD READER
ORS LED
PWB
HL(SUB)
24V_EXT
P-GND
5V_EXT
AVCC
5VPD
D-GND
CL
LVDS
PWB
HL(MAIN)
24V_EXT
P-GND
3.3V_EXT
D-GND
ORS PD
PWB
CL
INVERTOR
PWB
CCD PWB
5VN
D-GND
N_HL(LOW)
N_HL(WARM)
N_HL(SUB)
N_HL(MAIN)
HL PWB
option
RSPF UN
24V
P-GND
3.3V
D-GND
HL(LOW)
INVERTOR
PWB
LCD PWB
HL(WARM)
H. DC power line diagram (120V)
PSU
FUSE
F204
FUSE
F205
FUSE
F202
F203
F201
FUSE
FUSE
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
24V5
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
5VL
5VL
5VO
D-GND
12V
24V3
P-GND
24V2
24V3
P-GND
P-GND
FW
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
12V
24V1
D-GND
D-GND
MFPC PWB
12V
5VL
5VO
3.3V
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
5VL
5VL
5VO
D-GND
12V
24V3
P-GND
5V_LD
24V2
P-GND
INT24V1
/INT_CNT
INT24V2
24V2
24V2
INT24V2
/INT_CNT
INT24V1
P-GND
D-GND
5V_LD
24V3
P-GND
P-GND
FW
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
12V
24V1
5VN
MOTHER PWB
FET
12V
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
LCC
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
LD_C
LD_Y
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
DESK
5VO
D-GND
INT24V1
SCAN IN PWB or
DOCUMENT CONTROL PWB
LD_M
USB HUB PWB
LSUSS_C
option
LSUSS_B
P-GND
INT24V2
D-GND
P-GND
option
D-GND
OPTION
USB CONVERSION PWB
D-GND
ADULM
PRM
2ndTC PWB
D-GND
PFM
POM
TNM_Y
INT24V2
RD I/F PWB
FUM
TNM_M
D-GND USB I/F PWB
5VO
PM
LD_BK
INT24V1
1stTC PWB
DVM_BK
5VN
5VNPD
D-GND
PSM
TNM_C
5VO
FINISHER
24V3
P-GND
D-GND
5V_LD
MC PWB
DVM_CL
PSFM
INT24V1
TNM_K
P-GND
INT24V2
DRIVER MAIN PWB
TM DRIVER PWB
24V3
24V3
P-GND
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
LSU
PWB
TEL
LIU
PWB
INT24V2
P-GND
P-GND
INT24V2
5VNPD
P-GND
5VN
INT24V1
P-GND
24V3
24V3
P-GND
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
24V3
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
D-GND
12V
3.3V
5VS
5V
D-GND
A-GND
5V_LD
24V5
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
FAX
MAIN
PWB
FDSW
RDSW
OSM
INT24V2
24V3
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
D-GND
HDD
12V
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
INT24V1
P-GND
INT24V2
D-GND
24V1
24V2
5VNPD
5VN
5V_LD
AC PWB
PCU PWB
INT24V1
P-GND
SCAN CNT
PWB
INT24V1
5VN
5VO
3.3V
D-GND
HL_PR
5V
D-GND
24V_EXT
P-GND
5V_EXT
AVCC
5VPD
D-GND
24V1
24V
P-GND
A12V
A5V
A3.3V
D-GND
KEY OP
PWB
option
CARD READER
ORS LED
PWB
HL(SUB)
24V_EXT
P-GND
5V_EXT
AVCC
5VPD
D-GND
CL
LVDS
PWB
HL(MAIN)
24V_EXT
P-GND
3.3V_EXT
D-GND
ORS PD
PWB
CL
INVERTOR
PWB
CCD PWB
5VN
D-GND
N_HL(LOW)
N_HL(WARM)
N_HL(SUB)
N_HL(MAIN)
HL PWB
option
RSPF UN
24V
P-GND
3.3V
D-GND
HL(LOW)
INVERTOR
PWB
LCD PWB
HL(WARM)
I. DC power line diagram (230V)
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
CN5
WH_CNT
1
NC
2
24V3
3
B03B-PH-K-R
B4P(5-3)-VH
WH_L(LSU)
WH_L(DESK/LCC)
NC
WH_N(DESK/LCC)
CN4
WH_N(LSU)
CN3
WH-N(DESK1)
NC
WH-L(DESK1)
B2P3-VH
1
2
3
B2P3VH-BL
CN2
WH-N(SCAN)
NC
WH-L(SCAN)
WH PWB
CN1
WH-L
1
2
NC
WH-N
3
B2P3-VH-R
WH_SW
To 11-23
J PN:STANDARD
EX100V:OPTION
EX12 0V: OPTION
EX200V:OPTION
WH
AC PWB
SCANNER UNIT
P
2
1
CN2(B03P-VL-K)
MSW- Nout
1
NC
2
MSW- Lout
3
CN3 ( B03P- VL- R)
MSW - Li n
1
NC
2
MSW - Ni n
3
CN4 ( B3P4-VH-R)
L_DC
1
NC
2
NC
3
N_DC
4
CN10(B4P-PH-K-S)
24V2
1
NC
2
NC
3
D-GND
4
(SCN-WH harness (2))

EL2PIN
P
R
2
2
WH-N(SCAN)
WH-L(SCAN)
1
1
CN5(B03P-VL-E)
1
L_HL
2
NC
N_HL
3
CN1(B03P-VL )
1
L_I N
2
NC
3
N_I N
CN 6( B2P3-VH - R)
1
N_WH
2
NC
3
L_WH
(AC-HL harness PA2)

R
EL 2 PIN
WH-N(SCAN)
2
WH-L(SCAN)
1
L_WH
PS-187
PS-187
L_WH
(AC-WH harness (1))
HL PWB
CN1
L_HL
1
NC
2
N_HL
3
B03P-VL(WH)
(AC-HL harness PA2)
(AC CORD)
MSW
MFP
FAX
OTHER
ENGINE
ENGINE
ENGINE
LCC, DESK
FI NI SHER
JPN:OPTION
EX100V:OPTION
EX120V:OPTION
EX200V:OPTION
WH
NAME
5VL
5VO
5VN
24V1
24V2
24V3
24V4
24V5
(AC-DC harness)
(MSW harness)
MSW- Nout
1
PS-250(RED)
MSW- Lout
1
PS-250 (RED)
MSW- Li n
1
PS-25
0
MSW- Ni n
1
PS- 250
DC PWB
CN1( B2P3 - VH-B)

3
L_DC
2
NC
1
N_D C
4
5
6
7
8
CN8(B7P-VH-B)
NC(24V1)
1
24V 1
2
24V 2
3
24V 3
4
24V 3
5
24V 4
6
24V 5
7
P-GND
NC(P-GND)
P-GND
P-GND
NC(P-GND)
CN5(B04P- VH-B)
12V
1
12V
2
NC
3
NC
4
CN7(B8P-VH-B)
FW
1
P-GND
2
P-GND
3
CN4(B6P-VH-B)
5VN
1
5VN
2
5VN
3
5VN
4
D-GND
5
D-GND
6
CN6(B03B-PASK-1)
DCCNT1
1
NC
2
DCCNT2
3
CN3(B03P-VH-B)
3. 3V
1
3. 3V
2
D-GND
3
CN2(B5P-VH-B)
D-GND
1
D-GND
2
5VO
3
5VL
4
5VL
5
TO INSERTOR (11-25)
TO LCC (11-23)
TO 11-11
TO LCC (11-23)
TO INSERTOR (11-24)
TO LCC (11-23)
TO INSERTOR (11-24)
TO LCC (11-23)
(DC main harness PA2)
(Ozone fan)
OZFM
PSFM
PSFM2
1
2
3
4
SMR-4
SMR-3
3
2
1
SMP-3
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
SMP-4
SMP-3
2
3
1
SMR-3
2
3
1
TO 11-11
0ZFM_V
/0ZFM_CNT
P-GND
OZFM_LD
P-GND
PSFM_LD
PSFM_V
19
WH_CNT
20
24V3
B24B-PHDSS
12
14
16
18
15
13
11
CN5
23
P-GND
22
PSFM2_LD
21
PSFM2_V
CN2
1
24V1
2
P-GND
3
24V2
4
P-GND
5
24V3
6
D-GND
7
12V
8
D-GND
9
5VN
11
3.3V
12
FW
10
NC(D-GND)
B12B- XL
PCU PWB
CN4
INT5V
1
D-GND
3
5
5VNPD
B26B-PHDSS
3
5VNPD
2
D-GND
1
INT5V
B05B-PH-K-S
CN15
4
n DCCNT1
5
n DCCNT2
MOTHER PWB
CN10
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
5VL
4
5VL
5
5VO
6
3.3V
7
5VN
8
12V
9
24V3
10
P-GND
B10P-VH
2.
Actual wiring chart
A. Power supply section
CARD READER
(OPTION)
1TNFD
full detection)
1TNFD
1
2
D-GND
6-179228-2
(Waste toner
TMN (Waste
toner motor)
HLPCD
release detection)
1
5VN
HLPCD
2
3
D-GND
GP1A73
179228-3
(Fusing pressure
(Fusing pressure
release motor)
PRM
P
1
2
P
5
4
3
2
1
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
SL2PIN
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
R
1
2
R
5
4
3
2
1
SM6P
/C_CARD
/C_SEL
/C_CLOCK
/C_DATA
5V
D-GND
SM-5pin_N
24V3
PRM_A
PRM_B
PRM_/A
PRM_/B
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
(HL I/F harness PA2)
24V(RDSW)
PS-187
24V(FDSW)
SPS-51T-187
DSW-F
DSW-R
24V1
24V(RDSW)
PS-187-2V
14
16
18
20
22
24
21
23
17
19
15
11
13
P
1
3
5
7
9
/C_CARD
/C_SEL
/C_CLOCK
/C_DATA
5V
D-GND
1TNFD
D-GND
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
5VN
HLPCD
D-GND
DF1B-24DE
24V3
PRM_A
PRM_B
PRM_/A
PRM_/B
14
16
18
20
22
24
21
23
17
19
15
11
13
S
1
3
5
7
9
AC
PWB
CN6
1
24V3
PRM_A
8
PRM_B
4
PRM_/A
6
PRM_/B
2
B10B-PNDZS
CN8
3
TO 11-23
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
P
DCPS
SM-6pin
/C_CARD
/C_SEL
/C_CLOCK
/C_DATA
5V
D-GND
RCFM_LD
P-GND
SM-3PIN
/RCFM_V
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
R
1TNFD
D-GND
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
5VN
HLPCD
D-GND
PRM_A
PRM_B
PRM_/A
PRM_/B
/RCFM_V
25
23
RCFM_LD
5
P-GND
B32B-PHDSS
7
9
11
13
28
30
32
20
22
24
26
CN13
CN2
24V2
3
B12B-XL
7
/INT_CNT
B7P-VH-B
CN16
24V1
1
2
24V(RDSW)
3
24V(RDSW)
4
24V(FDSW)
B4P-VH
CN3
1
5VNPD
2
P-GND
3
INT24V1
5
I NT24V2
6
P- GND
INT24V1in
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
/C_CARD
/C_SEL
/C_CLOCK
/C_DATA
5V
D-GND
(SCN-Mother harness P2)
(Upper main harness PA2)
24V2
B7P-VH-B
CN6
PRM_A
9
PRM_B
5
PRM_/A
7
PRM_/B
3
B10B- PNDZS
1
2
Machine cooling fan

(80 FAN)
TM-DRV
PWB
1
2
3
4
5
7
6
EL2P
24V(RDSW)
24V(FDSW)
I NT24V2
P- GND
INT24V1in
N,C
/ IN T_CNT
24V2
24V2
B7P-VH-B
1
2
SCNcnt PWB
PCU PWB
INTCNT
B. Front section
3
R
HL SUB
HL MAIN
VL-3pin
2
2
1
1
HL UW
HL LOW
YL
D1.25-M3
D1.25-M3
BK
WH
BL
YL
Drawer
R
1
2
SM-2pin
TH_US_IN
D-GND
SM-2pin
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
P
1
2
P
1
2
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
View from Body side (Main body side)
R
1
2
SM-3pin(BK)
TH_UM_IN
TH_UMCS_IN
D-GND
P
1
2
3
Fuser unit I/F Drawer
(Fusing
harness PA2)
R
1
2
3
D1.25-M3
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
510W
WH
(AWG18)
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
B-1
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
B-6
B-7
B-8
B-9
WH
480W
(AWG18)
BK
810W
(AWG16)
(TS-HL_MAIN connecting harness P2)
D1.25-M3
RCZR 10PIN
RCZR 9PIN
TH_UMCS_IN
TH_UM_IN
D-GND
TH_US_IN
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
POFM_CNT
D-GND
N-HL(LOW)
L-HL(SUB)
N-HL(SUB)
N-HL(MAIN)
L-HL(MAIN)
P Drawer RWZ
6
N-HL(UW)
BK
780W
(AWG16)
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
View from Fuser unit side (Fusing side)
Fuser unit I/F
D1.25-M3
(Fusing harness PA2)

WH
300W
(AWG18)
WH
300W
(AWG18)
TS LOW
TS SUB
Fusing drawer connector pin arrangement
Contact
RTH(LOW)
Contact
RTH(SUB)
Non-contact
RTH(MAIN)
300W
TS MAIN
YL
(TS-HL_MAIN connecting harness P2)

YL-2pin
1
1
2
2
P
R
D1.25-M3
(TS-HL_LOW connecting harness P2)
480W
510W
300W
A-10
A-9
A-8
A-7
A-6
A-5
A-4
A-3
A-2
A-1
B-9
B-8
B-7
B-6
B-5
B-4
B-3
B-2
B-1
R
6
(AWG18)
300W
(AWG16)
810W
(AWG18)
510W
(AWG18)
480W
(AWG16)
780W
(AWG18)
300W
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
P
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
DF1B-20DE
N,C
TH_UM_IN
D-GND
TH_US_IN
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
POFM_CNT
D-GND
TH_UMCS_IN
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
E
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
(Upper main
harness PA2)
L-HL(UM)
N-HL(UM)
N-HL(US)
N-HL(UW)
L-HL(US)
N-HL(LM)
CN13
INT24V1
D-GND
HL_OUT_UW
HL_OUT_LM
HL_OUT_US
HL_OUT_UM
/HL_PR
B32B-PHDSS
CN4
/HL_PR
HL_OUT_UW
HL_OUT_LM
HL_OUT_US
HL_OUT_UM
D-GND
INT24V1
B07B-PASK-S
HL PWB
PCU PWB
CN12
TH_UM_IN
8
D-GND
6
TH_US_IN
4
D-GND
2
TH_LM_IN
9
D-GND
7
POFM_CNT
5
D-GND
3
TH_UMCS_IN
1
B30B-PHDSS
B03P-VL(RD)
CN3
2
3
1
B03P-VL(BK)
CN2
3
1
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
C. Fusing unit section
PTC UN
Transfer separation
sensor BK
1TUD_CL
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD
3
GP1S73
179228-3
Separation electrode UNCL
SRA-21T-4
BS-Y
(SPRING)
BS-Y
(Transfer belt separation harness PA2)
(1TC output harness PA2)

1TC-K
FPS-187
1TC-C
FPS-187
1TC-M
FPS-187
1TC-Y
FPS-187
MC-CL
PS-250
GB-Y
(SPRING)
GB-Y
(MC harness PA2)
BS-M
(SPRING)
GB-M
BS-M
GB-M
(SPRING)
BS-C
GB-C
(SPRING)
GB-C
(SPRING)
(SPRING)
BS-K
BS-C
BS-K
(SPRING)
MC-K
PS-250(RED)
GB-K
2-TC
PS-187
1
2
3
4
R
P
1
2
3
1st TC
PWB
MC PWB
2nd TC
PWB
1TUD_K
D-GND
5VNPD
PTC_HEAT
SM-4pin
PTC
B2P-VH
1
2
3
4
P
GB-K
(MC-BK harness)
(Secondary transfer separation harness)
(MC interface
harness)
separation
1TUD_CL (Transfer
sensor CL)
(PTC heater harness CJ)
(PTC-shield harness P2)

PTC
PS-110(WH)
SRA-21T-3
(MC interface
harness)
1TC-K
SPS-01T-187
1TC-C
SPS-01T-187
1TC-M
SPS-01T-187
1TC-Y
SPS-01T-187
MC-Y
PS-250
MC-C
PS-187
MC-M
PS-187
MC-M
PS-187
MC-Y
PS-187
MC-K
PS-187
2-TC
PS-187(BLUE)
PTC
electrode
Heater
electrode
1TUD_K
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD
3
GP1S73
179228-3
1TUD_K
Separation electrode UN_K
SM-3Pin
1TUD_CL
D-GND
5VNPD
CN1
N,C
HV_REM
1TC-K-CC
1TC-C-CC
1TC-M-CC
1TC-Y-CC
1TC-REV
P-GND
INT24V2
B9B-PASK
B9B-PASK
INT24V2
D-GND
1TC-REV
1TC-Y-CC
1TC-M-CC
1TC-C-CC
1TC-K-CC
HV_REM
N,C
B8B-PASK
INT24V2
D-GND
/HV_DATA
/HV_CLK
/HV_LD
HV_REM
MC_CL_ERR
MC_BK_ERR
INT24V2
D-GND
/TC_DATA
/TC_CLK
/TC_LD
/HV_REM
PTC_ERR
/PTC_CLK
B8B-PASK
R
1
2
3
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(Paper feed main harness PA2)
INT24V2
D-GND
/HV_DATA
/HV_CLK
/HV_LD
HV_REM
MC_CL_ERR
MC_BK_ERR
CN13
1TUD_CL
31
29
D-GND
27
5VNPD
B32B-PHDSS
PCU PWB
B32B-PHDSS
CN6
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
CN14
INT24V2
2
4
D-GND
6
/TC_DATA
8
/TC_CLK
/TC_LD
10
5
/HV_REM
PTC_ERR
7
/PTC_CLK
9
B30B-PHDSS
CN12
27
1TUD_K
28
D-GND
29
5VNPD
30
PTC_HEAT
B30B-PHDSS
D. High voltage section
DVM_CL (DV motor-CL)

INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/DVMC_CK
4
/DVMC_D
5
DVMC_LD
7
NC
3
NC
6
B07B-PASK-S
(Transfer separation clutch)
1TURC
(Process drive harness PA2)
(Phase detection BK)

DHPD_K
(Process drive harness PA2)
DHPD_K
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD
3
(Phase detection cL)
GP1S73
179228-3
DHPD_CL
DHPD_CL
1
D-GND
2
5VNPD
3
179228-3
GP1S73
DVM_K (DV motor-BK)

1
INT24V2
2
P-GND
/DVMK_CK
4
/DVMK_D
5
DVMK_LD
7
NC
3
NC
6
B07B-PASK-S
R
1
2
SM-2Pin
24V3
1TURC
P
1
2
D-GND
5VNPD
DHPD_K
24V3
1TURC
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVMC_CK
/DVMC_D
DVMC_LD
PCU PWB
16
DHPD_CL
17
D-GND
18
5VNPD
B18B-PHDSS
13
14
15
11
12
2
4
6
8
10
CN11
1
INT24V2
3
P-GND
5
/DVMK_CK
7
/DVMK_D
9
DVMK_LD
2
10
12
6
5VN
/CRM_M_DT
/CRM_M_CK
22
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
P-GND
P-GND
12
TNM_M_A
14
TNM_M_/A
16
TNM_M_B
18
TNM_M_/B
20
TNM_C_A
24
26
TNM_C_/A
TNM_C_B
28
TNM_C_/B
30
B30B-PHDSS
CN14
24V3
TNM_Y_/B
TNM_Y_B
TNM_Y_/A
TNM_Y_A
P-GND
TNM_K_/B
TNM_K_B
TNM_K_/A
TNM_K_A
4
14
16
D-GND
8
B16B-PHDSS
5VN
/CRM_Y_DT
/CRM_Y_CK
D-GND
D-GND
3
13
15
7
1
9
11
5
5VN
/CRM_C_DT
/CRM_C_CK
D-GND
CN15
5VN
/CRM_K_DT
/CRM_K_CK
TM-DRV
PWB
CN5
+24V
+24V
TMK_A
TMK_/A
TMK_B
TMK_/B
CN4
+24V
+24V
TMC_A
TMC_/A
TMC_B
TMC_/B
CN2
+24V
+24V
TMM_A
TMM_/A
TMM_B
TMM_/B
CN1
+24V
+24V
TMY_A
TMY_/A
TMY_B
TMY_/B
D-GND
SM-18Pin
5VN
/CRM_Y_DT
/CRM_Y_CK
5VN
/CRM_M_DT
/CRM_M_CK
D-GND
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
P
5VN
/CRM_C_DT
/CRM_C_CK
D-GND
D-GND
5VN
/CRM_K_DT
/CRM_K_CK
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
CN3
24V3
12
TNM_Y_/B
1
TNM_Y_B
3
5
TNM_Y_/A
7
TNM_Y_A
P-GND
9
TMK_/B
17
TMK_B
15
TMK_/A
13
TMK_A
11
19
P-GND
P-GND
2
TMM_A
10
TMM_/A
8
TMM_B
6
4
TMM_/B
TMC_A
20
18
TMC_/A
16
TMC_B
14
TMC_/B
B20B-PNDZS
TNM_K
TNM_C
TNM_M
TNM_Y
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
CRUM(YELLOW)
5VN
2
4
/CRM_Y_DT
3
/CRM_Y_CK
1
D-GND
TSR-04V-K
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
14
15
16
R
CRUM(MAGENTA)
2
5VN
4
/CRM_M_DT
3
/CRM_M_CK
1
D-GND
TSR-04V-K
9
10
11
12
CRUM(BLACK)
5VN
2
4
/CRM_K_DT
3
/CRM_K_CK
D-GND
1
TSR-04V-K
CRUM(CYAN)
2
5VN
4
/CRM_C_DT
3
/CRM_C_CK
D-GND
1
TSR-04V-K
(CRUM harness PA2)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
E. Main drive unit section
DV un
2
3
4
1
(Toner control
sensor YELLOW)
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
51021-0400
TCS_Y
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
YELLOW
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
51021-0400
TCS_M
(Toner control
sensor MAGENTA)
(DV harness PA2)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
(BIAS harness A)
(BIAS harness B)
BS-Y
SRA-01T-3.2
SRA-01T-3.2
SPS-01T-110
(DV harness PA2)
5VN
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
TNCRU_C
5VN
QR/P8-8P
(SPRING)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
TO 11-3
1
D-GND
NC
2
/DL_C
3
53254-0310
5VN
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
TNCRU_M
5VN
QR/P8-8P
(SPRING)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
TO 11-3
D-GND
1
NC
2
/DL_M
3
53254-0310
5VN
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
TNCRU_Y
5VN
QR/P8-8P
(SPRING)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
TO 11-3
1
D-GND
NC
2
/DL_Y
3
53254-0310
DL_Y (Discharge lamp YELLOW)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
(BIAS
harness
A)
(BIAS harness B)
BS-M
SRA-01T-3.2
SRA-01T-3.2
SPS-01T-110
(DV harness PA2)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
TO 11-3
DL_M (Discharge lamp MAGENTA)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
(BIAS harness A)
C
(BIAS harness B)
BS-C
SRA-01T-3.2
SRA-01T-3.2
SPS-01T-110
(DV harness PA2)
5VN
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
TNCRU_K
5VN
QR/P8-8P
(SPRING)
DL_C (Discharge lamp CYAN)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
(BIAS
harness
A)
C
(BIAS harness B)
BS-K
SRA-01T-3.2
SRA-01T-3.2
SPS-01T-110
MAGENTA
TCS_C
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
51021-0400
(Toner control
sensor CYAN)
CYAN
TCS_K (Toner control sensor BK)

24V3
2
TCS_K
3
D-GND
4
TSG_BK
1
51021-0400
BLACK
(Discharge lamp BK)
1
D-GND
NC
2
/DL_BK
3
53254-0310
DL_BK
(DV interface
harness)
(DV interface
harness)
(DV interface
harness)
(DV interface
harness)
5VN
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
TNCRU_K
5VN
/DL_BK
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
5VN
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
TNCRU_C
5VN
/DL_C
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
5VN
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
TNCRU_M
5VN
/DL_M
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
10
5VN
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
TNCRU_Y
5VN
/DL_Y
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H
2
9
D-GND
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
10
9
D-GND
2
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
10
D-GND
2
9
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
10
9
D-GND
2
(DL/DV main harness)
D-GND
5VN
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
TNCRU_Y
5VN
/DL_Y
D-GND
5VN
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
TNCRU_M
5VN
/DL_M
D-GND
5VN
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
TNCRU_C
5VN
/DL_C
D-GND
5VN
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
TNCRU_K
5VN
/DL_BK
B40B-PADSS-1
26
28
32
30
34
36
38
40
22
24
6
8
12
10
14
16
18
20
25
27
31
29
33
35
37
39
21
23
5
7
11
9
13
15
17
19
CN10
3
PCU PWB
F. DL & DV section
PCU
PWB
CCFM_V
CCFM_LD
P-GND
CCFM_CNT
B7B-PH-K-S
CN19
INT24V1
NC
/LSUSS_B
4
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
3
2
1
LSU TH1
D-GND
LSUTH1
NC
NC
B4B-PH-K-S
(LSU-BD harness PA)
P
R
1
1
2
2
3
3
SM-3Pin
P
R
1
1
2
2
SM-2Pin
CCFM
R
P
1
1
2
2
SM-2Pin
(MOTHER-LSU connecting
(LSUSS-BK harness PA2)
harness PA2)
POLYGON MOTOR
/BREAK
1
POLYCLK
2
/LOCK
3
/START
4
P-GND
5
24V1
6
B6B-PH-K-S
LSUSSBK
(Polygon motor harness PA)
4
3
2
1
BD PWB
D-GND
n BD
D-GND
5VN
B4B-PH-K-S
/BREAK
POLYCLK
5
/LOCK
4
/START
3
P-GND
2
24V1
1
B6B-PH-K-S
CN2
6
CN1
1
D-GND
2
n BD
3
D-GND
4
5VN
D-GND
5
6
LSUTH1
7
NC
B7B-PH-K-S
LD
PWB
35
33
37
26
30
28
29
27
31
DT_Y1+
DT_Y1GND
n LDERR_Y
VREF_Y1
VREF_Y2
DT_Y2+
DT_Y2GND
FG
FG
SRA-21T-3
47
45
49
32
36
34
41
39
43
DT_M1+
DT_M1GND
n LDERR_M
VREF_M1
VREF_M2
DT_M2+
DT_M2GND
LDCHK_1
1
LDCHK_2
2
501571-5007
SRA-21T-3
49
47
45
43
50
48
46
41
39
37
44
42
40
35
40
42
44
46
23
21
25
20
24
22
17
15
19
38
n SH_YMC1
GND
n SH_YMC2
GND
DT_C1+
DT_C1GND
n LDERR_C
VREF_C1
VREF_C2
DT_C2+
DT_C2GND
n ENB_YMC
DT_Y1+
DT_Y1D-GND
/LDERR_Y
VREF_Y1
VREF_Y2
DT_Y2+
DT_Y2D-GND
D-GND
DT_M1+
DT_M1D-GND
/LDERR_M
VREF_M1
VREF_M2
DT_M2+
DT_M2-
D-GND
/ENB_C
D-GND
/SH_C2
D-GND
DT_C1+
DT_C1D-GND
/LDERR_C
VREF_C1
VREF_C2
DT_C2+
DT_C2-
/SH_C1
D-GND
/SH_K1
D-GND
/SH_K2
D-GND
/LDERR_K
DT_K2+
DT_K2D-GND
VREF_K1
VREF_K2
/ENB_K
DT_K1+
DT_K1-
5V_LD
5V_LD
19
LDCHK_1
21
LDCHK_2
501190-5017
26
24
22
27
25
23
20
18
16
38
36
34
33
31
29
32
30
28
14
12
10
9
7
5
3
17
8
6
4
15
13
11
11
9
13
4
6
8
10
12
5
3
7
16
14
18
CN7
1
2
DT_K1+
DT_K1GND
n SH_K1
GND
n SH_K2
GND
n LDERR_K
DT_K2+
DT_K2GND
VREF_K1
VREF_K2
n ENB_K
(LSU-LD
harness P2)
CN1
50
48
+5V
+5V
LSU
PWB
CN5
CH0_N
CH0_P
D-GND
D-GND
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
D-GND
D-GND
CLCLK_N
CLCLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
D-GND
D-GND
CH4_N
CH4_P
ECLK_LSU_N
ECLK_LSU_P
D-GND
D-GND
HSYNC_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_N
S24B-PHDSS
S20B-PHDSS
/TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT
TH_LSU
/PCU_TRG
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
LSU_ASIC_RST
CN4
5VLD
D-GND
/SCK_LSU
D-GND
/TRANS_DAT
D-GND
/RST_DAT
3.3V CN
D-GND
5V CN
D-GND
24V
P-GND
S06B-XASK-1
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
1
2
4
3
5
6
8
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
2
1
4
3
5
6
3.3V CN
D-GND
5V CN
D-GND
24V
P-GND
CH0_N
23
CH0_P
24
22
D-GND
21
D-GND
CH1_N
19
CH1_P
20
CH2_N
17
CH2_P
18
16
D-GND
15
D-GND
13
CLCLK_N
14
CLCLK_P
CH3_N
11
CH3_P
12
10
D-GND
9
D-GND
CH4_N
7
8
CH4_P
5
ECLK_LSU_N
6
ECLK_LSU_P
4
D-GND
3
D-GND
HSYNC_LSU_P
1
HSYNC_LSU_N
2
B24B-PHDSS
MOTHER
PWB
CN5
6
5VLD
12
D-GND
14
/SCK_LSU
15
D-GND
/TRANS_DAT
13
18
D-GND
16
/RST_DAT
10 LSU_ASIC_RST
/TRANS_RST
11
JOBEND_INT
17
20
TH_LSU
19
/PCU_TRG
VSYNC_K_N
28
VSYNC_K_P
27
VSYNC_C_P
26
VSYNC_C_N
25
VSYNC_M_N
24
VSYNC_M_P
23
VSYNC_Y_P
22
VSYNC_Y_N
21
B28B-PHDSS
CN4
1
8
5
7
2
4
(MOTHER-LSU harness PA2)
G. LSU section
CS2
PAPER
FEED
UN
CS1
PAPER
FEED
UN
1
5VN
CPFD2
2
D-GND
3
GP1A73
179228-3
CPFD2 (CS2 paper entry detection)
5VNPD
1
CLUD2
2
D-GND
3
GP1A73
179228-3
CLUD2 (CS2 lift-up detection)
5VN
1
CPFD1
2
D-GND
3
GP1A73
179228-3
CPFD1 (CS1 paper entry detection)
5VNPD
1
CLUD1
2
D-GND
3
GP1A73
179228-3
CLUD1 (CS1 lift-up detection)
(Right lower door

open/close detection)
(Paper present detection for

CS2)
5VNPD
1
CPED2
2
D-GND
3
GP1A73
179228-3
CPED2
(Paper feed UN harness CS2 PA2)
5VN
1
DSW_C
2
D-GND
3
GP1A73
179228-3
DSW_C
5VNPD
1
CPED1
2
D-GND
3
GP1A73
179228-3
present detection for

CPED1 (Paper
CS1)
(Paper feed UN harness CS1 PA2)
CSS2
CSPD2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CSS1
CSPD1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
9
8
7
6
5
4
CSS2
1
D-GND
2
3
NC
NC
4
PWB_un S4P-PH-K-S
(CS2 cassette installation detection)
5VNPD
1
CSPD2
2
D-GND
3
GP1A73
179228-3
(Paper remaining detection for CS2)
5VN
CPFD2
D-GND
5VNPD
CPED2
D-GND
PHNR-9-H +
BU09P-TR-P-H
5VNPD
3
CLUD2
2
D-GND
1
CSS1
1
D-GND
2
3
NC
NC
4
PWB_un S4P-PH-K-S
(CS1 cassette installation detection)
1
5VNPD
CSPD1
2
D-GND
3
GP1A73
179228-3
(Paper remaining detection for CS1)
5VN
DSW_C
D-GND
5VN
CPFD1
D-GND
5VNPD
CPED1
D-GND
PHNR-12-H +
BU12P-TR-P-H
5VNPD
3
2
CLUD1
D-GND
1
(Cassette SW harness PA2)
26
28
20
22
24
14
16
18
8
10
12
2
4
6
25
27
19
21
23
31
30
29
13
15
17
7
9
11
P
1
3
5
CSS2
D-GND
5VNPD
CSPD2
D-GND
5VN
CPFD2
D-GND
5VNPD
CPED2
D-GND
5VNPD
CLUD2
D-GND
CSS1
D-GND
5VNPD
CSPD1
D-GND
5VN
DSW_C
D-GND
5VN
CPFD1
D-GND
5VNPD
CPED1
D-GND
DF1B-32DE
5VNPD
CLUD1
D-GND
26
28
20
22
24
14
16
18
8
10
12
2
4
6
25
27
19
21
23
31
30
29
13
15
17
7
9
11
S
1
3
5
5VNPD
CSPD2
D-GND
5VN
CPFD2
D-GND
5VNPD
CPED2
D-GND
5VNPD
CLUD2
D-GND
CSS1
D-GND
5VNPD
CSPD1
D-GND
5VN
DSW_C
D-GND
5VN
CPFD1
D-GND
5VNPD
CPED1
D-GND
5VNPD
CLUD1
D-GND
26
CSS2
28
D-GND
B32B-PHDSS
20
22
24
14
16
18
8
10
12
2
4
6
25
27
19
21
23
31
30
29
13
15
17
7
9
11
CN9
1
3
5
PCU
PWB
H. Paper feed unit section
CLUM2 (CS2 lift-up motor)

P-GND
1
/CLUM2
2
B2P-PH-K-S
CLUM1 (CS1 lift-up motor)

P-GND
1
/CLUM1
2
B2P-PH-K-S
(CS2 paper feed clutch)
CPLC2
(CS1 paper feed clutch)
CPLC1
(Vertical transport clutch)
CPFC
(Paper feed motor)

CPFM
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/CPFM_GAIN
3
/CPFM_CK
4
/CPFM_D
5
CPFM_LD
6
NC
7
B07B-PASK-S
SM-2Pin
/CPUC2
24V3
SM-2Pin
/CPUC1
24V3
R
1
2
R
1
2
SM-2Pin
/CPFC
24V3
R
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R

2
5
6
3
1
4
INT24V1
INT24V1
RRMB/
RRMB
RRMA
RRMA/
B6P-PH-K-R
Process drive
RRM (PS motor)
Paper feed drive
1
6
3
5
4
2
(PS front motor)

INT24V1
2
INT24V1
5
PFMB/
6
PFMB
3
PFMA
1
PFMA/
4
PHR-6
PFM
R Frame
INT24V1
INT24V1
ADUMLB/
ADUMLB
ADUMLA
ADUMLA/
PHR-6
ADULM (ADU lower motor)
(Paper feed drive harness PA2)
/CPFC
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
/CLUM2
SM-10Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
INT24V1
INT24V1
RRMB/
RRMB
RRMA
RRMA/
N,C
INT24V1
INT24V1
PFMB/
PFMB
PFMA
PFMA/
B13B-PASK-1
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN2
INT24V1
7
INT24V1
8
ADUMLB/
9
ADUMLB
10
ADUMLA
11
ADUMLA/
12
B12B-PASK-1
CN5
1
/CPFC
2
24V3
3
/CPUC1
4
24V3
5
/CPUC2
6
24V3
7
P-GND
8
/CLUM1
9
P-GND
10
/CLUM2
B24B-PHDSS
CN6
32
INT24V2
30
P-GND
28 /CPFM_GAIN
26
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D
24
22
CPFM_LD
B32B-PHDSS
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
PCU PWB
I. Paper feed drive unit section
PS UN
PROCON
SENSOR UN
(PS sensor)
PPD2
5VNPD
1
PPD2
2
D-GND
3
GP2A200
179228-3
PPD1 (PS front sensor)

5VNPD
1
PPD1
2
D-GND
3
GP1A73
179228-3
shutter solenoid)
PCSS(Process control
RESI SENSOR R
PCS_R
5
5VNPD
1
D-GND
2
REGS_R
4
/REGS_R_LED
3
OMRON
179228-5
RESI SENSOR F
5VNPD
1
D-GND
2
REGS_F
4
/REGS_F_LED
3
PCS_F
5
OMRON
179228-5
2
1
R
2
1
P
PS UN
(PS UN harness PA2)
PROCON SENSOR UN
/PCSS
24V3
SM2P
(Process control sensor UN harness PA2)
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_F
/REGS_F_LED
5VNPD
D-GND
NC
PCS_CL
NC
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_R
/REGS_R_LED
/PCSS
24V3
NC
NC
NC
SM18P
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
BU06P-TR-P-H+PHNR-06-H
4
5VNPD
3
5
PPD1
2
6
D-GND
1
3
5VNPD
4
2
PPD2
5
1
D-GND
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
R
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_R
/REGS_R_LED
/PCSS
24V3
2
4
6
8
11
13
10
5VNPD
12
PPD1
14
D-GND
16
5VNPD
18
PPD2
20
D-GND
B32B-PHDSS
PCS_CL
CN6
1
5VNPD
3
D-GND
5
REGS_F
7
/REGS_F_LED
PCU
PWB
J. PS unit & process control unit section
(ADU open/close
detection)
(Manual feed paper

length detection 1)
(ADU transport detection 2)
(ADU transport 1
interface harness)
(Manual feed tray

non-expansion detection)
(Manual
feed tray
harness (2))
TH&HUD Temperature
humidity sensor
1
5VN
HUD_M
2
3
D-GND
TH_M
4
ZHR-4
feed tray
MTOP2 (Manual
expansion detection)
MTOP2
1
2
D-GND
5VLED13
3
GP1S73
179228-3
PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H
1
NC
9
2
NC
8
3
NC
7
MPLD
6
4
5
5
D-GND
4
6
5VLED12
3
5VN
7
MPWD
8
2
9
D-GND
1
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
1
2
3
(Right paper exit, reverse PG interface harness)
(Manual feed
tray harness (1))
MTOP1
25
27
28
5VN
HUD_M
29
14
D-GND
31
TH_M
15
5VLED4
S32B-PHDSS-B
6
5
4
3
2
1
13
MTOP1
5VLED9
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
TH_M
5VLED4
9
10
11
12
13
14
2
5VLED9
MPFD
D-GND
5VLED7
NC (FAX_D)
NC (GND)
5VLED6
10
8
9
1
2
3
CN3(2/2)
NC (GND)
11
NC (5VLED) 12
NC (GND)
17
NC (GND)
21
NC (GND)
23
NC (GND)
26
NC (GND)
30
NC
32
MPED
7
RIGHT
DOOR I/F
PWB
/MPUC
24V3
SM2PIN
SRA-21T-4
(Right door
harness P2)
1
2
P
24V3
/MPGS
/MPFS
24V3
/MPUC
24V3
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
QR/P4 32PIN
15
31
30
14
28
13
11
12
16
22
24
26
27
29
P
(Multi upper UN harness P2)
24V3
NC
F-GND
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
APPD3
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
MPWD
TH_M
HUD_M
9
25
32
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
10
7
23
8
2
3
5
4
7
6
4
5
11
12
16
22
24
26
27
29
S
15
31
30
14
28
13
9
25
32
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
10
7
23
8
DF11-6DP-SP2
24V3
24V3
24V3
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
8
6
7
2
4
5
3
1
(Manual feed gate solenoid)
MPGS
MPFD
/MPGS
5VLED6
D-GND
5VLED7
8
24V3
1
7
/MPFS
2
6
MPED
3
(Manual feed paper

feed clutch)
MPUC
1
2
R
FG
(Right door harness PA2)
6
4
2
5
3
1
DF11-8DP-SP1
5VLED13
24
5VLED13
MTOP2
22
MTOP2
5VN
MPWD
MPLD
MPLD2
5VLED12
19
20
16
13
18
CN3(1/2)
4
APPD2
5
D-GND
6
5VLED10
5VN
MPWD
10
9
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
7
DSW_ADU
D-GND
8
9
5VLED2
10
APPD1
D-GND
11
12
5VLED5
13
APPD3
14
GND
15
5VLED
NC
16
S16B-PHDSS-B
4
5
6
CN2
1
2
3
5
6
3
MPLD
12
1
MPLD2
14
4
5VLED12
11
(Right door harness P2)
(Right door harness P2)
3
APPD1
1
D-GND
2
2
1
5VLED5
3
4
1
3
D-GND
2
2
DSW_ADU
3
1
5VLED2
4
POD3
3
4
5
D-GND
2
1
5VLED4
6
6
5
4
(Right paper exit UN harness)
(ADU open/close detection

interface harness)
1
APPD2
D-GND
2
5VLED10
3
GP1S73
179228-3
APPD2
MTOP1
1
D-GND
2
5VLED9
3
GP1S73
179228-3
MTOP1
5VN
3
MPWD
2
D-GND
1
VR_PWB PHNR-03-H
MPWD
(Manual feed paper

width detection)
MPLD
1
D-GND
2
5VLED12
3
GP1S73
179228-3
MPLD
1
APPD1
D-GND
2
5VLED5
3
GP1S73
179228-3
APPD1(ADU transport detection 1)
DSW_ADU
1
D-GND
2
3
5VLED2
GP1S73
179228-3
DSW_ADU
1
POD3
2
D-GND
5VLED4
3
GP1S73
179228-3
POD3 (Right paper exit detection)
TFD3
1
2
D-GND
5VLED1
3
GP1S73
179228-3
TFD3 (Right paper full detection)
CN1
5VN
1
D-GND
2
SIN3
3
SELIN1
4
SELIN2
5
SELIN3
6
APPD1
7
APPD2
8
APPD3
9
10
POD3
MPFD
11
5VNPD
16
MPWD
13
14
TH_M
15
HUD_M
S16B-PHDSS-B
R
1
2
P
1
2
FG
P
1
2
(Manual feed pick-up clutch)
MPFS
PCU PWB
9
24V3
14
/MPGS
22
/MPFS
11
24V3
20
/MPUC
12
24V3
B22B-PHDSS
CN7
5VN
1
13
D-GND
2
SIN3
16
SELIN1
3
SELIN2
15
SELIN3
APPD1
4
18
APPD2
NC(APPD3)
5
17
POD3
6
MPFD
10
5VNPD
7
MPWD
19
TH_M
HUD_M
8
SM2P
24V3
/MPGS
R
1
2
MPFD
MPFD
1
D-GND
2
5VLED6
3
GP1S73
179228-3
(Multi lower UN harness)
(Manual feed paper entry detection)
MPED
1
MPED
2
D-GND
3
5VLED7
179228-3
GP1S73
4
/MPGS
2
1
5VLED6
5
5
24V3
1
2
D-GND
4
3
MPFD
3
(Manual feed paper

empty detection)
SM2P
24V3
/MPFS
SRA-21T-4
(Paper feed main

harness PA2)
K. Right door unit section
5VNPD
1
HPOS
2
D-GND
3
LG248NL
179228-3
HPOS
(SHIFTER HP)
3
2
1
PHR-3
PHR-6
1
2
3
4
5
6
(Paper exit motor)
POMA
INT24V1
POMB
POMA/
INT24V1
POMB/
POM
1
2
3
4
5
6
(Fusing motor)
/POFM_V
/POFM_V
/POFM_V
/POFM_V
FUMB
FUMA
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMB/
FUMA/
PHR-6-R
(Paper exit UN harness PA2)
7
POMA
INT24V1
8
9
POMB
10
POMA/
11
INT24V1
12
POMB/
SRA-21T-3
FG
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
SM-12p
FUMB
FUMA
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMB/
FUMA/
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
SSJC6-4
7
8
9
10
11
12
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
P
5
1
2
3
4
6
(Fusing cooling fan (40FAN))
FUFM
SSJC6-6
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
DF11-4DP-SP1
SM-6Pin
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
NC
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FUM
3
2
1
4
SRA-21T-3
FG
(Fusing rear detection)
(SHIFTER MOTOR)
OSM
R
5
1
2
3
4
6
(Paper exit UN harness PA2)
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
7
8
5VNPD
1
POD1
2
D-GND
3
LG248NL
179228-3
POD1
5VNPD
1
POD2
2
3
D-GND
LG248NL
179228-3
POD2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
(Paper exit detection)
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD2
SM4PIN
1
2
3
4
R
(Paper exit paper full detection)
5VNPD
TFD2
D-GND
GP1A71
TFD2
POFM 2
POFM 1
SM4PIN
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
R
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10
11
12
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
P
1
2
3
POMA
INT24V1
POMB
POMA/
INT24V1
POMB/
SM-12p
FUMB
FUMA
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMB/
FUMA/
SM-3Pin
FUFM_/V
FUFM_LD
P-GND
NC
NC
NC
7
8
9
10
11
12
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
R
1
2
3
10
18
19
(Paper feed drive

harness PA2)
POD1
D-GND
5VNPD
16
17
12
10
18
19
24
15
HPOS
15
16
17
12
23
14
POD2
14
HPOS
POD2
TFD2
24V2
/OSM_/B
/OSM_/A
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
CN2
5
POMA
INT24V1
1
4
POMB
6
POMA/
2
INT24V1
3
POMB/
B12B-PASK-1
CN1
4
FUMB
5
FUMA
INT24V1
1
2
INT24V1
3
FUMB/
FUMA/
6
B6B-PASK-1
CN13
1
FUFM_/V
15
FUFM_LD
19
P-GND
B32B-PHDSS
25
POD1
26
D-GND
21
5VNPD
B30B-PHDSS
22
13
11
12
13
14
15
CN12
16
POFM_V
17 /POFM_CNT
P-GND
20
18
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
19
TFD2
(Upper main
harness PA2)
(Upper main
harness PA2)
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
11
8
9
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
6
7
11
8
9
S
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
1
2
3
4
5
DF1B-26p
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
P
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
DRIVER
MAIN
PWB
PCU PWB
L. Paper out unit section
DRIVER MAIN
PWB
MOTHER
PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
CN5
INT24V1
P-GND
5VNPD
B3P-VH
ADUMLCNT
1
2
3
1
ADUML_/A
3
ADUML_A
5
ADUML_B
7
ADUML_/B
9
POMCNT
11
POM_/A
13
POM_A
15
POM_B
17
POM_/B
19
RRMCNT
21
RRM_/A
23
RRM_A
25
D-GND
2
FUMCNT
4
FUM_/A
6
FUM_A
8
FUM_B
10
FUM_/B
12
RRM_B
14
RRM_/B
16
PFMCNT
18
PFM_/A
20
PFM_A
22
PFM_/B
24
PFM_B
26
B26B-PNDZS
CN4
CN1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
/MPFC_RES
PCU_RES
PCU_TXD
D-GND
PCU_RXD
PCU_DTR
/FAX_LED
PCU_DSR
D-GND
/POF
TRANS_RST
LSU_RST
SCK
D-GND
D-GND
TRANS_DAT
JOBEND_INT
RSV_DAT
/PCU_TRG
TH1_LSU
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
28FMZ-BT
(Paper feed main

harness PA2)
(PCU-MOTHER
connecting FFC PA2)
CN3
3
INT24V1
2
P-GND
1
5VNPD
B7P-VH
CN8
1
ADUMLCNT
3
ADUML_/A
5
ADUML_A
ADUML_B
7
ADUML_/B
9
POMCNT
11
POM_/A
13
POM_A
15
POM_B
17
POM_/B
19
RRMCNT
21
RRM_/A
23
RRM_A
25
D-GND
2
FUMCNT
4
FUM_/A
6
FUM_A
8
FUM_B
10
FUM_/B
12
RRM_B
14
RRM_/B
16
PFMCNT
18
PFM_/A
20
PFM_A
22
PFM_/B
24
PFM_B
26
B26B-PHDSS
CN18
28
D-GND
27
D-GND
26
D-GND
25
D-GND
24
/MPFC_RES
23
PCU_RES
22
PCU_TXD
21
D-GND
20
PCU_RXD
PCU_DTR
19
18
/FAX_LED
PCU_DSR
17
16
D-GND
/POF
15
TRANS_RST
14
13
LSU_RST
SCK
12
11
D-GND
D-GND
10
TRANS_DAT
9
8
JOBEND_INT
RSV_DAT
7
/PCU_TRG
6
5
TH1_LSU
D-GND
4
D-GND
3
2
D-GND
1
D-GND
28FMZ-BT
PCU PWB
M. PCU PWB-other PWB
(LSU OPTION)
WH
(LCC OPTION)
WH
(DESK OPTION)
WH
F.G.
LCC CONTROL
PWB
F.G.
1
2
DESK CONTROL
PWB
1
2
P
1
2
1
2
WH_L(LSU)
WH_N(LSU)
EL 2PIN
WH_L(LCC)
WH_N(LCC)
1
2
R
1
2
CN-A
NC
4
TXD_LCC
7
RXD_LCC
8
/DTR_LCC
9
/DSR_LCC 10
RES_LCC
11
NC
3
5VN
5
D-GND
6
24V4
1
2
P-GND
/TRC_LCC
12
B12B-PHDSS-B
WH_L(DESK)
WH_N(DESK)
CN-F
24V4
1
P-GND
2
5VN
3
D-GND
4
D-GND
5
TXD_DSK
6
RXD_DSK
7
/DTR_DSK
8
DSR_DSK
9
RES_DSK
10
/TRC_DSK
11
NC
12
B12B-PHDSS-B
(LSU-WH harness)
F.G.
1
2
3
R
4
12
5
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
11
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
P
1
3
2
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
P
WH_L(LSU)
NC
WH_N(LSU)
EL 3PIN
WH_L(LCC)
WH_N(LCC)
F-GND
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
EL 12PIN
1
2
3
P
4
12
5
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
11
R
NC
1
NC
2
TXD_LCC
3
RXD_LCC
4
/DTR_LCC
5
/DSR_LCC
6
RES_LCC
7
F-GND
8
5VN
9
D-GND
10
24V4
11
12
P-GND
/TRC_LCC
13
NC
14
NC
15
EL 15PIN
R
SRA-21T-4
F.G.
F.G.
SRA-21T-4
WH_L(DESK)
1
WH_N(DESK)
3
F-GND
2
EL 3PIN
R
SRA-21T-4
F.G.
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
TXD_DSK
RXD_DSK
/DTR_DSK
DSR_DSK
RES_DSK
/TRC_DSK
SM 11PIN
(WH-DESK_LCC harness II)
TXD_LCC
RXD_LCC
/DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC
RES_LCC
D-GND
TXD_DSK
RXD_DSK
/DTR_DSK
/DSR_DSK
RES_DSK
/TRC_DSK
CN4
1
WH_N(LSU)
WH_N(DESK/LCC)
2
NC
3
WH_L(DESK/LCC)
4
5
WH_L(LSU)
B4P(5-3)-VH
CN4 (FROM - P1)

5VN
3
6
D-GND
B6P-VH
CN7 (FROM - P1)

7
P-GND
B8P-VH
CN8 (FROM - P1)

6
24V4
B7P-VH
25
D-GND
26
/TRC_LCC
B26B-PHDSS
20
21
22
23
24
CN4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
WH PWB
DC PWB
PCU PWB
N. DESK & LCC
FINISHER
FINISHER & INSERTOR (OPTION)
CN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INSERTOR
TXD_FIN
RXD_FIN
/DTR_FIN
/DSR_FIN
RES_FIN
24V3
5VN
D-GND
P-GND
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
CN
TXD_FIN
RXD_FIN
/DTR_FIN
/DSR_FIN
RES_FIN
24V3
5VN
D-GND
P-GND
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
P
TXD_INS
RXD_INS
/DTR_INS
/DSR_INS
RES_INS
NC
5VN
D-GND
NC
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
EL 12PIN
SRA-21T-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
R
F.G.
TO COIN VENDOR
(OPTION)
CN7 (FROM - P1)

6
P-GND
B8P-VH-B
(FROM
- P1)
CN4
4
5VN
B6P-VH-B
CN8 (FROM - P1)

7
24V5
B7P-VH-B
CN4
7
TXD_INS
8
RXD_INS
9
/DTR_INS
10
/DSR_INS
11
RES_INS
12
D-GND
B26B-PHDSS
CN17
1
24V3
2
P-GND
3
/CV_COPY
4
/CV_COUNT
/CV_START
5
6
/CV_CA
7
/CV_CLCOPY
8
/CV_COLOR1
9
/CV_STAPLE
10
/CV_COLOR0
11
/CV_DUPLEX
12
5VN
13
/CV_SIZE0
14
/CV_SIZE1
15
/CV_SIZE2
16
/CV_SIZE3
B16B-PNDZS
DC PWB
PCU PWB
O. Finisher & coin vendor
P. Scanner section 1/3
nRES_MFPC_SCN
NC
D-GND
B14B-PHDSS-B
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
OCSW
CL INVERTOR
PWB
D-GND
LCD_DATA3 +
LCD_DATA3 D-GND
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLKD-GND
LCD_DATA2 +
LCD_DATA2 D-GND
LCD_DATA1 +
LCD_DATA1 D-GND
LCD_DATA0 +
LCD_DATA0 -
GND
1
GND
2
GND
7
29
GND
39
GND
40
GND
25
3.3V
19 3.3V_EXT
23
5V_EXT
24V_EXT
3
5
24V_EXT
37
/YL(Y1)
35
XH(X1)
YH(Y2)
33
/XL(X2)
31
SC_TEMP
27
VCONT
21
17
/CCFT
15 PNL_SEL0
13 PNL_SEL1
11 PNL_SEL2
9
PNL_SEL3
36
DISP
501571-4029
BACK
LIGHT
+3.3V
NC
+3.3V
+3.3V
UD/LR
ENAB
F-GND
Vsync
D-GND
Hsync
D-GND
B5
B4
B3
D-GND
B2
B1
B0
D-GND
G5
G4
G3
D-GND
G2
G1
G0
D-GND
R5
R4
R3
D-GND
R2
R1
R0
NC
D-GND
D-GND
CK
D-GND
D-GND
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+3.3V
NC
+3.3V
+3.3V
NC
ENAB
F-GND
Vsync
D-GND
Hsync
D-GND
B5
B4
B3
D-GND
B2
B1
B0
D-GND
G5
G4
G3
D-GND
G2
G1
G0
D-GND
R5
R4
R3
D-GND
R2
R1
R0
NC
D-GND
D-GND
CK
D-GND
D-GND
FH12-40S-0.5SH(55)
8.5 LCD UN
(OP harness P2)
5
GND
4
CCFT
3
+24V
2
+24V
GND
1
B5B-PAS K
(LCD FFC P2)

10
6
8
16
12
14
22
18
20
28
24
26
34
30
32
8.5-LVDS PWB
GND
23
GND
22
GND
21
GND
20
19
GND
GND
18
3.3V
17
3.3V_EXT 16
5V_EXT 15
24V_EXT 14
24V_EXT 13
12
/YL(Y1)
XH(X1)
11
YH(Y2)
10
/XL(X2)
9
SC_TEMP 8
VCONT
7
6
/CCFT
PNL_SEL0 5
PNL_SEL1 4
PNL_SEL2 3
PNL_SEL3 2
1
DISP
501190-5029
/YL(Y1)
4
XH(X1)
3
YH(Y2)
2
/XL(X2)
1
52271-0469
(INVERTER
harness P2)
INVERTER PWB
D-GND
1
2
D-GND
3 nPWRSW
B3P-PH-H-S
GND
5
CCFT
4
+24V
3
+24V
2
GND
1
BM05B-GHS-TBT
TOUCH
PANEL
7
8
9
CN4
5V2
4
D-GND
6
12 nINFO_LED
WU_LED
8
POW_LED
10
nWU_KEY
14
501190-2029
PO SW
PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
/CCFT
2
1
+CCFT
S02(8.0)B-BHS
CN3
1
GND
GND
2
17
5V_EXT
20
GND
18 3.3V_EXT
16
/BZR
/KEYIN
19
15 SEG0LEDBPR
13 SEG1LEDCRR
11
SEG2D0
9
/F0D1
/F1D2
7
5
/F2G0
/F3G1
3
(OP harness P2)
CL
ORS-PD
PWB
GND
6
5
PD
4
5V_EXT
1
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
2
PDSEL2
3
B6P-PH-H-S
MHPS
MHPS
D-GND
5V
EHR-3
CN1
(OPE harness P2)
3
2
1
CR2 MFP-OPE PWB
29
28
27
26
25
24
(MHPS harness)
2
1
CN1
GND
PD
5V_EXT
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
PDSEL2
5
P-GND
4
P-GND
3
CL
2
24VPD
1
24VPD
5597-05APB
8.5inch OPE SYSTEM
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED 2
MIRROR
MOTOR
F.G.
SRA-21T-4
CN9
CN13
14 nPOF_SCN
13
RXD_SCN
12 LCD_SEL3
11 nCTS_SCN
10 LCD_SEL1
9
TXD_SCN
8
LCD_SEL0
7
nRTS_SCN
LCD_SEL2
6
5
nRES_SCN
4 nLCD_DISP
3 nRES_MFPC_SCN
2
NC
1
D-GND
B14B-PHDSS-B
5VEXT
D-GND
OCSW
EHR-3
(SCN-LAMP_FFC)
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
DF1B-24Pin
6
D-GND
5
+3.3V
4
+5VN
2
+12V
1
+24V2
3
P-GND
B6P-VH
1
2
3
ORS LED PWB
(Document detection
emitting side
harness)
CN2
CN10
CN4
CN5
P-GND
5
4
P-GND
3
CL
24VPD
2
1
24VPD
5597-05CPB7F
50
49
48
47
39
38
37
SEG0LEDBPR
36
35
SEG1LEDCRR
SEG2D0 34
33
/F0D1
/F1D2
32
/F2G0
31
/F3G1
30
501190-5029
CN3
nPOF_SCN
RXD_SCN
LCD_SEL3
nCTS_SCN
LCD_SEL1
TXD_SCN
LCD_SEL0
nRTS_SCN
LCD_SEL2
nRES_SCN
nLCD_DISP
MiM_A
1
MiM_B
2
3
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
4
B4P-PH-H-S
GND
GND
5V_EXT
GND
3.3V_EXT
/BZR
/KEYIN
CN12
CN14
D-GND
6
+3.3V
5
+5VN
4
+12V
3
+24V2
2
1
P-GND
B6P-VH
5VEXT
1
D-GND
2
OCSW
3
24VEXT
4
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6P-PH-H-S
1
MHPS
2
D-GND
3
5V
BM03B-GHS-TBT
7
8
9
3
9
8
D-GND
10
LCD_DATA3 + 11
LCD_DATA3 - 12
D-GND
15
LCD_CLK+
13
LCD_CLK14
D-GND
16
LCD_DATA2+ 17
LCD_DATA2 - 18
D-GND
21
LCD_DATA1+ 19
LCD_DATA1 - 20
22
D-GND
LCD_DATA0+ 23
LCD_DATA0 - 24
B24B-PHDSS-B
CN14
CR2 MOTHER PWB
D-GND
D-GND
nPWRSW
3.3VPD
9
1 SCANDATA0 2 SCANDATA0 +
D-GND
3
D-GND
5
7
D-GND
12 SCANCLKOUT14 SCANCLKOUT+
11
D-GND
13
D-GND
B16B-PHDSS-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SCANCLKOUT- 10
SCANCLKOUT+ 11
D-GND
12
SCANDATA3 - 13
SCANDATA3 + 14
D-GND
15
B15P-PH-K-S
1
5V2
D-GND
2
4
nINFO_LED
5
nWU_LED
6
nPOW_LED
7
nWU_KEY
GND
1
AFE_RDD
2
AFE_WRD
3
AFE_SCLK
4
5
AFE_CS
6 /RES_CCDAD
GND
7
8
3.3V
3.3V
9
3.3V
10
3.3V
11
3.3V
12
3.3V
13
GND
14
5V
15
5V
16
5V
17
GND
18
10V
19
10V
20
GND
21
22
RA23
RA+
24
GND
25
RBRB+
26
GND
27
RC28
29
RC+
30
GND
31
CLK32
CLK+
GND
33
RD34
RD+
35
GND
36
RE37
RE+
38
GND
39
40 AFE_CSTG
41
GND
FI-RE41S-VF
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB
(SCN-Mother
harness P2)
SCANDATA0 SCANDATA0 +
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
CN12
CN6
CCD PWB
(CCD-F_FFC)
41
GND
AFE_RDD
40
AFE_WRD
39
AFE_SCLK
38
AFE_CS 37
/RES_CCDAD 36
GND
35
3.3V
34
3.3V
33
3.3V
32
3.3V
31
3.3V
30
3.3V
29
GND
28
5V
27
5V
26
5V
25
GND
24
10V
23
10V
22
GND
21
RA20
RA+
19
GND
18
RB17
RB+
16
GND
15
14
RCRC+
13
12
GND
11
CLKCLK+
10
GND
9
RD8
RD+
7
GND
6
5
RERE+
4
GND
3
2
AFE_CSTG
GND
1
FI-RE41S-VF
OCSW
CL
ORS-PD
PWB
(OPE harness P2)
10
6
8
16
12
14
22
18
20
28
24
26
34
30
32
D-GND
LCD_DATA3 +
LCD_DATA3 D-GND
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLKD-GND
LCD_DATA2 +
LCD_DATA2 D-GND
LCD_DATA1 +
LCD_DATA1 D-GND
LCD_DATA0 +
LCD_DATA0 -
GND
1
GND
2
7
GND
29
GND
GND
39
40
GND
25
3.3V
19 3.3V_EXT
23
5V_EXT
3
24V_EXT
24V_EXT
5
37
/YL(Y1)
35
XH(X1)
33
YH(Y2)
31
/XL(X2)
SC_TEMP
27
VCONT
21
17
/CCFT
15 PNL_SEL0
13 PNL_SEL1
11 PNL_SEL2
9
PNL_SEL3
DISP
36
501571-4009
1
24V_EXT
D-GND
2
3
/CCFT
S3B-PH-K-S
LCD INVERTOR PWB
1
/YL(Y1)
2
XH(X1)
3
YH(Y2)
4
/XL(X2)
52271-0469
(INVERTER
harness P2)
TOUCH
PANEL
24V_EXT 3
D-GND
2
/CCFT
1
S3B-PH-SM4-TB
2
/CCFT
1
+CCFT
S02(8.0)B-BHS
(LCD FFC P2)

VO
1
LP
2
3
D-GND
CP
4
D-GND
5
6
3.3V_EXT
7
M
8
D0
D1
9
D-GND
10
D2
11
12
D3
13
D-GND
14
DISP
15
VEE
52030-2629
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
VO
LP
D-GND
CP
D-GND
3.3V_EXT
M
D0
D1
D-GND
D2
D3
D-GND
DISP
VEE
8.1 LCD UN
(OPE harness P2)
BACK
LIGHT
SEG2D0
/F0D1
/F1D2
/F2G0
/F3G1
CN4
SEG0LEDBPR
SEG1LEDCRR
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3 nPWRSW
B3P-PH-H-S
GND
23
GND
22
GND
21
20
GND
GND
19
18
GND
3.3V
17
3.3V_EXT
16
5V_EXT
15
14
24V_EXT
24V_EXT
13
/YL(Y1)
12
XH(X1)
11
YH(Y2)
10
9
/XL(X2)
SC_TEMP 8
7
VCONT
/CCFT
6
PNL_SEL0 5
PNL_SEL1
4
PNL_SEL2 3
PNL_SEL3 2
DISP
1
501190-5029
CN 1
GND
GND
5V_EXT
GND
3.3V_EXT
/BZR
/KEYIN
5V2
4
D-GND
6
12 nINFO_LED
8
WU_LED
POW_LED
10
14
nWU_KEY
501190-2029
7
8
9
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB
14 nPOF_SCN
13
RXD_SCN
12 LCD_SEL3
11 nCTS_SCN
10 LCD_SEL1
TXD_SCN
9
LCD_SEL0
8
nRTS_SCN
7
LCD_SEL2
6
5
nRES_SCN
4 nLCD_DISP
3 nRES_MFPC_SCN
2
NC
D-GND
1
B14B-PHDSS-B
1
2
17
20
18
16
19
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
50
GND
GND
49
48
5V_EXT
47
GND
3.3V_EXT
39
38
/BZR
37
/KEYIN
SEG0LEDBPR 36
SEG1LEDCRR 35
34
SEG2D0
33
/F0D1
/F1D2
32
/F2G0
31
30
/F3G1
501190-5029
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN3
6
D-GND
5
+3.3V
+5VN
4
+12V
2
+24V2
1
3
P-GND
B6P-VH
8.1inch OPE SYSTEM
(Document detection
emitting side
harness)
ORS LED PWB

CL INVERTOR
PWB
MHPS
MHPS
D-GND
5V
EHR-3
6
GND
PD
5
5V_EXT
4
PDSEL0
1
PDSEL1
2
3
PDSEL2
B6P-PH-H-S
29
28
27
26
25
24
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
DF1B-24Pin
CN12
CN14
CN 3
3
2
1
CN3
7
8
9
10
11
12
15
13
14
16
17
18
21
19
20
22
23
24
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
nRES_MFPC_SCN
3
NC
2
D-GND
1
B14B-PHDSS-B
(MHPS harness)
2
1
(OPE harness P2)

GND
PD
5V_EXT
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
PDSEL2
B24B-PHDSS-B
nPOF_SCN
RXD_SCN
LCD_SEL3
nCTS_SCN
LCD_SEL1
TXD_SCN
LCD_SEL0
nRTS_SCN
LCD_SEL2
nRES_SCN
nLCD_DISP
5
P-GND
4
P-GND
3
CL
2
24VPD
24VPD
1
5597-05APB
CR2 8.1 MFP-OPE PWB
9
3.3VPD
3
D-GND
D-GND
5
7
D-GND
D-GND
11
13
D-GND
B16B-PHDSS-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
9
8
D-GND
6
+3.3V
5
+5VN
4
+12V
3
2
+24V2
P-GND
1
B6P - VH
MIRROR
MOTOR
CN4
CN5
F.G.
SRA-21T-4
CN10
(SCN-LAMP_FFC)
8.1-LVDS PWB
D-GND
LCD_DATA3 +
LCD_DATA3 D-GND
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLKD-GND
LCD_DATA2 +
LCD_DATA2 D-GND
LCD_DATA1 +
LCD_DATA1 D-GND
LCD_DATA0 +
LCD_DATA0 -
MHPS
1
D-GND
2
5V
3
BM03B-GHS-TBT
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED2
PO SW
PWB
D-GND
D-GND
nPWRSW
5
P-GND
4
P-GND
CL
3
2
24VPD
1
24VPD
5597-05CPB7F
5VEXT
D-GND
OCSW
EHR-3
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SCANCLKOUT- 10
SCANCLKOUT+ 11
D-GND
12
SCANDATA3 - 13
SCANDATA3 + 14
D-GND
15
B15P-PH-K-S
5V2
1
D-GND
2
4
nINFO_LED
5
nWU_LED
6
nPOW_LED
7
nWU_KEY
1
MiM_A
2
MiM_B
MiM_/A
3
MiM_/B
4
B4P-PH-K-S
CN9
CCD PWB
CR2 MOTHER PWB
CN1
CN4
(SCN-Mother
harness P2)
SCA NDATA0 SCANDATA0 +
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
1
5VEXT
D-GND
2
3
OCSW
4
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6P-PH-K-S
1
2
3
CN11
GND
1
AFE_RDD
2
AFE_WRD
3
AFE_SCLK
4
5
AFE_CS
6 /RES_CCDAD
7
GND
8
3.3V
9
3.3V
3.3V
10
11
3.3V
12
3.3V
13
3.3V
14
GND
15
5V
16
5V
17
5V
18
GND
19
10V
20
10V
GND
21
22
RA23
RA+
24
GND
25
RB26
RB+
27
GND
28
RC29
RC+
30
GND
31
CLK32
CLK+
33
GND
34
RD35
RD+
36
GND
RE37
38
RE+
GND
39
40 AFE_CSTG
41
GND
FI-RE41S-VF
C N13
(CCD-F_FFC)
41
40
39
38
37
/RES_CCDAD 36
GND
35
3.3V
34
3.3V
33
3.3V
32
31
3.3V
30
3.3V
29
3.3V
28
GND
27
5V
5V
26
5V
25
GND
24
10V
23
10V
22
GND
21
RA20
RA+
19
GND
18
17
RB16
RB+
15
GND
RC14
RC+
13
GND
12
CLK11
CLK+
10
GND
9
8
RDRD+
7
GND
6
RE5
RE+
4
GND
3
AFE_CSTG 2
1
GND
FI-RE41S-VF
GN D
AFE_RDD
AFE_WRD
AFE_SCLK
AFE_CS
CN2
Q. Scanner section 2/3
TO RSPF
XAD 34PIN
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPFMCK
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMO1
SPFMO2
SPRMA
SPRMA/
SPRMB
SPRMB/
SPRMO1
SGS
STMPS
SRRC
SPFC
SPWS
SELA_
SELB_
SELC_
SSELO
SPPD4
SPFFAN
SPPD3
SPPD5
5VPD
D-GND
P-GND
P-GND
AVCC
5V_EXT
24VPD
24VPD
D-GND
P
3
4
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
1
2
8
7
5
6
34
5
6
34
1
2
8
R
3
4
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
(Main unit - RSPF interface harness PA2)
CR2 SCNCNT PWB
CN16
1
GND
2
GND
3
3.3V
3.3V
4
5V
5
12V
6
7
24V
8
24V
9
24V
10
GND
B10B-PH-K-S
CN15
SPPD1
1
SPPD2
2
SPFMCK
3
SPFMM1
4
SPFMM2
5
SPFMO1
6
SPFMO2
7
SPRMA
8
SPRMA/
9
SPRMB
10
SPRMB/
11
SPRMO1
12
SGS
13
STMPS
14
SRRC
15
SPFC
16
SPWS
17
SELA_
18
SELB_
19
SELC_
20
SSELO
21
SPPD4
22
SPFFAN
23
SPPD3
24
25
SPPD5
5VPD
26
GND
27
NC
28
B28B-PHDSS-B
CN6
n A_PNC
1
n A_COPY
2
3
n A_CA
n A_READY
4
n A_AUD
5
5V
6
7
D-GND
24V
8
NC
9
10
n A_TC
24V
11
PNC-a
12
D-GND
13
B13P-PH-K-S
(PNC harness)
TO AUDITER
R. Scanner section 3/3
TO HANDSET
(JAPAN ONLY)
TO EX TEL
TO LINE
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
MJ2
1
2
3
4
5
6
(EX)
1
2
3
4
5
6
L1
L2
-
TX+
RX+
RXTXDG
RHS-
TEL LIU PWB
MJ-62J-RD315
L1
L2
-
MJ-64J-RD315
T2
R1
T1
R2
-
MJ-62J-RD315
MJ1
( JAPAN)
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
T X 24- 40R - 10ST- H1
RGDTMDM_CLK
AFERESBBITCLK
BSPCLK
BRXD
BTXD
HDMUTERHS-
MDM_ASPCLK
MDM_ABITCLK
24V
AG
24V
AG
150VON
CION
MSGMUTE
HS1HS2CIEXHSSON1
SON2
ECON
MRON
TELID
CI2NC
TELID2
NC
DG
3.3V
DG
5VS
DG
SI3_RESSPK
MDM_ATXD
MDM_ARXD
SPEAKER
(BOARD TO
BOARD)
SPSP+
S02B-PASK-2(LF)(SN)
TX25- 40P- 8ST- H1
CN7
1
24V
2
AG
3
24V
4
AG
5
150VON
6
CION
7
MSGMUTE
8
HS19
HS210
CI11
EXHS12
SON1
13
SON2
14
ECON
15
MRON
16
TELID
17
CI218
NC
19
TELID2
20
NC
21
DG
22
3.3V
23
DG
24
5VS
25
DG
26
SI3_RES27
SPK
28
MDM_ATXD
29
MDM_ARXD
30
MDM_ABITCLK
31
MDM_ASPCLK
32
RGDT33
MDM_CLK
34
AFERES35
BBITCLK
36
BSPCLK
37
BRXD
38
BTXD
39
HDMUTE40
RHS-
CN2
1
2
FAX MAIN PWB
BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT
D-GND1
3.3V1
3.3V2
CNCT_FAX
nFAXCS_CTS
5V
+5V-1
FLVPP
nFAXCS_CTS
D-GND
D-GND2
D-GND
5V
FAX_WUPFAXCS_RXD_P
FAX_WUP+5V-2
D-GND3
D-GND
D-GND4
FAXCS_TXD_P
FLVPP
5VS
+5V2
FAXD_TXD_N
+24V
3.3V3
3.3V4
D-GND5
P-GND
CN3
30
29
28
26
27
25
24
22
23
21
20
19
17
18
15
13
16
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
4
3
2
1
(SCN-Mother
harness JP P2)
D-GND
D-GND
3.3V
3.3V
24V
nFAXCS_CTS
5V
nFAXCS_RTS
FLVPP
nFAXCS_CTS
D-GND
nFAXD_RTS
D-GND
5V
FAXCS_RXD_N
FAXCS_RXD_P
FAX_WUPFAXD_RXD_P
FAXD_RXD_N
D-GND
FAXCS_TXD_N
FAXCS_TXD_P
nRES_FAX
5VS
FAXD_TXD_P
FAXD_TXD_N
nNCT_FAX
3.3V
3.3V
D-GND
P-GND
B31B-CSRK
CN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
MOTHER
PWB
S. FAX section
12V
GND
GND
5V
GND
SATA_RXP
SATA_RXN
GND
SATA_TXN
SATA_TXP
SATA SIGNAL
GND
HDD
SATA POWER
12V
12V
12V
GND
GND
GND
5V
5V
5V
GND
GND
GND
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
RS232C
LAN
(TYPE-B)
USB2.0
(TYPE-A)
USB2.0
(HDD SATA cable P2)
(HDD SATA cable P2)
CPU FAN
GND
SATA_RXP
SATA_RXN
GND
SATA_TXN
SATA_TXP
GND
5V
DD+
GND
5V
DD+
GND
TRP1+
TRP1TRP2+
TRP2TRP3+
TRP3TRP4+
TRP4CD
RXD
TXD
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
DBR30-091F100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SI-51005-F
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
UBR23-4K2200
1
2
3
4
UAR27-4K5J00
1
2
3
4
SM-4pin
CN17
CN9
CN6
CN5
CN19
LOCK_CPUFAN
P-GND
PWM_CPUFAN
PWR_CPUFAN
CN4
6SAT07P-328B-B5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
R
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CH0_N
CH0_P
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
CLK_N
CLK_P
SCANDATA0-
SCANDATA0+
SCANDATA1-
SCANDATA1+
SCANDATA2-
SCANDATA2+
SCANCLKOUT-
SCANCLKOUT+
SCANDATA3-
SCANDATA3+
LCDC_REFCLKin
nLDC_DISP(OC)
LCD_DATA3+
LCD_DATA3-
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLK-
LCD_DATA2+
LCD_DATA2-
LCD_DATA1+
LCD_DATA1-
LCD_DATA0+
LCD_DATA0-
CN19
12V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
1
5
4
8
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
LOCK_CPUFAN
QR/P4 8P
1
5
4
8
S
7
6
3
2
LCDSEL2
LCDSEL3
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
NC
24V_FAX
USB_FR_SEL
5V0_FAX
CTS_LCDsub
3.3V_FAX
3.3V_FAX
3.3V_FAX
RTS_LCDsub
3.3VECO
_MFP_out
NWU_FAX2
NCNCT_FAX1
RES_FAX1
FAX1CS_CTS
FAX1CS_RTS
FAX1CS_RXD
FAX1CS_TXD
FAX1D_CTS
P-GND
D-GND
3.3V
3.3V
nNCT_FAX
31
30
29
28
27
FAXD_TXD_N
26
FAXD_TXD_P
25
24
5V
nRES_FAX 23
22
FAXCS_TXD_P
21
FAXCS_TXD_N
20
D-GND
19
FAXD_RXD_N
18
FAXD_RXD_P
FAX_WUP- 17
16
FAXCS_RXD_P
FAXCS_RXD_N 15
14
5V
13
D-GND
nFAXD_RTS 12
11
D-GND
10
nFAXCS_CTS
9
FLVPP
8
nFAXCS_RTS
7
5V
6
nFAXCS_CTS
5
24V
4
3.3V
3
3.3V
2
D-GND
1
D-GND
B31B-CSRK
2nd FAX UN (OPTION)
BOARD TO BOARD
(HDD power interface harness P2)
(HDD power interface harness P2)
61 USB_DN_out 91
62 USB_DP_out 92
63 USB_VBUS_out 93
64 USB_RTN_P_in 94
ECLK_LSU_N
65 USB_RTN_N_in 95
ECLK_LSU_P 66 PICVPPON
96
HSYNC_LSU_P 67 RXD_SCN
97
HSYNC_LSU_N 68 NCTS_SCN 98
VSYNC_K_N 69 TXD_SCN 99
VSYNC_K_P
70 NRTS_SCN 100
VSYNC_C_P 71 NRES_SCN 101
VSYNC_C_N 72 NRES_PCU 102
VSYNC_M_N 73 RXD_PCU 103
VSYNC_M_P 74 NCTS_PCU 104
VSYNC_Y_P
75 TXD_PCU 105
VSYNC_Y_N 76 NRTS_PCU 106
LCDSEL0
77 NPOF_MFPC 107
LCDSEL1
78 NREQ_PIC 108
+5VL
79 NCLR_PIC 109
+5VL
80 TXD_PIC 110
+5VL
81 RXD_PIC 111
+5VL
82 PWM0
112
+5VL
83 FAN_CNCT 113
+5VL
84 NRST_PIC 114
+5VL
85 RES_MFP 115
+5VL
86 PWM1
116
+5VL
87 NREQ_PIC_INT 117
+5VL
88 FAX1D_TXD 118
TXD_LCDsub
89 FAX1D_RXD 119
RXD_LCDsub
90 FAX1D_RTS 120
TX25-120P-LT-H1E
CH3_N
CH3_P
CH4_N
CH4_P
P-GND
PWM_CPUFAN
PWR_CPUFAN
P
7
6
3
2
(HDD SATA cable P2)
MFP PWB
P
1
2
3
4
CN2
1 LCD_DATA0- 31 CH3_N
2 LCD_DATA0+ 32 CH3_P
3 LCD_DATA1- 33 CH4_N
4 LCD_DATA1+ 34 CH4_P
5 LCD_DATA2- 35 ECLK_LSU_N
6 LCD_DATA2+ 36 ECLK_LSU_P
7 LCD_CLK- 37 HSYNC_LSU_P
8 LCD_CLK+ 38 HSYNC_LSU_N
9 LCD_DATA3- 39 VSYNC_K_N
10 LCD_DATA3+ 40 VSYNC_K_P
41 VSYNC_C_P
11 nLDC_DISP
12 LCD_REFCLKin 42 VSYNC_C_N
13 SCANDATA3+ 43 VSYNC_M_N
14 SCANDATA3- 44 VSYNC_M_P
15 SCANCLKOUT+ 45 VSYNC_Y_P
16 SCANCLKOUT- 46 VSYNC_Y_N
17 SCANDATA2+ 47 LCDSEL0
18 SCANDATA2- 48 LCDSEL1
19 SCANDATA1+ 49 +5VL
20 SCANDATA1- 50 +5VL
21 SCANDATA0+ 51 +5VL
22 SCANDATA0- 52 +5VL
53 +5VL
23 CH0_N
54 +5VL
24 CH0_P
CH1_N
55 +5VL
25
CH1_P
56 +5VL
26
57 +5VL
27 CH2_N
58 +5VL
28 CH2_P
59 TXD_LCD
29 CLK_N
60 RXD_LCD
30 CLK_P
TX25-120P-LT-H1E
CN16
1 12V
3 D-GND
2 5VN
4 D-GND
B4P-VH
B10B-PHDSS-B
CN17
1 PWR_CPUFAN
3 PWM_CPUFAN
5 P-GND
7 LOCK_CPUFAN
2 PWR_HDDFAN
4 PWM_HDDFAN
6 P-GND
8 LOCK_HDDFAN
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
FAX1D_RTS
FAX1D_RXD
FAX1D_TXD
NREQ_PIC_INT
NRST_PIC
RES_MFP
PWM1
FAN_CNCT
TXD_PIC
RXD_PIC
PWM0
NCLR_PIC
NREQ_PIC
NPOF_MFPC
NRTS_PCU
TXD_PCU
NCTS_PCU
RXD_PCU
NRES_PCU
NRES_SCN
NRTS_SCN
TXD_SCN
NCTS_SCN
RXD_SCN
PICVPPON
USB_RTN_N_in
USB_RTN_P_in
USB_VBUS
USB_DN
USB_DP
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
LCDSEL2
LCDSEL3
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
NC
24V_FAX
USB_SEL_SW
3.3V_ECO
RTS_LCD
3.3V_FAX
3.3V_FAX
3.3V_FAX
CTS_LCD
5V0_FAX
NWU_FAX2
NCNCT_FAX1
RES_FAX1
FAX1CS_CTS
FAX1CS_RTS
FAX1CS_RXD
FAX1CS_TXD
FAX1D_CTS
MOTHER PWB
T. MFP board section
CN13
VBUS
FP_DFP_D+
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
CN19
VBUS
D2D2+
DGND
DGND
VBUS
D3D3+
DGND
DGND
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
FRONT UP
REAR DOWN
B11B-PH-K-S
VBUS
DGND
FP_D+
FP_DDGND
RE_D+
RE_DDGND
DGND
5V
5V
MOTHER
PWB
BM10B-GHS-TBT
OTHER
NM MODEL
(HUB interface harness P2)
DOWN
VBUS
DD+
GND
DOWN
VBUS
DD+
GND
SHIELD
SHIELD
UP
VBUS
DD+
GND
GND
CN3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
USB HUB
PWB
BM10B-GHS-TBT
DOWN
VBUS1
D1D1+
GND
SHIELD1
VBUS2
D2D2+
GND
SHIELD2
KEYBOARD : OPTION
BM05B-GHS-TBT
CN2
5
4
3
2
1
CN1
3
GND
2
5V
1
5V
B3B-PH-SM4-TB
BM06B-GHS-TBT
CN5
6
5
4
3
2
1
BM04B-GHS-TBT
CN4
4
3
2
1
(SCN - mother harness P2)
PA-5pin
VBUS
DD+
GND
SHIELD
LR
1
2
3
4
5
(SCN mother harness P2)
PA-6pi n
VBUS
DD+
GND
SHIELD
LR
2
3
4
5
6
(8.5 OPE harness P2)

VBUS
DD+
GND
GND
BM05B-GHS-TBT
CN
5
4
3
2
1
SRA-21T-3
SRA-21T-3
(8.5 OPE harness P2) (Keyboard interface harness P2) (Keyboard harness P2)
P
LR
PA-6pin
P
LR
P
1
1
1
1
VBUS
1
2
2
2
2
D2
D+
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
GND
4
5
5
5
5
SHIELD
5
6
FG
6
PA-5pin
P
2
3
4
5
6
CN
VBUS
DD+
GND
GND
TO KEYBOARD
TO USB I/F
OTHER:OPTON
NM MODEL:STANDARD
KEYBOARD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
USB converter PWB
Soldering
BROWN
GRAY
GRAY
LIGHTBLUE
CN
BLUE
USB I/F PWB
VBUS1
D1D1+
GND
GND
U. USB section
CN16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN15
SPPD1
1
SPPD2
2
SPFMCK
3
SPFMM1
4
SPFMM2
5
SPFMO1
6
SPFMO2
7
SPRMA
8
SPRMA/
9
SPRMB
10
SPRMB/
11
SPRMO1
12
SGS
13
STMPS
14
SRRC
15
SPFC
16
SPWS
17
SELA
18
SELB
19
SELC
20
SSELO
21
SPPD4
22
SPFFAN
23
SPPD3
24
SPPD5
25
5VPD
26
GND
27
(NC)
28
B28B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
B10B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
GND
GND
3.3V
3.3V
5V
12V
24V
24V
24V
GND
SCN-CNT PWB
(NC)
PHDR-28VS-1
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
PHR-10
RSPF connecting harness P2

(SPF paper feed
reverse motor)
SPRM
(SPF transport
motor)
SPFM
(SPF document paper exit gate solenoid)
SGS
XADR-34V/XADRP-34V
1
1
GND
2
2
GND
3
3
SPPD1
4
4
SPPD2
5
5
+24VPD
6
6
+24VPD
7
7
+5V
8
8
AVCC
9
9
SPFMCK
10
10
SPFMM1
11
11
SPFMM2
12
12
SPFMO1
13
13
SPFMO2
14
14
SPRMA
15
15
SPRMA/
16
16
SPRMB
17
17
SPRMB/
18
18
SPRMO1
19
19
SGS
20
20
STMPS
21
21
SRRC
22
22
SPFC
23
23
SPWS
24
24
SELA
25
25
SELB
26
26
SELC
27
27
SSELO
28
28
SPPD4
29
29
SPFFAN
30
30
SPPD3
31
31
SPPD5
32
32
5VPD
33
33
GND
34
34
GND
HF main unit - RSPF interface harness P2
PHR-6
PHR-6
PHR-3
(NC)
PHDR-34VS-1
CN H
1
2
3
4
5
6
B6B-PH-K-R
CN F
1
2
3
4
5
6
B6B-PH-K-S
SPRMA/
+24VPD
SPRMA
SPRMB
+24VPD
SPRMB/
SPFMA/
+24VPD
SPFMA
SPFMB
+24VPD
SPFMB/
CN C
1
+24VPD_SGS
2
(NC)
3
SGS/
B3B-PH-K-S
CN A
1
GND
2
GND
3
SPPD1
4
SPPD2
5
+24VPD
6
+24VPD
7
+5V
8
AVCC
9
SPFMCK
10
SPFMM1
11
SPFMM2
12
SPFMO1
13
SPFMO2
14
SPRMA
15
SPRMA/
16
SPRMB
17
SPRMB/
18
SPRMO1
19
SGS
20
STMPS
21
SRRC
22
SPFC
23
SPWS
24
SELA
25
SELB
26
SELC
27
SSELO
28
SPPD4
29
SPFFAN
30
SPPD3
31
SPPD5
32
5VPD
33
GND
34
GND
B34-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
Transport interface harness P2
Base tray harness P2
PHR-7-R
Document tray harness P2
CN D
PHR-12
SPLS1
1
GND
2
+5VPD_SPLS1
3
SPLS2
4
GND
5
+5VPD_SPLS2
6
AVCC
7
SPWS
8
GND
9
SPFC/
10
(NC)
GND
11
+24VPD_SW_SPFC
12
B12B-PH-K-S
CN B
GND
1
STMPU
2
STMPS/
3
+24VPD_STMPS
4
+5VPD
5
SPPD4
6
GND
7
B7B-PH-K-R
CN E
PHR-11
+24VPD_SRRC
1
SRRC/
2
3
SPED
GND
4
+5V_SPED
5
+5VPD
6
SPPD1
7
GND
8
+24VPD
9
GND
10
(NC)
+24VPD_SW
11
B11B-PH-K-S
CN G
PHR-13
+5VPD
1
SPPD2
2
GND
3
+5VPD
4
SPPD3
5
GND
6
SOCD
7
GND
8
+5VPD_SOCD
9
+5VPD
10
SPPD5
11
GND
12
(NC)
13
(NC)
B13B-PH-K-S
RSPF DRIVER PWB
SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
1
SPFC/
1
+24VPD_SW_SPFC
2
2
SMP-03V-NC / SMP-03V-NC
1
1
AVCC
2
2
SPWS
3
3
GND
179228-4 / 292254-4 / 179228-4

1
GND
1
2
STMPU
2
3
3
STMPS/
4
4
+24VPD_STMPS
PALR-08VF / PAP-08V-S
SPED
1
1
2
GND
2
3
3
+5V_SPED
4
4
+5VPD
5
SPPD1
5
6
GND
6
7
+24VPD
7
8
8
+24VPD_SW
SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
1
+24VPD_SRRC
1
2
SRRC/
2
SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC
1
+5VPD
1
2
SPPD2
2
3
GND
3
+5VPD
4
4
SPPD3
5
5
GND
6
6
SOCD
7
7
GND
8
8
+5VPD_SOCD
9
9
+5VPD
10
10
SPPD5
11
11
GND
12
12
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-3
SRA-21T-3
Paper feed harness P2
SRA-21T-3
Transport harness P2
SRA-21T-3
SRA-21T-4
SRA-21T-3
SRA-21T-4
(SPF paper feed clutch)
SPFC
(SPF document
width sensor)
SPWS
179228-3
(SPF document
SPLS2 length long sensor)
1
SPLS2
2
GND
3
+5VPD_SPLS2
VHPGP1S73P+-18
179228-3
(SPF document
SPLS1 length short sensor)
1
SPLS1
2
GND
3
+5VPD_SPLS1
VHPGP1S73P+-18
(SPF reverse gate

front sensor)
179228-3(BLACK)
SPPD4
1
+5VPD
2
SPPD4
3
GND
VHPGP1A73A+-18
(Stamp solenoid)
STMPS
PS-187-2V
SCOV
(SPF cover SW)
1
+24VPD
2
+24VPD_SW
179228-3(BLACK)
(SPF paper entry sensor)
SPPD1
1
+5VPD
2
SPPD1
3
GND
VHPGP1A73A+-18
179228-3
(SPF document empty sensor)
SPED
1
SPED
2
GND
3
+5V_SPED
VHPGP1S73P+-18
(SPF resist roller clutch)
SRRC
179228-3(BLACK)
(SPF reverse rear sensor)
SPPD5
1
+5VPD
2
SPPD5
3
GND
VHPGP1A73A+-18
179228-3
(SPF open/close sensor)
SOCD
1
SOCD
2
GND
3
+5VPD_SOCD
VHPGP1S73P+-18
179228-3(BLACK)
(SPF scan front sensor)
SPPD3
1
+5VPD
2
SPPD3
3
GND
VHPGP1A73A+-18
179228-3(BLACK)
(SPF paper entry 2 sensor)
SPPD2
1
+5VPD
2
SPPD2
3
GND
VHPGP1A73A+-18
V. RSPF section
3.
Signal list
Signal name
1TNFD
Name [Type]
Function/Operation

switch [Mechanical switch]
Transfer belt separation CL
detection
Transfer belt separation BK
detection
Primary transfer separation
clutch
[Electromagnetic clutch]
ADU motor lower
[Stepping motor]
Detects waste toner.
ADUM_L_C
ADU motor lower current select
APPD1
ADU transport path

detection 1
[Transmission type]
ADU transport path
detection 2
[Transmission type]
Process suction fan motor lock
detection
Process suction fan motor
LCD backlight
[CCFT cool cathode ray tube]
Scanner lamp
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
1TURC
ADUM_L
APPD2
CCFM_LD
CCFM_V
CCFT
CL
CLUD1
CLUD2
CLUM1
CLUM2
CPED1
CPED2
CPFC
CPFD1
CPFD2
CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
CPUC1
CPUC2
CSPD1

(Lift HP detection)
[Transmission type]
(Lift HP detection)
[Transmission type]
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 1) [DC brush motor]
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 2) [DC brush motor]
[Transmission type]
[Transmission type]
[Transmission type]
[Transmission type]
Paper feed motor
[Brushless motor]
Paper feed motor lock
detection
Paper feed clutch
(Paper feed tray 1)
Paper feed clutch
(Paper feed tray 2)
Tray 1 remaining paper
quantity detection
Connector level
"L"
"H"
Empty
Full
Connec
tor No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
CN13
PCU
Detects the transfer belt

separation CL.
Detects the transfer belt
separation BK.
Controls the primary transfer
separation mode.
Separated
Contact
CN13
31
PCU
Separated
Contact
CN12
27
PCU
Separated
Contact
CN11
12
PCU
CN8
3, 5, 7,
9
PCU
Selects the ADU motor lower

current.
Detects paper pass in the ADU
upper stream section.
Large
current
Pass
Small
current
CN8
PCU
CN7
PCU
Detects paper pass in the ADU

medium stream section.
Pass
CN7
18
PCU
Detects the process suction fan

motor lock.
Cools the process.
LCD backlight
CN19
PCU
Stop
ON
Lock
detection
Drive
OFF
CN19
CN13
4
6
PCU
SCU
Radiates lights to the

document for the CCD to scan
the document images.
ON
OFF
CN5
SCU
Upper limit
CN9
PCU
Upper limit
CN9
PCU
Drives the paper tray lift plate.
Stop
Drive
CN5
PCU
Drives the paper tray lift plate.
Stop
Drive
CN5
10
PCU
Detects paper empty in the tray

1.
Detects paper empty in the tray
2.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper
transport roller in the paper
feed tray section.
Detects paper pass in the tray
1.
YES
NO
CN9
PCU
YES
NO
CN9
10
PCU
ON
OFF
CN5
PCU
Pass
CN9
15
PCU
Detects paper pass in the tray

2.
Pass
CN9
16
PCU
Drive
Stop
CN6
24
PCU
Detects the paper feed motor

lock.
Controls ON/OFF of the roller
in the paper feed tray section.
CN6
22
PCU
ON
Lock
detection
OFF
CN5
PCU
ON
OFF
CN5
PCU
Detects the remaining paper

quantity in the tray 1.
Remaining
quantity
CN9
21
PCU
Remaining
quantity
CN9
22
PCU
YES
YES
NO
NO
Reference
Reference
CN9
CN9
CN11
CN11
25
26
16
13
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Controls ON/OFF of the roller

in the paper feed tray section.
CSPD2
Tray 2 remaining paper

quantity detection
Detects the remaining paper

quantity in the tray 2.
CSS1
CSS2
DHPD_CL
DHPD_K
Tray 1 detection
Tray 2 detection
CL phase detection
BK phase detection
Detects the tray 1.

Detects the tray 2.
Detects the CL phase.
Detects the BL phase.
NOTE
Drives with
the 4-phase
signal.
Detects
during lifting
up.
Detects
during lifting
up.
Signal name
Name [Type]
DL_BK
Discharge lamp BK [LED]
DL_C
Discharge lamp C [LED]
DL_M
Discharge lamp M [LED]
DL_Y
Discharge lamp Y [LED]
DSW_ADU
ADU transport open/close

detection
[Transmission type]
Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/
close detection
[Micro switch]
DSW_C
DSW_F
DSW_R

[Micro switch]
DVM_CL_D
Development drive motor (CL)

[Brushless motor]
DVM_CL_LD
Development drive motor (CL)

lock detection
Development drive motor (K)
[Brushless motor]
DVM_K_D
DVM_K_LD
FUFM_V
FUFM_LD
FUM
FUM_CNT
Development drive motor (K)

lock detection
Fusing fan motor
Fusing fan motor lock

detection
Fusing drive motor
[Stepping motor]
HLOUT_LM
Fusing drive motor current

select
HLOUT_UM
HLOUT_US
HLOUT_UW
Heater lamp upper assist
HLPCD
HUD_M
Fusing pressure detection

sensor [Transmission sensor]
Shifter home position
detection
Humidity detection
LSUSS_B
MC_BK_ERR
High voltage BK error

detection
MC_CL_ERR
High voltage CL error
MHPS
Scanner home position

sensor [Transmission type]
Scanner motor
[Stepping motor]
Manual feed paper empty
detection
[Transmission type]
Manual feed paper entry
detection [Transmission type]
Paper pickup solenoid
(Manual paper feed)
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
HPOS
MIM
MPED
MPFD
MPFS
Connector level
"L"
"H"
OFF
ON
CN10
PCU
OFF
ON
CN10
21
PCU
OFF
ON
CN10
PCU
OFF
ON
CN10
22
PCU
Open
Close
CN2
RD I/F
Detects open/close of the tray

1, 2 transport cover.
Detects open/close of the front
door, and fusing, motor, LSU
laser power line.
Detects open/close of the right
door, and fusing, motor, LSU
laser power line.
Drives the development
section, the color OPC drum,
and the transfer section.
Detects the development drive
motor (CL) lock.
Drives the development
section, the black OPC drum,
and the transfer section.
Detects the development drive
motor (K) lock.
Cools motor related to the
fusing section and paper exit
section.
Detects the fusing fan motor
lock.
Open
Close
CN9
30
PCU
Open
Close
CN16
PCU
Open
Close
CN16
PCU
Drive
Stop
CN11
PCU
Lock
detection
Stop
CN11
10
PCU
CN11
PCU
Lock
detection
ON
CN11
PCU
CN13
PCU
CN13
15
PCU
Lock
detection
CN8
6, 8,
10, 12
PCU
Selects the fusing drive motor

current.
Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp
lower main.
upper main.
upper sub.
upper assist.
Detects a change in the fusing
pressure.
Detects the shifter home
position.
Detects the humidity.
Large
current
OFF
Small
current
ON
CN8
PCU
CN13
10
PCU
OFF
ON
CN13
14
PCU
OFF
ON
CN13
12
PCU
OFF
ON
CN13
PCU
Pressure
release
CN13
30
PCU
CN12
24
PCU
Pressure
applying
Home
position
CN7
PCU
Open
Close
CN19
PCU
Error
detection
CN6
17
PCU
Error
detection
CN6
19
PCU
CN9
SCU
Home
position
CN4
SCU
Detects paper empty in the

manual paper feed tray.
YES
NO
CN3
1, 2, 3,
4
7
RD I/F
Detects paper empty in the

Controls the paper pickup
solenoid (manual paper feed)
Pass
CN7
PCU
Pickup
CN7
22
PCU
Function/Operation
Discharges electric charges on
the OPC drum.
the OPC drum.
the OPC drum.
the OPC drum.
Detects open/close of the ADU
cover.
Controls open/close of the LSU

shutter.
Detects an abnormal output of
high voltage BK.
Detects an abnormal output of

high voltage CL.
Detects the scanner home
position.
Scanner (reading) section
Drive
OFF
Connec
tor No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
NOTE
Drives with
the 4-phase
signal.
Analog
detection
Judged
when a high
voltage is
outputted.
Manual
paper feed
unit
Signal name
Name [Type]
MPGS
Manual feed gate solenoid

MPLD
Manual feed paper length

detector
MPUC

MPWD
Manual paper feed tray paper

width detector
[Volume resistance]
Manual paper feed tray
pull-out position detection 1
MTOP1
Function/Operation
Controls open/close of the
manual paper feed gate
solenoid.
Detects the paper length in the
Connector level
"L"
"H"
ON
OFF
Connec
tor No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
CN7
14
PCU
Detection
CN3
16
RD I/F
Controls ON/OFF of the paper

feed roller in the manual paper
feed section.
Detects the paper width in the
ON
OFF
CN7
20
PCU
CN7
PCU
Analog
detection
Storing
position
CN3
25
RD I/F
Pull-out
position
CN3
22
RD I/F
Manual
paper feed
unit
Manual
paper feed
unit
Close
Open
CN10
SCU
CN12
12, 13,
14,15
PCU
MTOP2
Manual paper feed tray

pull-out position detection 2
OCSW
Original cover SW
[Transmission type]
OSM
Shift motor [Stepping motor]
Detects the pull-out position of

the manual paper feed tray.
(Retraction position)
Detects the pull-out position of
the manual paper feed tray.
(Pull-out position)
Detects open/close of the
document cover (document
size detection trigger).
Offsets the paper.
OZFM_CNT
OZFM speed control
Controls the OZFM speed.
CN5
14
PCU
OZFM_LD
Ozone fan motor lock

detection
Ozone fan motor
Process control sensor
[Reflection type]
Process control shutter
solenoid
Transport motor
[Stepping motor]
Detects the ozone fan motor

lock.
Discharges the ozone.
Detects the toner patch density.
CN5
18
PCU
Stop
Lock
detection
Drive
CN5
CN6
12
9
PCU
PCU
Open
Close
CN6
11
PCU
CN8
20, 22,
24, 26
PCU
Large
current
Small
current
Pass
CN8
18
PCU
CN12
25
PCU
Pass
CN12
23
PCU
Pass
CN7
17
PCU
CN12
17
PCU
Stop
Drive
CN12
16
PCU
CN12
18
PCU
CN12
19
PCU
Stop
Lock
detection
Lock
detection
Drive
CN12
16
PCU
CN8
13, 15,
17, 19
PCU
OZFM_V
PCS_CL
PCSS
PFM
Controls ON/OFF of the

process control and the
registration shutter.
Transports between the
registration roller and the paper
feed section. Transports
between the registration roller
and the right door section.
Selects the transport motor
current.
Detects the paper exit from
fusing.
Detects the discharged paper.
PFM_CNT
Transport motor current select
POD1
POFM_LD1

[Transmission type]
[Transmission type]
Right tray paper exit
detection
speed control
(F side)
POFM lock detection
Detects the POFM lock.
POFM_LD2
POFM lock detection
Detects the POFM lock.
POFM_R

(R side)
[Stepping motor]

current select
Registration front detection
[Transmission type]
Registration detection
Selects the paper exit drive

motor current.
Detects paper in front of the
registration roller.
Detects paper at the rear of the
Changes the fusing pressure.
Large
current
Pass
Small
current
CN8
11
PCU
CN6
12
PCU
Pass
CN6
18
PCU
CN13
20, 22,
24, 26
PCU
Detects the power cooling fan

motor 1 lock.
Detects the power cooling fan
motor 2 lock.
Lock
detection
Lock
detection
Drive
CN5
13
PCU
CN5
22
PCU
CN5
11
PCU
POD2
POD3
POFM_CNT
POFM_F
POM
POM_CNT
PPD1
PPD2
PRM

[Stepping motor]
PSCF_LD
Power cooling fan motor 1 lock

detection
Power cooling fan motor 2 lock
detection
Power cooling fan motor 1
PSFM2_LD
PSFM_V
NOTE
Detects paper exit to the right

tray.
Controls the speed of the
paper exit cooling fan motor.
Stop
Manual
paper feed
unit
Drives with
the 4-phase
signal.
Pulse (Duty)
drive
Analog
detection
Drives with
the 4-phase
signal.
Pulse (Duty)
drive
Drives with
the 4-phase
signal.
Drives with
the 4-phase
signal.
Signal name
PSFM_V2
PTC_ERR
Name [Type]
PTC_HEAT
Power cooling fan motor 2

PTC high voltage error
detection
PTC heater
PWM
MFP cooling fan
PWRSW
Operation panel power switch

[Push switch]
Machine rear section cooling
fan motor lock detection
RCFM_LD
RCFM_V
REGS_F
REGS_F_LED
REGS_R
REGS_R_LED
RRM
RRM_CNT
Machine rear section cooling

fan motor
Registrations sensor (Front)
[Reflection type]
Registration sensor LED
(Front) [LED]
Registration sensor (Rear)
[Reflection type]
Registrations sensor LED
(Rear) [LED]
Registration motor
[Stepping motor]
Function/Operation
Detects the output abnormality
of the PTC high voltage.
Turns ON/OFF of the PTC
heater.
Cools the controller.
Connector level
"L"
"H"
Stop
Drive
Error
detection
OFF
ON
Connec
tor No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
CN5
CN14
21
7
PCU
PCU
CN12
30
PCU
ON (PWM
control)
OFF
CN19
82
MFPC
CN12
MOTHER
Lock
detection
CN13
23
PCU
Stop
Drive
CN13
25
PCU
CN6
PCU
Registration sensor LED light

emitting
Detects registration shift.
CN6
PCU
CN6
PCU
Registration sensor LED light

emitting
Drives and turns ON the
CN6
PCU
CN8
14, 16,
23, 25
PCU
Selects the registration motor

current.
Detects the toner density (C).
Large
current
Small
current
CN8
21
PCU
CN10
27
PCU
Detects the toner density (K).
CN10
PCU
Detects the toner density (M).
CN10
PCU
Detects the toner density (Y).
CN10
28
PCU
Full
CN12
22
PCU
Full
CN2
RD I/F
CN18
PCU
Outputs the ON/OFF control

signal of the DC power.
Detects the cooling fan motor
lock in the machine rear
section.
Cools the machine rear
section.
Detects registration shift.
OFF
ON
TH1_LSU
Registration motor current

select
[Magnetic sensor]
[Magnetic sensor]
[Magnetic sensor]
[Magnetic sensor]
[Transmission type]
Right tray paper exit full
detection
LSU UN thermister
Detects the face-down paper

exit tray full.
Detects the paper exit full in the
right tray.
TH_LM_IN
Lower main thermister
CN12
PCU
TH_M
Temperature detection
CN7
19
PCU
TH_UM_IN
CN12
PCU
TH_UMCS_IN
CN12
PCU
TH_US_IN
Upper sub thermister
CN12
PCU
TNM_C
Toner motor C
[Stepping motor]
Transports toner from the toner

cartridge to the developing unit.
CN14
24, 26,
28, 30
PCU
TNM_K
Toner motor K
[Stepping motor]

CN14
21, 23,
25, 27
PCU
TNM_M
Toner motor M
[Stepping motor]

CN14
14, 16,
18, 20
PCU
TNM_Y
Toner motor Y
[Stepping motor]

CN14
11, 13,
15, 17
PCU
WH_CNT
Dehumidifying heater control
OFF
ON
CN5
19
PCU
WTNM

[Synchronous motor]
Turns ON/OFF the

dehumidifying heater.
Stirs waste toner.
CN13
11, 13
PCU
TCS_C
TCS_K
TCS_M
TCS_Y
TFD2
TFD3
NOTE
Analog
detection
Analog
output
Analog
detection
Analog
output
Drives with
the 4-phase
signal.
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Analog
detection
Drives with
the 4-phase
signal.
Drives with
the 4-phase
signal.
Drives with
the 4-phase
signal.
Drives with
the 4-phase
signal.
Drives with
the 2-phase
signal.
MX-3100N
[12]
OTHERS
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Item
1.
X Bypass
Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection
Paper Type Registration
Auto Tray Switching
Custom Size Registration
System settings
A. Login method
(1)
When User Authentication is not Enabled
1)
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
2)
Touch the [Admin Password] key.
3)
Touch the [Password] text box and enter the administrator

password.
4)
Touch the [OK] key.
5)
Displays the system setting key on the touch panel.
* To logout, touch the [Logout] key in the top right corner of the
screen.
Also touch the [Exit] key to quit the system settings.
(If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.)
(2)
When User Authentication is Enabled
a. When user authentication is by login name and password

(and e-mail address)
1)
Touch the login name key.
2)
Touch the [Admin Login] key.
3)
Touch the [Password] key.
Address Control
Address Book
Custom Index
Program
Fax Data Receive/Forward
I-Fax Settings*4
X Reception Start
X Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen
X Forward Received Data
Printer Condition Settings
Printer Default Settings
X Copies
X Orientation
X Default Paper Size
X Default Output Tray
Enter the administrator password in the administrator password entry screen.

4)
X Default Paper Type

X Initial Resolution Setting
Touch the [OK] key.
b. Login by user number

1)
Touch the [Admin Login] key.
2)
Touch the [Password] key.

Enter the administrator password in the administrator password entry screen.
3)
Touch the [OK] key.
* To logout, press the [LOGOUT] ([*]) key. (Except when entering a

fax number.)
(If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.)
B. System setting list

(1)
System setting (general) list

Factory default
setting
Item
Total Count
Job Count
Device Count
Default Settings
Clock
X Clock Adjust
Specify Time Zone
Date & Time Settings
Synchronize with Internet
Time Server
X Daylight Saving Time Setting
X Date Format
Keyboard Select
List Print (User)
All Custom Setting List
Printer Test Page
Sending Address List
Document Filing Folder List
Paper Tray Settings
Tray Settings
X Tray 1
X Tray 2
X Tray 3*1
X Tray 4*2
X Tray 5*3
X Disable Blank Page Print

X Line Thickness
X 2-Sided Print
X Color Mode
X N-Up Print
X Fit To Page
X Output
Print per Unit

X Quick File
PCL Settings
X PCL Symbol Set Setting
X PCL Font Setting
X PCL Line Feed Code
X Wide A4
PostScript Setting*5
X Print PS Errors
X Binary Processing
Document Filing Control
USB-Device Check
User Control*6
Modify User Information
Disable
Factory default
setting
Plain, Auto-Inch
8-1/2" x 14"
Enabled
Custom 1: X=17",
Y=11"
Custom 2: X=17",
Y=11"
Custom 3: X=17",
Y=11"
User 1
-
Enabled
-
1
Portrait
8-1/2" x 11"
Varies depending
on the machine
configuration
Plain Paper
600dpi
(High Quality)
Disabled
5
1-Sided
Auto
1-Up
Enabled
Varies depending
on the machine
configuration
Enabled
Disabled
PC-8
Internal Font, 0:
Courier
0.CR=CR;
LF=LF; FF=FF
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
-
Disable
[MM/DD/YYYY], [/],
[Last], [12-Hour]
English (US)
*1: When a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer / stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed.
*4: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*2: When a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed.

*3: When a large capacity tray is installed.
*5: When the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
*6: When user authentication is enabled and the logged-in user
does not have the authority to configure the system settings
(administrator) (excluding factory default users).
Plain, 8-1/2" x11"

Plain, 8-1/2" x11"
Plain, Auto-Inch
Plain, 8-1/2" x11"
MX-3100N OTHERS 12 1
(2)
System setting (administrator) list

Factory default
setting
Item
User Control
User Authentication Setting
X User Authentication
X Authentication Method Setting
X Device Account Mode Setting

Other Settings
X Actions when the Limit of Pages for Output
Jobs
X The Number of User Name Displayed

Setting on Operation Panel
X A Warning when Login Fails
X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
X Automatically print stored jobs after login
X Default Network Authentication Server
Setting
X Count Setting after Login
X User Information Print
User List
Page Limit Group List
Authority Group List
Favorite Operation Group List*1
X Favorite Operation Group Registration*1
X Home Screen List*1
User Count
Energy Save
Toner Save Mode
X Print
X Copy
Auto Power Shut-Off
Auto Power Shut-Off Timer
Preheat Mode Setting
Operation Settings
Other Settings
X Keys Touch Sound
Key Touch Sound at Initial Point
X Auto Clear Setting
Cancel Auto Clear Timer
X Message Time Setting
X MFP Display Language Setting
X Disabling of Job Priority Operation
X Disabling of Bypass Printing
X Key Operation Setting
Disable Auto Key Repeat
X Disabling of Clock Adjustment
X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode
X Initial Original Count Setting
MFP Display Pattern Setting
Customize Key Setting*2
X Copy
Customize 1
Customize 2
Customize 3
X Scan
Customize 1
Customize 2
Customize 3
X Internet Fax*3
(Same as Scan)
X Fax*4
(Same as Scan)
X USB Memory Scan
Customize 1
Customize 2
Customize 3
X Data Entry*5
Factory default
setting
Item
Disabled
Authenticate a User
by Login Name and
Password
Disabled
Job is Completed
even when
the Limit of Pages is
Reached
12
Doc. Filing
X Received Date Image Check Setting
X Default List/Thumbnail Display
Remote Operation Settings
X Remote Software Operation
Operational Authority
View Password Entry Screen
X Operation from Specified PC
Hostname or IP Address of PC
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
-
X Operation by User who Has Password

Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
45 min.
15 min.
Middle
Disabled
60 sec.
Disabled
6 sec.
American English
Disabled
Disabled
0.0 sec.
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
All disabled
Pattern 1
File
Quick File
Address Review
File
Quick File
(Same as Scan)
Home Screen Settings*2
Preview Setting
X Default Preview Display
Image Send
Device Control
Other Settings
X Original Feeding Mode
X Saddle Stitch Position Adjust*6
X Auto Paper Selection Setting
X Tandem Connection Setting
IP Address of Slave Machine
Port Number
Disabling of Master Machine Mode
Disabling of Slave Machine Mode
X Detect Standard in Auto Color Mode
X Registration Adjustment
X Optimization of a Hard Disk
X Clear All Job Log Data
Original Size Detector Setting
X Original Detection Size Combination
X Cancel Detection at Document Glass
Disabling of Devices
X Disabling of Document Feeder
X Disabling of Duplex
X Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*7
X Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*8
X Disabling of Tray Setting
X Disabling of Finisher*9
X Disabling of Offset
X Disabling of Stapler*9
X Disabling of Punch*10
X Disabling of Color Mode*11
Fusing Control Settings
Copy Function Settings
Initial Status Settings
X Color Mode
X Paper Tray
X Exposure Type
X Copy Ratio
X 2-Sided Copy
X Output
Other Settings
X Copy Exposure Adjustment
Color
Black & White
X Rotation Copy Setting
X Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios
Reception Date:
Twice
Memory Box: Twice
Twice
Disabled
List
Prohibited
Display in Both PC
and MFP
Prohibited
Display in Both PC
and MFP
Prohibited
Display in Both PC
and MFP
All Disabled
0.0 mm
Plain Paper
0.0.0.0
50001
Disabled
Disabled
3
Inch-1
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
16 - 24 lbs.
(60 - 90g/m2)
Full Color
Varies depending
on the
machine
configuration
Auto
100%
1-Side to 1-Side
-
5
5
Enabled
-
Item
X Setting a Maximum Number of Copies
X Initial Margin Shift Setting
Side 1
Side 2
X Erase Width Adjustment
Edge Clearance Width
Center Clearance Width
X Card Shot Settings
Original Size
Fit to Page
X Automatic Saddle Stitch*6
X Initial Tab Copy Setting
X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs
X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy
X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection
X Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is
Supplied the Paper
X B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode for
Document Feeder
X B/W Quick Scan from Document Glass
Color Adjustments
X Initial Color Balance Setting
X Auto Color Calibration
Network Settings
IPv4 Settings
IPv6 Settings
Enable TCP/IP
Enable NetWare
Enable EtherTalk
Enable NetBEUI
Reset the NIC
Ping Command
Printer Settings
Default Settings
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing
X Prohibit Test Page Printing
X A4/Letter Size Auto Change
X Print Density Level
Color
Black & White
X CMYK Exposure Adjustment
X Bypass Tray Settings
Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass
Tray
Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass
Tray
Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper
Select
X Job Spool Queuing
Interface Settings
X Hexadecimal Dump Mode
X I/O Timeout
X Enable USB Port
X USB Port Emulation Switching
X Enable Network Port
X Network Port Emulation Switching
X Port Switching Method
Auto Color Calibration
Image Send Settings
Operation Settings
X Other Settings
Default Display Settings
Hold settings for a while after scanning
has been completed
Switch Automatically to Copy Mode
Screen
Address Book Default Selection
Factory default
setting
999
Initial Resolution Setting

Scan
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
Internet Fax*3
X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8"
Disabled
Enabled
1/2"
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Factory default
state
DHCP
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
-
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
3
3
0
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
60 sec.
Enabled
Auto
Enabled
Auto
Switch at End of
Job
-
Scan (fax when fax

is installed)
Disabled
Enabled
Tab Switch: ABC,
Address Type: All
Factory default
setting
Item
Fax*4
Default Exposure Settings

Original Image Type
Moire Reduction
Must Input Next Address Key at
Broadcast Setting
Scan Complete Sound Setting
The Number of File Name/Subject/Body
Keys Displayed Setting
The Number of Direct Address Keys
Displayed Setting
Disable Switching of Display Order
Hold Setting for Received Data Print
Default Verification Stamp
Erase Width Adjustment
X Settings to Disable Registration
Disable Registering Destination from
Operation Panel
Disable Registering Destination on Web
Page*12
Disable Registration of Program
Disable Registration of Memory Box
Disable Destination Registration Using
Global Address Search*12
Disable Registration Using Network
Scanner Tool*12
X Settings to Disable Transmission
Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode
Disable Selection From Address Book
Disable Direct Entry
Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*3
Disable PC-Fax Transmission*4
X Own Name and Destination Set
Sender Data Registration
Sender Name
Sender Fax Number
I-Fax Own Address
Registration of Own Name Select
Scan Settings
X Other Settings
Default Sender Set
Default Color Mode Settings
Black & White
Color Mode
Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto
Mode
Initial File Format Setting
File Type
Black & White
Color/Grayscale
Specified Pages per File
Number of Pages
Compression Mode at Broadcasting
Black & White
Color/Grayscale
Apply the
Resolution Set
when Stored:
Disabled
200 X 200 dpi
Apply the
Resolution Set
when Stored:
Disabled
200 X 100 dpi
Apply the
Resolution Set
when Stored:
Disabled Standard
Auto
Text
Disabled
Disabled
Middle
12
10
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
1/2"
1/2
All disabled
All disabled
All disabled
All disabled
All disabled
Disabled
Disabled
All disabled
All disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Mono 2
Auto, Grayscale
Disabled
PDF
MMR (G4)
Medium
Disabled
Disabled
MH (G3)
Medium
Item
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments
(E-mail)
Maximum Size of Data Attachments
(FTP/Desktop/Network Folder)
Bcc Setting
Enable Bcc
Display Bcc Address on the Job Status
Screen
Disable Scan Function
USB Memory Scan
PC Scan
Pre-Setting Mail Signature
X Default Address Setting
I-Fax Settings*3
X I-Fax Default Settings
Auto Wake Up Print
Compression Setting
Speaker Volume Setting
Receive Signal
Communication Error Signal
Original Print on Transaction Report
Transaction Report Print Select Setting
Single Sending
Broadcasting
Receiving
Activity Report Print Select Setting
Auto Print at Memory Full
Print Daily at Designated Time
Body Text Print Select Setting
Pre-Setting Mail Signature
X I-Fax Send Settings
I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting
I-Fax Reception Report Request Timeout
Setting
Number of Resend Times at Reception
Error
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments
Rotation Sending Setting
Printing Page Number at Receiver
Recall in Case of Line Busy
Recall in Case of Communication Error
X I-Fax Receive Settings
Auto Receive Reduce Setting
Duplex Reception Setting
Set Address for Data Forwarding
Direct SMTP
Add Hostname or IP Address Too
Hostname or IP Address
Receiving Date & Time Print
A3 RX Reduce
POP3 Communication Timeout Setting
Reception Check Interval Setting
I-Fax Output Setting
X Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Setting

Document Filing Settings
Other Settings
X Default Mode Settings
X Sort Method Setting
X Administrator Authority Setting
Delete File
Delete Folder
Change Password
X Delete All Quick Files
Delete
Factory default
setting
Unlimited
Unlimited
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
MH (G3)
Middle
Middle
Print Out Error
Report Only
Print Out Error
Report Only
Print Out All Report
No Printed Report
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
1 hour
2
Unlimited
All Enabled
Enabled
Times: 2, Interval 3
min.
Times: 2, Interval 3
min.
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
60 sec.
5 min.
Varies depending
on the machine
configuration
All Invalid
Sharing Mode
Date
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
-
Item
Delete quick files at power up
(protected files excluded)
X Default Color Mode Settings
Color
Black & White
X Default Exposure Settings
Original Image Type
Moire Reduction
X Initial Resolution Settings
X Color Data Compression Ratio Setting
X Scan Complete Sound Setting
X Default Output Tray *13
X Disable Stamp for Reprinting

X Batch Print Settings
Selection of [All Users] is not allowed.
Selection of [User Unknown] is not
allowed.
X Erase Width Adjustment
X Card Shot Settings
Original Size
Fit to Page
Document Output Options
X Print
Copy
Print
Scan Send
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*3
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*4
Scan to HDD
X Scan Send
Copy
Scan Send
Scan to HDD
X Internet Fax Send*3
Copy
Scan Send
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Scan to HDD
X Fax Send*4
Copy
Scan Send
Scan to HDD
List Print (Administrator)
Administrator Settings List
Image Sending Activity Report
Data Receive/Forward List
Web Settings List*12
Metadata Set List*5
Security Settings
SSL Settings
X Server Port
HTTPS
IPP-SSL
Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in Device Web
Page Access
X Client Port
HTTPS
FTPS
SMTP-SSL
POP3-SSL
LDAP-SSL
Factory default
setting
Enabled
Auto
Mono 2
Auto
Text
Disabled
600 x 600 dpi
Medium
Middle
Varies depending
on the
machine
configuration
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
1/2"
1/2"
X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8"
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Item
Level of Encryption
IPsec Settings
IEEE802.1X Setting
Enable/Disable Settings
Printer Condition Settings
X Disable Blank Page Print
User Control
X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
Operation Settings
X Cancel Auto Clear Timer
X Disabling of Job Priority Operation
X Disabling of Bypass Printing
X Disable Auto Key Repeat
X Disabling of Clock Adjustment
X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode
Device Control
X Disabling of Document Feeder
X Disabling of Duplex
X Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*7
X Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*8
X Disabling of Tray Setting
X Disabling of Finisher*9
X Disabling of Offset
X Disabling of Stapler*9
X Disabling of Punch*10
X Disabling of Color Mode*11
X Disabling of Master Machine Mode
X Disabling of Slave Machine Mode
Copy Function Settings
X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs
X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy
X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection
Printer Settings
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing
X Prohibit Test Page Printing
X Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper
Select
Image Send Settings
X Other Disabling
Disable Switching of Display Order
Disable Scan Function
PC Scan
USB Memory Scan
X Settings to Disable Registration
Disable Registering Destination from
Operation Panel
Disable Registering Destination on Web
Page*12
Disable Registration of Program
Disable Registration of Memory Box
Disable Destination Registration Using
Global Address Search*12
Disable Registration Using Network
Scanner Tools*12
X Settings to Disable Transmission
Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode
Disable Selection from Address Book
Disable Direct Entry
Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*3
Disable PC-Fax Transmission*4
Document Filing Settings
X Disable Stamp for Reprinting
X Batch Print Settings
Selection of [All Users] is not allowed.
Selection of [User Unknown] is not
allowed.
Change Administrator Password
Product Key*4
Factory default
setting
Low
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Factory default
setting
Item
Serial Number
PS3 Expansion Kit
Internet Fax Expansion Kit
E-mail Alert and Status
Application Integration Module
Application Communication Module
External Account Module
XPS Expansion Kit
Data Backup
Storage Backup
Device Cloning
Initialize and/or Store Settings
Restore Factory Defaults
Store Current Configuration
Restore Configuration
Sharp OSA Settings
External Account Setting*15
X External Account Control
X Enable Authentication by External Server
USB Device Settings*16
X External Keyboard
Level of Encryption
X USB Memory
Level of Encryption
Disabled
Disabled
Internal driver
None
Internal driver
None
*1: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in "User Control" in
the Web pages
*2: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in the system settings in the Web pages.
*3: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
*4: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.

*5: When the application integration module is installed.
*6: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
*7: When a large capacity tray is installed.

*8: When a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer / stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed.
*9: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
*10: When a punch module is installed.
Disabled
*11: When a color-related problem has occurred.

*12: When network connection is enabled.
Disabled
Disabled
*13: When the exit tray unit is installed.
All disabled
All disabled
All disabled
All disabled
All disabled
*14: It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the

peripheral devices installed.
*15: When the external account module is installed.
*16: When the external account module or application communication module is installed.
2.
Paper JAM code
A. PCU JAM cause
Disabled
Disabled
All disabled
All disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
See "TO THE
ADMINISTRATOR
OF THE MACHINE"
in the Safety Guide.
Code
NO_JAM_CAUSE
NO_MATCH
STOP_JAM
TRAY1
CPFD1_S1
CPFD1_N2
CPFD1_N3
CPFD1_N4
CPFD1_S2
CPFD1_S3
CPFD1_S4
TRAY2
CPFD2_N3
CPFD2_N4
Code content
No jam. Also used to cancel a jam.
Parameter no matching
Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
Cassette 1 paper feed JAM
(CPFD1 not-reached JAM)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
Cassette 2 paper feed JAM
(CPFD2 not-reached JAM)
CPFD2 Not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Code
CPFD2_S2
CPFD2_S3
CPFD2_S4
PPD1_N1
PPD1_N2
PPD1_N3
PPD1_N4
PPD1_NM
PPD1_NL
PPD1_NA
PPD1_S1
PPD1_S2
PPD1_S3
PPD1_S4
PPD1_SM
PPD1_SL
PPD1_SA
PPD2_N1
PPD2_N2
PPD2_N3
PPD2_N4
PPD2_NM
PPD2_NL
PPD2_NA
PPD2_S1
PPD2_S2
PPD2_S3
PPD2_S4
PPD2_SM
PPD2_SL
PPD2_SA
PPD2_PRI
PPD2_DRUM
POD1_N
POD1_S
POD1_FUS
POD2_N
POD2_S
POD3_N
POD3_S
APPD1_N
APPD1_S
APPD2_N
APPD2_S
TRAY3
DPFD1_N4
DPFD1_S3
DPFD1_S4
DPFD2_S4
TRAY4
MFT
MPFD_S
LCC
LPFD_SL
SIZE_ILG
MTR_ILG
PDPPD1_N
PDPPD1_S
PDPPD2_N
PDPPD2_S
FPPD1_N
FPPD1_S
FPPD2_N
FPPD2_S
FPDD_S
FSTPLJ
FPNCHJ
FDOP
Code content
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM
(Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM
(Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout)
PPD2 JAM (Drum lock detection)
POD1 not-reached JAM
POD1 remaining JAM
POD1 JAM (Detection of twining to fusing)
POD2 remaining JAM
POD3 remaining JAM
APPD1 not-reached JAM
APPD1 remaining JAM
APPD2 not-reached JAM
APPD2 remaining JAM
Cassette 3 (Desk 1) paper feed JAM
DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
Cassette 4 (Desk 2) paper feed JAM
Manual feed tray paper feed JAM
(MPFD not-reached)
MPFD remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached)
LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
Size illegal JAM
Motor driver trouble JAM
Paper pass inlet port not-reached JAM
Paper pass inlet port remaining JAM
Paper pass outlet port not-reached JAM
Paper pass outlet port remaining JAM
Finisher inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
Finisher inlet port sensor remaining JAM
Saddle section not-reached JAM
Saddle section remaining JAM
Bundle exit remaining JAM
Staple JAM
Punch JAM
Finisher door open JAM
Code
FIN_TIME
FIN_PAOF
FPATPD_S
FPPD3_N
FPPD3_S
CPFD2_DESK
PPD1_LCC
PPD2_FIN
FSSMJ
FPDMJ
FSDMJ
FGMJ
FSPTMJ
Code content
Finisher paper fast delivery JAM
Paper spec data reception overflow
Saddle transport remaining JAM
Saddle paper exit not-reached JAM
Saddle paper exit remaining JAM
CPFD2 JAM
(Desk communication abnormality detection)
PPD1 JAM
(LCC communication abnormality detection)
PPD2 JAM
(Finisher communication abnormality detection)
Stapler shift motor JAM
Paper exit motor JAM
Saddle motor JAM
Gripper motor JAM
Saddle paper transport motor JAM
B. SCU JAM cause

Code
NO_JAM_CAUSE
NO_MATCH
STOP_JAM
SPPD1_N
SPPD1_S
SPPD2_N
SPPD2_S
SPPD3_N
SPPD3_S
SPPD4_N
SPPD4_S
SPPD5_N
SPPD5_S
SPRDMD_S
SPSD_SCN
SPPD2_NR
SPPD2_SR
ICU_REQ
P_SHORT
Code content
No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
Parameter no matching
Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
SPPD1 not-reached JAM
SPPD1 remaining JAM
SPPD2 remaining JAM
SPPD3 remaining JAM
SPPD4 remaining JAM
SPPD5 remaining JAM
SPRDMD remaining JAM
Exposure start notification timer end
SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
ICU factor stop JAM
Short size JAM
3.
MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)
MX-3100N
[A]
EXTERNAL OUTFIT
(2)
Rear cabinet
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
1)
Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
Disassembly and assembly
A. Cabinet
2
e
l
i
m
a
n
r
(3)
p
h
g
1)
Left cabinet rear lower/Left cabinet

o
b
q
c
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
(1)
1)
Front cabinet
Rear cabinet
Left cabinet rear lower
Left cabinet
Upper cabinet right
Upper cabinet left
Upper cabinet rear cover
Upper cabinet rear
Front cabinet upper
Operation panel base plate
Right cabinet front
Right connection cabinet
Right cabinet rear cover
Right cabinet rear
Paper exit cover
Paper exit tray cabinet
Left cabinet rear
Frame cover
2)
Remove the desk connection lid (A). Remove the screw, and
remove the left cabinet rear lower (B) and the left cabinet (C).
C
B
2
4
A
1
Front cabinet
Remove the front cabinet band. Remove the front cabinet
hinge. Remove the front cabinet.
MX-3100N EXTERNAL OUTFIT A 1
(4)
1)
Upper cabinet right/Upper cabinet left
(6)
Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
the table glass (C).
Front cabinet upper/Operation panel base plate
1)
Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
front cabinet upper.
2)
Remove the screw, and remove the operation panel base

plate.
(7)
Right cabinet front/Right connection cabinet/Right

cabinet rear cover/Right cabinet rear
2)
Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet right (A) and
the upper cabinet left (B).
B
(5)
1)
Upper cabinet rear cover/Upper cabinet rear

Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid (A). Remove the
screw, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover (B).
1)
Remove the front cabinet upper.
2)
Open the right door and the right cabinet lower.
A
1
1
2
2)
Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the

earth wire. Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet
rear.
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet front (A).
Remove the screw, and remove the right connection cabinet
(B). Remove the ozone filter cover (C). Remove the screw, and
remove the right cabinet rear cover (D). Remove the desk connection lid (E). Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet rear (F).
(9)
Frame cover
1)
Remove the waste toner box, and open the drum positioning
unit.
2)
3)
Remove the front cabinet upper.
4)
Remove the screw, and remove the frame cover.
1
6
4
3
C
F
5
E
(8)
1)
Paper exit cover/Paper exit tray cabinet/Left

cabinet rear
Remove the paper exit cover (A). Open the front cabinet, and
remove the screw.
Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet (B).
Remove the screw, and remove the left cabinet rear (C).
1
A
C
CN13
VBUS
FP_DFP_D+
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN6
CN12
CR2 MOTHER PWB
CN14
MX-3100N OPERATION PANEL B 1
CN14
NC
D-GND
B14B-PHDSS-B
nRES_MFPC_SCN
CN3
14 nPOF_SCN
RXD_SCN
13
12 LCD_SEL3
11 nCTS_SCN
10 LCD_SEL1
TXD_SCN
9
LCD_SEL0
8
7
nRTS_SCN
LCD_SEL2
6
5
nRES_SCN
4 nLCD_DISP
3 nRES_MFPC_SCN
2
NC
1
D-GND
B14B-PHDSS-B
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB
CN12
1
5VEXT
D-GND
2
3
OCSW
4
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6P-PH-H-S
CN10
5VEXT
D-GND
OCSW
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED 2
1
2
3
GND
1
GND
2
GND
7
29
GND
39
GND
40
GND
25
3.3V
19 3.3V_EXT
23
5V_EXT
3
24V_EXT
24V_EXT
5
/YL(Y1)
37
35
XH(X1)
33
YH(Y2)
/XL(X2)
31
27
SC_TEMP
21
VCONT
17
/CCFT
15 PNL_SEL0
13 PNL_SEL1
11 PNL_SEL2
9
PNL_SEL3
36
DISP
501571-4029
CN1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
23
GND
22
GND
GND
21
20
GND
GND
19
GND
18
17
3.3V
3.3V_EXT 16
5V_EXT 15
24V_EXT 14
24V_EXT 13
/YL(Y1)
12
XH(X1)
11
YH(Y2)
10
/XL(X2)
9
SC_TEMP 8
VCONT
7
6
/CCFT
PNL_SEL0 5
PNL_SEL1 4
PNL_SEL2 3
PNL_SEL3 2
DISP
1
501190-5029
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
+3.3V
NC
+3.3V
+3.3V
UD/LR
ENAB
F-GND
Vsync
D-GND
Hsync
D-GND
B5
B4
B3
D-GND
B2
B1
B0
D-GND
G5
G4
G3
D-GND
G2
G1
G0
D-GND
R5
R4
R3
D-GND
R2
R1
R0
NC
D-GND
D-GND
CK
D-GND
D-GND
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
+3.3V
NC
+3.3V
+3.3V
NC
ENAB
F-GND
Vsync
D-GND
Hsync
D-GND
B5
B4
B3
D-GND
B2
B1
B0
D-GND
G5
G4
G3
D-GND
G2
G1
G0
D-GND
R5
R4
R3
D-GND
R2
R1
R0
NC
D-GND
D-GND
CK
D-GND
D-GND
5
GND
4
CCFT
3
+24V
2
+24V
GND
1
B5B-PAS K
TOUCH PANEL
nPOF_SCN
RXD_SCN
LCD_SEL3
nCTS_SCN
LCD_SEL1
TXD_SCN
LCD_SEL0
nRTS_SCN
LCD_SEL2
nRES_SCN
nLCD_DISP
D-GND
6
+3.3V
5
+5VN
4
+12V
2
+24V2
1
3
P-GND
B6P-VH
D-GND
LCD_DATA3 +
LCD_DATA3 D-GND
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLKD-GND
LCD_DATA2 +
LCD_DATA2 D-GND
LCD_DATA1 +
LCD_DATA1 D-GND
LCD_DATA0 +
LCD_DATA0 -
PO SW
PWB
10
6
8
16
12
14
22
18
20
28
24
26
34
30
32
CN4
GND
5
CCFT
4
3
+24V
+24V
2
GND
1
BM05B-GHS-TBT
CN3
/YL(Y1)
4
XH(X1)
3
YH(Y2)
2
/XL(X2)
1
52271-0469
/CCFT
2
+CCFT
1
S02(8.0)B-BHS
MX-3100N
[B]
OPERATION PANEL
D-GND
6
+3.3V
5
+5VN
4
+12V
3
+24V2
2
P-GND
1
B6P-VH
CN11
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
DF1B-24Pin
D-GND
1
D-GND
2
3 nPWRSW
B3P-PH-H-S
CR2 MFP-OPE PWB
7
8
9
5V2
4
6
D-GND
12 nINFO_LED
WU_LED
8
POW_LED
10
nWU_KEY
14
501190-2029
1
GND
GND
2
17
5V_EXT
20
GND
18 3.3V_EXT
16
/BZR
19
/KEYIN
15 SEG0LEDBPR
13 SEG1LEDCRR
11
SEG2D0
9
/F0D1
/F1D2
7
5
/F2G0
/F3G1
3
6
GND
PD
5
4
5V_EXT
PDSEL0
1
PDSEL1
2
PDSEL2
3
B6P-PH-H-S
CN
CN1
10
D-GND
LCD_DATA3 + 11
LCD_DATA3 - 12
15
D-GND
13
LCD_CLK+
14
LCD_CLKD-GND
16
LCD_DATA2 + 17
LCD_DATA2 - 18
D-GND
21
LCD_DATA1 + 19
LCD_DATA1 - 20
22
D-GND
LCD_DATA0 + 23
LCD_DATA0 - 24
B24B-PHDSS-B
CN13
1
2
3
4
5
6
29
28
27
26
25
24
GND
50
GND
49
5V_EXT 48
GND
47
3.3V_EXT 39
/BZR
38
/KEYIN
37
36
SEG0LEDBPR
35
SEG1LEDCRR
SEG2D0 34
/F0D1
33
32
/F1D2
/F2G0
31
/F3G1
30
501190-5029
GND
PD
5V_EXT
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
PDSEL2
USB I/F PWB
VBUS1
D1D1+
GND
GND
D-GND
D-GND
nPWRSW
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
VBUS
DD+
GND
GND
BM05B-GHS-TBT
CN
5
4
3
2
1
7
8
9
P
2
3
4
5
6
3
9
8
PA-6pi n
VBUS
DD+
GND
SHIELD
9
3.3VPD
D-GND
3
D-GND
5
7
D-GND
D-GND
11
13
D-GND
B16B-PHDSS-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
LR
2
3
4
5
6
ORS-PD
PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SCANCLKOUT- 10
SCANCLKOUT+ 11
D-GND
12
SCANDATA3 - 13
SCANDATA3 + 14
15
D-GND
B15P-PH-K-S
1
5V2
2
D-GND
nINFO_LED
4
nWU_LED
5
nPOW_LED
6
nWU_KEY
7
BM10B-GHS-TBT
OTHER
CN19
VBUS
D2D2+
DGND
DGND
VBUS
D3D3+
DGND
DGND
1.
NM MODEL
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
A. 8.5 inch operation panel
OCSW
LCD
BACK LIGHT
3
5
1
6
PWRSW
INVERTER PWB
8.5-LVDS PWB
SRA-21T-4
F.G.
Signal
OCSW
PWRSW
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name
Original cover SW
Function/Operation
Document size detection timing switch
Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.
Name
MFP OPE-P PWB
LVDS PWB
Document detection light receiving PWB
LCD INV PWB
USB connector PWB
Function/Operation
Detects the pressed key on the operation panel.
Receives light from the document detection light emitting PWB to detect the document size.
Emits light for detection of the document size.
Emits the document size detection LED lights.
For USB connecting
CN13
VBUS
FP_DFP_D+
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
CN19
VBUS
D2D2+
DGND
DGND
VBUS
D3D3+
DGND
DGND
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN6
CN12
CR2 MOTHER PWB
CN14
CN14
NC
D-GND
B14B-PHDSS-B
nRES_MFPC_SCN
CN3
14 nPOF_SCN
RXD_SCN
13
12 LCD_SEL3
11 nCTS_SCN
10 LCD_SEL1
TXD_SCN
9
LCD_SEL0
8
7
nRTS_SCN
LCD_SEL2
6
5
nRES_SCN
4 nLCD_DISP
3 nRES_MFPC_SCN
2
NC
1
D-GND
B14B-PHDSS-B
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB
CN12
1
5VEXT
D-GND
2
3
OCSW
24VEXT
4
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6P-PH-H-S
CN10
5VEXT
D-GND
OCSW
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED 2
1
2
3
GND
1
GND
2
GND
7
29
GND
39
GND
40
GND
25
3.3V
19 3.3V_EXT
23
5V_EXT
3
24V_EXT
24V_EXT
5
37
/YL(Y1)
35
XH(X1)
33
YH(Y2)
31
/XL(X2)
27
SC_TEMP
VCONT
21
17
/CCFT
15 PNL_SEL0
13 PNL_SEL1
11 PNL_SEL2
9
PNL_SEL3
36
DISP
501571-4009
CN1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
23
22
GND
GND
21
20
GND
GND
19
18
GND
17
3.3V
3.3V_EXT 16
5V_EXT 15
24V_EXT 14
24V_EXT 13
/YL(Y1)
12
XH(X1)
11
YH(Y2)
10
9
/XL(X2)
SC_TEMP 8
7
VCONT
6
/CCFT
PNL_SEL0 5
PNL_SEL1 4
PNL_SEL2 3
PNL_SEL3 2
DISP
1
501190-5029
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
52030-2629
V0
LP
D-GND
CP
D-GND
3.3V_EXT
M
D0
D1
D-GND
D2
D3
D-GND
DISP
VEE
CN3
/YL(Y1)
1
XH(X1)
2
3
YH(Y2)
/XL(X2)
4
52271-0469
CN4
24V_EXT
3
D-GND
2
/CCFT
1
S3B-PH-SM4-TB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
V0
LP
D-GND
CP
D-GND
3.3V_EXT
M
D0
D1
D-GND
D2
D3
D-GND
DISP
VEE
1
24V_EXT
2
D-GND
/CCFT
3
S3B-PH-K-S
/CCFT
2
+CCFT
1
S02(8.0)B-BHS
TOUCH PANEL
nPOF_SCN
RXD_SCN
LCD_SEL3
nCTS_SCN
LCD_SEL1
TXD_SCN
LCD_SEL0
nRTS_SCN
LCD_SEL2
nRES_SCN
nLCD_DISP
D-GND
6
5
+3.3V
4
+5VN
2
+12V
1
+24V2
3
P-GND
B6P-VH
D-GND
LCD_DATA3 +
LCD_DATA3 D-GND
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLKD-GND
LCD_DATA2 +
LCD_DATA2 D-GND
LCD_DATA1 +
LCD_DATA1 D-GND
LCD_DATA0 +
LCD_DATA0 -
PO SW
PWB
10
6
8
16
12
14
22
18
20
28
24
26
34
30
32
D-GND
1
D-GND
2
3 nPWRSW
B3P-PH-H-S
5V2
4
D-GND
6
12 nINFO_LED
WU_LED
8
POW_LED
10
nWU_KEY
14
501190-2029
1
GND
GND
2
17
5V_EXT
20
GND
18 3.3V_EXT
16
/BZR
/KEYIN
19
15 SEG0LEDBPR
13 SEG1LEDCRR
11
SEG2D0
9
/F0D1
/F1D2
7
5
/F2G0
/F3G1
3
GND
6
5
PD
4
5V_EXT
1
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
2
PDSEL2
3
B6P-PH-H-S
CN
BACK LIGHT
6
D-GND
+3.3V
5
+5VN
4
+12V
3
+24V2
2
P-GND
1
B6P-VH
7
8
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
24
24
DF1B-24Pin
CN11
10
D-GND
LCD_DATA3 + 11
LCD_DATA3 - 12
15
D-GND
13
LCD_CLK+
14
LCD_CLKD-GND
16
LCD_DATA2 + 17
LCD_DATA2 - 18
21
D-GND
LCD_DATA1 + 19
LCD_DATA1 - 20
22
D-GND
LCD_DATA0 + 23
LCD_DATA0 - 24
B24B-PHDSS-B
7
8
9
CN13
1
2
3
4
5
6
29
28
27
26
25
24
50
GND
49
GND
5V_EXT 48
47
GND
3.3V_EXT 39
38
/BZR
37
/KEYIN
SEG0LEDBPR
36
35
SEG1LEDCRR
SEG2D0 34
/F0D1
33
/F1D2
32
/F2G0
31
/F3G1
30
501190-5029
GND
PD
5V_EXT
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
PDSEL2
USB I/F PWB
VBUS1
D1D1+
GND
GND
CR2 MFP-OPE PWB
3
9
8
VBUS
DD+
GND
GND
BM05B-GHS-TBT
CN
5
4
3
2
1
CN1
D-GND
D-GND
nPWRSW
P
2
3
4
5
6
9
3.3VPD
D-GND
3
D-GND
5
7
D-GND
D-GND
11
13
D-GND
B16B-PHDSS-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
PA-6pi n
VBUS
DD+
GND
SHIELD
ORS-PD
PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SCANCLKOUT- 10
SCANCLKOUT+ 11
D-GND
12
SCANDATA3 - 13
SCANDATA3 + 14
D-GND
15
B15P-PH-K-S
5V2
1
D-GND
2
nINFO_LED
4
nWU_LED
5
nPOW_LED
6
nWU_KEY
7
LR
2
3
4
5
6
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
BM10B-GHS-TBT
OTHER
NM MODEL
B. 8.1 inch operation panel
OCSW
LCD
1
6
PWRSW
INVERTER PWB
8.1-LVDS PWB
SRA-21T-4
F.G.
Signal
OCSW
PWRSW
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
2.
Name
Original cover SW
Function/Operation
Document size detection timing switch
Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.
Name
MFP OPE-P PWB
LVDS PWB
LCD INV PWB
USB connector PWB
Function/Operation
Detects the pressed key on the operation panel.
Receives light from the document detection light emitting PWB to detect the document size.
Emits light for detection of the document size.
Emits the document size detection LED lights.
For USB connecting
3.
Operational descriptions
A. 8.5 inch operation panel unit
A. Outline
The operation panel is composed of the MFP OPE PWB, the LCD
INV PWB, the LVDS PWB, the USB CN PWB, the LCD unit, ansd
the operation key, and is used to operation the machine, to set and
to displat the status.
The LCD is provided in two types: 8.5 inch color LCD and 8.1 inch
monochorme LCD. They differ in the operations. They are connected with the document detection light receiving PWB for detection of the documetn size. They receive light from the document
deteciton light emitting PWB attahced to the rear frame side,
detecting the document size.
g
f
a
b
The power switch of the operation panel outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power.
The USB connecter can be connected with the USB memory, the
USB keyboard, the IC card writer, the IC card reader, and he USB
hub, sending these electronic data to the mother PWB.
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
The MX-2600N and the MX-3100N are provided with the keyboard
(standard for North America, option for other than SEN) under the
operation panel unit, allowing text input.
LCD INV PWB

POWER SW PWB
MFP OPE-P PWB
USB connector PWB
LVDS PWB
LCD module
Touch panel
1)
Remove the operation panel base plate.
2)
Remove the screw, and put the operation panel upside down.
3)
Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the earth

wire, and remove the operation panel unit.
(1)
LCD INV PWB/POWER SW PWB/MFP OPE-P PWB
(3)
LVDS PWB
1)
Remove the operation panel unit.
1)
2)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the

LCD INV PWB and the POWER SW PWB.
2)
Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS
shield sheet.
3)
Remove the screw and the earth wire. Peel off the Mylar, and
remove the earth sheet and the MFP OPE-P PWB.
3)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and the earth
wire. Remove the LVDS PWB.
* When the LVDS PWB is removed, the earth plate for the
LCD is also removed. Be careful not to lose it.
(2)
USB connector PWB
1)
2)
Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the USB
connector PWB.
(4)
1)
LCD module
2)
Remove the LVDS shield sheet.
3)

Mylar.
4)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the LCD holder.
5)
Remove the LCD module.
(5)
3)

Mylar.
4)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove

the LCD unit.
5)
Remove the touch panel.
Touch panel
1)
2)
Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS
shield sheet.
B. 8.1 inch operation panel unit
(1)
POWER SW PWB/MFP OPE-P PWB
1)
2)
Remove the screw, and remove the POWER SW PWB.
3)
Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the MFP
OPE-P PWB.
e
b
f
d
g
a
c
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
POWER SW PWB
MFP OPE-P PWB
USB connector PWB
LCD INV PWB
LVDS PWB
LCD module
Touch panel
1)
Remove the operation panel base plate.
2)
Remove the screw, and put the operation panel upside down.
(2)
3)
USB connector PWB
1)
2)
Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the USB
connector PWB.

the operation panel unit.
(3)
LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB
(5)
1)
1)
Touch panel
2)

the LCD INV PWB (A) and the LVDS PWB (B).
2)

the LCD unit.
3)
Remove the touch panel.
* When the LCD INV PWB and the LVDS PWB are removed,
the earth wire for the LCD is also removed. Be careful not to
lose it.
(4)
LCD module
1)
2)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the LCD holder.
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the LCD module.
C. Keyboard unit
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the keytop unit.
4)
Remove the screw, and slide and remove the operation base
plate.
5)
Remove the screw. Disconnect the connector. Remove the

keyboard.
b
a
Parts
a
b
c
(1)
Keyboard
USB conversion PWB
USB hub PWB
Keyboard/USB conversion PWB
1)
2)
Pull out the keytop unit. Remove the black sheet, and disconnect the connector.
6)
(2)
Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Remove the screw
and the earth wire, and remove the USB conversion PWB.
USB hub PWB
1)
Remove the rear cabinet.
2)
Remove the screw and disconnect the connector. Remove the

USB hub PWB.
MX-3100N
[C]
RSPF SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
A. Paper feed section

CN H
SPRMA/
1
+24VPD
2
SPRMA
3
SPRMB
4
+24VPD
5
SPRMB/
6
B6B-PH-K-R
CN E
+24VPD_SRRC
1
SRRC/
2
3
SPED
GND
4
+5V_SPED
5
+5VPD
6
SPPD1
7
GND
8
+24VPD
9
GND
10
(NC)
+24VPD_SW
11
B11B-PH-K-S
PALR-08VF / PAP-08V-S
1
SPED
1
2
GND
2
3
+5V_SPED
3
4
+5VPD
4
5
5
SPPD1
6
GND
6
7
+24VPD
7
8
+24VPD_SW
8
179228-3
1
2
3
SPED
GND
+5V_SPED
179228-3(BLACK)
1
+5VPD
2
SPPD1
3
GND
PS-187-2V
1
+24VPD
2
+24VPD_SW
SCOV
SPRM
SPPD1
SPFC
SPED
RSPF DRIVER
PWB
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
179228-3
1
SPLS1
2
GND
3
+5VPD_SPLS1
CN D
SPLS1
1
GND
2
+5VPD_SPLS1
3
SPLS2
4
GND
5
+5VPD_SPLS2
6
AVCC
7
SPWS
8
GND
9
SPFC/
10
(NC)
GND
11
+24VPD_SW_SPFC
12
B12B-PH-K-S
179228-3
1
SPLS2
2
GND
3
+5VPD_SPLS2
SMP-03V-NC / SMP-03V-NC
1
1
AVCC
2
2
SPWS
3
3
GND
SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
1
SPFC/
1
+24VPD_SW_SPFC
2
2
B. Reversing section
179228-3(BLACK)
+5VPD
1
SPPD5
2
GND
3
VHPGP1A73A+-18
SPFM
SPPD5
SGS
SPPD4
MX-3100N RSPF SECTION C 1
SPRM
SPRMA/
+24VPD
SPRMA
SPRMB
+24VPD
SPRMB/
CN H
1
2
3
4
5
6
B6B-PH-K-R
CN C
1
+24VPD_SGS
2
(NC)
3
SGS/
B3B-PH-K-S
(NC)
CN B
1
GND
2
STMPU
3
STMPS/
4
+24VPD_STMPS
5
+5VPD
6
SPPD4
7
GND
B7B-PH-K-R
179228-3(BLACK)
+5VPD
1
SPPD4
2
GND
3
VHPGP1A73A+-18
CN G
1
+5VPD
2
SPPD2
3
GND
4
+5VPD
5
SPPD3
6
GND
7
SOCD
8
GND
9
+5VPD_SOCD
10
+5VPD
11
SPPD5
12
GND
13
(NC)
(NC)
B13B-PH-K-S
1
+5VPD
1
2
SPPD2
2
3
GND
3
4
+5VPD
4
5
SPPD3
5
6
GND
6
7
SOCD
7
8
GND
8
9
+5VPD_SOCD
9
10
+5VPD
10
11
SPPD5
11
12
GND
12
CN F
1
2
3
4
5
6
B6B-PH-K-S
SPFMA/
+24VPD
SPFMA
SPFMB
+24VPD
SPFMB/
RSPF DRIVER PWB
C. Transport section
RSPF DRIVER PWB
CN F
SPFMA/
1
+24VPD
2
SPFMA
3
SPFMB
4
+24VPD
5
SPFMB/
6
B6B-PH-K-S
CN E
+24VPD_SRRC
1
SRRC/
2
3
SPED
GND
4
+5V_SPED
5
+5VPD
6
SPPD1
7
GND
8
+24VPD
9
GND
10
+24VPD_SW
11
B11B-PH-K-S
CN G
+5VPD
1
SPPD2
2
GND
3
+5VPD
4
SPPD3
5
GND
6
SOCD
7
GND
8
+5VPD_SOCD
9
+5VPD
10
SPPD5
11
GND
12
(NC)
13
(NC)
B13B-PH-K-S
2.
SRRC
SMP-02V-NC /
SMR-02V-N
1
+24VPD_SRRC
1
2
SRRC/
2
SPFM
SPPD3
1
+5VPD
1
2
SPPD2
2
GND
3
3
+5VPD
4
4
SPPD3
5
5
GND
6
6
SOCD
7
7
GND
8
8
+5VPD_SOCD
9
9
+5VPD
10
10
SPPD5
11
11
GND
12
12
179228-3(BLACK)
1
+5VPD
2
SPPD2
3
GND
VHPGP1A73A+-18
SPPD2
179228-3(BLACK)
1
+5VPD
2
SPPD3
3
GND
VHPGP1A73A+-18
179228-3
1
SOCD
2
GND
3
+5VPD_SOCD
VHPGP1S73P+-18
SOCD
A. Document size detection

(1)
Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray

The document width is detected with the SPF document width sensor (SPWS), and the document length is detected with the SPF
document length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is
judged from the document width and the document length according to the table below. When documents of different sizes are
mixed and set on the document tray, the largest document size is
detected.
Document size
AB series
Inch series
A5
B5
11" x 8.5"
A4
B5R
A4R
8.5" x 13"
B4
A3
11" x 17"
8.5" x 5.5"
11" x 8.5"
A4
11" x 8.5"R
8.5" x 13"
8.5" x 14"
A3
11" x 17"
Document length sensor

SPLS1
SPLS2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
B. Paper feed transport operation

(1)
1)
2)
7)
Preliminary paper feed completion (Second sheet)
8)
Paper feed start (Second sheet)
9)
Scan completion (First sheet)/Resist operation (Second sheet)
Single-side scan
Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
Preliminary paper feed start (First sheet)

Pickup roller falling
3)
Preliminary paper feed completion/Paper feed start (First

sheet)
10) Scan start (Second sheet)

4)
Resist operation (First sheet)
5)
Scan start (First sheet)
6)
Preliminary paper feed start (Second sheet)
11) Paper exit completion (First sheet)
12) Scan completion (Second sheet)
13) Paper exit completion (Second sheet)
5)
Scan start (First sheet front surface)
14) Pickup roller rising
6)
Gate falling (First sheet front surface)
7)
Scan completion (First sheet front surface)
8)
Reverse stop
(2)
Duplex scan
1)
2)

3)
4)
Gate rising

sheet)
9)
Resist operation (First sheet front surface)
10) Reverse after resist operation
Reverse start
11) Resist operation (First sheet back surface)
17) Document transport continuation
12) Scan start (First sheet back surface)
18) Preliminary paper feed start (Second sheet)
13) Gate falling (First sheet back surface)
19) Preliminary paper feed completion/Paper feed start (Second

sheet)
14) Scan completion (First sheet back surface)
20) Resist operation (Second sheet front surface)
15) Reverse stop gate rising

21) Paper exit completion (First sheet)
16) Reverse start

22) Scan start (Second sheet front surface)
23) Same operations as "5) Scan start (First sheet front surface)"
and later.
(3)
Stamping operation
1)
2)

3)

sheet)
4)
Resist operation (First sheet)
5)
Scan start (First sheet)
6)
Scan completion (First sheet)
7)
Stop at the stamping position/Stamping operation (First sheet)
8)
Paper exit start (First sheet)/Preliminary paper feed start (Second sheet)
C. RSPF mixed document select switch

This machine is provided with the random paper feed function
which allows feeding documents of different sizes.
The random paper feed can be used only for single surface document of the following combinations.
Destination
AB series
Inch width
9)
Paper exit completion (First sheet)
Combinations for random paper feed

A3 and B4
B4 and A4R
A4 and B5
B5 and A5
8.5" and 11" width
To enable the mixed document mode, set the mixed document

select switch to ON. To disable le, turn it OFF.
10) Stop at the stamping position/Stamping operation (Second

sheet)
ON
OFF
11) Paper exit start (Second sheet)
3.
4)
5)
Remove the stopper.
6)
Disconnect the connector. Remove the paper feed PG holder,

and remove the document tray unit.
A. Document tray unit
Parts
SPF document with sensor
1)
Remove screw from the bottom of the RSPF unit.
2)
Open the paper feed unit, and remove the screw.
2
1
1
3
3)
(1)
SPF document with sensor
1)
Remove the document tray unit.
2)
Remove the document tray lower.
B. Paper feed unit
Parts
a
1)
3)
SPF cover SW
Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.
2)
Remove the transport unit.
3)
Remove the earth wire. Remove the spring and the paper feed
PG holder, and remove the paper feed unit and the upper PG
link arm.
Remove the SPF document width sensor.
(1)
SPF cover SW
1)
2)
3)
Remove the paper feed unit.
4)
Remove the screws.
5)
6)
Remove the upper cover.
3)
Remove screw from the bottom of the RSPF unit.
4)
Remove the screws.
5)
Remove the SPF cover SW.
C. Transport unit
1)
2)
Remove the connecter.
D. Reversing section
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the resin E-ring and the bearing. Remove the drive
unit, and remove each part.
(1)
Parts
Document paper exit gate solenoid
Document paper exit gate solenoid
1)
2)
3)
Remove the solenoid adjustment plate. Remove the SPF document paper exit gate solenoid.
* When installing, insert the pin of the SPF document paper
exit gate solenoid into the gate.
(1)
1)
2)
Remove the E-ring, and remove the SPF paper feed clutch.
E. Drive unit
(2)
1)
a
b
c
d

2)
3)
Remove the E-ring, and remove the SPF resist roller clutch.
Parts
SPF transport motor
(3)
F. Base tray section
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the drive unit.
5)
Remove the SPF paper feed reverse motor.
Parts
a
(1)
(4)
SPF transport motor
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the drive unit.
5)
Loosen the screw of the tension holder to reduce the tension of

the belt. Remove the SPF transport motor.
RSPF drive PWB
RSPF drive PWB
1)
2)
Remove the RSPF drive PWB.
MX-3100N
[D]
SCANNER SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
MHPS
5
4
6
3
9
MIM
7
CLI
2
1
3
8
P-GND
5
4
P-GND
3
CL
2
24VPD
24VPD
1
5597-05APB
CCD PWB
Signal
CLI
MHPS
MIM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name
Scanner lamp
Scanner home position sensor
Scanner motor
Name
Pulley belt
Pulley
Scanner drive wire
Reflector
No. 2 mirror
No. 3 mirror
Lens
CCD PWB
Idle gear
Function/Operation
Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp)
Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
Function/Operation
Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley.
Drives the scanner drive wire.
Transmits the scanner motor power to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
Condenses the copy lamp light.
Inducts the document image into the No. 3 mirror.
Inducts the document image into the lens.
Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal.
Transmits the scanner motor drive power to the belt.
MX-3100N SCANNER SECTION D 1
1
MiM_A
2
MiM_B
3
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
4
B4P-PH-H-S
GND
1
AFE_RDD
2
AFE_WRD
3
AFE_SCLK
4
AFE_CS
5
6 /RES_CCDAD
7
GND
8
3.3V
9
3.3V
3.3V
10
3.3V
11
3.3V
12
3.3V
13
GND
14
5V
15
5V
16
5V
17
GND
18
10V
19
10V
20
GND
21
22
RA23
RA+
24
GND
25
RBRB+
26
GND
27
RC28
29
RC+
30
GND
31
CLK32
CLK+
GND
33
RD34
RD+
35
GND
36
RE37
RE+
38
GND
39
40 AFE_CSTG
41
GND
FI-RE41S-VF
CN5
CN2
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB
41
GND
AFE_RDD
40
AFE_WRD
39
AFE_SCLK
38
AFE_CS 37
/RES_CCDAD 36
GND
35
3.3V
34
3.3V
33
3.3V
32
3.3V
31
3.3V
30
3.3V
29
GND
28
5V
27
5V
26
5V
25
GND
24
10V
23
10V
22
GND
21
RA20
RA+
19
GND
18
RB17
RB+
16
15
GND
14
RC13
RC+
GND
12
CLK11
CLK+
10
GND
9
RD8
RD+
7
GND
6
RE5
RE+
4
GND
3
2
AFE_CSTG
GND
1
FI-RE41S-VF
CN9
2
P-GND
5
P-GND
4
CL
3
24VPD
2
1
24VPD
5597-05CPB7F
1
MHPS
D-GND
2
3
5V
BM03B-GHS-TBT
3
2
1
EHR-3
MHPS
D-GND
5V
CL INVERTOR
CN4
2.
A. Outline
B
This section performs the following functions.

1)
Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the

contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of
three lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog).
2)
The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital signals by the A/D converter.
3)
The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process section (scanner control PWB).
G
R
B. Detail description
(1)
Optical section drive
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner

motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by
the drive wires.
B
(Image data for 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
(2)
Scanner lamp drive
R
Red component
image data
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal
sent from the scanner control PWB.
(3)
(4)
Image scan/color separation
G
Green component
image data
B
Blue component
image data
Image signal A/D conversion
Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three
lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog).
1)
The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted

into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
The color components of document images are extracted to R, G,

and B separately by the three kinds of CCD elements (R,G,B).
2)
The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image

process section.
The red CCD extracts the red component of document images, the
green CCD green the components, and the blue CCD the blue
components. This operation is called the color separation.
Each color pixel has 10bit information.
CCD PWB
Analog IC
The CCD unit looks like one unit, but it includes three kinds of CCD
elements, R, G, and B.
CCD
(6 Lines)
The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by

the CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direction is performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner
motor. Document images are optically reduced by the lens and
reflected to the CCD.
Buffer
R
G
B
The scan resolution is 600 dpi.
AFE ADC LVDS
TG
Timing
Generator
(5)
Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing

the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).
3.
5)
Remove the screw, and remove the scanner unit.
A. Scanner unit
f
b
a
c
e
a
b
c
d
e
f
Parts
Scanner lamp
CL inverter PWB
CCD unit
Scanner motor
(1)
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
3)
Remove the upper cabinet right and the upper cabinet left..
4)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band.
1)
Scanner lamp/CL inverter PWB

Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
the table glass (C).
2
1
2)
Shift the lamp unit to the right end. Loosen the screw, and
remove the wire.
3)
While rotating the lamp unit, lift it. Remove the harness holder
and the flat cable, and remove the lamp unit.
(2)
1)
CCD unit
Remove the dark box cover. Disconnect the connector, and
remove the CCD unit.
2
1
4)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the lamp.
(3)
Scanner motor
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
Disconnect the connector and remove the scanner motor.
1
5)
Remove the CL inverter PWB.
(4)
1)
Remove the operation base plate.
2)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the document detection

light receiving PWB.
(5)
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear.
2)
Remove the screw, and remove the light emitting unit.
3)
Remove the document detection light emitting PWB.
MX-3100N
[E]
PAPER FEED SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
A. Manual paper feed section
DRIVER MAIN PWB

CN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
INT24V1
INT24V1
PFMB/
PFMB
PFMA
PFMA/
2
5
6
3
1
4
INT24V1
INT24V1
PFMB/
PFMB
PFMA
PFMA/
B13B-PASK-1
PCU PWB
CN1
5VN
1
D-GND
2
SIN3
3
SELIN1
4
SELIN2
5
SELIN3
6
APPD1
7
APPD2
8
APPD3
9
10
POD3
MPFD
11
5VNPD
16
MPWD
13
14
TH_M
15
HUD_M
S16B-PHDSS-B
RIGHT
DOOR I/F
PWB CN3(2/2)
1
2
R
NC (GND)
NC (5VLED)
NC (GND)
NC (GND)
NC (GND)
NC (GND)
NC (GND)
NC
MPED
11
12
17
21
23
26
30
32
7
D-GND
5VLED7
NC (FAX_D)
NC (GND)
5VLED6
8
9
1
2
3
5
4
D-GND
5VLED7
4
5
2
3
/MPGS
5VLED6
7
6
10
MPFD
MPFD
8
24V3
1
7
/MPFS
2
6
MPED
3
R
1
2
SM2P
24V3
/MPFS
1
2
3
MPED
D-GND
5VLED7
/MPUC
24V3
SM2PIN
1
2
P
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
10
7
23
8
CN7
1
13
2
16
3
15
4
18
5
17
6
10
7
19
8
15
31
30
14
28
13
P
24V3
/MPGS
/MPFS
24V3
/MPUC
24V3
QR/P4 32PIN
15
31
30
14
28
13
S
9
24V3
14
/MPGS
22
/MPFS
24V3
11
20
/MPUC
12
24V3
B22B-PHDSS
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
NC(APPD3)
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
MPWD
TH_M
HUD_M
PFM
4
/MPGS
2
1
5VLED6
5
5
24V3
1
2
D-GND
4
3
MPFD
3
R
1
2
SM2P
24V3
/MPGS
1
2
3
MPFD
D-GND
5VLED6
P
1
2
MPUC
24V3
24V3
24V3
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
4
5
6
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
APPD3
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
MPWD
TH_M
HUD_M
P
1
2
6
4
2
5
3
1
APPD2
D-GND
5VLED10
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
5
21
6
10
7
23
8
DF11-6DP-SP2
MPFS
MPFD
3
TH_D/HUD_M
2
MPED
MPGS
MPLD
MPLD2
5VLED12
16
13
18
5VN
MPWD
19
20
12
MPLD
3
14
MPLD2
1
11
5VLED12
4
10
9
5VN
MPWD
5
6
MTOP2
22
MTOP2
5VLED13
24
5VLED13
MTOP1
25
MTOP1
5VLED9
27
5VLED9
10
4
3
2
1
13
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
TH_M
5VLED4
11
12
13
14
2
1
2
3
MPLD
D-GND
5VLED12
3
2
1
5VN
MPWD
D-GND
MTOP2
D-GND
5VLED13
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
MTOP1
D-GND
5VLED9
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
TH_M
1
3
5
4
2
7
6
8
5VN
28
29
HUD_M
D-GND
14
31
TH_M
5VLED4
15
S32B-PHDSS-B
9
NC
1
8
2
NC
7
NC
3
MPLD
6
4
5
5
D-GND
4
5VLED12
6
3
5VN
7
2
MPWD
8
D-GND
9
1
DF11-8DP-SP1
MX-3100N PAPER FEED SECTION E 1
MPWD
MTOP1
MPLD
MTOP2
Signal name
CPFM
MPED
MPFD
MPDS
MPGS
MPLD
MPUC
MPWD
PFM
Name
Paper feed motor
Manual paper feed length detector
Manual paper feed tray paper width
detector
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position
detector 1
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position
detector 2
Transport motor
TH_M/HUD_M
Temperature/humidity detection
MTOP1
MTOP2
No.
1
Name
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Paper pickup roller
Torque limiter
2
3
Function/Operation
Controls open/close of the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed section.
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (Storing position)
Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (Pulling out position)
Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed section, transport between
the resist roller and the right door section.
Detects temperature and humidity.
Function/Operation
Separates paper to prevent double feed.
Sends paper to the paper transport section.
A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. /
Transports paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.
B. Tray paper feed section
PCU PWB
R
1
2
SM-2Pin
/CPFC
24V3
P
1
2
R
1
2
SM-2Pin
/CPUC1
24V3
P
1
2
R
1
2
SM-2Pin
/CPUC2
24V3
P
1
2
P-GND
/CLUM1
1
2
P-GND
/CLUM2
1
2
INT24V2
P-GND
/CPFM_GAIN
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN6
32
INT24V2
30
P-GND
28 /CPFM_GAIN
26
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D
24
22
CPFM_LD
B32B-PHDSS
/CPFC
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
/CLUM2
SM-10Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
P
CN5
/CPFC
1
2
24V3
3
/CPUC1
24V3
4
/CPUC2
5
6
24V3
7
P-GND
8
/CLUM1
9
P-GND
10
/CLUM2
B24B-PHDSS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
R
24V1
24V(RDSW)
CLUM1
CPFM
CLUD1
CPED1
2
5VNPD
CLUD1
D-GND
1
2
3
10
11
12
5VNPD
CPED1
D-GND
1
2
3
7
8
9
5VN
CPFD1
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
PHNR-12-H +
BU12P-TR-P-H
5VNPD
3
CLUD1
2
D-GND
1
P
1
3
5
5VNPD
CPED1
D-GND
6
5
4
7
9
11
5VN
CPFD1
D-GND
9
8
7
CPUC1
DF1B-32DE
5VNPD
CLUD1
D-GND
1
2
CN16
24V1
1
2
24V(RDSW)
3
24V(RDSW)
4
24V(FDSW)
B4P-VH
S
1
3
5
C N9
1
3
5
5VNPD
CLUD1
D-GND
5VNPD
CPED1
D-GND
7
9
11
7
9
11
5VNPD
CPED1
D-GND
13
15
17
5VN
CPFD1
D-GND
13
15
17
13
15
17
5VN
CPFD1
D-GND
31
30
29
5VN
DSW_C
D-GND
31
30
29
31
30
29
5VN
DSW_C
D-GND
4
CLUM2
1
3
CPUC2
DSW_R
10
9
CPFD1
CPFC
CSS1
CSPD1
5VNPD
CSPD1
D-GND
1
2
3
19
21
23
5VNPD
CSPD1
D-GND
19
21
23
19
21
23
5VNPD
CSPD1
D-GND
CSS1
D-GND
NC
NC
1
2
3
4
25
27
CSS1
D-GND
25
27
25
27
CSS1
D-GND
PHNR-9-H
BU09P-TR-P-H
5VNPD
3
2
CLUD2
D-GND
1
2
4
6
5VNPD
CLUD2
D-GND
2
4
6
2
4
6
5VNPD
CLUD2
D-GND
11
5VNPD
CLUD2
D-GND
1
2
3
7
8
9
5VNPD
CPED2
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
5VNPD
CPED2
D-GND
6
5
4
8
10
12
5VNPD
CPED2
D-GND
8
10
12
8
10
12
5VNPD
CPED2
D-GND
5VN
CPFD2
D-GND
1
2
3
1
2
3
5VN
CPFD2
D-GND
9
8
7
14
16
18
5VN
CPFD2
D-GND
14
16
18
14
16
18
5VN
CPFD2
D-GND
5VNPD
CSPD2
D-GND
1
2
3
20
22
24
5VNPD
CSPD2
D-GND
20
22
24
20
22
24
5VNPD
CSPD2
D-GND
CSS2
D-GND
NC
NC
1
2
3
4
26
28
CSS2
D-GND
26
28
CLUD2
CPED2
6
5
7
CPFD2
CSS2
12
CSPD2
11
26
CSS2
28
D-GND
B32B-PHDSS
Signal name
CLUD1
CLUD2
CLUM1
CLUM2
CPED 1
CPED 2
CPFC
CPFD1
Name
Paper feed tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper feed tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2)
Paper feed motor
Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/close detection
Function/Operation
Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray section.
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Torque limiter
5
6
7
8

9
10
11
12
Transport roller 5 (drive)

Rotating plate
Function/Operation
Always provides a certain level of resistance to the rotation of the separation roller,
preventing against double feed.
Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and the paper feed roller (No. 2 paper
feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
Transport paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2 and 3, 4 to the transport roller 8.
Lifts up the paper, and always keeps constant the paper feed position.
Transports paper from the paper feed tray 2 to the transport roller 4.
CPFD2
CPFM
CPUC1
CPUC2
CSPD1
CSPD2
CSS1
CSS2
DSW_C
2.

Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray section.
Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray section.
Tray 1 installation defection
Tray 2 installation defection
Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/close detection
A. Hand feed
B. Tray paper feed
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface,
separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it
to the paper feed roller section.
(1)
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to prevent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual
paper feed clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the
paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the resist roller by the manual
transport roller.
Paper feed front operation
Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller
falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate
stops at the specified position.
(2)
Paper feed operation
When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch

are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup timing, feeding paper.
At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper
to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
to prevent against double feed of paper.
(3)
Paper remaining detection
The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in

total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper
empty. The result is displayed.
(4)
Paper remaining quantity detection method
The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rotations of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up
operation of the paper feed tray to turning ON the upper limit
sensor.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
CPED
(paper sensor)
The no-paper detection sensor detects

the state of no remaining paper.
Turn plate
During no-paper detection
Remaining Paper
Detection Actuator
CSPD
(remaining paper detection)
1/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
3.
A. Manual paper feed unit
1)
2)
Remove the screw, and remove the connector cover. Remove

the screw and remove the ADU inner cover.
a
b
c
d
Parts
Temperature humidity sensor
Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
3)
4)
Remove the ADU cabinet F and the ADU cabinet R.
(1)
Temperature and humidity sensor/Manual paper

feed tray paper width detector
1)
Remove the manual paper feed tray unit.
2)
Remove the MF tray upper inside cover.
3)
Disengage the pawl, lift the MF tray upper and MF tray 2, and
disconnect the connector.
Remove the MF harness cover, and disconnect the connector.
2
3
4)
Remove the temperature and humidity sensor.
5)
Remove the manual paper feed tray paper width detector.
2
5)
6)
Remove the MF tray installing shaft, and remove the manual

feed tray unit.
Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed

unit.
(2)
4)
1)
Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2)
Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
Remove each part, and remove the MF drive plate.
5)
3)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the MF front plate.
Disconnect the connector, and disengage the pawl, and

remove the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
(3)
Remove the MF upper base paper guide unit.
7)
Remove the MF upper guide supporting plate.
1)
Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2)
Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
3)
6)
Remove each part, and remove the transport roller 12 (drive).
1
1
8)
Remove the paper pickup solenoid.
5)
Remove the tray paper feed unit 1, 2.
B. Tray paper feed unit

1)
Remove the right cabinet front.
2)
C. Others
3)
Remove the right lower door unit.
(1)
1)
Parts
Tray 1, 2 installation detection
Tray 1, 2 installation detection

4)
Remove the paper feed movable PG lower.
2)

tray 1, 2 installation detection unit.
3)
Disengage the pawl, and remove the tray 1, 2 installation

detection.
Remove the spring from the tray 1, 2 installation detection.
MX-3100N
[F]
PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
RRM
DRIVER MAIN PWB
INT24V1
INT24V1
RRMB/
RRMB
RRMA
RRMA/
B6P-PH-K-R
1
6
3
5
4
2
7
INT24V1
8
INT24V1
9
RRMB/
10
RRMB
11
RRMA
12
RRMA/
N,C
13
B13B-PASK-1
BU06P-TR-P-H+PHNR-06-H
4
5VNPD
3
5
PPD1
2
6
D-GND
1
3
5VNPD
4
2
PPD2
5
1
D-GND
6
CN6
10
5VNPD
12
PPD1
14
D-GND
16
5VNPD
18
PPD2
20
D-GND
B32B-PHDSS
PPD2
3
PCU PWB
PPD1
Signal name
PFM
Resist detection
Resist motor
No.
1
Resist roller (drive)
Resist roller (idle)
5VNPD
PPD1
D-GND
1
2
3
179228-3
5VNPD
PPD2
D-GND
1
2
3
179228-3
Name
Function/Operation
Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed section,
transport between the resist roller and the right door section.
Detects the paper in front of resist roller.
Detects the paper in rear of resist roller.
Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.
Name
Function/Operation
Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls the transport timing of
paper, and adjusts the relative relations between images and paper.
Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the transport
power of the transport roller.
Transports the paper to resist roller.
Transport motor
PPD1
PPD1
RRM
INT24V1
INT24V1
PFMB/
PFMB
PFMA
PFMA/
2
5
6
3
1
4
PFM
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
INT24V1
INT24V1
PFMB/
PFMB
PFMA
PFMA/
PHR-6
MX-3100N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F 1
2.
Transport paper from each paper feed section to the resist roller
with two or more transport rollers. The paper transport clutch controls ON/OFF of each transport roller. The resist roller controls the
relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images.
The resist roller controls the relative positions of the transported
paper and transfer images. The resist roller is driven by the transport motor. The relative positions of the paper and the transfer
images are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.
3.
A. Resist roller unit

1)
Remove the developing unit (K).
2)
Remove the drum unit (K).
3)
Remove the primary transfer unit.
4)
Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
5)
6)
Remove the ADU connection drive.
7)

the resist roller unit.
MX-3100N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F 2

1.
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
MX-3100N
[G] LSU SECTION
CN19
INT24V1
1
NC
2
/LSUSS_B
3
B7B-PH-K-S
4
2 3
1
5
LD PWB
D-GND
n BD
D-GND
5VN
B4B-PH-K-S
4
3
2
1
CN1
1
D-GND
2
n BD
3
D-GND
4
5VN
5
D-GND
6
LSUTH1
7
NC
B7B-PH-K-S
CN1
50
48
14
12
10
9
7
5
3
17
8
6
4
15
13
11
/SH_C1
D-GND
/SH_K1
D-GND
/SH_K2
D-GND
/LDERR_K
DT_K2+
DT_K2D-GND
VREF_K1
VREF_K2
/ENB_K
D-GND
/SH_C2
D-GND
DT_C1+
DT_C1D-GND
/LDERR_C
VREF_C1
VREF_C2
DT_C2+
DT_C2D-GND
/ENB_C
D-GND
19
LDCHK_1
21
LDCHK_2
501190-5017
CN3
3.3V CN
D-GND
5V CN
D-GND
24V
P-GND
S06B-XASK-1
LSU_ASIC_RST
CN4
5VLD
D-GND
/SCK_LSU
D-GND
/TRANS_DAT
D-GND
/RST_DAT
/TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT
TH_LSU
/PCU_TRG
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
S20B-PHDSS
CN5
CH0_N
CH0_P
D-GND
D-GND
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
D-GND
D-GND
CLCLK_N
CLCLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
D-GND
D-GND
CH4_N
CH4_P
ECLK_LSU_N
ECLK_LSU_P
D-GND
D-GND
HSYNC_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_N
S24B-PHDSS
2
1
4
3
5
6
1
2
4
3
5
6
8
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
CN4
1
8
5
7
2
4
3.3V CN
D-GND
5V CN
D-GND
24V
P-GND
6
5VLD
12
D-GND
14
/SCK_LSU
15
D-GND
/TRANS_DAT
13
18
D-GND
16
/RST_DAT
10 LSU_ASIC_RST
/TRANS_RST
11
JOBEND_INT
17
20
TH_LSU
19
/PCU_TRG
VSYNC_K_N
28
VSYNC_K_P
27
VSYNC_C_P
26
VSYNC_C_N
25
VSYNC_M_N
24
VSYNC_M_P
23
VSYNC_Y_P
22
VSYNC_Y_N
21
B28B-PHDSS
CN5
CH0_N
23
CH0_P
24
22
D-GND
21
D-GND
CH1_N
19
CH1_P
20
CH2_N
17
CH2_P
18
16
D-GND
15
D-GND
13
CLCLK_N
CLCLK_P
14
CH3_N
11
CH3_P
12
D-GND
10
D-GND
9
CH4_N
7
CH4_P
8
ECLK_LSU_N
5
ECLK_LSU_P
6
D-GND
4
D-GND
3
1
HSYNC_LSU_P
2
HSYNC_LSU_N
B24B-PHDSS
MX-3100N LSU SECTION G 1
4
3
2
1
+5V
+5V
11
9
13
4
6
8
10
12
5
3
7
16
14
18
49
47
45
43
50
48
46
41
39
37
44
42
40
35
DT_M1+
DT_M1D-GND
/LDERR_M
VREF_M1
VREF_M2
DT_M2+
DT_M2-
LDCHK_1
1
LDCHK_2
2
501571-5007
CN2
6
/BREAK
POLYCLK
5
/LOCK
4
/START
3
P-GND
2
24V1
1
B6B-PH-K-S
MOTHER PWB
D-GND
LSUTH1
NC
NC
B4B-PH-K-S
DT_K1+
DT_K1GND
n SH_K1
GND
n SH_K2
GND
n LDERR_K
DT_K2+
DT_K2GND
VREF_K1
VREF_K2
n ENB_K
40
42
44
46
23
21
25
20
24
22
17
15
19
38
38
36
34
33
31
29
32
30
28
DT_Y1+
DT_Y1D-GND
/LDERR_Y
VREF_Y1
VREF_Y2
DT_Y2+
DT_Y2D-GND
5V_LD
5V_LD
n SH_YMC1
GND
n SH_YMC2
GND
DT_C1+
DT_C1GND
n LDERR_C
VREF_C1
VREF_C2
DT_C2+
DT_C2GND
n ENB_YMC
47
45
49
32
36
34
41
39
43
26
24
22
27
25
23
20
18
16
DT_K1+
DT_K1-
DT_M1+
DT_M1GND
n LDERR_M
VREF_M1
VREF_M2
DT_M2+
DT_M2GND
35
33
37
26
30
28
29
27
31
CN7
1
2
DT_Y1+
DT_Y1GND
n LDERR_Y
VREF_Y1
VREF_Y2
DT_Y2+
DT_Y2GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
/BREAK
POLYCLK
/LOCK
/START
P-GND
24V1
B6B-PH-K-S
LSU PWB
6
7
10
9
PGM
R
P
1
1
2
2
SM-2Pin
P
R
1
1
2
2
SM-2Pin
PCU PWB
LSUSS
Signal
name
PGM
LSUSS
Polygon motor
Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.

Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name
LD PWB
Cylindrical lens
fT lens 1
fT lens 1
Reflection mirror
Cylindrical lens
Collective lens for BD
BD PWB
LSU PWB
Function/Operation
Controls flashing of laser beams and the output values.
Converges laser beams to focus.
Laser beams are refracted so that the laser scanning speed at the both ends of the OPC drum is the same as
that at the center.
10
LSU thermistor
2.
Name
Function/Operation
Assures the optical path for laser.

Collects the laser beams, and focuses it on the OPC drum.
Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB control
signal and image data.
Measures the temperature in LSU.
(Scanning system)
A. Outline
Image data sent from the image process circuit through the PCU
are converted into laser beams which are radiated to the surface of
the OPC drum.
In this model, 2-laser system is employed where 2 lines of laser for
one color are radiated. The LSU unit is composed of the optical element from laser to the polygon mirror, the primary system including
the mirror which assures light path, and the main scanning system.
B. Composition
(Primary system)
LD1 LD2
LD2 LD1
LD1 LD2
LD1 LD2
Main scanning direction

Rear
Scanning
direction
LD2
LD1
Scanning
direction
LD2
LD1
BK C M Y
Front
3.
(Writing position on paper)
A. LSU
Paper exit direction

Rear
LD2
LD1
LD2
LD1
LD2
LD1
LD2
Scanning
direction
LD1
Front
(On the polygon motor)

Model
MX-2600/3100
Number of
mirror surface
7 surfaces
Parts
Rotating
speed
27334rpm
Bearing
Remarks
Polygon motor
1)
Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet. [Refer
to "Left cabinet lower, left cabinet" in "External view."]
2)
OIL
C. Outline of LSU specifications

Effective scan width :
Resolution:
Beam diameter:
Laser power:
LD wavelength:
307mm
1200dpi
Main scan = 50 to 65m, Sub scan = 60 to 75m
Max. 0.255mW
770 to 795nm
3)
Remove the LSU left plate PA.
4)
Remove the LSU slant adjustment plate screw (A), and loosen
the screw (B).
(1)
1)
Remove the LSU.
Polygon motor
Remove the LSU shaft fixing plate. Remove the screw.
2)
Remove the screw, and remove the LSU CNT PWB cover R.
3)
Remove the screw, and lift the LSU CNT PWB cover F (A).
5)
Shift the front side of the LSU shaft from (A) to (B), and remove
the LSU shaft.
Remove the screw, and lift the polygon motor unit (B).
3
1
B
6)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the LSU.
4)

the polygon motor.
* When installing, do not touch the polygon mirror movable
section and the mirror surface.
B. Others
5)
Remove the screw, and remove the ozone air inlet duct A.
6)
Remove the screw, and remove the ozone air inlet duct B.
(1)
Parts
1)
2)
Remove the MC PWB.
3)
Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove

the filter box unit.
4)
7)
Remove the LSU.
8)

the LSU shutter solenoid unit.
Remove the screw and remove the duct harness cover. Disconnect the connector.
* When installing, insert the projected section (A) of the solenoid arm into the hole in the lever link arm.
9)
Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the LSU shutter solenoid.
* When installing, engage the solenoid pin (A) with the shutter
lever arm.
MC
MC
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
D-GND
NC
/DL_C
D-GND
NC
/DL_M
D-GND
NC
/DL_Y
CN1
INT24V2
8
D-GND
7
/HV_DATA
6
/HV_CLK
5
4
/HV_LD
3
HV_REM
2
MC_CL_ERR
1
MC_BK_ERR
B8B-PASK
/DL_BK
MC
1
1
10
2
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
DL_BK
GB
GB
GB
GB
MC
MX-3100N PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION H 1

1
2
4
5
7
3
6
1
2
4
5
7
3
6
D-GND
/DL_Y
22
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVMK_CK
/DVMK_D
DVMK_LD
INT24V2
2
P-GND
4
/DVMC_CK
6
/DVMC_D
8
DVMC_LD
10
B18B-PHDSS
CN11
1
3
5
7
9
B40B-PADSS-1
D-GND
24
/DL_M
D-GND
/DL_C
MX-3100N
[H]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVMK_CK
/DVMK_D
DVMK_LD
NC
NC
VM_CL
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVMC_CK
/DVMC_D
DVMC_LD
NC
NC
/DL_Y
2
D-GND
9
10
21
23
/DL_BK
D-GND
CN10
3
/DL_M
/DL_C
INT24V2
D-GND
/HV_DATA
/HV_CLK
/HV_LD
HV_REM
MC_CL_ERR
MC_BK_ERR
B32B-PHDSS
CN6
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
9
D-GND
2
10
D-GND
2
9
10
9
D-GND
2
MC PWB
D-GND
NC
/DL_BK
MC-K
GB-K
GB-C
GB-M
GB-Y
1.
MC-CL
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
PCU PWB
DVM_CL
DVM_K
Signal name
DVM_CL
DVM_K
DL
MC
GB
No.
1
2
2.
Name
Developing drive motor (Color)
Developing drive motor (Black)
Discharge lamp (Y,M,C,BK)
Main charger (Y,M,C,K)
Grid (Y,M,C,K)
Function/Operation
Color developing unit/Color drum drive
Black developing unit/Black drum drive
Light is radiated to the discharge lamp to discharge the OPC drum surface.
The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.
Name
Function/Operation
Latent electrostatic images are formed.
Cleans and remove residual toner from the OPC drum surface.
OPC drum (Y,M,C,K)

Cleaning blade
3)
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.

The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1)
After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the

cleaning blade.
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main

charger.
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
High voltage unit
Screen grid
Main corona unit

The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage applied to the screen grid.
2)
Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
OPC drum
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
Laser beams
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are balanced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
4)
The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
2)
Remove the waste toner box unit.
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
Lens
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,

light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
3)
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the

negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Loosen the blue screw. Check to confirm that the lock is

released, and open the drum positioning unit.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on

the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.
(CAUTION)
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
manually released, turn the power OFF/ON after completion of
the operation. This procedure initializes the transfer roller to
return it to the home position.
4)
3.

A. Drum unit
1)
5)
(1)
1)
Remove the frame cover. (Refer to "Frame cover" in "External

view.")
2)

the waste toner drive unit.
Remove the screw, and remove the waste toner drive motor
from he waste toner drive unit.
6)
Hold the lock lever and pull out each drum unit slowly.
Hold the lower section of the unit and remove it with both
hands.
(2)
1)

view.")
2)

the waste toner drive unit.
3)
Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the waste toner
box instillation lever.
B. Others
b
a
a
b
Parts
Disconnect the connector and disengage the pawl. Remove

the waste toner full detection switch.
Signal name
TNM
CRUM
No.
1
Toner motor (Y,M,C,K)

CRUM(Y,M,C,K)
Toner transport pipe
2
10
12
6
5VN
/CRM_M_DT
/CRM_M_CK
22
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
P-GND
12
P-GND
TNM_M_A
14
TNM_M_/A
16
TNM_M_B
18
TNM_M_/B
20
TNM_C_A
24
26
TNM_C_/A
TNM_C_B
28
TNM_C_/B
30
B30B-PHDSS
D-GND
SM-18Pin
5VN
/CRM_Y_DT
/CRM_Y_CK
CN3
24V3
12
TMY_/B
1
TMY_B
3
5
TMY_/A
7
TMY_A
P-GND
9
17
TMK_/B
15
TMK_B
13
TMK_/A
11
TMK_A
19
P-GND
P-GND
2
TMM_A
10
TMM_/A
8
TMM_B
6
4
TMM_/B
TMC_A
20
18
TMC_/A
16
TMC_B
14
TMC_/B
B20B-PNDZS
13
14
15
16
P
5VN
2
4
/CRM_Y_DT
3
/CRM_Y_CK
1
D-GND
TSR-04V-K
13
14
15
16
R
MX-3100N TONER SUPPLY SECTION i 1
PCU PWB
Name
Function/Operation
Toner supply motor to the developing unit
Data memory for toner cartridge.
Name
Function/Operation
Toner supply pipe from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
5VN
4
/CRM_M_DT
3
/CRM_M_CK
1
D-GND
TSR-04V-K
9
10
11
12
CN5
+24V
+24V
TMK_A
TMK_/A
TMK_B
TMK_/B
CN4
+24V
+24V
TMC_A
TMC_/A
TMC_B
TMC_/B
CN2
+24V
+24V
TMM_A
TMM_/A
TMM_B
TMM_/B
CN1
+24V
+24V
TMY_A
TMY_/A
TMY_B
TMY_/B
2
5VN
4
/CRM_C_DT
3
/CRM_C_CK
D-GND
1
TSR-04V-K
5
6
7
8
CRUM(Y)
CN14
24V3
TNM_Y_/B
TNM_Y_B
TNM_Y_/A
TNM_Y_A
P-GND
TNM_K_/B
TNM_K_B
TNM_K_/A
TNM_K_A
4
14
16
D-GND
8
B16B-PHDSS
5VN
/CRM_Y_DT
/CRM_Y_CK
5VN
/CRM_M_DT
/CRM_M_CK
D-GND
9
10
11
12
2
5VN
4
/CRM_K_DT
3
/CRM_K_CK
D-GND
1
TSR-04V-K
1
2
3
4
TONER SUPPLY SECTION
D-GND
D-GND
5VN
/CRM_C_DT
/CRM_C_CK
D-GND
5
6
7
8
D-GND
5VN
/CRM_K_DT
/CRM_K_CK
1.
3
13
15
7
1
2
3
4
[i]
5VN
/CRM_C_DT
/CRM_C_CK
1
9
11
5
D-GND
CN15
5VN
/CRM_K_DT
/CRM_K_CK
MX-3100N
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
TNM_Y
CRUM(M)
TNM_M
CRUM(C)
TNM_C
CRUM(K)
TNM_K
1
1
1
TM-DRV
PWB
2.
3.
When the toner cartridge is inserted into the machine, the lock pawl
is released and the supply shutter is opened.
A. Toner cartridges
1)
2)
Lift the lock lever, and pull it out slowly and horizontally.
The transport shutter is opened and closed by the shaft linked with
the developing lever.
The toner supply section of the developing unit is opened and

closed when the open/close level on the unit pushes the block .
MX-3100N TONER SUPPLY SECTION i 2

1.
2
1
2
1
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
MX-3100N
[J]
DEVELOPING SECTION
DVM_CL
BS_Y
BS_M
DVM_K
BS_C
TCS_Y
TCS_M
BS_K
1
TCS_C
2
1
TCS_K
BS-Y
BS-M
TCS_K
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
5VN
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
TNCRU_M
5VN
QR/P8-8P
5VN
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
TNCRU_C
5VN
QR/P8-8P
5VN
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
TNCRU_K
5VN
QR/P8-8P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVMC_CK
/DVMC_D
DVMC_LD
NC
NC
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVMK_CK
/DVMK_D
DVMK_LD
NC
NC
CN1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
4
5
7
3
6
1
2
4
5
7
3
6
B8B-PASK
INT24V2
D-GND
/HV_DATA
/HV_CLK
/HV_LD
HV_REM
MC_CL_ERR
MC_BK_ERR
CN11
1
3
5
7
9
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVMK_CK
/DVMK_D
DVMK_LD
INT24V2
2
P-GND
4
/DVMC_CK
6
/DVMC_D
8
DVMC_LD
10
B18B-PHDSS
C N6
31
INT24V2
29
D-GND
27
/HV_DATA
25
/HV_CLK
23
/HV_LD
21
HV_REM
19
MC_CL_ERR
17
MC_BK_ERR
B32B-PHDSS
5VN
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
TNCRU_C
5VN
5VN
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
TNCRU_K
5VN
25
27
31
29
33
35
37
39
5VN
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
TNCRU_M
5VN
CN10
5
7
11
9
13
15
17
19
3
5VN
8
4
7
TCS_C
6
5
D-GND
5
6
TSG_C
7
4
D-GND
3
8
DVTYP_C
9
TNCRU_C
2
10
5VN
1
6
8
12
10
14
16
18
20
3
8
5VN
7
TCS_K
4
5
6
D-GND
5
6
TSG_BK
4
D-GND
7
3
DVTYP_K
8
TNCRU_K
2
9
1
5VN
10
3
5VN
8
TCS_M
4
7
D-GND
6
5
TSG_M
6
5
D-GND
4
7
DVTYP_M
8
3
TNCRU_M
2
9
5VN
1
10
5VN
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
TNCRU_Y
5VN
MX-3100N DEVELOPING SECTION J 1
BS-C
TCS_C
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
26
28
32
30
34
36
38
40
B40B-PADSS-1
3
8
5VN
7
TCS_Y
4
5
D-GND
6
6
TSG_Y
5
4
D-GND
7
8
3
DVTYP_Y
TNCRU_Y
2
9
1
5VN
10
PCU PWB
BS-K
TCS_M
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
TCS_Y
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
5VN
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
TNCRU_Y
5VN
QR/P8-8P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
MC PWB
Signal name
DVM_CL
DVM_K
BS
TCS
No.
1
2
3
2.
Name
Developing drive motor (Color)
Developing drive motor (Black)
Developing bias (Y,M,C,K)
Toner density sensor (Y,M,C,K)
Name
Developer roller
Mixing roller
Toner filter (Y,M,C,K)
Function/Operation
Color developing unit/Color drum drive
Black developing unit/Black drum drive
Developer bias
Controls the toner density in the developing unit.
Function/Operation
Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images.
Mixing of developer
Prevents dispersing of toner
3.
This converts the electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum generated by the laser (writing) unit into visible images with toner.
A. Development unit
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively
charged due to mechanical friction.
Parts
a
Density sensor
1)
2)
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC

component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
3)
Check that the lock is released as shown in (A).
(1)
Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit.
1)
Remove the developing unit.
Density sensor

2)
Remove the screw, and remove the DV guide.

Remove the screw, and disconnect the connector.
Remove the density sensor.
A
B
4)

5)
MX-3100N
[K]
TRANSFER SECTION
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
A. Transfer section
1st TC PWB
1TC-Y
1TC-M
1TC-C
1TC-K
CN1
INT24V2
8
P-GND
7
6
1TC-REV
1TC-Y-CC
5
1TC-M-CC
4
1TC-C-CC
3
1TC-K-CC
2
HV_REM
1
N,C
9
B9B-PASK
MC PWB
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
INT24V2
D-GND
1TC-REV
1TC-Y-CC
1TC-M-CC
1TC-C-CC
1TC-K-CC
HV_REM
N,C
1TURC
B8B-PASK
1TUD_CL
D-GND
5VNPD
1
2
3
1TUD_BK
D-GND
5VLED
1
2
3
P
1
2
3
SM-3Pin
1TUD_CL
D-GND
5VNPD
R
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
P
1TUD_BK
D-GND
5VLED
PTC_HEAT
SM-4pin
1
2
3
4
R
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVMK_CK
/DVMK_D
DVMK_LD
NC
NC
1
2
4
5
7
3
6
SM-2Pin
24V3
1TURC
P
1
2
DVM_K
1TUD_CL
1TC_K
R
1
2
1TUD_BK
3
2
7
2nd TC PWB
PTC
B2P-VH
PTC
3
4
2TC
C N6
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
INT24V2
D-GND
/HV_DATA
/HV_CLK
/HV_LD
HV_REM
MC_CL_ERR
MC_BK_ERR
B32B-PHDSS
CN13
1TUD_CL
31
29
D-GND
27
5VNPD
B32B-PHDSS
CN12
27
1TUD_BK
28
D-GND
5VLED
29
30
PTC_HEAT
B30B-PHDSS
PCU PWB
1
1TC_CMY
CN1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
B9B-PASK
5 6
8
INT24V2
D-GND
/HV_DATA
/HV_CLK
/HV_LD
HV_REM
MC_CL_ERR
MC_BK_ERR
2-TC
PS-187
CN11
1
3
5
7
9
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVMK_CK
/DVMK_D
DVMK_LD
11
24V3
12
1TURC
B18B-PHDSS
CN1
INT24V2
1
D-GND
2
/TC_DATA
3
/TC_CLK
4
/TC_LD
5
/HV_REM
6
PTC_ERR
7
/PTC_CLK
8
B8B-PASK
CN14
2
INT24V2
D-GND
4
6
/TC_DATA
8
/TC_CLK
10
/TC_LD
5
/HV_REM
7
PTC_ERR
9
/PTC_CLK
B30B-PHDSS
13
11
1TNFD
WTNM
Signal name
1TC_CMY
1TC_K
1TNFD
1TUD_BK
1TUD_CL
1TURC
2TC
DVM_K
WTNM
PTC
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
12
P
1
2
SL2PIN
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
R
1
2
P
17
19
DF1B-24DE
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
S
17
19
CN13
11
13
1TNFD
D-GND
1
2
21
23
1TNFD
D-GND
21
23
7
1TNFD
D-GND
9
B32B-PHDSS
Name
Primary transfer output (CMY)
Primary transfer output (K)
Transfer belt separation BK detection
Transfer belt separation CL detection
Secondary belt transfer output
PTC output
Function/Operation
Color transfer high voltage
B/W transfer high voltage
B/W transfer folder position detection
Color transfer roller position detection
Transfer roller separation control
Secondary transfer high voltage
Transfer unit drive (Commonly used with the B/W developing drive roller)
Transports waste toner.
PTC high voltage
Name
Primary transfer cleaner blade
Intermediate transfer belt
Primary transfer belt drive roller
Primary transfer belt follower roller
Primary transfer belt tension roller
Belt CL brush
Function/Operation
Clean and remove residual toner from the intermediate transfer belt.
Toner on the drum is transferred to form toner images on the belt.
Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the intermediate transfer belt.
Drives the transfer belt.
Transfer belt follower.
Apply a tension to the transfer belt.
Transfer belt back surface cleaning.
MX-3100N TRANSFER SECTION K 1
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
No.
8
9
10
11
12
13
Name
PTC opposing roller
Secondary transfer belt dirve roller
Secondary transfer belt follower roller
PTC unit
Function/Operation
Roller to flow a PTC current.
Transfers toner images on the intermediate transfer belt to paper.
Transfers toner images on the intermediate transfer belt to paper.
Drives the transfer belt.
Transfer belt follower.
Reduces the positive charges on the primary transfer belt.
B. Pro-reg sensor section
PCU PWB
24V3
/PCSS
/REGS_R_LED
REGS_R
D-GND
5VNPD
PCS_CL
CN6
13
11
8
6
4
2
9
7
/REGS_F_LED
5
REGS_F
3
D-GND
1
5VNPD
B32B-PHDSS
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P
NC
NC
NC
24V3
/PCSS
/REGS_R_LED
REGS_R
D-GND
5VNPD
NC
PCS_CL
NC
D-GND
5VNPD
/REGS_F_LED
REGS_F
D-GND
5VNPD
SM18P
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
R
P
1
2
SM2P
24V3
/PCSS
3
4
2
1
5
/REGS_R_LED
REGS_R
D-GND
5VNPD
PCS_R
5
3
4
2
1
PCS_F
/REGS_F_LED
REGS_F
D-GND
5VNPD
R
1
2
PCSS
REGS_R
REGS_F
Signal name
PCSS
REGS_F
REGS_R
Name
Color image density sensor PWB
reflection plate shutter solenoid
Color image density sensor/
Image registration sensor F
Black image density sensor/
Image registration sensor R
Function/Operation
Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the resist sensor.
Detection of resist shift on the machine front (F) side, and detection of the color toner patch density.
Detection of resist shift on the machine rear (R) side, and detection of the black toner patch density.
2.
(2)
A. Transfer
(1)
Primary (intermediate) transfer roller separation

mechanism and contents
The primary transfer roller operates pressing all the rollers, separates all the rollers, or presses only black depending on the operation mode.
Transfer operation
a. Transfer operation
When the roller separation clutch (1TURC) turns ON, the transfer
cam rotates to shift the primary transfer link and the primary transfer arm linked with the cam in the arrow direction, performing separating operation of the roller.
All pressing
PTC
Constant
current
All separating
Toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to the primary

transfer belt by applying the positive high voltage to the primary
transfer roller.
Negative charge is generated by the PTC unit, and this weakens
positive charges on the transfer belt, reducing the attractive force
between the primary transfer belt and toner.
By this operation, the transfer efficiency in the secondary transfer is
improved.
Next, the positive high voltage is applied to the secondary transfer
belt, and toner images on the primary transfer belt are transferred
to paper. In the monochrome mode and the color mode, the black
(K) transfer voltage is selected.
Pressing only black
b. Cleaning operation
In the cleaning operation, the polarity of the applying voltage of the
secondary transfer belt is made negative, and unnecessary toner is
transferred to the primary transfer belt, and it is cleaned by the primary transfer belt cleaning blade, and transported to the waste
toner section.
It also performs all pressing, all separating, or pressing only black

with the roller separation sensors (1TUD_CL, 1TUD_K) and the
separation detection arm.
All pressing
All separating
Pressing only black
1TUD_CL
ON
OFF
OFF
1TUD_K
OFF
ON
OFF
The primary transfer drive and the secondary transfer drive are
commonly used with the black developing motor.
Constant
voltage
B. Image density detection and resist detection
3.
Image density detection and image resist detection are performed

by the sensors arranged on the front frame side and the rear frame
side.
A. Primary transfer unit
(1)
1)
2)
3)
Loosen the blue screw.
4)
Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Making sure that

the lock is released (B), open and then pull out the drum positioning unit.
Function and operation of the color image density

sensor/image resist sensor F (REGS F) provided
on the front frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the color
toner patch density is detected.
When the image resist adjustment is performed, the image resist
shift on the front frame side is detected.
The shutter plate is provided on the sensor. The shutter plate is
closed before operation of the process control. The sensor sensitivity adjustment is performed by using the shutter plate as the reference reflection plate.
The operation of the shutter plate is controlled by the process control shutter solenoid (PCSS).
(2)
Function and operation of the black image density

sensor/image resist sensor R (REGS R) provided
on the rear frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the black
toner patch density is detected.
When the image resist adjustment is performed, the image resist
shift on the rear frame side is detected.
* Failure to complete this step may damage the intermediate

transfer belt.
A
B
5)
Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer

unit.
C. Pro-reg sensor unit
(NOTE)
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
released manually, turn on the power again after completion of
the work. (Power OFF-ON)
This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to the
home position.
B. Secondary transfer unit

1)
2)
Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
Parts
1)
Remove the developing unit (K).
2)
Remove the drum unit (K).
3)
Remove the resist roller unit.
4)
Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the

pro-reg sensor unit.
(1)
1)
Remove the pro-reg sensor unit.
2)
Remove the screw. Disconnect the connector, and remove the

process control shutter solenoid.
* When installing, engage the process control shutter solenoid
with the groove section of the shutter mounting plate (A).
1
2
2
1
2
1
P
SM-3pin(BK)
TH_UM_IN
TH_UMCS_IN
D-GND
SM-2pin
TH_US_IN
D-GND
SM-2pin
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
R
P
1
2
3
P
1
2
P
1
2
YL
YL
BK
WH
BL
YL-2pin
1
1
2
2
P
R
PRM
2
FUMB
FUMA
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMB/
FUMA/
1
2
3
4
5
6
TH_UM_IN
D-GND
TH_US_IN
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
POFM_CNT
D-GND
TH_UMCS_IN
RCZR 9PIN
B-9
B-8
B-7
B-6
B-5
B-4
B-3
B-2
B-1
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
300W
(AWG18)
300W
(AWG18)
510W
(AWG18)
480W
(AWG18)
810W
(AWG16)
780W
(AWG16)
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
E
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
5VN
HLPCD
D-GND
DF1 B - 2 4D E
24V3
PRM_A
PRM_B
PRM_/A
PRM_/B
DF1B-20DE
N,C
TH_UM_IN
D-GND
TH_US_IN
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
POFM_CNT
D-GND
TH_UMCS_IN
SM-12p
FUMB
FUMA
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMB/
FUMA/
P
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
11
13
15
P
1
3
5
7
9
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
15
11
13
S
1
3
5
7
9
L-HL(UM)
N-HL(UM)
N-HL(US)
N-HL(UW)
L-HL(US)
N-HL(LM)
SM-12p
FUMB
FUMA
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMB/
FUMA/
PCU PWB
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
26
24
22
20
PRM_/B
PRM_/A
PRM_B
PRM_A
B32B-PHDSS
CN13
32
30
28
D-GND
HLPCD
5VN
CN13
INT24V1
4
D-GND
6
HL_OUT_UW
8
HL_OUT_LM
10
HL_OUT_US
12
HL_OUT_UM
14
/HL_PR
16
B32B-PHDSS
CN4
/HL_PR
7
6
HL_OUT_UW
HL_OUT_LM
5
4
HL_OUT_US
HL_OUT_UM
3
D-GND
2
INT24V1
1
B07B-PASK-S
CN6
PRM_A
9
PRM_B
5
PRM_/A
7
PRM_/B
3
B10B- PNDZS
MX-3100N
[L]
FUSER SECTION
CN1
FUMB
4
5
FUMA
1
INT24V1
2
INT24V1
3
FUMB/
6
FUMA/
B6B-PASK-1
CN12
TH_UM_IN
8
D-GND
6
TH_US_IN
4
D-GND
2
TH_LM_IN
9
D-GND
7
POFM_CNT
5
D-GND
3
TH_UMCS_IN
1
B30B-PHDSS
B03P-VL(RD)
CN3
2
3
1
B03P-VL(BK)
CN2
3
1
2
CN6
24V3
1
PRM_A
8
PRM_B
4
PRM_/A
6
PRM_/B
2
B10B-PNDZS
TM-DRV PWB
R
1
2
B-1
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
B-6
B-7
B-8
B-9
N-HL(LOW)
N-HL(UW)
N-HL(SUB)
N-HL(MAIN)
L-HL(SUB)
L-HL(MAIN)
R
4
R
5
4
3
2
1
HL PWB
R
1
2
R
1
2
3
300W WH
(AWG18)
510W WH
(AWG18)
WH
(AWG18)
300W WH
(AWG18)
P
4
1
2
3
810W BK
(AWG16)
780W BK
(AWG16)
5VN
HLPCD
D-GND
SM-5pin_N
24V3
PRM_A
PRM_B
PRM_/A
PRM_/B
1.
P
5
4
3
2
1
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
DRIVER MAIN PWB
HLTS2
HLPCD
VL-3pin
HL_U
HL_LM
YL P
MX-3100N FUSER SECTION L 1

1
FUM
2
HLTS1
RTH1
HLTS3
Signal name
FUM
HL_LM
HL_U
HL_US
HLPCD
HLTS1
HLTS2
HLTS3
PRM
RTH1
RTH2
RTH3
No.
1
2
3
2.
Name
Fusing motor
Heater lamp (3)
Heater lamp (1)
Heater lamp (2)
Fusing pressure release
sensor
Thermostat (1)
Thermostat (2)
Thermostat (3)
Fusing temperature sensor (1)
Name
Fusing roller (Heating)
Separation pawl
Fusing roller (Pressing)
Function/Operation
Heats the fusing roller (pressing).
Heats the fusing roller (heating).
Heats the fusing roller (heating).
Detects pressure release of the fusing roller.
Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
When the temperature rises abnormally, conduction to the heater lamp is cut off. [For the fusing roller (pressing)]
Adjusts the fusing roller pressure.
Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Center section)
Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Edge section)
Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (pressing).
Function/Operation
Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller (heating).
Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
C. Fusing operation
A. Fusing unit drive
Color toner (Y,M,C,K) on paper is subject to heat and pressure to

be fused on paper.
For driving the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat
roller gear.
At that time, color toner of Y, M, C, and K are mixed to reproduce

colors approximate to the document image colors.
Driving by the drive motor (stepping motor) is performed according

to the control signal sent from the PCU.
PCU
The heater lamps are provided in the lower and the upper heat
roller to heat paper from the upper and the lower sides.
This is because paper must be heated both from the upper side
and from the lower side together in order to melt and fuse toner in
the four layers on the paper.
The upper and the lower heat rollers of silicon rubber are
employed.
FUM
This is because of the following reasons.
B. Heater lamp drive

The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the thermistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the
specified level, the heater lamp ON signal is sent from the PCU to
the heater lamp drive circuit on the HL PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and
heating the heat roller.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller,
the thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, the power supply (AC line) to the
heater lamp is cut off.
1)
To increase the nip quantity. To increase the heating capacity

for paper.
2)
By pressing the flexible roller, multi-layer toner can be fused

without deformation.
3)
An even pressure can be applied to rough surface of toner layers (multi-layer structure).
D. Automatic pressure release system
E. Fusing temperature control
The upper and the lower heat rollers are normally pressed. When,
however, one of the following conditions is satisfied, they are
released from the pressure.
The temperature sensor is provided at the center and the edge section of the upper heat roller and at the edge section of the lower
heat roller.
When the machine shifts to the pre-heating mode.
The heat roller temperature is detected by each temperature sensor to control the heater lamp to maintain the temperature at the
specified level.
When the machine shifts to the auto power shut off mode.
When the power switch of the operation panel is turned OFF.
When the machine has been left in the ready state for 20 minutes.
In the case of SW-A
When the envelope mode is used.
(1)
In addition, the fusing temperature is switched according to the kind

of paper.
Mode
Pressure release operation
The pressure release motor (PRM) rotates to drive the pressure

release lever of the fusing unit to the pressure release state via the
reduction gears (6 pcs.).
When 1710ms passes from operating the pressure release detection level and driving the pressure release sensor (HLPCD) to the
transmission state (L level), the pressure release motor stops to
complete the pressure release operation.
Paper
Ready
condition
Print mode
Black/White
plain paper
Color plain
paper
Thick paper
OHP
Envelope
Glossy paper
Pressure release lever
3.
Pressing condition
Upper
heater
lamp main
170
Upper
heater
lamp sub
180
Lower
heater
lamp main
140
170
180
140
170
165
180
180
175
165
180
160
140
135
145
145
A. Fusing unit
a
Pressure release
motor (PRM)
Pressure release
state
d
(2)
Pressing operation
When an end use performs any operation or when the machine

receives a job signal, the pressure release motor rotates reversely
to dive the pressure release lever to the pressing state.
Parts
When 430ms passes from when the pressure release sensor

(HLPCD) is in the interruption state (H level), the pressure motor
stops to complete the pressing operation.
NOTE: When turning OFF the main power switch of the machine,
be sure to turn OFF the power switch of the operation
panel and check to confirm that the LCD is turned OFF.
a
b
c
d
1)
Upper thermostat
Lower thermostat
Upper heater lamp
Lower heater lamp
If the main power switch is turned OFF with the LCD displayed, the power is tu5ned off without completion of the
pressure release operation. This will deform the upper and
the lower heat rollers.
When, in addition, the fusing roller is installed again after
removing it, be sure to install it under the pressure release
state.
2)
Remove the blue screw. Release the lock lever. Remove the
fusing unit.
(2)
Lower thermostat
1)
Remove the fusing unit.
2)
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the

lower thermostat.
2
2
1
(1)
Upper thermostat
1)
2)
* Install so that the caulked section of the terminal faces

down.
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the

upper thermostat.
* Install so that the caulked section of the terminal faces up.
(3)
Upper heater lamp
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Remove the screw and remove the lamp holder. Remove the
upper heater lamp.
NOTE: When installing, fit the projected section of the upper
heater lamp with the hole in the cover.
(4)
Lower heater lamp
1)
2)
3)
Remove the connector of the upper heater lamp.
4)
Remove the connector of the lower heater lamp.
5)
Remove the screw and the clamp. Remove the screw and the
lamp holder. Remove the lower heater lamp.
B. Others
* When installing, treat the wires so that the harness of the

lower heater lamp does not separate from the boss (A).
a
(1)
Parts
1)
Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to "Front cabinet

upper" in "External view.")
2)

the fusing pressure release motor unit.
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the fusing pressure release

motor.
MX-3100N
[M]
DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION
1.
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
A. Duplex section
RIGHT DOOR I/F

PWB
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
1
2
3
6
5
4
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
1
2
3
3
POD3
4
5
2
D-GND
1
5VLED4
6
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VLED2
1
2
3
APPD1
D-GND
5VLED5
1
2
3
APPD2
D-GND
5VLED10
1
2
3
3
POD3
TFD3
APPD1
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
1
2
3
3
APPD1
1
2
D-GND
2
1
5VLED5
3
4
5
6
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
CN3(1/2)
APPD2
4
D-GND
5
6
5VLED10
S32B-PHDSS-B
ADUML
DRIVER MAIN
PWB
INT24V1
INT24V1
ADUMLB/
ADUMLB
ADUMLA
ADUMLA/
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
DSW_ADU
7
D-GND
8
9
5VLED2
APPD1
10
D-GND
11
5VLED5
12
APPD3
13
GND
14
5VLED
15
NC
16
S16B-PHDSS-B
4
1
2
3
D-GND
2
DSW_ADU
3
1
5VLED2
4
DSW_ADU
CN2
1
2
3
2
5
6
3
1
4
CN2
7
INT24V1
8
INT24V1
9
ADUMLB/
10
ADUMLB
11
ADUMLA
12
ADUMLA/
B12B-PASK-1
APPD2
Signal name
ADUML
APPD1
APPD2
DSW_ADU
POD3
TFD3
No.
1
2
3
Name
ADU motor lower
Right tray paper exit full detection
Function/Operation
Duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass detection
Duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass detection
Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection
Detects the paper exit to right tray.
Detects the right tray paper exit full.
Name
Function/Operation
Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
Discharges paper.
MX-3100N DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION M 1
B. Paper exit section
DF11-4DP-SP1
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD2
SM4PIN
1
2
3
4
R
5
1
2
3
4
6
SM-6Pin
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
NC
P
5
1
2
3
4
6
5VNPD
TFD2
D-GND
3
2
1
5VNPD
POD2
D-GND
1
2
3
5VNPD
HPOS
D-GND
1
2
3
5VNPD
POD1
D-GND
1
2
3
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
7
8
1
2
3
4
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
POM
POFM_R
P
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
DF1B-26p
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
N,C
S
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
6
7
11
8
9
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
6
7
11
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
1
2
3
4
5
POD2
POD1
11
12
13
14
15
24V2
/OSM_/B
/OSM_/A
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
13
TFD2
13
22
TFD2
14
POD2
14
23
POD2
15
HPOS
15
24
HPOS
16
17
12
POD1
D-GND
5VNPD
16
17
12
10
18
19
NC
NC
NC
10
18
19
25
POD1
26
D-GND
21
5VNPD
B30B-PHDSS
DRIVER MAIN
PWB
SSJC6-6
POFM_F
PCU PWB
CN12
POFM_V
16
17 /POFM_CNT
20
P-GND
18
POFM_LD1
19
POFM_LD2
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
1
2
3
4
R
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
OSM
3
2
1
4
HPOS
SM4PIN
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
/POFM_V
/POFM_V
/POFM_V
/POFM_V
TFD2
R
1
2
3
4
SSJC6-4
FUM
FUMB
FUMA
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMB/
FUMA/
1
2
3
4
5
6
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
POMA
INT24V1
POMB
POMA/
INT24V1
POMB/
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
SM-12p
FUMB
FUMA
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMB/
FUMA/
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
SM-12p
FUMB
FUMA
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMB/
FUMA/
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
POMA
INT24V1
POMB
POMA/
INT24V1
POMB/
7
8
9
10
11
12
7
8
9
10
11
12
POMA
INT24V1
POMB
POMA/
INT24V1
POMB/
7
8
9
10
11
12
CN1
FUMB
4
5
FUMA
1
INT24V1
2
INT24V1
3
FUMB/
FUMA/
6
B6B-PASK-1
CN2
POMA
5
INT24V1
1
4
POMB
6
POMA/
2
INT24V1
3
POMB/
B12B-PASK-1
Signal name
FUM
HPOS
OSM
POD1
POD2
POFM_F
POFM_R
POM
TFD2
No.
1
2
3
Name
Fusing drive motor
Shifter home position detection
Shifter motor
Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side)
Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side)
Function/Operation
Detects the shifter home position.
Performs offset of paper.
Detects paper exit from fusing.
Detects the exit paper.
Detects face-down paper exit tray full.
Name
Function/Operation
Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport roller 13.
Transports paper from the transport roller 9 to the transport roller 1. / Transport paper to
the duplex (ADU) section.
Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. / Transport paper to the
duplex (ADU) section.
2.
1)
2)
Remove the right door unit.
A. Duplex
Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the transport roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1.
At that time, paper is passed under the ADU reverse gate guide.
When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead
edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and
rotates reversely after the specified time.
By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is
sent to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the
right side of the Ado gate which lowers by its own weight.
The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor
lower to transport paper to the duplex paper feed position.
Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then
transported to the machine again.
B. Paper exit
Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the transport roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray.
When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the
paper exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely.
Paper is passed through the ADU reverse gate, and discharged
to the right tray.
3.
A. Duplex unit
(1)
a
b
c
RD I/F PWB
1)
2)
Remove the connector cover. Remove the ADU inner cover.
3)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the RD I/F PWB.
Parts
RD I/F PWB
ADU motor lower
(2)
B. Paper exit unit
1)
2)
Remove the connector cover and the ADU inner cover.
3)
Remove the MF drive connection plate. Disconnect the connector. Remove the manual paper feed clutch unit.
a
a
4)
Remove the manual paper feed clutch.
a
b
c
d
(3)
Parts
Shifter motor
Fusing drive motor
1)
2)
Remove the paper exit unit, and disconnect the connector.
ADU motor lower
1)
2)
Open the control box.
2
1
3)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU motor lower.
(1)
1)
Remove the paper exit unit.
2)
Remove the exhaust fan duct.
3)
(3)
3)
Fusing drive motor
1)
2)
Remove the fusing drive motor.
Remove the paper exit cooling fan motor.
(4)
(2)
Remove the shifter motor.
1)
2)
Remove the paper exit drive motor.
Shifter motor
1)
2)
Disconnect the connector and remove the earth terminal.

Remove the snap band, and remove the slide motor unit.
[N] DRIVE SECTION
MX-3100N
3)
Remove the flywheel.
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
* Installing sequence: (1)C (2) KM (3)KM

(Engraved mark for each color)
* After installing, check to confirm that it is not in contact with

the harness.
A. Main drive unit
b
a
b
b
c
KM
C
d
KM
4)

the main drive unit.
* Hold section A and remove.
Parts
a
b
c
d
e
f
TM drive PWB
Toner motor
Rresist motor
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External

view.")
2)
Remove the screw, and open the control box.
MX-3100N DRIVE SECTION N 1
(1)
1)
TM drive PWB/Toner motor
(3)

view.")
1)

view.")
2)
2)
3)

the TM dive PWB.
3)
4)

the developing drive motor (CL).
4)
(2)

the toner motor.
(4)
Resist motor
1)

view.")
2)
3)
4)

the resist motor.
1)

view.")
2)
3)
4)

the developing drive motor (K)
(5)
1)

view.")
1)

view.")
2)
2)
3)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and the each
terminal. Remove the driver main PWB unit.
4)
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Disengage

the pawl, and remove the filter box unit.
5)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed drive

unit.
3)
4)
Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear. Disconnect the connector, and remove the E-ring, and remove the primary transfer separation clutch.
* When installing, engage the projected section for stopping
the clutch rotation with the frame projection.
B. Paper feed drive unit
a
d
f
c
e
c
a
b
c
d
e
f
Parts
Transport motor
Paper feed motor
Paper tray lift-up motor
(1)
1)
Transport motor
(3)
Paper tray lift-up motor

view.")
1)
2)
2)
3)

the transport motor.
3)
Remove the driver main PWB unit.
(2)

view.")
4)
Remove the filter box unit.
5)

the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
6)
Disengage the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling.
Paper feed motor
1)

view.")
2)
3)
Remove the driver main PWB unit.
4)
5)

the paper feed motor.
(4)
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1/Paper feed

tray 2)/Tray vertical transport clutch
1)
Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
2)
Remove the paper feed motor.
3)
Remove the paper feed drive unit.
4)
Remove the gear and disconnect the connector.
5)
Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame upper unit.
9)
Remove the tray vertical transport clutch unit.
6)
Remove the paper feed clutch unit.
10) Remove the E-ring, and remove the tray vertical transport
clutch.
7)
Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
8)
Remove the belt.
MX-3100N
[O]
PWB SECTION
* Inserting position
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
an inserting procedure when the DIMM

memory is removed
1.
A. Control box
DIMM1
DIMM2
i
e
a
DIMM3
DIMM4
h
g
c
f
DIMM1: Option
DIMM2: 512MB
DIMM3: 1GB
DIMM4: Option
3)
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
(1)
Stopper (A) with your finger to release the lock of the memory
PWB.
Parts
DIMM memory PWB (512MB)
DIMM memory PWB (1GB)
PROG1 ROM PWB
PROG2 ROM PWB
MFP cnt PWB
HDD
PCU Flash ROM PWB
PCU PWB
Mother PWB
DIMM memory PWB (512MB/1GB)/PROG1 ROM

PWB/PROG 2 ROM PWB/MFP cnt PWB
1)
Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
2)
Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB.
4)
When the lock is released, the memory PWB tilts. Pull it out
under that state.
* Be sure to release the lock before pulling it out.
* Do not touch the IC on the memory PWB.
* When placing the HDD on the upper side, do not apply an

excessive force to the DIMM memory. So remove it or put a
spacer.
MX-3100N PWB SECTION O 1
* Note for removing procedure of the memory PWB
c)
Raise the memory PWB until the connector stopper

clicks.
Remove the PWB inside the tilt of the memory PWB first.
(Removing the IC outside the tilt will result in poor efficiency
of work.)
* Check to confirm that the lock pin (A) is in the center

of the lock hole.
* The stopper (B) must penetrate inside the PWB.
Outside
Inside
Outside
Inside
* Note for installing procedure of the memory PWB

Install the PWB outside the tilt of the memory PWB first.
(Installing the IC inside the tilt will result in poor efficiency
of work.)
5)
Outside
a)
Inside
Outside
Release the lock, and remove the PROG1 ROM PWB (A) and
the PROG2 ROM PWB (B).
Inside
Tilt the memory PWB and fit with the connector port. Put
the memory PWB up to the line (A) in the figure.
* When inserting, be sure to hold the both ends and be
sure not to touch the IC on the PWB.
About 15
A
6)
b)

the MFP cnt PWB.
Push the memory PWB which is kept tilted fully to the

bottom.
* Be careful not to tilt left and right.
* The gold plated section must be hidden.
[ Tilting left and right ]
[ The gold plated

section can be seen ]
[ Normal ]
(2)
1)
HDD
2)
Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB.
2)
3)

the HDD unit.
(4)
4)
PCU PWB
1)
2)
Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB.
3)

the PCU PWB.
Remove the screw, and remove the angle from the HDD.
* Since the HDD is weak to shock, carefully treat it without
knocking the edge of the HDD or falling or applying a shock.
(5)
(3)
1)
PCU Flash ROM PWB
Mother PWB
1)
2)

the mother PWB.
Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet lid.
B. Power unit
3)

the filter box unit.
4)

the AC power PWB unit.
5)

the DC power PWB.
b
a
Parts
a
b
(1)
AC power PWB
DC power PWB
AC power PWB
1)
2)

the AC power PWB.
(2)
DC power PWB
1)
2)
C. Others
3)
Remove the screw, and pull out the scanner control PWB unit.
Disconnect the connector.
4)
Remove the screw, and remove the scanner control PWB.
b
a
c
d
f
g
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
(1)
Parts
SCN Flash ROM PWB
Scanner control PWB
HL PWB
Driver main PWB
MC PWB
SCN Flash ROM PWB/Scanner control PWB
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2)
Release the lock, and remove the SCN Flash ROM PWB.
(2)
1)
HL PWB
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cover.
2)
3)

the duct.
2
1
4)

the HL PWB.
(5)
1)
2)
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the flywheel.

the harness.
(3)
1)

Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cover.
2)
3)

the secondary transfer PWB.
KM
C
KM
4)
(4)

the primary transfer PWB.
Driver main PWB
1)
2)

the driver main PWB.
(6)
1)
MC PWB
2)
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the flywheel.

the harness.
KM
C
KM
4)
Disconnect the connector, remove the supporter, and remove

the primary transfer PWB unit.
5)

the MC PWB and the supporter.
MX-3100N
[P]
FAN SECTION
3)
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
the duct.
1.
A. Fan motor
f
e
4)

the rear cooling fan motor.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and be
careful of the pulling direction of the harness (B).
d
c
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
(1)
Parts
Ozone fan motor
Fusing fan motor
1)
2)
(2)
Ozone fan motor
1)

view.")
2)
3)
MX-3100N FAN SECTION P 1
4)
(3)

the ozone fan motor from the filter box unit.
(4)
1)
2)
3)
4)

the AC power PWB unit.
5)
Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle, and remove

the harness. Remove the screw, and remove the DC power
unit.
6)
Remove the screw, and remove the power cooling fan motor.
1)

view.")
2)
3)
4)

the power cooling fan.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and
arrange the engraved mark (B) in the blowing direction with
the arrow direction (C) of the metal plate.
B
A
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing inside, and the
harness (B) facing upward.
(5)
(7)
1)
1)
Remove the LSU.
2)
2)
Remove the screw. Remove the duct. At the unit on its side
and disconnect the connector.
3)
Remove the screw and the snap band, and remove the process air inlet fan motor.
3)

the controller cooling fan motor.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and the
harness (B) facing downward.
B
A
(6)
Fusing fan motor
1)
2)

the fusing fan motor.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing inside, and the
harness (B) facing downward.
MX-3100N
[Q]
SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the main switch unit.
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1.
A. Sensor/Switch
4)
Disconnect the connector, disengage the pawl, and remove

the main switch.
* When installing, be careful of connection of the connector.
b
a
3
3
2
2
R
1
a
b
c
(1)
Parts
Main switch
(2)
Main switch
1)
Remove the front cabinet. [Refer to "Front cabinet" in "External

view."]
1)

view.")
2)
Remove the screw, and remove the frame cover.
2)
Remove the screw, and remove the front door open/close

switch unit.
the front door open/close switch.
2
3
MX-3100N SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION Q 1
(3)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the resist roller unit.
5)

the right door open/close switch cover unit.
6)
Remove the right door open/close switch.
MX-3100N SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION Q 2
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Lead-Free
5mm
Solder composition
code (Refer to the
table at the right.)
Solder composition
Solder composition code
Sn-Ag-Cu
Sn-Ag-Bi
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi
Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
Bi-Sn-Ag-P
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommendable.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK
Since the melting point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT

solder is about 220C, which
is about
40C higher
than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
XXXX
BYSHARP
CORPORATION
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature
components.
Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
ALLofRIGHTS
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
in a retrieval
transmitted
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black stored
during soldering
work,system,
clean andorfile
the tip with in
steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,

photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT

(Danish)
ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English)
Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturers instructions.
(Finnish)
VAROITUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French)
ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion s il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish)
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German)
Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
BATTERY DISPOSAL
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGES
CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANSE)
QUI DOIT TRE TRAITE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT 2008 BY SHARP CORPORATION

All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft Windows operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft
Corporation in the U. S.A. and other countries.
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003
and Internet Explorer are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987 -2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks
of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2008 July Printed in Japan

10867658-Sharp Mx-2600n 3100n Mx-2600g 3100g Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

10867658-Sharp Mx-2600n 3100n Mx-2600g 3100g Service Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

DIGITAL FULL COLOR

DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1

[B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1

CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

[C] RSPF SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

[D] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

For unpacking and installation,

[E] PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . .E-1

PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . .F-1

[G] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL

[ i ] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . i -1

SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . 8-1

[K] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . .K-1

[H] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION. . H-1

[10] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION. . M-1

[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 11-1

[N] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1

[12] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

[O] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING

DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i

UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE

[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT

[10] FIRMWARE UPDATE

[J] DEVELOPING SECTION

[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION

[K] TRANSFER SECTION

[L] FUSER SECTION

Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it

This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation.

1. Precautions for servicing

It may cause a fire or an electric shock.

Keep the power cable away from a heat source.

When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable,

It may cause a fire or an electric shock.

Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which

It may cause an injury or an electric shock.

It may cause a fire or an electric shock.

There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use

There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may

It may cause an electric shock.

Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective

3. Note for installing site

It may cause a burn.

It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.

When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to

Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.

Do not install the machine at the following sites.

Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch

For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications

When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink

The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to

Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise,

Place of much vibrations